Layne D. Hansen

CAREFUL MEASUREMENTS

To those who love freedom, but don’t know how to express why.

“[Communism’s] first commandment is found, not in the Communist Manifesto, but in the first sentence of the physics primer: “All of the progress of mankind to date results from the making of careful measurements.”

Whittaker Chambers, Witness

Acknowledgments

I would like to thank my wife, Sherry, for her advice and support. I would also like to thank those who have read and critiqued this work: Cynthia, Ryan, Lisa, Nichol, Jared. Big thanks to the very talented Landon Rasmussen, who painted the cover. I would like to thank my brother Chris for helping me get this published. Lastly, I would like to thank those who have thought about, written, and fought for freedom for the individual—and for those who continue to do so.

Introduction

Like many authors will tell you, writing this novel has been a labor of love… and frustration. This book is ten years in the making. It started with the question of what would happen if there was actual, full economic equality. Since this type of large-scale experiment described in this book would likely never happen, I have used my understanding of human nature, economics, politics, and my imagination to answer this question. The result is what you now hold in your hands.

Many readers will say something like “man, this guy really hates liberals,” but this is not the case. I have many liberal friends. You could also say that I hate liberalism, but that isn’t true either. People long ago hijacked that word, which actually means social and economic advancement while maintaining political and economic freedom. What I do hate is the idea that some people are smarter than others, and therefore, they must create governments. Those governments create policies, which dictate how people should live their lives. The audacity and arrogance behind this idea is truly breathtaking.

This philosophy has taken many forms, and goes by many names: socialism, communism, progressivism, among others. The fundamental idea, however, is common among all of these approaches, i.e., some individuals have the right, if not the obligation, to help others get through life. What they never say out loud, however, is that their desire to “help” others is their way to create wealth and power for themselves. George Orwell captured this idea best in his masterwork Animal Farm where he wrote, “All animals are equal, but some animals are more equal than others.” As happens in that book, the elite—the self-proclaimed intellectually and morally superior—steal the resources created by others. They keep some for themselves and give the rest to others in order to remain in power.

The desire to be free and the desire to control are two extremely powerful forces. They are like warm and cold weather fronts—when they collide they create a vicious storm that affects everyone it in its wake. This collusion creates human misery. This idea is best encapsulated by another Orwell masterpiece, 1984. The book’s protagonist, Winston Smith, has been arrested for crimes against the state. While being tortured into giving up any sense of individuality, Smith has this exchange with his tormentor:

O’Brien: “How does one man assert his power over another?

Winston: “By making him suffer.”

O’Brien: “Exactly. By making him suffer. Obedience is not enough… If you want a picture of the future, imagine a boot stamping on a human face… forever.”

This scene—this boot of dominance—has been played and replayed throughout history, in every corner of the globe. Thankfully, America (outside of a few groups) has been spared the worst of this misery, mostly due to its Constitution, its strong political institutions, and what I like to call political DNA—our ingrained expectation of freedom.

Human misery is scalar and we Americans are somewhere in the middle. Perhaps Milton Friedman described this best when he said, “When government - in pursuit of good intentions - tries to rearrange the economy, legislate morality, or help special interests, the cost come in inefficiency, lack of motivation, and loss of freedom. Government should be a referee, not an active player.” As groups gain more and more control, however, the misery will increase.

Other parts of the world are not so lucky. The road of history is paved with the corpses of victims of the philosophy that some individuals or groups have the right to control others. Whether one is called King, Queen, Emperor, Fuhrer, General Secretary, or President, the human misery is the same. An enormous majority of human beings desire to be free—to be left alone. Others have the psychotic need to control others. Where this comes from is still a mystery to scientists, but it’s real nonetheless.

I truly believe that, if an experiment as described in this book were set up in real life, the outcomes would be very similar to those experienced by these characters. Unless, that is, a large enough group of people stand up and fight against those trying to take away their liberty. Like Ronald Reagan said in his farewell address, “Freedom is never more than one generation away from extinction. We didn’t pass it to our children in the bloodstream. It must be fought for, protected, and handed on for them to do the same.”

We are losing this in America. Hopefully, I have created something here that will help to wake a long-sleeping giant. There truly are some out there that seek to take away your freedom. Why? Because, in a strange way, it fulfills something within them. We need to wake up, join together, and start fighting back.

Thank you for reading.

Prologue

The windshield wipers screeched across the old truck’s cracked windshield, but they did nothing to improve the driver’s view. Countless layers of dirt and dead bugs cast a milky sheen on the glass, made worse by the glare of the setting sun. Hank Williams blared from the stereo system that the driver’s grandson installed the year before.

That kid thinks this is his truck, the man thought with a grudging smile. It was something the old farmer had never been able to get through his grandson’s thick skull—this was Grandpa’s truck and would be until the day he died. Memories flooded his mind as he gazed across his expansive farmland. Learning how to drive the old tractor. Moving countless miles of sprinkler pipe. Tromping through the fields with his father and grandfather with mud-caked boots. Those long ago days caused tears to sting at his eyes.

Perhaps Ronald Harris was feeling sentimental because his end was coming sooner than later. He was stepping down as owner, president and CEO of Harris Farms, Inc. the next day. It used to be called “the farm,” but the operation had become so prosperous his sons demanded that he incorporate. This land, so loved and toiled over, had sustained his family for generations. His grandfather bought the first small parcel of land and slowly added to it when others couldn’t afford to keep going. His own father did the same and now here he was, about to pass it all along to his own sons and grandsons. This wasn’t just land and structures and equipment—it was a legacy, he thought as he crested a familiar rise.

He descended again, bringing a small, fertile valley into view. The crops were coming in fine, he could see. Harris’ dreamy melancholy suddenly came to a halt, however, when he saw that a disheveled figure was walking towards him. Apparently the man was unaware that he was in the middle of the road. He appeared to be wearing a military uniform. It was smeared with dirt. His boots were caked with mud. Harris brought the truck to a rolling stop. He wasn’t a swearing man but a curse word from his childhood nearly escaped his lips. Harris stepped out of the truck and slowly walked towards the man. Harris reached him as he was about to collapse to the ground.

“Goodness, son!” Harris exclaimed.

The man tried to speak but only a croaking sound escaped his throat. He gave up trying to speak and made a drinking gesture with his hand.

“You want some water?” Harris asked.

The man nodded, his eyes rolling back and then returning to meet Harris’ gaze. The old farmer lowered him to the gravel road and shuffled back to his truck. He returned, sloshing water out of a plastic bottle as he opened it. Harris held the bottle out towards the man, who wrenched it from his hand and drank greedily. He spilled more down his shirtfront than he drank.

“Thank you,” he rasped and then took a more careful drink.

“You’re welcome,” Harris replied, concern and confusion furrowing his brow. He reached down and helped the younger man to his feet.

“Thank you,” the younger man said again, limping towards Harris’ truck bed.

“You’re welcome.” He looked the man up and down again. He was trying to figure out why someone would be out here, on his land, dressed like a soldier, and in this condition. “How?” he said, perplexed. “Where?” Harris gave up trying to make sense out of what he was seeing and asked, “Where did you come from?”

The younger man gazed at Harris, either not sure what the question meant or how to answer. Finally he turned and pointed towards the northwest.

“You were over there,” Harris proclaimed, his eyes wide with surprise and recognition.

Some sort of experiment had been going on a few miles northwest from where they stood. He’d never gone there himself but a few of his rancher and farmer friends had done business with residents there.

The man nodded, tears rolling down his dirt-streaked face. Whether unashamed or too tired to care, he didn’t try to wipe them away.

“What’s your name?” the farmer asked, still unable to comprehend what he was seeing.

“Patton,” he croaked. “Patton Larsen.”

“Nice to meet you,” Harris said out of habit. “Wish we could’ve met under better circumstances. Ronald Harris,” he said, offering his hand, which Patton shook weakly. “You hungry?” Harris asked.

Patton nodded solemnly.

Harris walked to the open door of his truck and searched for food.

“Sorry young man,” he said, crinkling a bag of pistachios. “I only have these. Don’t think you could eat these do you?”

Patton shook his head and shrugged.

“Well, I don’t live too far from here,” Harris said. “Let’s head to my house and you can tell me how you got out here.”

Tears formed in Patton’s eyes again. “There are more of us… people like me… people with me,” he said, his voice breaking.

“Where?” Harris asked, his eyes growing wide with surprise.

Patton raised his arm and pointed down the hill towards a tall, gangly figure walking towards where they were standing. He then turned and met Harris’ gaze with a mirthless smile and a desperate look in his eyes. Harris grimaced. He said a silent prayer, asking for the help or the wisdom and the clarity of mind to know what to do.

“How many are there then?” he asked, feeling a surge of emotion crawl up his back and then his neck.

Patton shrugged. They got into the truck and drove down the hill towards the second man, who appeared to be in worse shape than Patton.

“How did this happen?” Harris asked after an awkward silence, still bewildered.

“They had a reason to live and a reason for us to die, I guess,” Patton said coolly, his eyes seeming to lose focus and then come back again.

This statement made no sense to Harris but he said nothing, assuming it was just babble. They reached the solitary figure in less than a minute. He was tall and painfully thin with dirty, disheveled red hair. He looked to be wearing a uniform, but it wasn’t military. It looked like someone in jail would wear. Harris opened the truck’s tailgate and the two helped him sit. Harris held a water bottle towards the man, who took it gratefully. The red-haired man opened it and commenced to drink as Patton had.

“How you doing?” Patton asked his comrade.

The man turned and looked at him with drawn and weary eyes and then looked down at his wet shirt.

“You said there are more of you?” Harris asked Patton.

Patton nodded grimly and stood. Beckoning the farmer to follow, Patton hobbled over to the next rise. As they reached the crest, they could see down the next stretch of gravel road, which went nearly all the way down to interstate. When Harris saw it his jaw went slack. A group of about a dozen people was slowly making its way up the slope towards them. They were all similar to Patton in appearance. Two pairs of people were carrying others on makeshift litters. Upon further inspection, Harris realized that Patton was in the best shape of anyone.

Harris looked at Patton and Patton met his gaze. Tears welled up in both of their eyes. Simultaneously, they made their way down the hill to meet the group and to try, somehow, to help them.

PART ONE

ARRIVING

CHAPTER 1

Years earlier…

The passenger train slithered across the landscape like a snake following its meandering prey. In between cities and towns the engineer could get the train up to nearly a hundred miles per hour. The train was torturously slow, however, when it climbed through the Sierra Nevada Mountains. To Patton Larsen, the slower the train traveled, the better. He was going to his destination willingly, but he was still anxious. The permanence and uncertainty of his decision still bothered him, like buyer’s remorse. This was, perhaps, his last chance to leave his past behind him and to possibly build a future. Patton shook himself out of his stupor and watched the passing landscape again.

Spring was coming early to this part of the country. Snow and ice clung to the ground in places, but for the most part it looked like the weather was beginning to turn. The sun was bright and the few clouds that he could see were unthreatening. Most noticeable was the crispness of the colors. The tall pines and wild grasses were a lush green, the snow a bright white, and the exposed earth was a rich brown.

As often happened, Patton’s mind turned inward. He suddenly thought of his mother.

“I think you’re just running away,” she replied when he told he was going away, possibly forever. “This damn experiment. What are you trying to prove?”

“Nothing. Maybe I am running away, but I don’t know what else to do.”

She turned away from him in that way she did when she was about to cry. Patton usually let these types of conversations wane, but this was too important. He had to make her understand.

“I’m sorry, Mom,” he whispered, placing his hand gently on her shoulder. “Do you want me to go back to the hospital? That was hell for me too, you know.”

She nodded and clasped her hand around his, squeezing it then releasing then squeezing it again. She turned to him with tears running down her face. “You didn’t lose everything in that wreck,” she replied, nearly inaudibly.

She was implying that he still had her. He bowed his head reverentially and said, “I lost enough, Mom.” He nearly choked on the last word. Patton paused and composed himself. “I love you Mom, but if I don’t do this I’m afraid of what I might do to myself.”

She understood what that meant and it would have to be enough for her. She’d lost her husband, but they’d lived a long life together. She had never lost a child, but Patton’s leaving would probably be as painful. Patton lost his wife and three children, all at once, in what must have been a terrifying few moments. The ordeal caused him two years of emotional agony. Patton had tried and tried to put it behind him, but finding his way through the maze of pain was impossible. Now, here he was, on a train, headed to some experiment and a new life. He had no idea what to expect. Behind Patton was the pain of a broken and unfulfilled life. Ahead of him was, well, he didn’t know yet.

Patton thought back to that crucial moment of his life when he was about to, once again, sink into the abyss of depression and alcoholism and possibly another suicide attempt. It was then that he’d seen the email advertising this crazy experiment. At first it had seemed like another email—something he’d normally delete. However, it quickly became his last hope of creating any type of life for himself.

The email read:

“A group of prominent social scientists is planning a social experiment. It is designed to show how a society will develop if every person begins with equal opportunities and economic status. The people chosen for this experiment will reflect the current demographics of the United States’ most recent census. A sample of nearly 32,000 people will be chosen, which represents approximately a hundredth of a percent of the population of the United States.

“Individual applications to this email will be entered into a large database. An algorithm will randomly select the combination of respondents that best represents the country’s political, social, ethnic, and economic dynamics. If you are interested in participating in this experiment, please log onto www.microcosm.org. More information and details are available at this site.”

It was during another long, sleepless night that Patton clicked on the link and entered his information. The survey proved to be a very detailed. It asked for some basic demographic information, but also some very personal questions about his life and his beliefs. When he finished with the survey, Patton was notified that he would have to sign a contract. Once the contract was signed, he would be bound to complete the experiment—the timeframe was unknown. If he failed to live up to the contract, he would have to pay a penalty of five hundred thousand dollars—this in order deter participants from leaving the experiment and skewing the results.

Patton learned that each individual or family group would be given an equal amount of money, or “economic credits” as they were called. They would be free to spend those credits however they pleased. They could indulge themselves with luxuries or they could invest in a business or professional practice. Participants could go about it alone or could merge their credits with other individuals or groups to create more buying power. No personal wealth could be brought in from the outside.

The experiment would essentially give the subjects total political and economic freedom. No government would be established by the organizers. In order to get the federal grant money, the federal government required there be essential services like police, fire, water, and sanitation services. The organizers agreed to provide these services until participants would take over. Luckily all of these services would be provided by participants.

The expressed purpose of the experiment was to place everyone on equal economic and social footing. Researchers would then observe events as they played out. The money would be the control mechanism in the experiment. No longer could people complain that they’d had an unfair disadvantage—people would either sink or swim by their own abilities and decisions, or lack thereof. As far as Patton could tell, the organizers did not give suggestions on how. They would let people choose for themselves what to do with their credits.

Once the experiment began, participants could leave for only up to four weeks at a time and could only do that three times per year. Family and friends from outside could come and visit, but for only one week at a time, three times per year. While these conditions seemed harsh to Patton, it did make sense. Obviously, the organizers felt that if participants spent too much time away the experiment would suffer because conditions would not reflect reality. Individual members of a family group could leave permanently, but at least one member of the family had to remain until the end of the experiment or pay the financial penalty.

Once participants were selected, they received access to an online catalog from which they would select their housing, transportation, and business, among several other details. At this time they could contact other participants to merge economic credits and build corporations. Once all of the participants made their selections, the process of building of the town began. The building of roads, housing, and businesses took over a year. Now that the town was complete, people from all over the country were now making their way to the Pocatello valley, which straddled the border between Utah and Idaho.

Researchers scoured the continental United States for the ideal landscape. They wanted an area that experienced all four seasons and had a diverse landscape within a relatively small geographical area. Also, the spot had to have a very small existing population, which would make it easier and cheaper to buy their property and move them out. Many parts of the country were considered, but the Rocky Mountain region was ultimately selected. Professional location scouts from the film industry were hired and sent to Colorado, Utah, Idaho, Montana, and Wyoming. After weeks of searching, the Pocatello Valley, located just north of the Great Salt Lake, was found to be the perfect spot. It was chosen for its isolation, its versatility, and its fertility, which made it both beautiful and ideal for farming.

A small lake was dredged, deepened, and expanded. It would serve as the southern border of the main part of town. The surrounding hills, once barren and covered with scrub grasses and sagebrush, were planted with trees and wildflowers. A city center was surveyed and residential, commercial, and industrial plots were laid out. Building lots outside of town, up along the low hillsides, could also be selected. Patton picked a plot in the eastern hills, just above the lake.

Patton was simultaneously excited and frightened when he was notified about his selection. It would be difficult to tell his mother. Worse, however, was the sense that he was leaving his family behind forever. The thought of not visiting their graves was almost unbearable, but he had the feeling he was supposed to do this—that somehow it was his destiny to be involved.

Now tired from reliving those recent memories, Patton leaned his seat back, put on his headphones, clicked play on his iPod, and prayed for sleep.

The train descended into Reno, Nevada at dawn. Daylight broke brilliantly over the Great Basin. The sun muted the city’s lights and street traffic, which usually bustled into the early morning hours. There were few cars on the streets. A small number of pedestrians were braving the chilly early morning air. The train began to brake and a sudden lurch woke Patton. He rubbed his eyes, yawned, and looked at his watch. It was just after 6 A.M. He’d wanted to sleep longer but all passengers had to leave the train so that others could be brought aboard. His stomach growled. He would need coffee and breakfast before exiting the train.

Patton showered and dressed and then made his way up to the dining car. He tapped the bar to get the barista’s attention and ordered a large latte. While waiting for his drink, Patton looked around the car. It was slowly filling with more tired-looking passengers. His gaze finally rested on a tall and athletic-looking blond woman, who was leaning casually against the far wall. She was talking mutedly on her cell phone. The woman turned towards him and their eyes met. He turned away, embarrassed, pretending that he hadn’t been staring.

“So you’re doing this crazy experiment, huh?” the barista asked him, setting down a napkin and then his coffee. She was young, maybe in her late teens or early twenties, and was probably just as bored as he was.

“Yeah. It sounded interesting,” Patton said, yawning.

He wasn’t in the mood for conversation and luckily the barista moved away to serve another customer. It turned out that the new customer was the blond woman he’d been ogling. He felt a rush of blood in his cheeks and turned away, taking a sip of his drink. The woman was pretty at six in the morning with no makeup and wearing yoga pants and a fleece jacket. Her blue eyes simultaneously exuded confidence and intelligence. Their eyes met again and she gave him a beautiful, radiant smile. Yes, she was dressed down, but Patton could imagine how gorgeous she would be dressed up for an evening out.

“Hi,” she said a little shyly.

“Hi.”

“How’s the coffee?”

“Surprisingly good.”

“So you’re doing this crazy experiment huh?”

Patton suddenly felt like talking to someone.

“Yes. Didn’t really have anything else going on.”

She snorted a laugh and nearly choked on the coffee she’d just sipped. At first he was confused. He answered her honestly but then realized his answer must have sounded strange.

“I’m Jennifer,” she said, still laughing and wiping at her mouth with a napkin.

“Patton,” he replied, extending his hand.

She took it and shook it firmly. She had a strong grip.

“Patton as in General Patton?” she asked, her eyes wide and playful again.

“Yes, actually. My grandpa served under him. Grandpa was one of the few who actually liked him, I guess.”

The handshake continued and when Patton noticed it had gone on longer than normal he pulled his hand away. Their eyes were still locked, but she turned away shyly for a moment. He cleared his throat.

“Can you believe they’re kicking us off?”

She met his gaze again and smiled.

“I know, right? Jerks.”

She laughed and he smiled. The awkward silence returned—the kind that occurs when two people are clearly attracted to one another. She was nothing like his wife in appearance. His wife was shorter and stockier, although still athletically built. Jennifer was a few inches taller and built like a marathoner. Patton was taller than her, but not by much. She generally liked larger, more muscular men, but she could tell that he was in good shape. He also had flashes of grey over his temples, which let her know that he was at least her age, and possibly a little older.

“So what are you doing today?” she asked, her eyes shining.

He shrugged, hoping she would invite him to spend the day with her. “I dunno. Maybe do some shopping, maybe a little gambling. You?”

“Can I join you?” she asked, knowing he would say yes.

They went to their rooms and retrieved things they might need. They met back at the dining car and detrained together. As they stepped off, Jennifer took Patton’s arm. He looked at her in surprise. Their eyes met and he suddenly wanted to kiss her. He swallowed hard and turned away.

The early morning air was brisk. Frost covered the grass and there were iced-over puddles in the gutters and in potholes. They could see their breath in the air as they walked and talked.

“Nice morning,” Jennifer said, gazing up at the ragged line of the Sierra Mountains to the west. The sun was behind them and it cast a bright light onto the mountains’ face.

“Yeah,” Patton agreed. “You want to find a place for breakfast?”

She nodded and they continued walking towards the larger buildings. They meandered through the streets, making small talk and window-shopping. After a few blocks they found a small diner. They were seated and both ordered coffee and juice.

“What do you really think of this experiment?” Jennifer asked.

Patton paused, thinking. His opinion had changed from minute to minute and he was gauging how he currently felt.

“It’s kind of exciting and nerve racking all at once,” he answered finally.

She nodded in agreement and he continued.

“I mean, leaving your past behind. I can’t imagine that someone who was… normal… someone who felt like life was going well for them would come and do something like this.”

She looked at him skeptically and said, “I think maybe someone who is adventurous. Or maybe someone who felt like they’d accomplished all they could and wanted a challenge or something.”

Patton nodded and asked, “Does that describe you?”

“I guess you could say that,” she replied warmly. “I’ve been successful, but I’d like to think I can make a new start.”

Their waitress, a cute blonde with a bright smile and Eastern European accent, arrived at their table with menus. She took their orders then left.

Looking at her ring finger again, Patton asked, “So you’re not married?”

She fought the urge to say something sarcastic, but instead replied, “No. I’ve never been married. I was always too busy. What about you?”

Pain creased his face and she was instantly sorry for asking. She couldn’t blame herself, though. He’d brought up the topic.

“I was,” Patton said sullenly. “She died.”

“I’m so sorry,” she said with sad eyes and reached out to touch his hands.

“It was a car accident,” he said, taking a deep breath in an attempt to ward off the inevitable sting of tears. “Her and my three kids. She was pushed off the road by a semi-truck that didn’t see her. They crashed through the railing and…” he trailed off, not able to finish.

The vision of that day suddenly entered his mind. His returning home from work and her not being there. The highway patrolman pulling off his hat and not being able to speak. Him falling to his knees asking if any of them had survived and the patrolman telling him that no, they had all died. The emptiness of their home and his total loss of meaning. The alcohol, the suicide attempt, going into the hospital—it had all been too much in too short of a time. Tears stung his eyes and he wiped at them. When he continued it was with deep emotion.

“It’s been hard,” he said, realizing how stupid and simplistic that sounded. “I’ve made it through until now. I kind of see this whole thing as my last chance.” He looked away from her, embarrassed. She reached over and held on to his hands.

“I’m so sorry, Patton. I can’t begin to imagine. You’re strong for finding a way to carry on,” she said, tears rolling down her face. She patted his hands. He nodded and smiled weakly at her.

Patton appreciated her sincerity but he was done talking about it. Jennifer understood. She took in a deep breath and let it out loudly. She smiled at him and squeezed his hands before letting go. Luckily for them, their server arrived with their food.

The new friends finished breakfast and spent the rest of the day in town. They found a casino that was close to the train station and gambled for part of the day. Jennifer talked about finding a movie but nothing interested either of them. Eventually it was time for them to get back to the train. They agreed to meet at the dining car later that evening but both wanted to rest after their long day. The two parted awkwardly, not knowing whether to hug or kiss or just shake hands.

Jennifer pulled Patton in for a hug and kissed him on the cheek. When she pulled away Patton wanted to kiss her on the lips, but thought it could wait. He stood and watched as she walked away. Just as he’d hoped, she turned around to look at him. Their eyes met and they both smiled. She turned again and walked away. When she was out of sight, Patton turned and walked towards his own room. He didn’t stop smiling the entire way.

CHAPTER 2

Patton was half asleep, listening to music and playing computer chess. The train had been moving again for an hour or so. The sun was bright and shining through his window. He heard someone talking loudly behind him and then felt someone sit next to him. He’d been enjoying the solitude and was annoyed to have an unwanted seatmate. Patton pretended not to notice the person and stared ahead, hoping he wouldn’t be dragged into a conversation.

No such luck.

His new seatmate was an attractive man, probably in his late twenties or early thirties. He had dirty blond hair that he wore over his ears and partway down his neck. He was clean shaven, with a strong jaw line. His most striking feature was his eyes. They were an opaque blue that looked silver from the right angle. Their eyes met and Patton nodded in greeting.

“How’s it going?” the young man asked, much too loudly in the confined space. “David,” he continued, offering his hand.

Patton shook it out of obligation. The young man had a strong, confident grip and Patton could tell from the man’s forearms that he was a religious weightlifter.

“Patton,” he replied with a nod a near grimace. He quickly turned his attention back to his chess game.

“Chess huh?” David asked stupidly.

Patton clenched his teeth in annoyance but the expression went unnoticed. Instead he simply replied with a terse “yep” and turned his attention back to his screen.

David activated his touch screen and began searching for the chess app. “Is there a way that we can play each other?”

“I don’t think so.”

“Oh, I bet there is. You’re just scared,” David said with a fake, overly-gregarious laugh.

Patton grimaced. “Actually, no. I just don’t think there’s a way to do it.”

The younger man nodded but could tell that Patton was annoyed.

“Either way,” Patton continued, “I’d rather just play by himself.”

David looked at Patton dumbly and an awkward silence began to build between them.

“What’s your problem dude? I’m just sitting here trying to be cool with you.”

Patton returned the younger man’s gaze, dumbfounded. He shook his head and looked away.

“So what, are you too good for me or something?” David continued after an awkward moment, getting more agitated. “You barely met me.”

Patton shook his head again. “Whatever, man. Look, like you say, we just met. I don’t mind being polite and all that, but I don’t like it when people force interaction down my throat. If you can’t tell when someone doesn’t want to talk, that’s your fault.”

The younger man harrumphed and tried to interrupt, but Patton continued.

“And… I was just sitting here minding my own business and you sat by me so don’t be offended if I don’t want to talk to you.”

Time passed and light whirred through Patton’s window. The painful silence continued between them but Patton ignored it.

David cleared his throat and asked “So what do you think of all this?”

Patton groaned inwardly but replied “All what?”

“This experiment,” David replied, sounding like a hairstylist trying to force conversation. “The reason we’re on this train.”

“I think it’s just great,” Patton replied sarcastically.

A curious grin painted David’s face. This particular expression made Patton want to punch him, but he resisted the impulse.

“You think you’re better than me,” David remarked. It wasn’t a question this time.

Patton’s merely shook his head. He could tell that the best way to get back at this guy was to give him no response. No satisfaction. Give him no rise at all.

David shook off the perceived insult and continued. “I think this experiment is going to fail unless some people take it in their hands to shake it up a little.”

Patton found this statement too disturbing to not respond.

“What do you mean by shake it up?”

David shifted in his seat and then struck a more confident, relaxed pose.

“I mean… people are going to want to go on and do what they want to do. This experiment is supposed to reflect American society right? If people don’t try to reproduce American society, how will they know what the effects are?”

Patton pondered this statement for a moment. Something was deeply troubling about this logic.

David continued. “I mean, in America, you have conservatives, liberals, socialists, right-wing wackos, and anarchists. How is this supposed to work if all these groups aren’t represented? What’s the point really?”

At first Patton found himself unable to respond, but then something occurred to him.

“First of all,” Patton began, “the point of the experiment isn’t to reflect American society. They’ve already done that by who they’ve chosen. What they want to see is how people will react when all of them are put on the same financial basis. Some black people—and I agree with them on this to a point—feel that since they were slaves, they were forced to start out lower than white people. They feel they have to work to just be equal. But in this experiment, they will already be on the same level. You see what I’m saying?”

David nodded but had a pensive expression. He wasn’t used to having people throw his arguments back into his face.

“With money being equal, everything will be equal. At least for a while,” Patton continued.

“So how will money equalize things? That doesn’t really make sense. People will bring their preconceived notions, their biases, their racism with them.”

“You’re assuming that everyone holds these views, but you’re wrong.”

“Am I?” David responded harshly.

“Yes. The problem with you is,” Patton said, ignoring his childish response. “You underestimate everyone you talk to. For some reason, you assume—falsely—that you are smarter than everyone you meet.”

David rolled his eyes this time but deep down he knew Patton was right. “You don’t know me.”

“You’re right and that’s my point. You assume you’re smarter than everyone you meet. I’m sure you assume that you’re smarter than me.”

David took a deep breath and exhaled it slowly. Patton was right, which embarrassed David even more. Patton continued before he could be interrupted.

“And this is the most disturbing thing to me about what you’re saying. Events are going to play out and that’s what this experiment is all about. However, if you manipulate events you’re going to skew the results. Your thinking is wrong.”

David was about to retort when a blond woman arrived and stood above them.

“Hi Patton,” she said, harried and out of breath. Then she noticed David. “Who are you?”

Patton sat up in his seat and gestured to him. “This is David.”

“Hi,” David said, beaming his most flirtatious smile and offering his hand. She shook it and brushed her hair back from her face with her other hand. She was obviously attracted to him.

The handshake lingered for a moment too long and Patton felt himself blush.

“You ready?” she asked Patton.

“Yeah,” he said excitedly, looking at Dave as if to say ‘take that!’ He stood and they walked towards the back of the entertainment car. As they reached the door, Patton looked back and smiled at David’s enraged face.

Frank looked at his wife affectionately. He loved looking at her without her noticing. This was a relatively recent phenomenon for him, this secret admiration, this fondness he felt for her. Their marriage had been a rocky one, but now that they were starting over, in a sense, he appreciated her all the more.

“How is it?” he asked his wife, nodding towards her salad.

She was staring at a young couple that had just walked into the dining car. She turned her attention back to him.

“Good.” She swallowed a bite and washed it down with a swallow of wine.

There was a strain there. He could see it in her face and hear it in her voice. It was probably the pain, or maybe she was just tired. Technically she was in remission, but sometimes the pain returned. Although her illness had driven a wedge between them for a time, he loved her so deeply now—maybe more now than ever. He smiled at that realization. How strange, he thought, for them to be on their way to Utah as part of some grand experiment. The thought made him smile and chuckle lightly.

“What’s so funny?” she asked, the strain now replaced with a twinkle in her eye.

“Oh,” he said with his gap-toothed grin, “I imagine we’re probably the first black folks to ever live in this part of the country.”

She smiled at that. Her husband was likely correct. She’d read the history of the area they were moving to. She couldn’t imagine that many African Americans had set foot in the Pocatello Valley.

Shontae was fifty-two. Frank, whose full name was Chevelle Franklin Norton, was fifty-six. He had just retired as a partner in a large accounting firm in San Francisco. His career afforded her the opportunity to stay home with their children and pursue her hobbies of gardening and, most recently, painting.

He broke out of his daze and looked at her again. She was beautiful and so radiant when she was happy and not in pain. In some ways her ovarian cancer had been the best thing for their marriage. It had calmed her, helped her lose unwanted weight, and humbled her—all of which she now agreed had been necessary.

“You look tired, Baby,” he said, concerned.

She leaned back, giving him an imperious look. But the gaze was playful and she was glad at his concern. “I am,” she said quietly, “but I like being here, out of that damned bed of ours..”

He grinned slightly and ate a spoonful of soup. She reached her hands out and he grabbed them. Their eyes met and they shared one of those gazes that only long-married couples could share. Their years of experience, both the good times and the bad times, passed between them through an invisible, emotional conduit.

Their server arrived with their dinner plates, warned them of their temperature, refilled their water glasses, and left with a smile. They sat and ate in silence. Not an awkward silence, but one of exhaustion and a sense of relief to finally be on their journey. It had been a difficult decision for them to enter this experiment. Their youngest child had just graduated from high school and was about to enter college. Two of their children were married and had young children. Her cancer had finally gone into remission and Frank was about to retire. They had finally attained all that they had worked for, but something had beckoned them away.

Perhaps they began to think that they could only find peace in new surroundings, around new people, and in a new profession. For work, Frank had chosen to enter into a corporation that would manufacture food products. His part in the enterprise was to operate a canning and bottling plant, processing the food that the other partners would raise and grow.

At Frank’s insistence, Shontae wouldn’t work. Frank had always made a lot of money. However, his ban on her working would allow her to focus on her hobbies and allow her to heal. Although Frank had always been a workaholic—in fact his dedication to his job and not to his family had been a major sore spot in their marriage—he promised her that he would work long enough to make their business a success. Then they could spend time together.

“Nervous?” she asked, knowing that he wasn’t.

He took a deep breath and then let it out slowly. “Anxious, more like.” He looked away for a moment. “The break will be good, though.”

She had to laugh at that. A break for him was to work only sixty hours per week.

“What about you?” he asked, concern returning to his eyes.

“It will be nice to get away from it all,” she replied with a smile. Her face suddenly went stern while making a jabbing motion with her fork. “You better keep your promise, Frank, and not just for me, either. This is a new life and I think we should have a new way of doing things.”

His first impulse at this type of talk used to be a flare of anger and then let her talk him down. But he had changed, too. He no longer felt that incessant clock in his head—the constant need to get on with the next task.

“At first I’ll have to work hard to get things running, but I plan on finding a good assistant and letting them run the show.”

She thought about that for a minute. The man had changed so much in such a short time. Better yet, he had made the changes for her and their marriage. They smiled at each other again. She suddenly felt the presence of someone standing above them. They looked up and saw a man. He was younger than Frank and had a blond woman in tow.

“Aren’t you Frank Norton?” the man asked, grinning broadly.

Frank wiped his hands on his napkin.

“Yes I am,” he replied, confused.

“I’m Patton Larsen. I’m running the farm and greenhouse.”

“Oh… Patton!” Frank barked. He stood and offered his hand. The two had found each other on the microcosm.org site and had decided to work as partners with their two separate enterprises. “So nice to finally meet you!”

“You too.” Patton patted Frank’s right shoulder with his free hand and repeated, “you too.”

“Oh,” Frank said, embarrassed, “this is my wife Shontae.”

Patton turned to her and smiled. They shook hands briefly. The two had spent hours chatting online. “Yes I remember. How are you?”

“Great, Patton.” She released his hand and placed her hand on her husband’s broad shoulder.

“Great, great,” Patton said, grinning broadly. He motioned towards Jennifer who walked over from their table. “Jennifer, this is Frank, the guy I was telling you about, and his wife Shontae.”

There were smiles and handshakes all around. Shontae invited them to join them for dessert and they accepted. Jennifer and Shontae had their own conversation while Frank and Patton discussed business. Their conversations went on for a long time and stopped only when the train started to slow.

“Must be coming up on Elko,” Frank said. “Are you two getting off the train?”

They looked at each other and smiled, embarrassed for some reason.

“We weren’t planning on it,” Jennifer replied.

Frank stood, followed by Shontae.

“Well, we were going to get off and get some air. Would you two like to join us?”

Patton and Jennifer looked at each other. “We’d love to,” Patton said, standing. He helped Jennifer to her feet and the four waited for the train to come to a complete stop.

The doors slid open and they were met by a wall of crisp air.

“Well, what should we do?” Frank asked everyone.

Patton shrugged and said, “It’s Elko. We can do whatever we want.” He stepped off onto the platform and the rest followed him, laughing loudly.

CHAPTER 3

Charlie Henry grimaced at the view. Patches of crusty snow stood out like islands in the wide expanse of the drab, lifeless landscape. Although he’d never been in this part of the country he hated it, and for some reason he’d always hated it. His train had originated in Chicago. Now that was a city, Charlie thought. This… this flyover country… looked like it’d been nuked. There weren’t many things in the world, particularly in America, that he didn’t hate.

He was born Charles Harrell Jr., but changed his name when he was nineteen and did so for two reasons. First, he was wanted by police for assaulting a Chicago police officer during the 1968 Democratic National Convention. The second, and more important reason, was that his father’s name was also Charles Harrell. He hated his father. Charlie’s father wasn’t a bad man—quite the contrary. He was a good and kind man. What Charlie despised about his father was his seeming lack of passion. He’d been content with his quiet, boring, workaday life—satisfied with the little job, with his little house, and his little family.

Charlie Henry had never been an introspective person, or one willing to accept criticism, no matter how constructive. He had been a sheltered and pampered child, brought up by two parents who had lived through the worst of the Depression and the Second World War. Despite his parents’ sacrifices, they had never passed their hard-learned lessons onto their son. Young Charlie had always had an unquenchable desire for adventure—to be a part of something big or something important. It was that desire that caused the irreparable rift between them.

It started when Charlie and some friends went to witness the Detroit race riots. The young, skinny teenagers were the only white people in the crowd—who weren’t policemen, that is. Though scared, the boys wanted to get involved somehow—to fight the injustice in the city’s ghettos. Before they could find any trouble, a young police officer spotted them and ordered them to get into his squad car. The officer asked where they were from and who their parents were and then drove them home. He lectured them about how dangerous “black folks” are the entire way home. When Charlie’s parents saw their son being delivered home by a police officer, Charlie’s mother began to cry softly, looking to her husband for answers. Mr. Harrell, a soft-spoken man by nature, stared off into space, his jaw clenched with anger.

Charlie was escorted to the front door by the policeman and stood awkwardly on the front stoop. His head hung low as the cop explained why he was bringing him home. Charlie was ashamed for his mother’s sake, but he was angry with his father and his meaningless life and this damn country that would allow its boys to go over to Vietnam and get blown to hell. As time passed, Charlie’s shame faded as his anger grew.

Months later, Charlie returned to the house one morning after staying out all night with friends. There had been a big anti-war demonstration downtown and Mr. Harrell figured that that was where his son had been. The man had merely become an observer in his son’s life, watching him slip away and become someone he didn’t recognize—and worse, a person that he no longer loved.

“Charlie,” he said in his quiet way, “you don’t know what you’re playing with here.”

Charlie had just looked at his father with disgust. The years of impotent rage that had been building within him—boiling and festering—finally escaped.

“What would you know about it? You’re nothing but a fascist pig just like those other sons of bitches!” Young Charlie said, gesturing out towards the world he didn’t truly understand. He’d expected his father to lash out at him, maybe even hit him, but the old man did nothing. He just stood there, stoic, and for the first time that Charlie had ever seen, his father looked hurt.

“As a matter of fact, Charlie, I do know what I’m talking about. I risked my life to fight fascists. I sat in a frozen hole, waiting for fascists to run across a field to kill me. Don’t tell me what I don’t know, son.”

It should have been the end of it, but Charlie felt a sick satisfaction in pushing his father’s buttons.

“Well it was a waste of time then. You come home just to become one of them. You and your useless life! Go to work, come home, kiss mom, eat dinner, watch TV. Over and over and over. But you accomplish nothing! You are nothing!”

The look of pain and betrayal deepened in Mr. Harrell’s face.

“I don’t know why I’m telling you this because you’re obviously being unreasonable, but I’m going to tell you anyway and then I want you to go to your room, pack your things and get out of my house and never come back.”

Charlie looked shocked for a moment but tried to compose himself.

“One night… sometime around Thanksgiving, the Germans shelled the hell out of us. Two of my best friends got killed that night. Anyway, I sat in my foxhole, freezing, scared out of my mind. Somehow I was able to pray and I asked God to get me through that night. If He would, I told Him that I would come home and live a quiet, peaceful life. I would find a job and I would start a family. He kept His promise. This life that you call useless is just me keeping my promise.”

Charlie’s father turned around and went to his bedroom, closing the door silently behind him. It would be the last time Charlie would ever see him. He went to his room and quickly packed his things. He called a taxi and waited on the front stoop for it to arrive. As the cab drove away, he watched his mother wave goodbye to him, tears streaming down her face. It would be the last time he would see her too.

Any sentimentality he felt for his mother eventually faded. He soon became involved in much more important things—rallies, meetings, and sit-ins. After graduating from high school Charlie set off for the University of Chicago. He never did declare a major. Instead, he got more deeply involved in the anti-Vietnam movement, even joining Students for a Democratic Society. Charlie quickly gained the reputation as a lightweight, not really committed to the movement and not particularly bright. However, when the Democratic National Convention came to Chicago in 1968, Charlie got his chance to show his bona fides.

It was during the third night of the four-day convention. Many of Charlie’s friends had already been arrested, so he decided to go out alone. He was standing towards the back of a large mob that was trying to break through a police barrier. Once they did, all hell broke loose. Charlie got chased into an alley and he watched, stunned almost, as dozens of his comrades were run down and beaten by cops with nightsticks. Two cops caught a young man and started beating him right in front of Charlie. Seething with anger at the injustice of it all, Charlie picked up a loose bit of concrete, snuck up behind one of the cops and smashed him in the back of the head. He then escaped down a dark alleyway. The young officer had a fractured skull and was nearly killed. Charlie, however, was a free but wanted man.

Most people, when seeing their face on a “Wanted” poster, would be frightened. Not Charlie. When he returned to campus the next fall he realized that he’d become notorious. Word spread that he’d been involved and the police began making inquisitions. To avoid being arrested, Charlie snuck into Canada where he stayed for nearly a year. He returned to the U.S. where he continued on with the movement, but much to his chagrin, it fizzled out just a couple years later.

Charlie stayed underground for nearly a decade until Jimmy Carter formally pardoned all draft dodgers. Free from being hunted by police, Charlie returned to the University of Chicago and earned a degree in political science. He then went to Cal Berkeley to earn his master’s degree, eventually taking a job with a progressive think tank in San Francisco. That work quickly became boring so he and a few comrades from his underground days started a nonprofit group. They were given a series of federal grants, most of which they used to fund their lavish lifestyles. Officially, their mission was to spread democracy in third world countries, but it was really a front for the re-emerging American Communist Party. For decades, Charlie and his cohorts traveled the world—Cuba, Angola, East Germany, France, Southeast Asia. They worked with Marxist factions in Northern Ireland and incited Leftist uprisings all throughout South and Central America.

Charlie did this for nearly three decades. It was while he was on a sabbatical that he found out about the experiment. He applied because he saw an opportunity to truly see how progressive policies could benefit mankind, only on a much smaller scale. And that is why he found himself on this train, speeding across a part of his country that he’d never wanted to see, imagining what his life’s work could do for these naïve and gullible people that were about to become his neighbors.

He already had plans for after he arrived, but he knew that it was going to take months, if not years, to make it all happen. But like most true believers, Charlie was patient.

Anna Radinski yawned deeply and readjusted herself to where she could see out of her window. The train was zooming past the landscape. Apparently there were no towns or people in this part of the country, she thought, cynically. There was nothing to slow down for in Wyoming anyway. This barren landscape contrasted greatly from where her trip had started, in Newark, New Jersey. She balled her red Cornell hoodie into a pillow and rested her head as comfortably as possible.

Like most of those headed to the experiment, she was excited for what the future held, but scared about the unknown. Perhaps, she thought, she leaving behind more than most people. She thought of Patty and the sudden thought of her friend brought back the sadness of their goodbye. Both she and Patty applied to be part of the experiment, but only Anna was selected. Anna felt like she was betraying her friend by accepting the slot, but there was no way she could refuse the opportunity. It helped that Patty insisted that Anna accept.

To Anna, being selected felt like destiny. It would now be her mission to bring about the social changes that America had needed for so long. It’s so hard to convince over three hundred million people that they’re wrong. Convincing thirty thousand people was a different story, however. Once she, and whoever would follow her on her crusade, showed that socialism could work in an American society, their approach could be modeled by the country as a whole. This sense of mission hadn’t lessened the pain of her parting with her friend, though. Anna and Patty were inseparable, in mind, in spirit, and in purpose. They tried the “one in body” thing once, but they both decided it was strange.

Anna had been an achiever in college, but most of her professors saw her as an intellectual lightweight. A follower. A lemming. In reality, she’d always been a big fish in a small pond. Because of her many awards and accomplishments, she’d gained an extremely inflated sense of self. Once she reached Wellesley College, however, she realized that she was just another student. Nothing rankled her more than the thought of being mediocre. Her best talent was taking other peoples’ ideas, inheriting them as her own, and then properly regurgitating them at the right times. She was also adept as repackaging, or rebranding, ideas.

It was graduate school at Cornell where everything changed for her. It was there that she blossomed into a beautiful young woman. Instead of wearing frumpy outfits, she, with the help of her mother, entirely replaced her wardrobe. She got LASIK surgery so she could get rid of the her nerdy glasses. She grew out her hair and began carrying herself with more confidence. She was hot, she knew it, and she used it to her advantage. She flirted with classmates for notes and help on tests. She flirted with professors for good grades.

At the end of Anna’s first semester of grad school, Patty moved close and got a job teaching a local middle school. It was at the end of that first school year that the experiment was advertised. While only Anna was selected, she and Patty started to make their plans. Anna would get settled in and would then help bring Patty and their mutual friend Mark out there to live. It was against the rules, but who would ever find out?

Now here she was, finally on the train, close to her destination. The thought of Patty and Mark joining her in a few months eased the pain of the long journey and for the first time in hundreds of miles, she smiled. She was looking out her window again. A brownish-gray haze hung over the grayish-brown landscape. Much of her trip from Albany had been pretty, but this was the ugliest, most barren landscape she’d ever seen.

Thick raindrops began to splatter onto her window and although she was warm inside the entertainment car, she felt cold. She rooted around in her backpack and found her iPod. She navigated and found her “Patty” playlist. Listening to these songs would make her cry again, but luckily, if things went the way they’d all planned, her friends would be joining her very soon.

Being the true Texan that he considered himself to be, Mike Wilson wanted to roll into Utah with one of those Cadillac land boats with the wide bull’s horns on the front. His dream was killed, however, when he was informed that participants had to arrive in an official train. To make up for the dashed hopes of a grand entrance, Mike was showing out. He had on his biggest hat, his pointiest boots, and his largest, gaudiest belt buckle. The hat and the boots were off now and he was in the entertainment car of his train, lying across three seats. It was a relatively short and easy trip for this train, which originated in his hometown of Houston. The stretch through the Rocky Mountains would be slow going, but so far, the trip had been flat and fast.

Mike was a throwback to an earlier time in Texas, when the oil wildcats tried to scare up dollars out of Texas’ hard-packed earth. He’d made some serious money with oil and with cattle. He tried, as best as he could, to emulate J.R. Ewing from the 1980s show Dallas. He wanted the money. He wanted the power. He had actually accumulated quite a bit of both.

Now, after having gone through the experiment’s tedious application process, Mike wondered why he’d gone through with it. He shook his head at himself that day as he scrawled his signature across the contract—one, if he were to break, would cost him five hundred-thousand dollars. Yet, here he was on the train, headed west. Mike figured he needed some adventure and excitement. The fact that a member of the Saudi royal family had put a price on his head was also good motivation to run away. That said, these were not the only reasons for his wanting to start new.

During one of his many long and sleepless nights—before giving away almost his entire first fortune and before making his second—Mike was flipping through channels when he came across a movie about a man who had become rich and successful. The man realized he wasn’t happy because he was no longer on the way up the mountain, but was sitting and waiting at the summit. Searching for a purpose, the man gave away all of his money and challenged himself to get it all back through a new business venture. The fun was in the getting, not the having.

Mike’s watch beeped. He slapped impatiently at the snooze button but couldn’t find it. He swore at the watch, but he was awake now and decided that he might as well get ready for the day. He put his hat on, did up his belt, and slid into his boots. He stood and did a yawning stretch in the middle of the aisle. A woman, who had been walking down the aisle, had to stop because he was blocking her way. She glared at him impatiently.

“Sorry, ma’am,” he said, grinning at her and tipping his hat. She scowled at him and slid past. He smiled to himself and followed her down the aisle. He made his way to the dining car and ordered a cup of coffee.

“Where we at, darlin’?” he asked a pretty, young, blond barista.

“New Mexico somewhere,” she answered with a huge, gorgeous grin.

He returned the smile. She was probably half his age, but that never bothered him. After a few minutes of small talk he slipped a ten dollar bill into her tip jar. He grabbed his coffee and made his way back to his seat, striking out yet again. The train stopped in Santa Fe, Tucson, and Phoenix, and then headed north into the pine forests in the heart of the Rocky Mountains. The progress was slow but Mike reveled in his last moments in the old world. It was an escape on two fronts. First, he would be able to start new—to make a new conquest in a new place. Second, he had a better chance of avoiding any further attempts on his life by that crazy Saudi.

The episode began just after the Iraqi army retreated from Kuwait in the spring of 1991. The Saudis and Kuwaitis were so grateful to America that they opened up new contracts to several American oil companies. Mike was just coming into his own at that point and the Saudi contracts were a virtual goldmine. Before flying to Riyadh, it was stressed to him by the U.S. State Department, and his business partners, to stay away from the Saudi women. He did the proverbial swearing on the Bible, but in his second night in Bahrain, a smaller country without all the Islamic restrictions on alcohol, his false attempts at religion went out the window.

The women wore head covers in the city, but night in the hotels was a different story. Mike couldn’t believe how gorgeous many of the Arab women were. Usually covered from head to toe, there was really no way to gauge a woman’s looks. However, at night, and in private, the women were much less guarded. Their big, almond-shaped eyes. The rich, mocha-colored skin. The exotic clothes and accents. For a tomcat like Mike it was almost too much to bear.

One night, following a boring day of finalizing contracts, he found himself alone in the hotel lobby when an absolute stunner walked in, modestly dressed, but with no head cover.

“Hi,” he twanged at her, letting her know that he was from Texas and that he was definitely on the prowl.

“Hello,” she said in lightly accented English.

She was tall and her eyes were a color he didn’t think possible for a human. She had the raven-colored hair that was typical for an Arab woman, but she had it cut in an American style. She wore a long, frill-less dress, but underneath, he could tell she had an astounding body. She was so beautiful he almost couldn’t breathe.

After shamelessly looking her up and down he said, “Can I get you a drink?”

She smiled at him and her eyes twinkled. “They don’t have any drinks here,” she said, elegantly waving her hand across the sitting room. His broad smile resembled a naughty boy who’d successfully gotten away with pulling Sally’s pigtail. He closed the distance between them and sat in the stool next to hers.

“They don’t have any here,” she said, her hot breath sending chills down his neck and his spine, “But I know where there’s something that is a little more… relaxing.”

“Where you from?” he asked her, his first attempt at small talk.

“Riyadh,” she said, taking a sip of a juice drink from her crystal glass.

“Well yeah. But where in America do you live?”

She looked at him, her eyes not betraying her surprise at his perceptiveness. Setting down her glass, she said, “New York.”

“Ahhh,” he said, giving her every bit of attention he could muster. “Ever been to Texas?”

She smiled coyly at him again. “Yes. My father has business interests there. Some with your president’s son, even.”

“Yeah? Well I’ll be damned. Maybe I know him,” he said, leaning in even closer.

She almost laughed at him. Her father didn’t have any casual acquaintances, especially in America and particularly not in Texas of all places. She mentioned his name and Mike laughed. He pulled out his wallet, removed a business card, and held it in front of her face.

“You know him?” she asked, her eyes wide with wonder.

“Of course,” he said, confidently, returning the card to his wallet. “Why do you think I’m here?”

“The food?” she said, laughing again.

He patted his stomach and groaned. The spicy food had not suited his stomach well. She laughed even harder. After another half hour of playful banter, he asked her if she wanted to see his suite. She looked around to see if anyone was listening, but a young concierge was the only person within earshot. They were nearly alone in the room.

“Give me thirty minutes?”

He winked and nodded at her as she gathered her things. An hour later there was a light knock at the door of his suite. He was in shirtsleeves now, no tie, collar undone, and no shoes.

“Hi,” he said warmly. He’d started himself off with a belt of Jack Daniels and he was feeling loose.

She looked in all directions to see if anyone was looking and then quickly stepped in. He offered her a whiskey and Coke and she gladly accepted. She was no devout Muslim and was more than a social drinker while living in New York City. They were sitting on a plush leather sofa and she was much more relaxed now. They talked and laughed and listened to American music while the alcohol took effect. Soon they were sitting very close and it was she that leaned in for the first kiss. Her lips were so soft it nearly took his breath away. The kisses became more and more passionate and both began to shed their clothes. Soon they were in his bedroom and after what had seemed like a blink of an eye, the morning had come.

He never found out how her father found out about that night, but somehow he had. And although the Saudi was angry enough to put a price on Mike’s head, he didn’t cancel the deal he had made with Mike and his partners. However, after Mike returned to America, his partners notified him that there was a hit out on him and that he should probably hire some sort of security. He did just that, hiring a former Navy SEAL. It was expensive, but it was worth it.

And there was only one serious attempt that he heard about. A Colombian assassin was on his way to do the hit when he was pulled over by a Texas state trooper. After not being able to explain why he had a forged driver’s license, and obviously wasn’t a migrant worker, the Texas Rangers were called in to investigate. The Rangers called ICE, who called the Colombian government, who informed all involved that the man was a serious player in the drug cartels and was a pro. Word of the hit got back to Mike’s security guy, who told Mike.

After his scrape with the Saudi, Mike dissolved all of his interest in the oil business and went into cattle ranching. A friend of a friend had developed a new beef and it became a global competitor. Mike sank hundreds of thousands of dollars into the venture and was almost immediately rewarded with millions in return. They branched out and Mike made millions more.

Eventually, though, everything changed for him. It wasn’t any single event, he realized. It was more of a long transformation. He became a reborn Christian and married a lovely young woman from Arlington. His transformation was incomplete, though, and he wasn’t able to keep his vows. The old Texas tomcat eventually returned to his old ways, chasing skirts and money. That lifestyle became boring again, however, as did life in general. He’d achieved all of his goals. He’d made more money than he thought was possible, and just when he was at his lowest point he saw the advertisement for the experiment. He took a day and filled out the survey, not thinking anything would come of it. To his surprise, however, three weeks later he received notice that he’d been selected. And now here he was, on a train to Utah and into trouble that God only knew.

CHAPTER 4

Patton’s train streaked across the remainder of the Great Basin towards Salt Lake City. He was sitting at a small desk, his head resting against the cool window. The moon was full and it cast a radiant light onto the white desert salt and sand, making it glow a ghostly white. He was mesmerized by the landscape—almost hypnotized. The last several hours had been a whirlwind of emotion and it was beginning to catch up to him, currently in the form of a headache. Part of it, he realized, was a shadow of guilt. Getting to know Jennifer wasn’t wrong, he knew, but the memory of his wife children was still very strong. Perhaps meeting Jennifer was the cause of his melancholy.

A surge of adrenaline rushed through him and for the first time in years he was beginning to feel alive. Not just feel alive, but wanting to be alive. And it wasn’t just Jennifer, he now realized, it was this new adventure. Maybe he was running away from his past, but maybe he was running towards something. The years of guilt and self-inflicted torment suddenly seemed to melt away. He wasn’t the one who had veered into her lane, causing her to maneuver onto the shoulder, to break through the barrier and run off the cliff. He hadn’t killed his family. They were taken away from him.

No, he thought, shaking his head at himself. There was nothing he could have done and there was nothing he could do now. He felt a pinprick of absolution that spread through his entire body, as if an invisible set of shackles been removed. The feeling was so tangible that he raised his wrists to his face. He was crying now and was beginning to fog his window. Embarrassed, he looked around his sleeper to make sure he was alone. He chuckled at himself and wiped at his cheeks. This was his first moment of real healing since his family’s death. Eventually he fell asleep. He wasn’t accustomed to all of this emotion and it finally caught up with him. And for the first time in years, he had a dreamless, peaceful sleep.

Patton’s train reached Salt Lake City before daybreak. He and his fellow passengers were supposed to exit the train again. Supposedly hotel rooms had been arranged for them. He met Jennifer in the dining car for coffee and they headed off together. The two held hands, walking east. The sun broke over the jagged peaks and without a word they both stopped. It was a breathtaking sight. They looked at one another with wonder.

“Wow,” was all Jennifer could say, pushing her arm through Patton’s. The morning air was cold, but they stood and gazed at the scene for a few moments.

“Do you think the mountains are like this where we’re going?” he asked.

“I sure hope so.”

They continued east towards the tall buildings downtown. They asked a passerby where their hotel was located. The person told them it was two blocks south of the temple. When they asked the woman what the Temple was she gave them a ‘you’ve got to be kidding me’ look and walked on. They looked at each other in amused shock at the woman’s response. They walked another block and saw a diner where they decided to eat breakfast. While eating they ascertained where the Temple was—one of its six spires was actually visible from where they sat—and decided to go see it when they were done eating.

After breakfast they returned to the street. It was turning out to be a bright and beautiful morning. The air was warming and they were getting more and more excited to be in this beautiful city with time to burn. Both of them had heard about Mormons, but neither of them knew much about them or their beliefs. They were pleasantly surprised with the simple, yet beautiful grounds that surrounded the Temple. The Mormon Church owned two large downtown city blocks and had connected them with a courtyard full of fountains and flowerbeds.

They took a tour of the grounds with a young woman who was in business dress and wearing a black nametag that said “Sister Black,” who they later found out was a missionary. She showed them the exterior of the Temple building itself, with its spires going impossibly high into the bright blue sky. The gigantic, awe-inspiring structure had taken forty years to complete, she told them, and it was built with granite that was literally cut out of the mountains by hand, transported by oxcart, and laid together using the most primitive of tools.

They walked through the courtyard and enjoyed the peaceful surroundings. By the time they were done, it was time for lunch. They went back to their hotel to eat, change, and call around to see if there was a way to get up to the mountains. To their delight, their hotel had a shuttle that took skiers up to the many resorts.

As beautiful as the mountains had been from the valley floor, the city looked even more beautiful from the mountains. It stretched out across the entire valley, to the mountains both southwards and westwards. The Great Salt Lake ate up the northwest part of the valley, extending north and west. Neither of them skied, but they found a terrace at the lodge that provided the breathtaking view. They alternated between drinking wine, coffee, and water. They talked to some of the skiers who were taking a midday break and even stayed late enough for dinner. It was nice to be off the train, stationary, without feeling the rush or push of a clock.

The next day they would finally arrive at their new town and their new homes.

The glossy black Chevrolet Tahoe exited from Interstate-84 and made its way north on a two-lane highway towards the Idaho border. A large man in a dark suit was driving. With his mirrored sunglasses and unsmiling face, he resembled a Secret Service agent, but he was an employee of Insight Resources. Riding shotgun, however, was an actual Secret Service agent, tasked with protecting the U.S. Senator that was riding in the back. Riding next to the senator was Ryan Wiley, the Insight Resources’ vice president of logistics. He had a large laptop that displayed a map of the newly-built town to which they were driving.

“These hills to the left,” Wiley said to the Senator, pointing out the window, “mark the southern border of the town.”

The SUV began to slow. The senator turned his attention from the map to the large gate the bisected the highway.

“What’s this here?” the Senator asked, pointing at the arched gate.

“This is the security gate that monitors who comes and goes.”

“How exactly does it do that?”

The SUV came to a stop. A security guard motioned for the driver to roll down the window. The driver flashed a badge and the guard motioned for him to drive on.

“Well, there’s a couple of ways,” Wiley replied, waving to the security guard as they passed. “In the middle is a sensor that reads the license plates as they go by and there are cameras that record the cars that come in and go out.”

The Senator nodded. “So people can come and go as they please?”

“Pretty much,” Wiley answered. “And people from the outside can come in. However, there are pretty strict rules about people from the outside.”

“Like?” the Senator asked, impatiently gesturing for him to continue.

“Outsiders can come in and work and shop and go to restaurants. But they can’t stay overnight without signing a waiver.”

The Senator nodded then a potential problem occurred to him.

“What if a single person from the outside meets someone living here and they want to get married?”

Wiley grinned sheepishly.

“We haven’t really hammered out those details. I don’t anticipate that happening much so I don’t think it would skew the results the eggheads are looking for.”

“Okay.”

The Senator gazed out his window to the west. Rising above the highway was a small mountain range. The foothills were mostly barren, spotted with sagebrush. He felt the vehicle ascend, level out, and then descend again.

“Up ahead, Senator, is the lake,” Wiley mentioned, pointing to their left.

“I understand this was dredged out and made deeper,” the Senator said, somewhat interested now. As a young man he’d worked on a dredging crew. The job helped him pay his way through college.

“Yep,” Wiley replied. “That was a tricky piece of engineering but it’s a nice feature and it will serve as the town’s water supply. It’s deep enough for boats and wave runners and that type of thing too.”

The Senator merely nodded his approval. He was only on this fact-finding mission because his majority leader wanted a report. He’d sponsored the bill but only as a favor. The whole experiment project and money allocated were rolled into a much larger spending bill. No one had actually read the damn thing, especially after it was combined with other pork projects. The Senator thought the whole thing was a joke but he owed the leader a favor so here he was. Besides, he was promised a week away from home to do some skiing.

The road turned slightly to the northeast, ascending into the foothills above the valley floor. From the new elevation the entire valley came into view. The Senator was impressed. To the east were the Samaria Mountains, by far the tallest in the valley. The smaller Hansel Mountains created the valley’s western border. To the north was a string of low-lying hills. It truly was a breathtaking view and the senator finally understood why this location was chosen.

“Most of the town is located on the Idaho side of the border. The better part of the lake is on the Utah side,” Wiley remarked, still playing tour guide. “We made this highway we’re on now circle the entire valley. As you can probably see, the two main streets extend out and meet the highway.”

“And why did you do that exactly?” the Senator asked.

“We’re not sure how long this will go on so we made room for growth. Other than that it gives the people places to go. They won’t be so anxious to leave.”

“And what would be wrong with that?”

Wiley shared a knowing glance with the driver in the rearview mirror.

“The whole point is for the scientists to collect the data they need. If people keep leaving I guess the results won’t be as reliable. At least that’s what I’ve been told.”

The Senator grunted. He didn’t really care either way but he had to put as many details into his report as possible.

“But they can leave right? I mean, at least temporarily?” he asked after a long pause.

“Yes. They can leave for a total of a few weeks per year to visit family and what not, but for the most part we want them here. Buying. Spending. Interacting.”

“Any how many people again?”

“Just over thirty thousand, counting children. Like we told your aides everyone will receive the equivalent of a half-million dollars. They can start a business or keep the money and work for other people. It’s all up to them.”

“And this cost how much?”

Wiley smiled at this one.

“Don’t ask me, Senator. You’re the one who wrote the bill remember?”

The senator smiled for the first time. He hadn’t even read the bill, let alone written it. Some group wrote it and passed it along to his staff. He’d just put his name on it and had pushed it through. His reward was given the form of donations, dummied to look like the money had come from hundreds of individuals. It had actually come from one donor who wanted to see this experiment happen for one reason or another.

And that was how the bill was passed and the money was appropriated without any solid guarantees of the people’s personal welfare—no one had actually read the entire bill. Years later, when he would read about what happened here, he felt some regret. However, by then, he’d been voted out of office.

A stream of buses, carrying experiment participants, made its way from Salt Lake City north to the Pocatello Valley. The buses were interspersed with semi-trucks, which were hired to carry people’s personal belongings to their new homes. Although the new town was largely stocked with necessary goods, participants were allowed to bring a limited amount of personal belongings with them.

When the buses rolled into the yet-to-be-named town, the people were stunned at its near perfection. The buildings and streets were laid out beautifully. Some of the downtown buildings were old-fashioned, but they were obviously new builds. Many residents separately observed that their new town looked like a movie set. It looked, beautiful, but the town was fully functional. It only needed people to make it complete.

Patton had seen pictures of his new home, but no picture, no matter how well taken, could do it justice. His simple, yet beautiful farmhouse sat on the eastern ridge overlooking the lake. The few personal possessions he’d brought were in one large suitcase and a large duffel bag. Everything else had either been provided for, using his credits, or had already been shipped from home. He stood there, gazing at his new home, his bags at his feet. A lump formed in his throat and he blinked back tears. “I wish you could see this,” he whispered to his now-departed wife. He pictured himself and his wife watching their children running and playing in the fenced front yard.

Two hot tears poured down his face but he didn’t wipe them. Eventually, he let the emotion flow and he started sobbing. He knew that by leaving California he was also leaving his family behind. In time, he hoped that the memory of them would remain but that the pain of their loss would fade. Patton gazed around one last time, almost hearing his children’s laughter. Hanging his head, he reached down, grabbed his luggage, and made his way into his new home.

Mike Wilson was exhausted. He had traveled the world and had been on twelve hour flights before, but he had never been this tired. When he reached his house he didn’t even unpack. He merely undressed before collapsing onto his bed where he slept through the rest of the day, through the night, and almost until the noon the next day.

When he finally woke, he had a nasty, throbbing headache—worse than any hangover he’d ever experienced. He rooted through his bags and found his Goody’s headache powder. He emptied two of the small paper packets into a glass of water, stirred it with a finger, and downed the concoction in three messy swallows. He turned on the large flat screen TV and surfed channels until his headache was almost gone. After an hour of this, Mike showered, dressed, and drove into town and find something to eat. He eventually found a Japanese restaurant where he ordered a steak and ate it while downing two beers and watching spring training baseball games on TV. After that he went to the large warehouse, similar to Costco, and bought all the things he would need for his house.

Mike left the store and soon found himself in his truck, driving and exploring. He drove west from the city center and connected onto the highway that went all the way around the lake. The highway went up onto a chain of hills and ridges, weaving back and forth, climbing and then descending. He made it around the southern tip of the lake and started back towards town. He remembered that one of his business partners was supposed to have property in the area. As he searched his mind for the man’s name, he zoomed past a large, arching sign that read “Larsen Farms.”

“That’s it!” he said triumphantly as he sped past. He brought his gigantic diesel pickup to a stop, checked oncoming traffic, made a hasty U-turn, and then turned onto the gravel driveway. He passed through the arched sign and climbed a small rise. As he descended back down towards the farmhouse, the view of the farm opened up before him. It looked to be something out of a Norman Rockwell painting. It was the ideal American country home. Regaining his senses, he drove on towards the small but well-built farmhouse.

To the left of the farmhouse and set back a hundred feet or so was a large red barn trimmed in white. Parked inside the barn was a gleaming, green and yellow John Deere tractor. Mike smiled and shook his head jealously. As a kid growing up in the Texas panhandle, he’d been fascinated by John Deere, mostly because his grandpa had owned one and he would often take Mike on long rides around his large ranch.

To the left of the barn was a large hay barn, open to the elements on all sides but with a beautifully sloped metal roof. This structure also brought back memories of he and his brothers and cousins playing cops and robbers in and around their grandfather’s hay. Sometimes they would make little tunnels and caves in the hay, like they were hunkering down in a real gangsters’ hideout. Mike pulled into the large gravel turnabout and parked. Letting his engine run, he stepped out into the crisp, fresh air. He did a full-body stretch. He walked around the farm, taking in the rest of his surroundings, enjoying the nostalgia that this place was conjuring within him.

Besides the small lawn that surrounded the farmhouse, the property was left mostly natural, without much landscaping. The prairie grass was sagging and was still a dull brown color. There were patches of sagebrush, but there were no wildflowers as of yet. Mike tried to imagine how beautiful the place would be in full bloom. Seeing the place made him envious of the owner of this property and he began to wish that he’d done the same. Perhaps, he thought, when their business was up and running and bringing in money he would be able to build something similar.

While lost in his mental reverie, a large pickup truck pulled onto the drive and headed up towards where he was standing. Suddenly feeling awkward about his intrusion, and not knowing what else to do, Mike waved to the driver. The driver turned and said something to a passenger and then returned the wave. The driver parked the large diesel and he and the passenger got out and walked towards him.

“Can I help you?” asked the man, who was of average height and had an athletic looking build.

Mike walked towards him and extended his hand. “Sorry, I’m sure this is strange of me to just come up to your place, but I didn’t know you wouldn’t be home,” he said with an awkward smile. “Mike Wilson,” he said, extending his hand.

“Patton,” the man said, taking his hand and shaking it and releasing it. “Patton Larsen.” A pensive look brushed Patton’s face, but then the dawn of recognition came. “Mike Wilson. I recognize that name,” he said, smiling now.

Mike cleared his throat. “Yeah,” he said, “I’m part of the corporation. I’m doing the cattle ranching.”

“That’s right,” Patton said, his smile growing wider. “So what brings you up here?”

Mike gazed around the property again and took in a deep breath of the clean air and said, “I was just driving around the lake and I saw your sign. I and recognized the name so I thought I’d stop in and see who I’m going to be dealing with.”

Patton nodded.

“This place is gorgeous,” Mike said, taking off his wide-brimmed hat and wiping his forehead.

Just then Patton’s companion approached.

“Sorry Mike,” he said, pointing towards the approaching woman. “This is my friend Jennifer.”

Jennifer gave him wide smile and offered her hand. Mike shook it, fighting the urge to leer at her. He couldn’t help but envy Patton yet again because the woman was gorgeous. He smiled and tipped his hat to her in return.

“Hi Jennifer.”

“Hi,” she said, a little shyly.

“Well Mike, do you have dinner plans?” Patton asked, patting him on the shoulder.

Mike shook his head and said, “No, I don’t. I ate lunch downtown.”

“Well, why don’t you stay for a while,” Patton said with a warm smile. “We’re going to grill up some steaks and drink some beers and admire the view.”

“Sounds great,” Mike said, grateful at the invitation. Suddenly, a sheepish grin crossed his face. “First,” he said awkwardly, “is there any way I could take your John Deere for a spin?”

Patton and Jennifer looked at each and then they both looked at Mike. They simultaneously burst out laughing.

Patting his new friend on the back, Patton said, “Sure Mike. Sure you can.”

CHAPTER 5

The large town hall meeting had been planned from the beginning. The experiment’s organizers thought it would be wise to start with a forum where questions could be asked and answered. All of the main researchers were present, as were representatives from the company that had been hired to select the experiment’s participants.

A large amphitheater was built specifically for this meeting, which the community could utilize for other events. Since the meeting was set to start at dusk, many citizens elected to stay at home, put their children to bed, and watch from the comfort of their own homes via an intranet hookup. The chilly air was another deterrent from many people attending in person.

Patton and Jennifer decided to attend the meeting in person and had a good view of the stage. As they settled into their seats they were both amazed when they took in their surroundings. These people were their new neighbors. They were all embarking on something together. This gave them both a sense of belonging and togetherness. Patton could see both apprehension and excitement on the faces on the people around him and the way his stomach felt at that moment, he knew he must have looked the same way to others.

On the stage was a beautifully carved wooden lectern, with seven chairs spaced evenly behind it. Serving as a backdrop to the stage was a gigantic screen, which was currently blank. Outside of a few members of a technical crew, the stage was empty.

“Nervous?” Jennifer asked.

“A little, I guess,” he said, blowing into his hands to warm them. “Nervous. Excited. Ready to get started. What about you?”

She leaned into him and clenched at his arm, smiling up at him affectionately and said, “Me too.”

After a few more minutes of waiting and making small talk, a trumpet blast came over the sound system and the house lights went out. The screen changed to a white background with the words “Welcome to MICROCOSM” in black. The letters began pulsating, in sync with the music, which became a full-fledged symphony. As the music played, and as the audience stood and started to applaud, seven people walked out onto the stage. Some raised their arms and waved to greet the crowd. Others just walked over and stood in front of their seats. At first the whole production seemed hokey and contrived, but Patton couldn’t help but get caught up in the excitement. He found himself cheering along with everyone else.

A tall and distinguished looking man approached the lectern. His nervous smile could be seen on the giant screen behind him. The man waved to the still-applauding crowd and tried to get them to take their seats. After a few more moments, the noise quieted and the people in the crowd finally took their seats.

“Wow! Thank you!” he said, turning to his colleagues on the stand. Apparently they hadn’t been expecting such an enthusiastic greeting. “Thank you and welcome!” he said, exultantly raising his arms in the air and the crowd began to cheer again.

The crowd finally quieted and the man stepped to the microphone again.

“My name is Doctor Eric Chandler. I’m a professor of sociology at the University of Virginia.” A small contingent of Virginians in the audience cheered. He acknowledged their impromptu greeting with a wave. He continued, saying, “I know that you have had plenty of time to go through the information on our website.”

The man’s face disappeared and was replaced by the words “www.microcosm.org” in gigantic-sized letters that filled up half of the screen. The letters then dissipated and were replaced again by the familiar main page of the website, a site that most people in the crowd had visited many times.

“As you’ll see,” Dr. Chandler said, “this is our website.” While operating a mouse on the lectern, a cursor flashed over a link that said, “Welcome to the Experiment.” The cursor disappeared and the new page was loaded. A list of bullet points appeared. At the top of the list was the word “Agenda.” The first bullet point was “Introductions.”

“Like I said, my name is Dr. Eric Chandler. Also on the stage with me are—” he said, turning back to his colleagues behind him. “—Dr. Alicia Woodley. She teaches Anthropology at Georgia Tech University.” She was a pretty African-American woman in her mid-forties. She stood and waved to the crowd then retook her seat.

“Next to her is Dr. Eli Greenstein. He is an emeritus professor of economics from Columbia.” Dr. Greenstein was a tall, distinguished looking man in his seventies. He wore a three-piece suit and looked to Patton to be the quintessential college professor. He bowed slightly and smiled and then retook his seat.

“Next to Dr. Greenstein there is Dr. Bryan Ester. He teaches political science close to here, down at Brigham Young University in Provo, Utah.” Dr. Ester was the youngest person on stage. He had a round, friendly face and was dressed much more casually than the rest of his colleagues. He waved and smiled shyly and quickly took his seat again.

“Here now, is Doctor Emily Nguyen-Baker. She is a professor of psychology from Stanford.” Dr. Baker was a petite, pretty middle-aged woman, who, to Patton, appeared to be part Asian. She bounced from her seat and waved enthusiastically at the crowd.

“And the last of our scientists is Doctor Tyrelle Robinson. He teaches geography at the University of Arizona.” Dr. Robinson was a tall African American man with salt and pepper hair and beard. He sported thick glasses and seemed to be bored by the proceedings, neither waving nor bowing.

“Now,” Dr. Chandler said, returning to the agenda, “The last person on the stage is Michael Varner. He is the CEO of Insight Resource, a consulting firm based out of Los Angeles, California. His company was hired by the group that is funding this experiment. Dr. Varner recruited myself and my colleagues here on this stage. I would now like to turn over the microphone to Mike, who may have answers to whatever questions you may have. Mike?”

Dr. Varner stood and shook Dr. Chandler’s hand brusquely and then stepped the lectern. He adjusted the microphone and waited for the polite but subdued applause to dissipate.

Once the crowd quieted down, Dr. Varner began, saying, “first of all, I’d like to thank Dr. Chandler.” He turned and nodded cordially to the master of ceremonies.

Facing the crowd again, Dr. Varner said, “my name is Mike Varner and like Dr. Chandler said I’m the CEO of Insight Resource out of Los Angeles. I’m here to answer any question that you might have at this time.

“If you’re at home via the intranet, you can click the link that says question slash comment and you can involve yourself in this discussion. If you’re here in the crowd you will find that in between every few seats there is a microphone. To get into the queue, push the green button beside the microphone. When it blinks, that means you are next. When the button lights up and stays solid you know that is your turn. A spotlight above me will shine down on you so I can see where you are. Also, you’ll appear here split screen alongside me on the large screen behind me.

“So,” he said, clasping his hands together casually, “what questions do you have?”

There was a long pause while the queue filled up. Finally, a spotlight flashed through the darkening night and moved up and to the speaker’s left. An African-American man appeared on the screen.

“Yes sir. Oh wait, I’m sorry,” Dr. Varner said. “Before you begin, let’s try to keep questions and comments brief so we can involve more people. All of these questions, answers, comments and responses will be posted on the home website for you all to revisit when needed. Furthermore, all unanswered questions will be answered by our technicians in Los Angeles. You will be able to see those on our website in the coming days. Okay sorry about that interruption. Sir?” he said, gesturing towards the first questioner.

“Hi, my name is Randall Johnson. I was a police officer in Auburn, Alabama and I was wondering… I know there are police and fire services, but will there be a government at some point?”

“I don’t know, will there?” Dr. Varner asked. There was scattered laughter, but he hadn’t meant it as a joke.

After a pause he said, “Sorry sir, but what I say is true. We set up this experiment, we chose the people, and we built the infrastructure. We built your businesses and transported in the cars and everything, but this experiment, and everything that happens here is up to you. Will you set up a government? That is totally up to you as a new community. The purpose of this experiment is to put you all on equal footing financially and see what happens. After that, though, it’s out of our hands and in yours.”

The lights moved again, this time landing on a man all the way across the arena from Patton and Jennifer. A middle-aged man stood and asked, “you say that it is up to us. Do you mean that everything is up to us? Is that safe? Is this a good idea?”

Dr. Varner strode forward towards the front of the stage, his chin in his hand.

“I didn’t mean to sound coy with my last answer. All of us have lived in a country where the laws are well established and where the government is well established. Of course it’s our assumption that some form of government would and should be formed, but we did not want to dictate that to you. I wouldn’t want a government, that we formed, influence how things go in the experiment. Does that answer your question?” The questioner appeared on the big screen again. He nodded and took his seat.

Dr. Chandler, the man who had introduced all of the scientists, stepped up to the lectern and said, “I would just like to interject here. Everything that we’ve done has been thoroughly examined by dozens of social scientists from all disciplines. Believe me, folks, we wouldn’t do anything without lots of careful consideration. To do otherwise would be very irresponsible of us.”

Dr. Varner nodded and said, “I agree. This has been a very thorough process. Very carefully thought out at every phase. Next question?”

The meeting went on and it began to amaze Patton just how dumb some people were. Question after question, people asked if the town would have this or that and the man on stage would stand there with the same expression, the same posture, and answer “I don’t know, will you?”

After another hour of this, Dr. Varner declared that he would be taking no more questions in that setting but any further questions, as announced before, would be answered by email and posted on microcosm.org. Patton and Jennifer left well before this point, though, not wanting to get caught in what was going to be a huge traffic jam. They were in Patton’s truck, driving through the dark, quiet streets. Jennifer’s neighborhood reminded Patton of the cookie-cutter subdivision he and his wife had moved into after he’d gotten his first real job. He turned into her driveway and parked.

Despite spending so much time with Jennifer, Patton was feeling butterflies. He exhaled deeply and his cold fingers began to shake. She could tell he was nervous, but she worked to keep her composure, not wanting to embarrass him.

After an awkward moment she asked him, “What’s wrong?”

Her voice caught him off-guard and he turned his eyes to meet hers. Not wanting to betray his nervousness, he shrugged and shook his head as if to say “nothing.” But he was a terrible liar. She reached over and grabbed his hands. The sudden intimacy forced him to look at her again.

“Patton, what’s wrong?”

He closed his eyes and exhaled again. Suddenly he smiled and then chuckled.

“I don’t know.”

She laughed at him, but not in a mocking way.

“Well,” she said in a smoky, seductive voice that she had never used with him, “why don’t you come in so we can talk about it?”

He felt a chill and then a tingling sensation up his spine.

“Sure,” he croaked.

He knew what his going inside her house would lead to. He was ready. At least he thought he was ready. Jennifer was the first woman he’d been alone with after his wife’s death. After a moment he decided he was ready for what he knew was going to happen.

The man’s haggard face was illuminated by the large bank of monitors. He looked like a person transitioning from human to zombie. Empty coffee cups and junk food wrappers were strewn all over the workstation. The operator was so concentrated on his work that he didn’t hear the two men approach.

“Carl.”

No response.

“Hey Carl!”

Still no response. Annoyed, the tall, lean Nate Ransom tapped the distracted man on the shoulder.

“Carl!”

Startled, Carl nearly jumped out of his seat. He twirled around in his office chair. The movement caused coffee cups and fast food wrappers to fall to the floor.

“Carl, this here is Alex. He’s going to be working with you on finishing up the system.”

Carl, never one for developing personal relationships, nodded a greeting and turned back around in his chair.

“Carl.”

No response.

“Carl!”

“Yes?” he mumbled, turning back around.

“I wasn’t finished.”

Carl adjusted his thick-framed glasses and stared at Ransom.

“Sorry Nate, been working on this all night. I’m just about finished.”

All three admired the wall full of gigantic monitors, each displaying two-by-three inch images relayed to the system by cameras that were placed all throughout the town. It was early and the streets were nearly empty so there wasn’t much going on. However, the sheer number of cameras was impressive.

“How many cameras are there?” Alex asked Nate, not wanting to get Carl’s attention again. Nate looked up and the ceiling, trying to calculate the number in his head.

“Four thousand, seven hundred and fifty two,” Carl interjected before Nate could finish his calculation.

Alex whistled. “Why so many?”

“It was part of the deal with the government. Before they let us do this we had to ensure the people’s safety. This was our solution,” Nate said, gesturing towards the monitors.

Alex exhaled loudly. “How will a bunch of cameras ensure the people’s safety?”

Nate shrugged. “Beats me. But they accepted it as our solution so what can ya do?”

Alex smiled at that. Though late to the game—he’d just recently been hired by Insight Resource—he was beginning to feel like part of the whole machine. He was a recent graduate from the University of Utah in systems technology and with a young family, had looked for work locally so he could keep his wife close to her parents.

“I couldn’t do it,” Alex said, almost to himself.

“Do what?” Nate asked, confused.

“Live in a place where I knew I was being watched twenty-four, seven.”

“These people don’t know about the cameras. That was never part of the contract. We just have this for our monitoring purposes and to satisfy the government.”

“What do you think they’ll do when they find out?” Alex asked with wide, almost shocked eyes.

“I don’t know. We don’t plan on them ever finding out. That’s kind of the point, isn’t it?”

Alex looked at the monitors again. Carl was mumbling something and tapping a mechanical pencil on the desk.

“I don’t know,” Alex said. “I guess I never thought about what the point might be.”

“That’s good,” Nate said. “It’s not for us to reason why.”

“What?” Alex replied, confused.

“It’s a quote. Anyway, we just monitor what’s going on and report it to the people in charge. All those PhDs are the ones who care what actually happens. They’re in it for the money and glory.”

“Money?” Alex asked, not seeing the connection.

“Yeah. They take the results from this and publish books and papers and all that. There’s lots of money to be had here. Hey Carl?”

No response.

Nate looked at Alex. His head was about to explode.

“Carl!”

“Yes?”

“Did we get the entrance monitoring station up and running?”

Carl looked out the window at the breaking dawn. He’d been awake for almost forty-eight hours now and his brain wasn’t working at its usual capacity. Finally he said, “Yeah, they called me last night. Then that senator showed up and was asking about it.

Nate rolled his eyes.

“Senator?” Alex asked.

Nate shook his head and nearly shuddered at the memory. The senator had come into the office, walking into rooms and offices like he owned the place. Trailed by his army of security guards, of course.

“Yeah. Senator what’s-his-name,” Nate said, snapping his fingers in hopes that it would jog his memory. “Anyway, he sponsored the bill that paid for all this. You wouldn’t believe the final cost.”

“What was the final cost?” Alex asked.

Nate just stared at him.

“Come on,” Alex pleaded after a moment.

“Let’s just say I now know why our country is so far in debt, because of BS like this.” Nate shrugged again. “But let’s be grateful. This BS is why we have jobs.”

Alex nodded gratefully at that. They both looked back up at the monitors. They were going paying him a lot of money to help keep a security system up and running. He’d landed the job just in time too—his house was about to go into foreclosure. He was going to have to live with his wife’s parents. It was his turn to almost shudder.

“There’s a rumor going around, though…” Nate said, shaking Alex from his nightmare living situation. “That this is being paid for by two individuals. I guess one is a huge liberal and the other guy is some Republican from somewhere or other.”

“Yeah, but why would they throw all that money away like this?”

Nate shrugged and said, “I dunno. Why do people do anything?” he asked and then something occurred to him.

“Oh, Carl,” Nate said, needing to ask him about another problem. When he turned to look at him, Carl was fast asleep, a small puddle of drool already formed on his desk.

“Forget it,” he said, throwing up his hands in frustration and the two of them walked away.

The term “spy” seemed a tad melodramatic, but it was fitting of the position of the people hired to perform the function. They would live and work alongside everyone else in the community, but Insight Resource would be paying them an additional salary. One of these spies was Bao An Hahn. He definitely didn’t feel like James Bond, chasing babes and bad guys, that is. In fact, his cover was to fill and service vending machines. Nothing could be less glamorous in the young man’s mind.

Bao was a second generation American, the son of a South Vietnamese Army lieutenant who managed to escape the country during the last few days of the war. Bao’s father met his mother in Oakland, where many Vietnamese refugees had settled. The two went on to marry and raise five children, of which Bao was the youngest. As with most Vietnamese families who migrated to the United States, the children were driven and forced to succeed in school. There were two doctors, a lawyer, an accountant and then there was Bao. It wasn’t as if Bao was a failure, it was just that he never thought he needed to attend college to do what he wanted to do.

The Hahn family purchased their first computer when Bao was two years old, and almost from the time that he could speak he could operate the machine as well as anyone in his family. By the time Bao was five he was writing simple code. By the time he was ten, he had a new computer of his own. By the time he was twelve, he’d created several video games. His skills soon led to trouble, however. Like most people with his programming abilities, Bao’s curiosity led him to hacking. At first it was innocent pranks, but when he broke into the system that controlled electronic freeway signs and started posting nasty messages, the police began to take notice.

Bao ended up completing his GED from juvenile detention before he turned seventeen years old, and under the strict control of his parents, started working for local businesses in the community. He wrote software programs to make the businesses run more efficiently and created websites for them. Once his parents’ control over him slackened, however, Bao started getting into trouble again. During a thirty-day stint in county jail, Bao’s situation was brought to the attention of the Sheriff. Instead of continuing the cycle of letting Bao out of jail just to see him return, the Sheriff recruited him to help him track down and arrest other hackers.

With a new challenge, and a nice steady paycheck, Bao no longer had the desire to create problems. As he was entering his third year with the Sheriff’s office, an interesting offer came to him from a company called Insight Resource, Inc. They wanted him to help them set up a computerized surveillance system for a town they were building in Utah for some kind of experiment. Bao readily accepted the offer.

After working for Insight for just a couple weeks, the rumors of the company inserting spies into the experiment started to circulate. Bao wondered why such a thing was even necessary, but he immediately applied. He would get to design his own house, drive his dream car, and still receive his salary on top of what he earned by filling vending machines. During the interview process he learned that spies were necessary to report developments. Were the people getting along? Was crime beginning to increase? What was economic activity like? These were the questions that only people inside the experiment could truly answer. That was the official answer. The real reason, Bao’s supervisor claimed, was to cover Insight Resource’s ass in case things went awry. If their people noticed anything screwy going on, Insight could then report it to the scientists and wash their hands of any liability. Either way, Bao was excited to get out of the office.

Bao was just finishing up a report about his initial impressions about the town. He conjectured about what might happen to the subjects. He proofread the report one last time, attached it to an email, and clicked send. Such reports from Bao, and dozens of other spies, were summarized, analyzed, and combined into one concise report that went to Insight executives. Once analyzed by people at that level, another report was written and sent to the PhDs who were in charge of the experiment.

Now that things were underway, it was the spies and their reports that would inform organizers of how things were going. They wouldn’t be the eyes and ears of the operation—there were thousands of cameras and microphones for that—but they would be the human element that computers can’t simulate. Although the spies would do their job, much to Bao’s chagrin, and the disappointment of almost the entire spy network, the things they reported would go largely unheeded.

The two large suitcases and the large Army duffle bag were lined up in a perfect row. He’d been a messy child, but Travis Snedley was now a neat freak. His time in the Army had something to do with that, but it was mostly due to his impatience with disorder. Ironically, he was about to embark on a new adventure where his main purpose would be to create disorder.

Travis was tall, nearly six-feet-two, and was solidly built. He was also a very graceful athlete, which was probably a result of his childhood ballet classes. While growing up, his classmates called him a “ballet pussy,” but no one would dare call him that now out of fear of ending up in a hospital. Not that he was a particularly vicious person—he didn’t just strike out violently at random—he just didn’t suffer rude or stupid people anymore.

He looked at his watch and unconsciously tapped his foot on the wooden floor. The cab driver was going to be late. And if the cab was late, he was going to be late to the airport. He pulled his phone out of his pocket and called the taxi dispatcher again, who assured him that the driver was close. Travis ended the call and exhaled loudly. He wouldn’t let this ruin his day. He promised himself he wasn’t going to lose control today.

Perhaps Travis was so serene because he’d grown up in an upscale Miami suburb. His father had been a holistic doctor to the stars and his mother was a world-renowned nutritionist who pioneered what became one of the most successful paleo diets in the world. Travis obviously never lacked for anything, except perhaps for some attention and guidance. When he acted out, his parents had him medicated. To fill his time, they put him in ballet and gymnastics and other things that led to his being teased unmercifully by his classmates.

He came to forgive them for this, however, when he was able to utilize that training to become a highly skilled martial artist. Despite his devotion for martial arts, Travis’s passion was politics. During his freshman year at Columbia, he heard about a program that was sponsored by a very secret, but very progressive group. They were recruiting young people, directly out of high school and without any type of criminal record, to join the military. The group wanted people who could qualify for military intelligence jobs so that they could gain access to top secret military intelligence.

Much to his parents’ dismay, Travis joined the Army during what was supposed to be his second semester at the prestigious Ivy League School. After basic training, Travis attended Advanced Individual Training in Arizona. He then joined a counterintelligence unit that was eventually deployed to Afghanistan. While there, under the relative freedom of combat, Travis accessed some highly secret files and downloaded them onto a thumb drive. A security breach was detected and Travis was caught and court-martialed. Before being caught, Travis was able to upload the information to Wikileaks, a website devoted to revealing secret documents of governments throughout the world.

Travis was caught red-handed, but his father’s lawyer was able get off with a slap on the wrist. He was sent to Fort Leavenworth, Kansas, where he ended up serving just over a year of hard labor. To him, however, it had all been worth it. Giving a year of his life was nothing. He was a hero to radicals and anarchists all over the world, especially in the United States. Upon returning to his parents’ home in Florida to rest and recuperate, Travis was contacted by a group back in New York. One of his friends from Columbia had given them his name. They wanted him to lead a group that would infiltrate a social experiment out west. They would fly to Salt Lake City, would be driven to a desolate area across the mountains from where the experiment was to take place.

Now, here he was, about to embark on the journey of a lifetime. If only the damn cab would come.

PART TWO

PUTTING DOWN STAKES

CHAPTER 6

The morning after the meeting at the amphitheater brought many changes. The weather had been unseasonably warm, but the morning air was brisk with a threat of snow. The bigger change was within the town itself. No longer did the large Insight Resource tents dominate the north side of Main Street. It was as if the circus had been in town and was suddenly gone the next morning. The stores, restaurants, and venues that had been run by the experiment’s organizers people were now gone without a trace. People must have been up all night working, packing, and transporting many of the new residents thought. In their place were the shops, stores, and restaurants run by participants of the experiment. Those business owners would now provide the goods and services for the townspeople.

Despite the cool weather, the downtown area was packed with pedestrian traffic all day. Bars, restaurants and movie theaters were packed. People had money and everyone wanted to get into town to see and be seen. A long line of cars waited outside the town’s security gate, waiting to be granted entrance. Several people from the surrounding areas were either coming into work jobs already obtained, or to seek employment opportunities. Though many residents chose to start their own businesses with their credits, many did not, figuring they would work for others.

Some economics researchers feared these residents were taking a risk by trusting that times would always be good. They were particularly worried about the many residents that were treating their newfound wealth as retirement. Many bought large, lavish homes, expensive cars, but did not provide themselves a way to perpetuate their wealth. If they overspent their credits they would eventually run out. This was further problematic because there was no way out of the experiment without paying the penalty. It was something researchers would keep their eyes on.

Anna had a severe case of cabin fever. Patty and Mark weren’t set to reach town until for a few weeks. Until then she was going to get out, meet people, and get a sense of her new neighbors. Fed up with watching TV getting high, Anna decided to get out and eat dinner, and maybe see a movie.

Now that the humdrum of life had closed in on her, her sense of purpose for participating in the experiment had faded somewhat. Perhaps, she thought, the desire to create a better society had come from her friends and not from within herself. This idea depressed her. All her life Anna had thought of herself as a leader, a moving force among moving forces. Now, she realized, maybe she was just a fraud. Maybe she was, and had always been, all talk and no action.

While lost in her thoughts, she passed an older man on the sidewalk. He seemed to be staring at her chest with a lustful glint in his eyes.

‘Pervert,’ she thought as she continued to walk downtown. She was accustomed to having men staring at her. The leering stares, especially from people she didn’t find attractive, were unsettling. After walking a few more steps, she heard someone from behind her say, “Hey!”

Anna knew it was the old man. She ignored him and increased her pace. He called again and this time she turned around. While walking towards her he pointed at her midsection.

“I like your shirt.”

She looked down, not remembering which shirt she had put on before leaving her apartment. The shirt had a picture of a bearded man wearing a beret.

“Uh, thanks,” she said, still wary of the old man’s motives.

“I mean, I really like your shirt. I actually met him once.”

“Wow,” Anna replied, honestly impressed.

She performed a mental calculation. The man on her shirt died in the late 60s or early 70s. If the guy here was old enough to remember meeting him he must be… she couldn’t think anymore. Anna had gotten high again just before leaving her apartment.

“He was an interesting guy,” the old man went on, almost reverently. “He was so calm and quiet in private, so unlike his public persona.”

She must have been giving him a confused look because now he was laughing at her.

“Do you know who this is on your shirt?”

Just to be sure she looked down at it again. The shirt was Army green and fit tightly on her wondrous form.

“Of course,” she said, a little offended. “It’s Che.”

The old man nodded with pleasure and said, “Yes, and do you know who he was?”

“Castro’s right hand man.”

“And why do you wear the shirt?”

A pause. Anna didn’t know she was being tested, but she also didn’t want to appear ignorant. She shrugged, revealing herself to be more the twenty-something girl that she was.

“My friend gave it to me. Che was a true believer. He believed in social justice.”

“Yes he did. He really did,” the man said, nodding again.

“Where are you headed off to tonight?” he asked hopefully.

Her impulse was to come up with an excuse to stonewall him, but he seemed harmless.

“I was on my way to see a movie,” she said.

“Yeah? Is there anything good playing?” he said, anxious to remain in her company, but not wanting to push his luck.

“I don’t know. I thought I’d go look and see.”

He got brave and reached out and touched her shoulder. “How about this… let me buy you dinner. I think we have lots to talk about,” he said, grinning at her the way a fox would at a hen.

She subtly moved away from his touch, but accepted his invitation. They made their way down the sidewalk together towards the heart of downtown. After walking a few blocks they found an Italian place that had good breadsticks and great wine. He finally introduced himself to her as Charlie Henry and did most of the talking through dinner. Unbeknownst to the much older, much more experienced man, young Anna Radinski was playing a game of her own. She was feeling him out, making sure that he was the right person to help her.

And it wasn’t as if Anna wasn’t having a good time. Charlie was distinguished looking. He was thin and had piercing grey eyes and a nice smile.

“So what was Castro like?” she asked, leaning towards him.

“He was a loudmouth who thought the world revolved around him,” Charlie said, looking off into space, trying to conjure up his favorite image of the old Cuban despot. “He had such charisma, though. Just imagine Bill Clinton with a beard.”

Anna tried to drum up the image in her mind but couldn’t and the whole mental exercise caused her to giggle. He was glad to see her loosening up. To keep her going, though, he filled her wine glass.

“What are you laughing about?” he asked her, smiling roguishly. He was clearly smitten with her and wasn’t afraid to let her know.

She took a bite of her pasta and didn’t answer. She looked at him, radiating sexuality, even though that wasn’t her intent. She attracted men, and some women for that matter. He reached out and rubbed the back of her neck. She allowed the touch but finally moved away. She’d had an enjoyable evening but that didn’t mean she was ready to go to bed with him.

“Eww, that was creepy,” Jennifer said, snickering behind her wine glass. “He’s old enough to be her grandfather.”

Patton was not amused and his expression perplexed her. Here, she thought they had been having a wonderful dinner, but Patton was just sitting there, stone-faced. She nudged him and he looked at her. He made a weak attempt at a smile but she wasn’t convinced.

“Didn’t you think that was creepy?”

He nodded and took a sip of wine.

“Would you like to share your feelings on the matter or are you going to just sit there and nod like a bobble head?”

That broke through his hard exterior and he smiled sincerely.

“It was creepy but for a different reason,” he said, taking a bite of his linguini.

“And that is?” she said, rolling her eyes at him. While they hadn’t known each other very long, they’d spent enough time together that she was becoming accustomed to his moods.

“The crap he was talking about. That old jerk really believed in that stuff. I could tell.”

She gave him a disbelieving look.

“I’m serious. Most of the time, when you hear people talking about that crap, they’re just trying to sound intellectual. This guy didn’t sound that way to me. He sounded like he really believed it.”

Jennifer leaned back and smiled at him. Patton hadn’t drunk all that much wine. He had a beer before they left the house but that was hours earlier. He was genuinely upset.

“I think you need to just relax and have fun,” she said, trying to keep the mood light. “Our movie starts pretty soon. Why don’t we get our check and go?”

But Patton just sat there with the same tight expression on his face, seeming to ignore her.

“A man like that in a place like this,” he said, almost to himself, shaking his head in disgust. “That’s not good. There’s a serpent in the garden,” he said.

Jennifer giggled at what sounded like a bad movie line. Their server walked by and Jennifer asked for their check.

“If I didn’t know better I’d say you were drunk. Look, he’s probably spouting off to impress that girl. You could tell he was trying to jump her bones. I mean, you pulled that same stuff on me.”

He jerked at that and she was glad to finally have his attention. When he met her gaze she laughed. Instead of matching her levity, his eyes bored into hers.

“I’m not kidding. People like him are dangerous. And did you see the shirt she was wearing?”

Jennifer shook her head. She was already tired of this conversation and was beginning to get tired of Patton’s crabby mood.

“No, I didn’t notice her shirt, Patton,” she said, not trying to hide her annoyance with him.

“Well, I’d bet you a hundred dollars you would’ve noticed if she’d been wearing an Adolf Hitler shirt.”

“Yeah, I guess,” she agreed grudgingly.

“That’s the thing… Hitler is seen as a bad guy and rightly so. Most people still think that Stalin was bad. But they don’t bat an eye at a Che shirt or a Mao shirt. Hell, Mao killed more people than Hitler and Stalin combined. Liberals love to make folk heroes out of monsters.”

She folded her arms and shook her head.

“What?” he asked innocently.

She reached for her water glass but reconsidered. With him in this mood, she was going to need more alcohol. He could tell she wanted to respond so he said nothing.

“You. You’re always right aren’t you.”

He’d been married long enough to know that this type of statement was a trap. He started to answer and then reconsidered. He wasn’t going to win this one.

“I grew up in California and my parents were liberal,” she continued. “I don’t recall them ever saying anything about Mao or anything like that.”

Patton nodded. “I’m sure they didn’t,” he replied calmly, “but that was your own, personal experience. If you take the broader view of history you’ll see that American leftists have always defended leftist dictators.”

Jennifer glared at him and took another drink of wine.

“My parents just thought the government should help the poor. I don’t think that’s wrong.”

Patton readjusted himself in his seat and took a long drink from his own wine glass. “Helping the poor isn’t bad,” he said calmly. “I just think that taking money from one person and giving it to another person is wrong. The biggest problem is that our government has decided what they think is a livable salary and then steal everything else.”

“Steal?”

“Yeah. Steal. Look,” he said, pointing to a table across the restaurant to where a young couple was sitting. “If I went over to that guy and took a hundred dollars out of that guy’s wallet and gave it to someone else, wouldn’t that be stealing?”

“Yeah, but—”

“—But what?” he said, cutting her off. “Is it or isn’t it?”

She was silent for a moment. Finally she replied, “Yes. I guess technically you’re right. But the government has to have funds to operate.”

Patton nodded and wiped his mouth with his napkin.

“Yes, but don’t you think they’ve gone too far?”

She didn’t respond.

“The founding fathers wouldn’t even recognize their Constitution anymore,” Patton continued. “It’s been almost completely forgotten.”

“How would you fix it then? Let those families starve?”

That offended him and he let it show.

“Of course not,” he said, trying to retain his calm. “Look at what Ronald Reagan did. He created an economy where everyone can go out and improve their own lives through work.”

Jennifer’s rolled her eyes—a natural reaction to the name “Reagan.”

“People had jobs with lower inflation and taxes. They could keep their own money and invest, save, or spend it how they wanted. But liberals will have you believe that making money is evil.”

Jennifer had to admit he was right about this, but was exaggerating. She had no response.

“Of course not. I haven’t told you this, but before I came here I was retired.”

Her eyes went wide with surprise at that.

“Retired?” she said, “You’re only forty-five.”

He smiled, pleased with himself.

“Yeah,” he said casually, “but I made good money. I worked hard. I was good at what I did. I invested that money and made millions.”

“Millions? And you left all that money behind?”

He sat back and shrugged and a humble expression.

“No,” he said, almost whispering. “After my family died, and I was selected for this experiment, I gave it to my family and I gave a bunch to charity.”

She looked at him, wanting to ask if he was serious, but could tell he was.

“Wow,” was all she could muster.

“I spent a lot of money too. I didn’t just save and invest. But what’s wrong with that? I earned it right? We had very low stress lives. We gave lots of money away to charity. We were able to travel and spend money and put a lot back into the economy. Why is that such a bad thing?”

She shrugged.

“I mean, when I bought a car, the car dealer had money to pay his employees. I had a big house, but I paid a construction company who paid its employees. Those employees went out into the community and spent money. Liberals know what creates a good economy but they choose not to let it happen. They just want people to be dependent on them and their programs.”

“Do you honestly believe that they’re out to purposely destroy the economy? Why would they do that?”

He leaned back to give his full stomach some relief.

“I know it’s harsh to say, but yes. They want to do things their own way, even if it doesn’t work. Reagan didn’t do anything to raise poverty rates or homelessness. That’s all propaganda. That success continued on through the Bushes and Clinton.”

“What about Obama?” she asked with a smirk, knowing what his reaction would be.

Patton sniffed derisively.

“Don’t get me started.”

Knowing of only one way to get Patton off of his rant, she scooted close to him and placed her hand high up on his thigh. She leaned into him and whispered, “Oh, I’ll get you started. Let’s get out of here.”

His face was suddenly red, his breathing suddenly shallow. He cleared his throat and said “Good idea. Let’s go.”

Michael Varner gazed around in wonder. The streets, the buildings, the sidewalks—they were all here because of him. Everything that all of these people were currently enjoying had come from inside his brain. He looked over at his wife and smiled. Their interlocked hands swung back and forth as they had when they were first dating.

The one thing that amazed Varner the most was that no one had recognized him. Just the night before his face was plastered on the big screen that over ten thousand people could see. Here on the busy streets, though, not a single person stopped him or even looked at him with familiarity.

Varner grew up on a corn farm in Iowa. By the time he graduated from high school, he was tired of corn and dirt and tractors. Instead of studying agriculture at college, as his father and brother had, he wanted to become an architect. It was during his second year of school when he started to think bigger. He was accepted into the city planning program and quickly found that planning and logistics were his passion.

Varner’s first job out of college was with the planning commission in Des Moines. He quickly found there was little room for movement. He started applying for jobs in larger cities and landed a job in Chicago. He enjoyed the challenge, but eventually realized that he was better suited for self employment.

Varner took a leap of faith, quit his job, and started a planning and logistics firm—a company that eventually grew and morphed into Insight Resource. Landing the government contract for this experiment was a coup, but it wasn’t without its challenges. The biggest of which was dealing with the federal government, especially the smarmy senator who’d sponsored the bill. Luckily his visit had been brief. Better yet, Varner got the sense that the senator was just going through the motions. He would likely never get involved in anything to do with this experiment.

Despite the palpable excitement of the new town and the experiment, Varner intermittently felt dread. The worst part was his inability to describe the cause. Perhaps it was the fact that there was no governmental structures or institutions to keep the society in order. Perhaps it was the fact that private entities were charged with the public safety—the police, fire, and healthcare. These were things the researchers, particularly the political scientists, insisted on. They wanted to see the fabled “state of nature” in action.

Most predicted that a government would quickly be established. This was a good thing in Varner’s mind—he’d wanted to set up a government, patterned after the US Constitution. However, someone had made the point, and it was a good one, that the type of government they set up would bias outcomes in the experiment. Varner argued, and vehemently at that, that there had to be some middle ground. Everyone agreed with this in theory, but no one could explain what it should be. The consensus was to err on the side of liberty.

Varner looked at his wife again. She smiled at him and then barked at their children to stay close to them. He returned the smile and then laughed at his son, who made a wise crack at his wife. He was suddenly glad that he was an outside observer of this experiment. In order to retain a strong presence, he’d rented a house in Ogden, Utah, which was about fifty miles away. The company’s meetings would be held there. The monitoring equipment, including all of the servers, were in Ogden also. If there were any serious problems, Varner could be in the Pocatello Valley in an hour.

That sense of dread came and went. Right now he was focused on the positive and having fun with his family. However, as he looked around at all the people, he couldn’t help but feel that if something went wrong, it was going to go very wrong.

CHAPTER 7

The weather finally broke for good around the first of May. All through April, Mother Nature was schizophrenic—cold rain and high winds, then snow, then a week of spring-like weather. Farmers couldn’t plant their crops and be confident they would survive. However, there were thundershowers by the second week May, the surest sign that spring had finally arrived.

With the warmer weather, people began to get out and enjoy their new surroundings. As May turned to June, boats and wave runners filled the lake. Many residents went out camping, fishing, and hiking. For many, this new life was like a permanent vacation, a holiday dream. Most had more money than ever before and they wanted to experience leisure. Many of the spies, including Bao, noticed the people’s loose spending and started making negative predictions in their reports.

To the office of Dr. Michael Varner/Insight Resource Inc.

Re: Report for May/Microcosm

Note: This report is the summary report of field reports.

Field Agents: All field agents in place and reporting.

Summary: May has seen mostly normal activity among residents. Weather has been continually warm, which has helped increase economic and social activity. As of yet there has been no date set to give the community an official name, although that movement has gained some momentum. Still no organized political activity. There is too much prosperity for there to be too much dissatisfaction. One watcher has predicted, however, that as the weather turns hot, crime will rise and that there will be enough fires to call for the formation of organized police and fire stations. He predicts that this will eventually germinate into a full-blown movement to form a government. I have attached his full report.

Criminal: Two men have been arrested and detained by Blue Creek Security Services for domestic violence (assault against their spouses—one was called in by the woman herself; the other was called in by a neighbor). There is no governmental body to adjudicate these matters so it is believed that these men will be released soon. Also, drunken and disorderly conduct continues to disrupt the ‘night life’. One man was badly injured during a fight: he was treated by local doctors but was transported to Ogden, Utah for further treatment.

Social: The general sense of ‘newness’ has begun to wear and residents have begun to consider this as their home rather than some large social-scientific experiment. Evidence of this can be seen through less ‘hits’ on the microcosm.org website. People are asking less questions and generally visiting the site less.

Political: There is the mindset among some that formation of a government is an eventuality and the question is what type of government be formed. Some residents are nervous to have so much freedom and lack of structure to their lives. They are used to traditional American life where much of life is centered on governmental activity.

Economic: Economic activity has continued to be heavy, although there is some worry that people are over-spending and that they will soon have to sell items, or mortgage their homes at some point. As a forerunner of this, two banks have formed and are offering mortgage products. Although no one has, of yet, mortgaged their home, many watchers feel that this is inevitable, considering the sheer amount of money that has been spent by some.

Psychological: No serious negative psychological behaviors as yet.

To celebrate their already-succeeding venture, Patton, Frank and Mike chartered a fishing boat and planned a long day fishing, telling stories, and drinking beer. The owner of the fishing shop was a friendly, middle-aged man named Tom Parry. He was a retired oncologist from the Cleveland area. Tom had set himself up for year-round activity. During the warmer part of the year he would charter his boat for fishing and waterskiing. During winter, he was going to rent snowmobiles and cross-country ski equipment. The three partners complimented him, telling him it was bold for him to depart from what he knew.

Tom enjoyed his work of helping people overcome disease, but was worn out by the whiny, non-paying patients, the governmental regulations, and the constant need to upgrade equipment. They were glad Tom had made the change. He already knew the lake and was a master fisherman. The fish weren’t biting, but the beer was cold and Mike had enough stories, including the one about the Saudi who’d put a hit out on him, to keep them laughing all day.

During one of these trips they settled on name “West Valley, Inc.” for their corporation. As things progressed they began to acquire more businesses, including a greenhouse, two farmers who grew cash crops, and a water purifying and processing company. They started making contact with farmers outside of the experiment to obtain more hard goods and equipment. Outside money began to flow in and they began to establish a huge market share for their products.

Of the three, Frank’s canning operation was the first business to take off. Mike’s business started to pick up later in June when he was able to sell some of his cattle to outside ranchers. In turn, he was able to open up to a new market and add to his herd at a much faster pace than he’d originally anticipated. The town’s demand for fresh meat and vegetables exceeded their ability to meet at first, but once they were able to meet the demand, the money started pouring in.

Patton’s growth wasn’t as vigorous as his partners’, but he knew he had the most growth potential because it wasn’t as specialized. This would eventually allow him to expand if things went right. Patton reached the pinnacle of success in his old life making lethal and non-lethal weapons out of plastics and composites, but he knew that his new business had even more potential than that. No matter whose business became the most successful, they were in it together. Today, the three enjoyed their success and they could only see things getting better.

The biggest problem they all experienced was the inability to find enough good employees to keep up with their growth and desire to expand. Of the many people who chose to not start a business, they found that a solid work ethic was lacking. Patton assumed this was partially due to modern American society, but he also understood that many of these people now had money—likely for the first time in their lives. They didn’t need to work, at least not yet.

Patton could foresee the time when people would run out of money and would need to scramble to find work. This was a gamble, because he also understood that you can’t assume that times will always be good. The only saving grace was there was no government, which meant there was no taxation, regulation, or subsidization. Things would be good economically for a time, but when—not if—a government was established, prosperity would be erratic.

For now, though, Patton and his partners were going to forge ahead and grow and expand their business as much as possible. Then, they all figured, they would be able to ride out the storm when it came.

Anna was out with Charlie again, this time at a bar. Halfway through her second drink, a man much younger and more attractive than her date, entered the bar. She noticed him walk in and once he got settled, he definitely noticed her in return. He had dirty blond hair, crystal blue eyes, and a cocky grin that made her melt. She held him in rapt attention. She was wearing a slinky black dress that Charlie had bought her. Her hair and makeup were flawless. She looked like a starlet on the red carpet. She was easily the most attractive woman in the bar and she knew it.

The most attractive man in the bar was staring at her. His lustful gaze was making her dizzy. She suddenly regretted having gone to bed with the old goat. She had to be careful with her flirting, not wanting Charlie to notice. Luckily, Charlie’s back was to the younger man and he couldn’t see the game they were playing. At times he noticed that she wasn’t paying attention to him. He looked behind him to see what Anna was staring at. By the time he was able to turn around, however, the younger man was feigning disinterest.

Suddenly, the man at the bar motioned with his head towards the restrooms. She nervously cleared her throat and began to gather up her things.

“Charlie? Sorry, but I need to use the restroom.”

Charlie nodded, mindlessly rubbing his index finger around the rim of his glass. Anna stood and nearly tripped over her chair. She caught herself and made her way towards the single doorway that led to the restrooms. She glanced both ways as she walked, trying to find him in the packed bar. Suddenly she felt someone nudging her from behind. She knew who it was and her knees began to feel weak. She fought the urge to stop and turn around, but she kept walking. When they reached the opening, he pushed her into a family restroom and shut the door behind them.

“Where you going?” he asked her, grinning and smelling like heaven.

She trembled at his touch.

“Ladies room,” she muttered.

He leaned into her seductively, nearly brushing his lips against her bare neck.

“I thought I’d get you away from that old guy. I didn’t know you could bring your grandfather with you to the experiment,” he said, that intoxicating grin returning to his face.

She chuckled lightly and looked away shyly.

“He’s not my grandfather,” she said, trying to find her confidence.

He pushed her against the wall and whispered, “So sorry.”

His warm breath on her ear and neck made her tingle from the ends of her hair to her toenails.

“Sorry for what?”

“Anyway,” he said, rubbing her thin, muscular shoulders, “what’s your name and where do you live?”

“Anna… and… um… why do you want to know that?”

“Because,” he said, leaning in again, not letting her pull away from him, “after he drops you off I want to come over.”

She swallowed nervously, still not quite able to meet his intense gaze. She reached into her bag and pulled out a slip of paper, and after fumbling some more, she found a pen. She quickly jotted down her address and phone number and handed it to him. He grabbed it and looked at it.

“I have the sudden desire to get home,” she said, smiling. “Feels like I’m coming down with something.”

“That’s what I like to hear,” the man said, smiling. “See you in an hour or so huh?”

She nodded and he left her there, trying to find her breath, and trying to think of an excuse for Charlie to take her home early.

It was crazy but he was going to do it. Maybe not tonight, but Pattom was going to do it soon.

“What are you thinking?” Jennifer asked him.

“What? Oh… nothing. Sorry, I guess I’m just kinda spacey,” he said, lying.

He wanted to use the opening to ask her to marry him, but the moment passed and he chickened out again.

“You’ve been working too hard,” she said, concerned. “I hardly see you anymore.”

That wasn’t true and she knew it, he thought. She was just being overly emotional. Hell, she was practically living at his house now. She had as many clothes in his spare bedroom closet as she had in her own house.

“Maybe,” he said, still scheming on how he would ask her.

“What’s wrong with you, Pat?”

He didn’t object to her calling him that, another sign that he should ask her the question that had been nagging him for three days. Only his mother and dead wife had ever called him by that name.

“Nothing Honey, I promise,” he said unconvincingly.

She gave him the ‘you’re full of crap’ look then stood and walked into the kitchen. “You want a beer?” she yelled.

“Yes, thank you!” he yelled to her in the other room.

She returned with his beer and plopped down onto the couch. She flipped through channels while he continued to stare off into space. After another half hour she set the remote down, grabbed her keys from off the coffee table, and started to stand.

He stood and gently grabbed her wrist. “Where you going?” he asked, worried that she was angry.

“What do you care?” she said, trying to pull away from his grip. “You haven’t said more than two words to me all night. I’m going home.”

He let go of her and walked over to stand in between her and door.

“I’m sorry,” he said, almost frantic. “I… okay… screw it… I’ll just tell you. Just sit back down okay?”

She looked at him and a nervous look came into her eyes. She swallowed hard, thinking the worst. Was he cheating? Had he lost interest in her? She hesitated, prompting him to push her down onto the couch by her shoulders. For the first time all night, he turned to her and looked into her eyes.

“I don’t know how to even start,” he said, looking away again.

She smiled at his nervousness, but still felt the dread that he was about to end their relationship.

“It’s crazy and I don’t know if you think it’s crazy, but it’s crazy how easy it is to be with you. How easy it is to talk to you. I haven’t felt like this since—”

“—Your wife died,” she interjected, emotion creeping into her voice.

His face went flush. It was the first time these emotions had been put into words. “Yeah,” he said sullenly, looking away again, feeling a small stab of that old, familiar pain. “I mean… that’s not a bad thing. It’s a good thing.”

“It’s a good thing but… you’re scared?” she asked, finally having the courage to face the end. “You’re not sure where this is going so you have to break up with me?” She shuddered and a tear ran down her cheek. He reached over and gently wiped it away.

“What? No, no, no,” he said, trying to regain control of the conversation. “Okay, sorry Honey. I’m not making myself clear here.”

“You think?” she said sarcastically through her tears and then chuckled softly.

Patton laughed and the awful tension that had been building was broken. He slid off the couch and moved to in front of her. He pulled her legs apart and wedged between them.

“What I’m trying to say is… will you marry me?”

The dread was gone but it took a second for the question to register. When it did, her eyes bulged and she lunged into his arms.

“Yes! I will!” she said, squeezing his neck like a vice.

They stayed there like that for a long moment, holding each other tightly. The hug turned into a kiss, their tears mingling on their cheeks. She pulled away and simultaneously laughed and cried, the way only women can do. When her shock passed, they talked about general details of their upcoming wedding—where, when, who would they would invite. Eventually their excitement faded and they fell asleep on Patton’s couch in each other’s arms.

CHAPTER 8

Anna had felt euphoria like this before, but it had often been drug induced. She was happy now because her friends Mark and Patty were finally there, sleeping in her guest bedroom. She watched them sleep from the doorway, much like a new mother would look upon her sleeping newborn.

The two had quite a journey, driving much of the way in Patty’s broken down Chevy Cavalier. The car finally died just west of Cheyenne, Wyoming. A friend wired them money to buy bus tickets to Salt Lake City. That part of their journey took them the better part of two days. Once they reached Utah they rode public transit as far north as Ogden, Utah, which was the end of the line. From that point they still had over thirty miles to go.

The two stayed in Ogden for a few days, panhandling and bumming cigarettes and money. They were able to find someone to drive them the rest of the way to their new home. They reached the border of experiment-owned territory at dusk and decided to camp there. They woke up the next morning, tired, cold and hungry, and much in need of a shower. They discarded most of their supplies in order to lighten their load and made their way on foot. By mid afternoon they reached civilization, passing some outlying ranches and farms. When they saw the lake, and then the town itself, they stopped and hugged each other in relief. Their long journey was over.

They made their way into town, staying hidden at a small city park until Anna could pick them up. Their reunion was full of hugs and tears and then Anna drove them to her apartment where they ate and showered. After they fell asleep, Anna gathered up all of their things and threw them in the trash. She had already purchased new clothes for them. Anna wanted to wake them so they catch up, but they were exhausted. She would let them sleep.

She picked up her phone and dialed Charlie’s number, who picked up after the third ring.

“Hello Anna,” he said hoarsely. He sounded like he’d just woken up from a nap.

“Hi Charlie.”

“So are we on for tonight, Doll? You’re not calling to cancel on me are you?”

She cringed. The image of his sweaty face filled her mind and the sound of his panting and grunting filled her ears. She didn’t want to remember the nights she had given into him. She had plans and she needed his help, but she couldn’t go on with their personal relationship. She would have to break that off later. She had more important things to worry about.

“That’s why I’m calling,” she said hesitantly, not wanting to set him off. “Mark and Patty are here. We all need to get together. How about tomorrow night?” she asked, cringing.

“Right,” he said, not able to mask the disappointment in his voice.

“They just got here yesterday and they’re really worn out,” she said, beginning to feel angry at Charlie’s selfishness.

“Excellent,” Charlie said, taking a more business-like tone now.

“Yeah,” she said, suddenly thinking about the man from the restaurant, suddenly having the desire to call him. Charlie was rambling about something or other, but Anna hadn’t heard him.

“Anna?”

“Yes, sorry Charlie. I’m here.”

“As I was saying,” he said, obviously annoyed, “once we start this, there’s no turning back. Are you ready for that?”

“Yes,” she said, hoping she sounded more certain than she felt. She didn’t exactly know what he’d meant by “no turning back” but she was all in.

“Are your friends ready for that?” he asked soberly. Charlie thought, these people being as young and inexperienced as they were, weren’t prepared to help create the necessary level of chaos. No bother. Either they would adjust or they would be out. He needed serious people who had the will to do what it would take.

“Charlie, we’ve been ready for this for our whole lives,” Anna said, hoping she sounded convincing.

Charlie paused, letting her commitment hang in the air. After a few moments he said, “I hope so. There’s much to do.”

While Anna’s friends struggled their way to their destination, Travis Snedley and company traveled in luxury. All eight of them were flown into Salt Lake City, first class at someone’s expense. Only one pair had come together. The rest had traveled separately.

The party spent three nights and two days in the city’s finest hotel. They ate at the best restaurants. They were driven up into the mountain resort town of Park City to escape the heat and be pampered at a luxury day spa. They figured it was the least Charlie—or whoever it was bankrolling their operation –could do for them before they descended into the chaos that they themselves were planning to create.

Besides Travis there were four other men and three women. One of the men had been in Travis’s Army unit. One of the men and one of the women had been members of the Earth Liberation Front—a radical environmental movement that tried to injure or kill as punishment for damaging the planet. The others had no particular training. They merely had the will and the right ideology.

After enjoying the fineries of the Wasatch Front, the party of eight was driven to a large farm on the Utah, Idaho border, across the Samaria Mountains from the Pocatello Valley. The next morning they all donned large rucksacks and made their way into the foothills above the farm. They hiked all that day, sometimes using the lightly graveled road, but often marching through the dry prairie grass and sagebrush. The party reached the summit late in the afternoon, descending halfway down the west slope of the Samarias, careful to remain out of view from the valley floor. It was a silly precaution, they knew. No one would be paying attention to this part of the valley. Even if they did, they would likely think they were residents of the town on a quick backpacking trip.

They camped at dusk and rose with the sun. After a breakfast of granola bars, trail mix, and bottled water they made their way to the valley floor. As instructed, they holed up in a small grove of quaking aspens. Almost exactly on time, a large Chevy Suburban pulled off the highway and drove down towards their makeshift camp. The sunglassed driver exited the vehicle and opened the back hatch. He looked up and down the highway. There was no traffic, so he made his way to the stand of trees where he was greeted by Travis.

“You made it,” the driver said.

Travis looked back at his small company and then back towards the highway.

“Yeah. No problem. Amanda twisted her ankle pretty good but we wrapped it.” Travis scouted traffic on the highway then said, “Let’s go. We’re ready.”

The driver nodded. He walked over to the girl with the wrapped ankle and gestured for her rucksack. They loaded their packs in the Suburban and made their way into town. Charlie greeted them gregariously. He fed them a large, catered lunch and while Travis’s companions napped through afternoon, he and Charlie discussed their plans.

“When do we move?” Travis asked, reclining in a large stuffed chair. He swirled a glass mindlessly in his hand, the ice clinking.

“Soon.”

Travis glared at him. Charlie raised his hands submissively.

“I’m sorry Travis, I don’t know the exact day.”

Travis nodded, but wasn’t entirely assuaged.

“The important thing,” Charlie continued, “is to make sure we have enough people. Anna’s friends are here, but to be honest… I don’t know if they’re up to this.”

Travis nodded. He understood that most people’s anger didn’t automatically translate into action. Violence was a skill, he knew. Not that the acts themselves were difficult to perform, but the will was difficult to develop.

“You got anyone else in the pipeline?” Travis asked, not confident in Charlie’s answer.

Charlie nodded.

“Good, because I don’t want to wait too long. The longer we’re here, the easier it will be for someone to notice us.”

“I don’t want to wait either,” Charlie said, standing and stretching. “I’m already starting to hate these people.”

Carl was at the tail end of another 12 hour shift. His pallid face and drawn eyes reflected the images from the bank of monitors he watched. As usual, Nate and Alex had approached him unaware, but didn’t immediately try to get his attention.

“See here?” Nate said, pushing onto a thumbnail-sized video on one of the main monitors. While still pressing he scrolled his finger to the left and the footage played alone on a large monitor.

Alex watched, the second knuckle of his index finger in between his teeth.

“Roll it back,” Alex said, gesturing with his other hand.

Nate scrolled the timeline of the video to the beginning and stepped back so they could both see.

“Eight backpackers… coming down from the east… then they make their way to that clump of trees,” Nate said, as if Alex needed the play by play.

Alex grunted. He rewound the video again.

“Why would they hide in those trees?” Alex asked after watching the video again.

Nate shrugged.

“Carl, is this footage from the drone?” Nate asked.

Surprisingly, Carl turned to them once his name was spoken. He seemed unusually lucid.

“That’s one of the drones, yeah,” Carl replied. “I sent another one out but they were gone by the time it got out there.”

“Hmm,” Nate replied. “Did we get a license plate scan?”

Carl shuffled through some papers and eventually found what he was looking for.

“Yep. Registered too… Patrick… Mick… Mick… something.”

Nate grabbed the paper from Carl and read the name.

“McNulty.”

“Yeah, whatever,” Carl said, returning his attention to the monitors.

“Anyway,” Nate said, speaking to Alex, “it’s an approved vehicle. Suspicious behavior, yes. But probably just a bunch of people doing exactly what it looks like. Backpacking.”

Alex was skeptical but he let it go.

“Just write up the report as usual,” Nate instructed him. “Attach both the doctors and the government liaison. Tell them there was some suspicious activity in the Northeast quadrant. We’ll send the footage if they want it, but I doubt they will.”

Alex nodded, went into his cubicle, and got to work writing the report. The report, which ended up being just over a page single spaced, went largely unread. No one from either the researchers or the government asked for more information. So, for the most part, Charlie’s invasion went largely unnoticed.

Charlie Henry, the elder statesman, held the room in rapt attention. Looking at this roomful of young people took him back to his glory days—their passion, their youth and their vigor invigorated him in turn. He felt twenty-one again.

“And what is the main thing we are looking for here? The thing that America has lacked for so long?”

A few of the “students” looked at each other, none of them wanting to speak up and give the wrong answer. Before the silence became awkward, Anna, ever the teacher’s pet, spoke up.

“Social justice,” she said, looking around at her colleagues shyly.

Charlie looked down at her with a sense of fatherly pride in his eyes.

“Very good, Anna,” Charlie said imperiously. “And what is the significance of social justice?”

Everyone just looked over at Anna this time. She bit her lip and gave her mentor a timid look. To her, the term “social justice” had always been that—a term. It was one of those postmodernist terms that could mean anything and everything. To her, though, it meant that the state ran things and met the needs of its citizens.

“Now,” Charlie said, gaining more confidence in his recruits as this meeting progressed, “what is the most important thing we remember as we go forward?”

The vague question caused many hands to shoot up. Charlie pointed at a strongly built young man with longish hair.

“The most important thing is to keep the big picture in mind. Progress is slow, especially when we’re dealing with Neanderthals,” he said proudly, looking around the room and grinning.

“Good point,” Charlie said, smiling. He pointed at the next hand, which belonged to Anna’s friend Mark.

“Adding to what Brandon said, progress is slow and sometimes it seems like you’re stuck. When that happens you have to keep moving forward. If one tactic doesn’t work, you go to the next one on the list.”

“Very true,” Charlie said. “That’s what Alinsky taught us. Anyway, what are we missing here? What hasn’t been mentioned?”

He peered around the room, meeting every person’s gaze. He looked at the long couch where Travis and Andrew were sitting. They both got heavily involved in the Occupy Wall Street movement and then with Antifa. He was very confident in himself, Anna could see, and Charlie had already told her that Travis was going to be his pit bull. Andrew was smaller than Travis and was clean-cut. Underneath his calm demeanor, however, Anna could tell that Andrew was not averse to violence.

Travis raised his hand.

“Yes?” Charlie said imperiously.

“You try new tactics, but you have to keep a constant attack from all angles. Armies try to attack from the front, the sides and the air. We need to do the same from the streets, in the media, behind the scenes.”

Charlie gazed at him pensively and then seemed to stare off into space. He was sad to say that he’d never made that connection, but it was a brilliant one.

“I like that,” Charlie said, almost purring. “You’re right. We need to keep the pressure on from all angles.”

The discussion went on for over an hour and Charlie looked over his new army in admiration. What they lacked in experience they made up for with passion. He would have traded them for a platoon of Weather Underground members, but this crew was willing, he could see. Sometimes merely having the will was enough, especially when the opposition didn’t know they were about to be at war.

CHAPTER 9

Summer weather arrived in June. The mountains and hills were full of hikers and backpackers. The lake was full of boats and jet skis. One enterprising man started a baseball league for youth. Following suit, other groups formed leagues for other sports, including soccer, softball, and golf. There were even baseball and softball leagues for adults. It was during this period that a group of citizens held a contest to name the town. Residents of all ages submitted suggestions and an essay to explain why their name should be used. Ultimately, “Blue Creek” was selected. A twelve-year-old boy studied the history of the area and found it once had this name.

Some townspeople raised money to buy signs with the town’s name emblazoned on it. A large metal arch, which spanned its way over three lanes of traffic on Main Street, was erected. A large ribbon-cutting ceremony was held to commemorate the event. A high school marching band from a nearby town performed and there was a community picnic at the city park that included games and activities. To cap the festivities, a concert was held that night at the amphitheater, along with a large fireworks show that was sponsored by several local businesses.

A strong sense of community had begun do develop among the citizens. As June ended the good feeling remained, but there were a few incidents were cause for concern. A man was attacked by two people while stopped at a stoplight. Witnesses told the private security company who investigated the incident that the attackers pulled the man out of his car, beat him and robbed him at gunpoint. However, the witnesses weren’t able to sufficiently describe the attackers so no arrests were made. It seemed to be an isolated incident, but just days later, two businesses were burglarized and vandalized. Some money was stolen, but worse was the fact that the store owners didn’t have any insurance to pay for the damage.

These incidents, which were reported in the local newspapers and on the TV news, prompted concerned citizens to talk about forming a police force. It would have the authority to investigate crime and punish the guilty. However, it was the night of the Fourth of July celebration that increased talk of a government and an official, organized police force.

The celebrations during the day transpired without incident. There was a large parade and then a carnival at the city park with games, rides, and concerts. At dusk, the townspeople gathered to watch what was promised to be an even bigger fireworks show than the month before. The show lived up to its billing, but about halfway through, a light up in the hills north of town caught everyone’s attention.

The fires started as small, disconnected patches, but began to merge together to form a recognizable symbol. Once the fire reached its fever pitch, a gigantic anarchy sign—the capital “A” with a circle drawn around its edges—could be seen from all over town. Several citizens raced up the hill to try to find the culprits, but the streets were packed with people and cars. By the time the first people reached the fire, there was no sign of the perpetrators. No real physical damage had been done, but whoever started the fire had inflicted major damage on the fragile psyche of the new community. Some residents demanded that authorities from the outside be called in to investigate.

In the days and weeks following the incident, a debate on whether a government should be formed seemed to consume the local newspapers and online bloggers. Many of the stories were planted by Charlie Henry’s group, which was behind all of the incidents in the first place. Time passed and the heated debate died down, however, the pro-government movement regained traction after a family was murdered while they slept.

After a few more break-ins, including one where a would-be burglar was caught and shot by the home’s owner, it was decided that forming a government with a legitimate police force was the only way to ensure the safety and security of the people and their property. No one knew exactly what form it would take, but fear and hopelessness made much of the citizenry feel like they had no other choice.

The summer evening was warm but comfortable and the dry air hung like a blanket around those who milled around on Main Street. The setting sun cast pastel hues on the soft clouds. The downtown area was buzzing with activity. It was a perfect night for the people to get out and enjoy. Patton and Jennifer were among the many taking advantage of the beautiful evening. They walked along the sidewalk, swinging their clasped fingers back and forth like young lovers.

Occasionally, one or other would stop in front of a shop to gaze at the wares. Twice, Jennifer made Patton stop in front of clothing stores that had ‘cute‘ window displays. Luckily for his wallet, all of the stores were closed. In retaliation, he made her stop in front of a gun store. She laughed at the childish way he guarded his eyes with his hands so he could see all of the big boy’s toys that were inside.

“Oh!” he said, admiring the store’s new Barrett .50 caliber sniper rifle. “That’s the one!”

She yanked at his arm but he didn’t budge. He looked down at the sign that announced the store’s hours and yes they would be open the next day at nine in the morning.

“Oh no you don’t,” she said, half laughing, half annoyed, tugging at him like a harried mother with a wayward child.

He stood erect and looked at her. “What do you mean ‘Oh no you don’t’? If I want to get it I’ll damn well get it,” he said defiantly, but with humor in his eyes.

“You want to put that monstrous gun in the same house as our children?” she said, her hands defiantly on her hips.

He shrugged boyishly. “If I bought it, it would be for our children. Look at what happened to…” he began saying but stopped, knowing that she wouldn’t want to hear about the family that was killed. Neither of them knew the victims, but the crime had hit them both very hard.

She raised her hand to stop him, conceding defeat and said, “I can see why you want a gun but does it have to be so big? I mean, wouldn’t a simple handgun do just as well?”

She had a point, he admitted to himself, but he wanted that rifle.

“I’ll get a handgun too,” he said, laughed, and began to walk away with a triumphant grin. She followed him, trying not to pay attention to him, just blindly moving forward. Suddenly, she crashed into him and nearly fell. She hadn’t noticed that he’d stopped dead in his tracks.

“What the hell!” she said, grabbing onto his arm so she wouldn’t fall to the concrete. When she regained her balance, she realized that he was looking at a bright orange poster with black print. It read:

ATTENTION!

Blue Creek Residents

In light of the recent murders and other recent crimes, there will be a meeting at the Amphitheater Friday night to discuss the formation of a government. If you cannot attend in person, please click the “Government Webinar” link on the intranet site to watch the event live.

August 1st, 6 P.M., Amphitheater

Jennifer read the poster and then looked at Patton, who had that look on his face. He didn’t look angry. He looked… determined. Knowing Patton as well as she did, this did not bode well. An angry Patton was bad, yes, but a determined Patton was an absolute nightmare to deal with.

“What’s wrong Honey?”

He didn’t answer her and just continued reading the poster, tracing his finger across the words, mumbling them to himself as he read.

“It doesn’t say who’s responsible for this,” he mumbled.

The poster also said that if someone wanted to speak at the meeting they would have to register on the intranet site. Figuring it would be first come first serve, Patton grabbed Jennifer’s elbow and pulled her towards his truck.

“Where are we going? Patton!” she yelled at him, pulling away from his grip.

He ignored her question and kept on walking, almost jogging, to where he was parked. When they got to the truck, he nearly simultaneously jumped in and started it. After loudly revving the engine once, he yanked it into reverse, sped out of his parking spot, and then peeled out towards his house.

An angry Jennifer folded her arms against her chest, staring forward, not saying a word. After reaching the two lane highway that would take him to his house, Patton said, “These people want to start a government. Who the hell do these people think they are?”

Jennifer’s only response was to purse her lips even tighter. She wanted to go home but her car was at his house. Patton continued to mumble. Jennifer finally had enough.

“Those people were murdered in their sleep in the middle of the night, Patton! What if we have kids and that happens to us, huh? What is all this anti-government garbage about anyway? I’m tired of you being so paranoid!”

He looked at her, disbelieving, with pain in his eyes. He calmed himself, but with a wounded tone he said, “Don’t lecture me about having my children killed okay? I know perfectly well how that feels.”

Tears of remorse stung at her eyes and she had to turn away from him. After a few minutes she turned to him again. Traces of pain were still in his eyes, but his face was passive and unreadable. She reached out and grabbed his arm.

“I’m so sorry Patton. I wasn’t thinking.”

He nodded at her apology and grabbed her hand. Relieved to be forgiven, tears poured down her cheeks and she wiped at them with her free hand. They drove on in silence for a few uncomfortable moments but he finally answered her question.

“I may be paranoid but I think I have a reason to be. Even our government, which is supposed to be based on the Constitution, fell apart. If it’s founded on kneejerk reactions instead of real principles then this city is going to fall apart.”

She shook her head at him and smiled. “Patton I love you, but I don’t know where you come up with this stuff.”

He looked over at her. His eyes had a depth that she couldn’t describe.

“Because I’ve seen it happen, Jennifer. And it’s not pretty.”

He turned and watched the road again. They didn’t speak again until they reached his house.

Mark and Patty were hoping to be packed and gone by the time Anna got home. However, just as Mark was stuffing the last of his things into a large backpack, he heard the front door open and the click of Anna’s shoes on the tile at the front door.

“Hello?” Anna yelled through the house. “You guys here?”

They looked at each other, not wanting to respond. There was no way for them to sneak out of the house. They were going to have to confront their friend after all.

“Mark? Patty?” she yelled again, but they still were just standing there, looking like children hiding from a belligerent father. They heard her approach and then the door opened slowly. Anna saw them standing there, obviously preparing to leave. For a moment she was too shocked to say anything.

“Hi,” Patty said awkwardly.

“Hi…” Anna said, pushing the door all the way open, stepping cautiously into the room. “You guys going somewhere?”

They looked at her, then at each other, then at the floor.

“Well?” Anna said, her voice growing angrier.

“Anna…” Mark said, wavering. “We can’t do this.”

He reached out and touched Patty’s shoulder, either to support her or to draw support from her. Anna just stared at them, incredulous.

“Anna, did Charlie order those other guys to kill that family?” Patty asked finally, tired of the pussyfooting.

At first Anna was shocked at the allegation, but she couldn’t hide the fact that she’d had the same suspicions herself. She tried to regain her composure, but it was too late. Patty looked at Mark and motioned for them to go. He grabbed a large, Army duffle bag and slung it over his shoulder.

“That’s what I thought,” she said with disgust in her voice.

Anna reached out to stop him, but they pushed past her.

“Wait! Look…” she said, breathing heavily now. “I don’t know if he did it. He would never tell me that. I really don’t know if it was him. I promise.”

She was pleading with her eyes. She understood their anger if their accusations were true. The events of the summer had been a whirlwind. She and everyone else in the group had been busy trying to push Blue Creek citizens towards pushing for a government. They couldn’t know what everyone was doing.

“And the guy that got pulled out of his car and beat up? And the stores that got trashed and now those people are out of business! What the hell is going on Anna?” Mark said angrily. “This isn’t what I signed up for. We’re supposed to never let a crisis go to waste, not create the crises ourselves!”

“Mark, I swear!”

But he was gone down the hall and Patty was right behind him. Suddenly, Mark whirled around to face her.

“What Anna! You swear what?”

Anna approached him slowly, her palms up.

“I had nothing to do with all that. He never told me about all that other stuff. After it happened I guessed it was him, but I swear I didn’t know. Just don’t go, please!”

Mark looked at Patty, trying to get a sense of what she was thinking. After a moment, Mark turned back to Anna.

“It doesn’t matter if you knew or not, Anna. We’re all a part of the murder of an innocent family. We can’t be a part of it anymore, not if that maniac is going to be involved.”

Anna turned away from him, fighting tears, fighting a rage that had building up inside her for years. Here she was, finally a part of something that had a chance to actually make a difference in the world and her best friends were with her. Now they were leaving.

“I’m sorry, guys,” Anna said, nearly whispering. “I didn’t know. That doesn’t mean you have to leave. We can talk to him.”

“No,” Mark said simply and picked up his bags and made his way out of the house with Patty in tow.

Patty stopped and turned back to look at her best friend with huge tears rolling down her face.

“I’m sorry Anna. I just can’t be a part of this. That man…” Patty said, pointing towards nowhere, “…he’s a maniac!”

Two thoughts crossed Anna’s mind at the same time. First, Anna knew they were right about Charlie. Second, Anna was going to see how far this was going to go. She had crossed the line that apparently her friends were not willing, or able, to cross.

“Okay. I understand,” Anna said resigned. “I’m sorry.”

She watched them trudge their way to the sidewalk and down to the corner. When she closed the door behind her she wasn’t crying and that fact was the most bothersome of all.

When Charlie opened the door and saw Anna he knew why she had come. He waved her in without a word. She walked into the living room, almost as if in a trance, and sat on Charlie’s plush loveseat. Charlie closed the door and sat down in an adjacent chair.

A silent, electric telepathy seemed to pass through them. Her questions passed to him without a word and his answers were transmitted back to her in like manner.

“Why Charlie?”

There were no denials, no obfuscations. He sat back in the chair, taking in a deep breath of air. He was obviously thinking of how to put it, but her eyes were telling him that it would be dangerous for him to try to lie to her. Finally, he leaned forward and met her gaze. His eyes were intense, but when he spoke, he spoke gently.

“Anna, did you think this was a game?”

She turned away from him, tears stinging at her eyes.

“Remember when I asked if you were ready for this and you said that you were?”

“I didn’t—I,” she said, trying to protest, but he cut her off, clamping down on her forearm.

“That’s a lie and you know it. Either you knew and you’re lying now or you were lying then and you’re a naïve child.”

The words stung her, but she knew they were true. She couldn’t deny it. She tried to pull her arm free, but he gripped it tighter.

“Anna,” he said, still in a soft, gentle voice. “This is not a game. The sacrifice of one family is going to be to the benefit of thousands of people. Is it tragic? Yes, but it’s for the greater good.”

She looked at him and he seemed to be sincere. Still, she was frightened at his intensity. She now realized that Charlie was playing for keeps. Was she ready to do the same? Was she ready to make the same commitment? Finally, Anna nodded.

“Okay,” Charlie said, releasing her arm. She rubbed at it absent-mindedly.

“Well?” she began, not knowing how to ask the next question.

“Yes?” he replied calmly, ever the patrician.

“What’s next?” she asked timidly. She sat up straight in her seat, seeming to gird herself.

Charlie leaned back in his chair again, a far off look in his eyes. After a few moments of reverie, Charlie leaned forward again.

“We spring the trap.”

CHAPTER 10

Patton and Jennifer couldn’t believe how empty the amphitheater looked. The last time they were there was for the kickoff event. There seemed to be a lot of people, mostly bunched together in front of the stage, but the venue looked empty.

“What’s wrong?” Jennifer had asked, noticing that Patton was jittery.

“Nothing,” he replied unconvincingly.

Patton couldn’t put his finger on it. He just had a general feeling of angst about this meeting. There was a commotion on the stage and a group of about ten people walked towards the audience. They all carried chairs with them. Patton realized they intended to remain on the stage above the rest of the crowd.

“What’s this?” he hissed, craning his neck around, trying to get a better view.

“What?”

“I guess these people think they’re some sort of committee.”

Patton struck a defiant pose, his arms crossed, his jaw set. Apparently the meeting was about to begin. A woman was on stage, holding a microphone, tapping it with their index finger.

“Testing… testing,” she said. “Okay. I guess we’re on.”

The mousy looking woman with the librarian’s bun looked back at her colleagues on stage. An older looking gentleman nodded and she turned back to the microphone. Apparently, Patton thought, this old man was the leader of this group. Patton decided to watch him throughout.

“Well hello,” the woman said cheerily. “It’s nice to have such a nice crowd out today. My name is Alice Weyland and I have been asked to conduct this meeting today.”

She looked back at her colleagues again, then back to the crowd.

“As you know, we’re here today to discuss the need for starting a government. We wanted everyone in our town to be involved. I’ve been told that over a thousand folks are logged in and watching and to those of you at home, welcome. Just know that you’re able to post any questions on the chat window and I’ll be sure to include those along with your comments. I apologize that we don’t have the capability to do some voice or video today.”

Patton was squirming already. Jennifer grabbed his hand, hoping that her touch would calm him. The people on stage took turns standing and introducing themselves. When the old man stood and introduced himself, a sense of recognition came over Patton when he heard his voice.

As if reading his mind, Jennifer squeezed his hand and leaned to whisper into his ear. “Hey, you see the older guy over there?” she said, pointing to their right. “And her?” she said, pointing over to their left.

“Yeah. I swear I recognize them from somewhere,” he whispered back.

“They’re that couple we saw at the restaurant in… that Italian restaurant. I remember thinking how weird it was for such an old guy and such a cute young girl to be together.”

The young woman noticed Jennifer pointing and scowled angrily. Jennifer lowered her hand and sheepishly snuggled into Patton.

Patton watched them in turn, looking at one and then at the other. Finally he remembered. It wasn’t the fact they had been such an odd match that had caught his attention, it had been what the old guy was talking to her about—his admiration for Che Guevara.

“Yeah,” Patton said, nodding, “I remember that old bastard.”

Jennifer rolled her eyes but she couldn’t help but laugh.

Each person on the stage took time, discussing their concern about the murders, the fire, and the general increase in crime in the community. To Patton it seemed as if they were having a private committee meeting, basically ignoring the audience. When the emcee said, “There will have to be the authority to tax,” many of her colleagues on stage nodded in agreement. Patton wanted to jump up and interject, but another member of the audience stood and followed up with a question that Patton had wanted to ask.

“Will there be a cap on how much can be taxed? Wouldn’t it be wiser to bond issues rather than to tax the people? At least that way you would have the consent of the people.”

The older man, who had earlier introduced himself as Charlie Henry, stood to respond.

“Bonding is an option of course,” he said, gesturing with his hands as he spoke. “The problem with that, though, is that you’re entangling every bit of important business with a vote. It really slows down progress of what needs to get done.”

Not being able to control himself any longer, Patton stood.

“I think that’s the point of bonding, don’t you?”

Shocked by the interruption, the older gentleman turned to meet Patton’s gaze.

“Well, Sir, I take it you have something to say on this issue?”

Patton pushed the button in front of his seat to activate the microphone. When the green light went solid he said, “Yes, among others.”

The man smiled and gestured for Patton to continue.

“Bonding is the only way to ensure that the government, if we end up setting one up—” he said, paused for a few beats, and then finished, saying “—doesn’t overdo it.”

Charlie Henry harrumphed and then replied, “Overdo it?” His smug grin made Patton want to climb onto the stage and smack it off his face.

Instead, Patton took a deep breath and said, “Yes. Overdo it,” pronouncing every syllable deliberately. There was a small scattering of laughter at his sarcasm. “If you look at the American government before we all came here, they were overtaxing, overspending, over-regulating, and over-promising. Basically, they overstepped their bounds on every front.”

“Every front?” Henry said, exasperated. “I believe you’re exaggerating a little bit here, young man.”

“Well,” Patton said, feeling the blood rush to his face, “when I say every front I mean every front. Taxes, spending, regulations, programs, executive orders. The Supreme Court overruling on almost every case that comes before them. In fact, I wouldn’t doubt if that was part of the reason many of you are here now.” Patton looked at the crowd and was glad to see more than a few heads nod. “Why would we allow ourselves to follow that bad example?”

The emcee stood and tried to cut Patton off, but Henry indicated that he wanted Patton to continue. Patton acknowledged the gesture with a nod.

“First of all, let’s talk about why we’re here tonight. Yes, those murders were tragic, but will forming a government solve this problem? And not only that, governments have shown that once they’re formed, they quickly get out of control.”

Henry, now enraged, turned away from the audience so they couldn’t his red face. Patton noticed the expression and smiled inwardly. He pressed on.

“I have one more question and then I’ll be done, I guess.”

Henry gestured for him to continue.

“Let’s assume we need a government. That’s a stretch, but let’s assume. Why should it be you people that puts it together?”

An earthy-looking woman stood and said, “Sir, we don’t appreciate your sarcasm, but I’ll answer your question as best I can,” she said condescendingly. “Apparently we are the ones most concerned about what has happened in our community recently and we want to do something about it—”

“—but,” Patton said, trying to cut her off, but she went on.

“—And…” she said, giving Patton an imperious look. “…We have taken the time to organize this meeting.”

Patton glared at her as she returned to her seat.

“If I may,” he said, exasperated. “Your answer was… well, how should I put this… total bullshit.” He ignored the murmurs and continued. “There are less than a dozen of you and there are over thirty thousand people in our community here. Are you telling me you’re going to be able to establish a government without the consent of the people?”

Henry rose to respond.

“We already have the signatures of over five hundred people and are working towards getting a thousand.”

Patton tried to interrupt again, but Henry stopped his potential interjection with his hand.

“Let me finish please. Now, I know that doesn’t sound like a lot, but it’s a significant amount. We’ll work on getting a majority of the people to form a government but until then, we need to answer some of these problems.”

“One thousand is less than three percent of the people!” Patton complained. “Even if you had a majority to agree to a government, that doesn’t mean that they agree on the form of government you propose. You can’t just create a government and assume that people agree with it if you have a bare majority of the people.”

The old man nodded in agreement, as did a couple others on the stage, and quite a few in the audience. Patton continued.

“I’d like to make a motion now that we base whatever government we make on the Constitution of the United States.”

“That’s a given, Mister…”

“Larsen,” Patton said, not knowing he had just made himself a future target.

“We thank you Mr. Larsen for your input. Are there any more questions?” he asked, looking at the rest of the crowd.

A middle-aged woman stood and Jennifer saw her chance.

“Let’s go,” Jennifer said, grabbing Patton’s arm.

He nodded and she stood. Patton glared back behind him as they walked out. He met the old man’s violent gaze. The future adversaries glared at one another with contempt. Finally, Patton turned to Jennifer and smiled before taking a final glimpse at Charlie Henry’s rage.

“That son of a bitch is going to be trouble,” Charlie said, nearly frantic. He’d been griping about “that Larsen bastard” ever since they left the meeting. Anna had never seen Charlie like this.

“Charlie, it’s okay,” she said, rolling her eyes at him. He was acting like a young teenaged girl who found out her crush didn’t like her in return. “Did you think we wouldn’t have any opposition to this thing? Who’s being naive now?”

Charlie stopped and looked at her. He wanted to be angry but she was right. She continued.

“People like him are going to make this harder than we thought. We’re going to have to escalate. It’s like the Tea Party all over again.”

He cringed when she mentioned the group’s name. Charlie shook his head, trying to dislodge the thought out of his mind. There were some flag-waving, brain-dead “patriots” here in Blue Creek, but if the population of this town was truly a microcosm of the United States, a majority of the people could be easily manipulated. They would just have to take advantage of that fact. If worse came to worse, they could get the teams out for some more mayhem. The community was on edge and needed only one more push. The only question was, how hard did that push need to be?

Bao watched the two men exchange verbal daggers while the crowd grew nervous. He thought the younger guy was going to rush the stage and beat the older guy down. Instead, the younger guy seemed satisfied with getting the other’s goat. Bao had to hide his face so others wouldn’t see his grin. He hated politics, and worse, he hated watching people talk about politics. It was his job to be here, though. If he had his druthers he’d be playing Call of Duty online with Carl. However, Nate, his boss, had basically ordered him to attend and to report his findings by the next day.

By Bao’s estimation, nothing had really been done. Just a bunch of people talking. He reported that formation of a government was being considered. He also reported that the meeting had gotten pretty intense. However, he did not report that two of the people on stage were behind the recent crime wave. And he did not report that those crimes were committed to force the townspeople to form a government that they would then seize control of. Had Bao known their intentions, he would have reported them. However, there was no guarantee that anyone reading it would do anything about it. The directive had been to let things play out unless things got really out of hand.

For almost a week after the meeting, Patton was still fuming “that old bastard.” At times, Jennifer had to stay away from him or he was going to drive her crazy. Fortunately for Jennifer, she knew how to bring him out of his moods. Tonight she was going to distract him with serious business. She grabbed her iPad and sat by him on the couch. She opened the calendar app and scrolled through the coming months.

“So when are we going to do this?”

At first he didn’t know what she was referring to. It finally dawned on him that she was talking about their wedding. They’d narrowed their wedding day to a two-week window in October, but she wanted to nail down the specifics. There were too many details to plan and the summer was bleeding away. Like all men having this conversation, Patton wanted to say “I don’t give a damn,” but he fought the urge.

“Let’s do October 15th,” he said, pointing at that day, trying to sound thoughtful about his choice.

She looked at the square under his finger and began to run through the logistics in her head. This was it. The day was finally chosen. Emotion suddenly welled up inside her. She leapt into his arms and kissed him all over his face and neck. He was struck by her emotion and hugged her as tight as he could. He was also relieved to have the date nailed down.

They returned to their planning, googling venues for their wedding, reception and honeymoon. Patton got lost in the moment. It was a far cry from his first wedding—his first wife had made almost every single plan. She ended up telling him where to be, when to be there, and what to wear. Something was different this time and Patton realized that it might be him. Perhaps he was growing as a person. He took joy in watching Jennifer’s excitement.

They grilled steaks and Jennifer made a salad for dinner. They ate and talked and drank wine. When it was dark, Patton decided that he was tired enough to go to bed. Jennifer, who was reading by her lamplight, noticed him turn over to his side, a sure sign that he was about to fall asleep.

“You turning in?” she asked lovingly.

He nodded sleepily. She smiled and leaned over to give him a goodnight kiss.

“Goodnight Honey,” she said, getting no reply.

Larsen Farms was well out of town, on a quiet stretch of a highway that was usually dead at night. As they approached the turnoff, the driver could see the large iron arch that stood over the driveway. He killed the lights and parked in a gravel turnout on the opposite side of the highway. The four people sat in the vehicle. All but one of them were anxious, if not nervous. All were dressed in black and were equipped with semi-automatic pistols, holstered at their waists. They’d planned this as well as possible, but there were so many unknowns. They didn’t know the layout of the farm. They didn’t even know if the loudmouth from the meeting would be at home.

It had rained earlier that day. The wet road glistened in the bright moonlight. A sudden, strong breeze blew through a large maple tree, causing them all to jump at the sound. Lights were scattered throughout the compound, but were not bright enough to deter them from doing what they were here to do.

The group crossed the road, hunched down but moving quickly. They kept to the long prairie grass on the sides of the driveway to avoid crunching gravel under their boots. As they passed under the arch, two of the team broke off and went to the right, ducking down behind a five-foot tall stone fence. The other two went left, hunkering down behind the fence on the other side of the driveway. The house was down in a small swale and to their right.

A security light suddenly flickered on.

“Down!” Travis whispered.

The others ducked quickly to the ground. Prairie grass rustled and gravel crunched beneath their weight. The night was too quiet and they were being too loud. Travis grimaced as he rose to his knees. He signaled to the team on the left, motioning for them to swing further left, around the barn. Travis and the woman did the same thing—only they circled wide around to the right and made their way to the back door of the farmhouse.

Beep Beep!

“Patton,” Jennifer said sleepily, patting him on the shoulder.

Beep Beep!

“Patton.”

“Huh?” he said groggily.

Beep Beep!

Patton finally noticed the alarm and shot up from his spot in the bed.

“What’s wrong?” Jennifer said, beginning to wake up now.

He fumbled in the dark, but finally found his phone. He clicked the scroll pad and clicked on the alert.

He had a new text message that read “Intruder alert!”

“Patton, what’s wrong?” she asked, frantically.

He was still half asleep but waking up quickly. “Someone’s breaking into my house.”

He said it with a deadly calm, which unnerved her more than if he’d shouted the words in her face.

The team on the left set off another security light as they made their way to the barn. Before departing, Travis decided that if the compound proved to have a security system, they would go in shooting. There were obviously security lights, but Travis couldn’t see any other equipment. No cameras, no sensors.

Crouched at the rear door of the farmhouse, Travis reached up and tried the knob. The knob was locked and Travis noticed a stout deadbolt. Undeterred, Travis reared back and kicked the door with his full force, his pistol at the ready. There was a loud cracking sound, but the door stayed intact. He kicked at it again and this time it gave way, crashing loudly against a kitchen counter.

Patton heard the door crash, panes of glass shattering on the kitchen floor.

“What the hell?” Jennifer gasped, looking at Patton with wide eyes.

He met her frightened gaze with a calm expression. Again, his calm made her even more nervous. He grabbed his iPad from his nightstand and opened his security app. He watched the intruders invade his home from the safety of Jennifer’s home. There were three, possibly four, and all seemed to be carrying handguns.

“You see? This is what you get when you speak up at a meeting,” Patton said, showing her the live footage.

She didn’t know what he meant at first, but then it dawned on her.

“You don’t think—”

He looked at her with that detached expression and said, “I speak up at a meeting against this government and they send out a bunch of goons to kill me. That would make these people ‘wake up’ and see they needed a government right? They’d be killing two birds with one stone.”

She looked at him and for the first time she was starting to believe in his kooky conspiratorial ideas. The thought that they could have been there caused her to shudder with fear.

“They’re not here!” cried one of the men. He kicked a garbage can, which seemed to explode, its contents spilling all over the room.

“Hey!” Travis yelled, pushing his shoulder. “We don’t need to do that! They’re not here, we move out, that’s it!”

The other man nodded reluctantly, but was still angry. He’d been psyching himself up all day to do this. He’d taken a hit of meth before leaving so he’d be sufficiently amped up.

“Let’s get out of here,” Travis said, motioning with his head.

Dejected, the four intruders lined up and filed out of the house.

“They’re gone now,” Jennifer said, still shaking. Patton put his arm around her to calm her but he was shaking too. The only difference was, he was shaking out of anger, not fear.

He was relieved about one thing, though. Had he been there, he would have had to kill four people. That was something he didn’t like doing, no matter how much they deserved it. Someone sent those people on a fool’s errand and he had a pretty good idea who it was.

The four sped back towards town. Travis was on his phone, riding shotgun, trying to calm his team down and update Charlie.

“No one was home. Yeah. We’re on our way back to town. What? Okay. What do you want us to do? You really think he has cameras up in his place? No. I didn’t see any. Okay. We’ll see you tomorrow night.”

Travis ended the call and looked at the driver.

“The old man is unbelievable,” he said, shaking his head, clenching his jaw.

The driver just nodded. The hold that the old man had on them was beginning to fade. Over time he had become a bore, constantly meddling in everything they wanted to do.

“He thinks that place is all wired up with cameras and that we need to get out of town because that guy will recognize us if he sees us around.”

The driver looked at him and rolled his eyes and said, “Seriously?”

“Yes. Did you see anything?”

The driver hunched over the wheel and thought for a second. Finally he shook his head. “No. Nothing obvious, anyway. It’s not like that house is that nice. Why would he have it wired up?”

The leader exhaled loudly in frustration.

“That old prick is just paranoid. I guess the two of ‘em got into it at the meeting.”

The driver nodded. He’d witnessed it all.

“It makes no sense,” Travis thought out loud.

The driver nodded again, his face contorted into a tight grimace and said, “Anna better know what she’s into with this guy.”

CHAPTER 11

Bao was on the tail end of his route. The summer was coming to an end, but it had been a blistering hot day. He needed two Gatorades and an energy drink just to get him through the day.

“Hey Jerry,” Bao said, nodding to the store owner. He was a big man. Bao guessed that half the candy bars and sodas he used to fill the store’s machines were purchased by the owner himself.

“Hey Bao. Hot one eh?”

Bao nodded, wiping sweat from his forehead. He bent over and lifted a plastic tray full of soda bottles.

Jerry’s Electronics store was the best place to get electronics in Blue Creek. It had the biggest selection and the highest quality products. Jerry was originally from Florida and had been an assistant manager at Best Buy, so he knew the business well. Back in Florida, Jerry wasn’t likely to have climbed very high on the corporate ladder. The experiment had given him the opportunity he’d always waited for.

Bao usually just went about his business, filling the machines and collecting coins. However, there had been a push for more personal contacts. Bao hated this because he had to talk to people, which he hated, and he had to write reports, which he hated even worse. But it was his job and he needed to step up.

“Your shelves are almost empty, man.”

Jerry nodded and smiled with satisfaction. His store had been successful enough that he’d already expanded his floor space and nearly doubled his workforce.

“Business is booming, my friend. How about you?” Jerry asked, gesturing towards the stack of plastic totes Bao used to carry his stock.

“Ah, you know. People like their snacks and their drinks,” Bao said, then grimaced. He tried not to look at Jerry’s ever-growing gut. The man seemed to take no offense.

Jerry was a throwback to an earlier era. He was much like the immigrants that came to America at the turn of the 20th Century. They took jobs in factories and learned the operation inside out. Many of these workers either improved the process or the product, invented some new gadget, or saved and started their own business that then competed with their previous employer. It was how many millionaires were made. It was the beauty of capitalism. Like many successful businessmen before him, all Jerry needed was an opportunity.

“Business has been ridiculous, actually,” Jerry said. “These people out here can’t keep a dime in their pocket without it burning a whole clear through.”

“I’ve bought some stuff here myself, dude. What you sayin’?”

Dave grinned at Bao and hit the button for a regular Coke.

“And I do appreciate it. You’ve bought some nice stuff, but you’re nothin’ like some of these people. Today I have this customer come in. He’s all decked out in nice clothes, got the tats and a big platinum chain. Anyway, he says he wants a flat screen for every room in his house so he doesn’t miss anything,” Dave said, snickering. “I mean, seriously.”

“I know what you mean,” Bao said, now filling the candy machine. “A lot of that going around?”

“You wouldn’t believe me if I told you. They’re spendin’ all their money. And what they gonna have to show for it? I should be like what’s his name over at the pawnshop. That guy is gonna make a killing.”

Bao nodded, making a note of where he should place some vending machines.

“Who’s they?” Bao asked.

Jerry exhaled loudly. “Shoot kid. I wouldn’t be surprised if some people are already going broke. They got three or four cars, TVs, sound systems all over their big, fancy houses. You watch. You’ll see check loan joints, more pawn shops, bankruptcy lawyers. All that kinda stuff. When people are sufferin’ the vultures will circle,” Jerry said, making a circling gesture with his index finger.

“Damn. And I thought this was supposed to be Utopia.”

Jerry snickered and rolled his eyes.

“Bao, people are people, no matter how much you give them. Broke people are broke for a reason. Rich people are rich for a reason. I’m telling you kid, there’s gonna be some cheap stuff for sale all over town here in the next few months if this keeps up.”

Bao just nodded again. Duly noted.

By the time Bao was finished with his route he had even more information. Someone was pulling enough cash together to start buying people’s excess cars. Not many residents had gotten that desperate, but a few suffering buyer’s remorse sold unneeded vehicles for far less than market value. Bao went to the nearly empty car lot and talked to the owners. He asked them about putting some machines at their place, but he was really looking for more gossip.

Indeed, they had taken out a loan from one of two Blue Creek banks. They were anticipating an influx of new vehicles within the next few months. Would Bao want to buy one that they already had on the lot? Bao wasn’t interested, but he told them he would look in the future.

Contact led to contact and he followed as many as he could. Bao wasn’t the only Insight spy to hear the rumblings. Many residents were living extravagantly and without a way to maintain or rebuild their wealth. Collectively, the spies’ reports would paint a disturbing, yet interesting picture. But the predictive results shouldn’t have come as a surprise—when people have money, they like to spend it.

As Bao drove home that night, he saw a kettle of vultures circling high above what must have been some dead or dying animal. He shuddered involuntarily. Bao didn’t believe in omens, but his parents and grandparents sure did. He suddenly hoped that everything he heard today was just gossip.

Bao looked up at the ghastly formation of birds again before they passed out of his view. He shuddered again, hoping he would forget the sight the next day and especially what it portended.

Anna woke to the sound of him pulling up his pants. In all of the nights they’d been together, they’d never slept together until morning. Apparently he wanted to keep his emotional distance. Anna thought that was stupid—the two of them frequently engaged in the most intimate act possible. Still, she didn’t want to scare him away. She would give into this one idiosyncrasy. Anna looked at him through heavy eyes and asked what time it was.

“Two. Sorry I woke you,” he said, leaning down to kiss her forehead.

She smiled dreamily. He was such a jerk, she thought, but she couldn’t help herself.

“Why can’t you just come back to bed? I’m not going to bite,” she said, giggling sleepily.

“Not that I would mind that,” he said, grinning. “You know why. I like waking up in my own bed. Alone.”

She nodded, hating herself for not being able to bargain with him.

‘It’s us together or nothing,’ she could say, but did she really want more from him than she was getting? Probably not. She was much smarter than him. He stimulated her in many ways, but intellectually was not one of them. Still, he had “it” and it was the “it” that she and Charlie were looking for.

“Will I see you tomorrow… well… later today?” she asked.

He pulled on his shirt and straightened his hair with his hands.

“I don’t know,” he said, yawning loudly. “Probably.”

She nodded again, but didn’t feel relieved. She hated herself for how insecure she felt. One of these days she was going to have to stop beating around the bush and tell him what she and Charlie were planning and what role he would play in those plans.

He sat on the edge of the bed and slipped his feet into his shoes. She reached around from behind and rubbed his stomach. When he was done he turned around and kissed her again. As the kisses became passionate he almost got undressed again, but he thought better of it and pulled away from her.

“I’ll talk to you later,” he said brusquely, walking towards the door and not looking back.

“Yeah. Sure,” she said, not angry or hurt anymore. She knew that in the end, she was going to get more out of him than he was going to get out of her.

Nearly four in the morning and still no sleep. Charlie Henry gazed forlornly out his bedroom window. The Indian Summer nights in this part of the country were incredible. The days were still hot and dry, but the cool mountain air was refreshing.

Charlie was far from sentimental. He hadn’t even attended his own mother’s funeral. It wasn’t sentiment, he reasoned. It was mostly lust that he felt for that girl, but she had succeeded in ending their relationship. Their interactions were strictly professional and only to do with their little… project. He rubbed the spot where her gorgeous body used to lie. He caressed the pillow where her beautiful hair would cascade down. He rolled onto his back, silently chiding himself for being such an emotional Lilliputian.

Charlie sighed and pulled his blankets to his shoulders. He suddenly thought of that Patton Larsen. His mood quickly changed from melancholy to malevolence. He cursed Larsen bitterly under his breath. Perhaps it wasn’t Larsen he was angry at. It was Travis’ failure to remove him from the picture.

Stalin ran Trotsky out of Russia and eventually took him out for good. Castro had similar success with Che, first marginalizing him, then pushing him out of the Cuban power structure. Others failed to eliminate their nemeses and later paid the price. He wasn’t sure why he thought of Larsen as his enemy. They had only that one verbal exchange. But Charlie Henry wasn’t used to being talked to like that—with such confidence and such contempt.

Now that he was sufficiently angry, Charlie threw his sheets off of his body and rolled to the edge of the bed. His feet found his slippers and he let out a loud yawn. He was feeling older for some reason. The thought depressed him because when he’d first reached this new place he’d been so rejuvenated. Now that feeling was beginning to fade. He sneered in the dark. He needed a new plan, but he wasn’t going to be able to make one without coffee. He thought of Anna again and shook his head.

“Oh Anna,” he said to no one. “What are you up to now?”

Patton stood and clinked his knife against his wine glass.

“I’d like to make a toast.”

The room eventually went silent and all eyes turned to him. It was an intimate gathering of friends–Patton and Jennifer, Frank and Shontae, and Mike and his new girlfriend–a girl that looked quite young to Jennifer and was quite a looker according to Patton.

It was the evening of Labor Day, the holiday that unofficially signified the end of summer. The weather had finally turned. The days were still hot, but the night air was cool. Leaves high in the mountains were starting to turn colors. Football season had started. It was beginning to feel like autumn. Dinner was now over. Many of them were finishing dessert. The men had cigars and brandy. The women had wine.

“Everyone,” he said, standing in a relaxed parade rest. “Jennifer and I have an announcement,” he said then paused to let the drama build. “We’re getting married next month.”

The table erupted in cheers and there were some whoops of celebration. Shontae leaned over and kissed Jennifer on the cheek. The news wasn’t surprising, but it was welcome.

“Congratulations,” Frank said, beaming, raising his drink to Patton.

Mike rose and congratulated his friends’ announcement then toasted the continued success of their business venture. The toast was met with another round of hearty cheers. Business had indeed been good. In only six months, the three partners were well ahead of their original projections. They’d opened up markets throughout northern Utah and southern Idaho and were looking to start dealing with some farmers and ranchers in western Nevada.

But this was an evening to forget business. All of the men had agreed before this get together that no one would bring up the company, margins, profits, or anything else business related. The festive mood grew and they poured another round of drinks.

An hour later it was just Patton and Frank, sitting on lawn chairs on Frank’s grass. Empty beer bottles littered the grass around them. They were both nursing a whiskey and Coke and both held smoldering cigars. Frank took a long, satisfying draw from his cigar and leaned back and looked at the stars. They were so bright out here away from the city. The beauty and immensity of the night sky suddenly made him feel very small.

Frank sighed in obvious satisfaction. Patton looked at him and grinned.

“What?” Frank asked, chuckling.

Patton gazed up at the stars himself and exhaled, relaxed, at peace, and completely happy.

“My wife—” Patton said, then caught himself. “My first wife,” he clarified. Frank smiled sadly at his friend but said nothing. Patton continued. “She grew up in rural California. Central Valley.”

Frank nodded. He was familiar with nearly every stretch of his home state, particularly the Central Valley.

“She grew up in a place kind of like this,” Patton said, letting the memory of her wash over him like the late summer air. “The way she used to describe it… sounded like heaven to me.”

Frank looked at him curiously. He’d never seen Patton like this before. He looked content, not needing to be somewhere else or to be doing the next thing on his list.

“She made us all go camping,” Patton continued, sounding dreamy. “At first I hated it, but it got to the point I looked forward to it every year.” A painful smile washed over Patton’s face. “And she made it so fun for the kids. We’d hike in the day and fish and then at night we watch the stars and tell scary stories.”

Frank gave his friend an approving nod and a warm smile.

“We never did anything like that. Shontae wanted to do things like that but I was always too busy working and traveling. I missed so much. I pretty much missed everything.” He trailed off, obviously feeling shame and regret.

“But you were making a better life for your family,” Patton said, trying to reassure his friend.

Frank looked at Patton soberly. He was grateful for the sentiment but didn’t accept the excuse. He shook his head and gazed back up at the stars. “That’s what I kept telling myself. I grew up poor. Piss poor. My old man was a mechanic and he loved those damn Chevelles. You know what a Chevelle looks like?”

Patton nodded.

“That’s my name, you know,” Frank said, revealing his deepest, darkest secret that only his family knew.

Patton looked at him, how brow furrowed with confusion. “What is?” he asked.

“Chevelle. It’s my first name. Franklin is my middle name.”

Patton rolled his head back and chuckled, partly because he thought Frank’s name was funny, but mostly because he was beginning to feel drunk.

“Anyway,” Frank said, smiling at his friend’s reaction, “my old man… he was strong and quiet, but he was great. I never saw him cry, not even once. Not even when his mother died. This one night after dinner he comes into my room. He closes the door behind him and he pulls up a chair.”

Frank paused, his face taking on a dreamy expression, as if he could see the moment in his mind’s eye. “He touches my hand and kinda closes my book so I know he really wants my attention. So I sit up at the edge of the bed and really look at him. And man I’ll never forget that look in his eyes.”

Frank took a sip from his drink and set it down on the table. “I’d never seen him like that… you know… quiet. Humble. Hurt, almost.”

“Meek?” Patton said, taking a stab at what his friend might be getting at.

Frank looked at him and considered the word for a moment.

“Yeah… that’s a good way to put it.” Frank sat up and leaned forward, his elbows on his knees. “Anyway, he leans forward a little and his eyes are a little moist and he says ‘Chevelle, you’re a smart kid. You got a chance to make somethin’ of yourself so don’t you be messin’ around with these damn gangs.’” Frank paused again. He cleared his throat, trying to hold off emotion. “Then my old man said, ‘You have the chance to get this family outta this damn place. Whatever you do, help your brothers and sisters.’ I took that as his greatest wish. His dying wish.”

Patton reclined back again, gazing at the stars. “My dad was quiet. It was my mother that did the talking in our house.” He said it and was surprised to feel a sudden rush of emotion. He realized he was missing her.

Frank chuckled and then said, “I just can’t imagine that. I mean my Momma could talk but it was my Dad who disciplined all the kids. Momma would just write down what us kids did and then my dad would whoop our asses when he got home from work.”

They both chuckled.

“My Mom ran our house with an iron fist,” Patton said. “My dad would take me and my brother and my sister out of the house just to get a breath of fresh air.”

Patton turned serious and asked, “So did you?”

Frank looked at him, confused.

“Do what?”

“Help your family?”

Frank reclined again, swirling what was left in his whiskey glass.

“I helped who could be helped. My brother was a heroin addict so I couldn’t do much for him. One of my sisters got pregnant when she was 14.”

Patton grimaced and let out a loud breath.

“Yeah, I’m glad the old man was gone by then,” Frank said. “He woulda killed that girl. Anyway, I helped some of my brothers and sisters through school. Helped another brother buy the old shop where Dad worked. His son is running it now,” Frank said, with a satisfied look on his face.

“That’s great, man,” Patton said, impressed with his friend’s generosity.

“What about you?” Frank asked him.

Without turning to look at his friend, Patton said, “My brother is a lawyer and my sister is an accountant for a big firm. They didn’t need much help from me. Anyway, I made a lot of money, but after I lost my family…”

Frank smiled sympathetically, understanding what Patton was trying to say. He pointed to the house where Jennifer was inside and said, “Now you have a reason to keep going.”

“I almost didn’t make it,” Patton said, his voice betraying a bit of emotion.

“To here?”

Patton nodded, but Frank knew there was more to it.

“After the accident I went into the hospital and they had me drugged up. I don’t even remember the funeral. After a while they let me out but I wasn’t getting better. Drinking. Painkillers. Nothing worked. Anyway, I didn’t need to work because I already had enough money. Maybe that’s what my problem was—I had nothing to look forward to every day.”

Frank nodded, silently encouraging his friend to keep going.

“One day I was going through my shop and I found this gun I’d made. It was all made of composite plastic, you know, that really hard stuff. Anyway I guess I got the crazy idea to try out my invention—to see if my life’s work had been worth it. And I was about to do it when my little nephew called.”

“Right then?” Frank asked, almost disbelieving. Patton nodded and gave Frank a funny little laugh.

“It got me distracted. I love that little kid. He’s always so happy. He was calling me because it was his cousin’s birthday and he wanted to tell me he loved me and was sorry,” Patton said, tears running down his cheeks now. “I held that gun in my hand the whole time I talked to him, but eventually my grip was getting lighter and lighter. By the end of the conversation it was on the table by a lamp.”

“Then what?” Frank asked, riveted.

“I got into my car and drove down to the mental ward of the hospital and checked myself in. I was in there for a while and when I got out, I wasn’t completely better, but good enough to go on.”

“Well Buddy, I’m glad that you did,” Frank said, turning his attention to the night sky again.

They fell silent for a long while, taking in the beauty before them. Patton was the one to break the silence.

“I’m drunk.”

They looked at each other and laughed.

She wanted to grab his hair and scratch out his eyes. He sounded like one of those whiny little crybabies she’d gone to high school with.

“Charlie, you’re making too big a deal out of this,” Anna said, trying hard to remain calm. He was pacing around wildly, his hair disheveled. He was so angry he didn’t respond to her.

“So what if they didn’t get him,” she said. “This Larsen guy is just one person. There’s nothing he can do to stop us.”

He stopped pacing and looked at her, shaking his head in disagreement.

“He’s just one person, but he’s convincing. You saw that. He’ll fight us tooth and nail on this.”

She rolled her eyes, not caring if he noticed.

“Charlie, you’re not looking at the big picture here. People want a government. They don’t know how to live without the structure. They’re scared. They’re like children.”

Their argument continued for another half hour. Neither of them budged from their original position so she asked him to leave. They should sleep it off and start again in the morning. What she didn’t tell him she had a date with David.

“We need to do something,” Charlie said as he opened the door to leave.

“Charlie, I’m done with this for right now. Go home. Have a smoke. Have a drink.” Then, placing her slender hand on his forearm she said, “the wheels are already in motion. There’s nothing these people can do anymore.”

“I hope you’re right,” he said, turning and slinking away towards his car.

She wanted to slam the door to show her displeasure, but she decided against it. She still needed him, even if he was showing himself to be a liability.

Hours later Anna was propped up on her elbow, gazing affectionately at the man in her bed. It was the longest he’d ever stayed, she realized. Usually, once they were done, David was up and dressed and out of her apartment before she could even say goodbye. Maybe he was tired tonight, she thought. Or maybe he had something on his mind.

He was acting differently towards her. He was much more passionate and much more intimate. He didn’t sneer at her when she got sentimental. He returned her hugs and kisses now, and he was much gentler with her in bed. He was asleep now, but she had no doubt he would wake up at some point, get dressed, and leave her. For now, though, she would take in the sight of him.

He’s perfect, she thought. Not just in a physical or sexual sense, although he was that. For her and Charlie’s plans to work, they needed someone like him. He was smart enough, articulate, and most of all—and this was the most important—he was ambitious. Blind ambition, Anna knew, led to reliance upon others. She hadn’t sprung the plan on him yet, but she knew he’d go for it.

Looking at him again, she decided to let him in on her and Charlie’s plan.

David Asher woke two hours later. Anna’s slender leg was wrapped around his waist, but he carefully extricated himself. It was symbolic in a way—her leg wrapped around him like that. Some nights when she called or texted him he wanted to ignore her. It was getting harder and harder to pull away from her. She was becoming more and more needy.

Not that he didn’t have feelings for her. He just wasn’t the type to get involved past, well, where he was now. No doubt Anna was beautiful. He hadn’t met her match in the few months he’d been in Blue Creek. She was missing something, though. Something he couldn’t identify or explain. She seemed to have it all going for her. Looks, brains, and passion. He’d dated less attractive women who were much more complete—much more confident in who they were.

David dressed in the dark. He was careful to not let his belt buckle rattle or to drop one of his shoes on the hardwood floor. He didn’t want to wake her and break away from her again. He pulled on his shirt, found his keys and wallet, and quietly exited the bedroom.

The night was warm. A cool breeze brushed across his face. The neighbor’s sprinklers were running, he could hear. David did a full body stretch and he stifled a yawn. He felt relaxed, and not just because he’d just engaged in that most relaxing activity. No, he felt at home in this place, as strange as that seemed to him. He’d dreaded coming to this part of the country, with all the conservatives and Mormons and all their traditional ways of living. He found that many of his fellow citizens were much like him. After all, the town was a small version of the country.

David’s reverie was broken as he approached his car. A slip of paper was lodged under his wiper blade. None of the other cars were similarly decorated so it couldn’t have been some small business person soliciting. He approached the car warily and pulled the paper free. It was a small note, folded in half. The handwriting was messy but legible. It read:

Text me at 435-725-3387. I have something important to tell you.

David looked around him. No one else was awake at this hour, at least as far as he could tell. He opened his car door and scanned the area again. Maybe the person who’d left the note was watching to make sure he got it and read it.

The cryptic note made it difficult for him to sleep. David woke at his usual 8 AM and removed the note from his wallet. He dialed the number and entered the message.

Who are you and what do you want?

David waited for a response, but there was nothing right away. A half hour passed and he didn’t hear the notifying chime. He busied himself to pass the time. He cooked and ate breakfast, showered, got dressed, and tidied up his bedroom. Finally, nearly two hours after sending the original message, he got a response.

I’ll tell you in person. Meet me at Micah’s Sports Bar at noon.

I may not meet in person if you don’t tell me who you are and what you want.

Suit yourself.

David sent the message and waited for a response. Ten minutes passed and nothing. He finally relented.

Okay, I’ll meet you at noon. How will I know it’s you?

Don’t worry, I know what you look like. Sit in a booth and I’ll find you.

The scenario was starting to resemble a bad spy movie. Still, David drove to the spot, making sure to get there early. He watched traffic but couldn’t see anyone watching him in his car. He went inside and picked a booth.

The place was nice and dark. A few TVs were on, playing different sports channels. A trio of attractive waitresses milled around, taking orders and bringing food. David ordered a Heineken and waited. It was ten minutes past noon. At a quarter past noon, a tall, athletic looking man slid onto the bench opposite him. He had long hair and looked like he hadn’t shaved in a few days. The newcomer settled in. The two eyed each other warily. The server returned with another Heineken for David. Travis Snedley ordered one for himself. She left and they continued to look at one another uneasily.

“Okay, so I’m here,” David said, waiting for his counterpart to tell him why he was summoned.

“You know Anna.” It wasn’t a question.

“Yes, how do you know that and who the hell are you?”

“Travis, but that’s not important. Some things are happening and you’re about to get involved. I just thought you might want to know before it’s sprung on you.”

David stared at him, trying not to betray the nerves he was feeling. He looked away, chugging the rest of his beer. He waited for Travis to continue but he didn’t. He just sat there silently.

“Why would I get involved with something?”

“Because you’re involved with Anna Radinski and she’s involved.”

David nodded, but was still confused.

“What so important then? Does she want me to sell Kirby vacuums with her or something?”

Travis chuckled and fiddled with the label on his beer bottle. He inhaled deeply and let the air out slowly, almost casually.

“She’s involved with this guy named Charlie Henry. The two of them have started this committee that wants to start a government here in your little town.”

“My little town? Seems to me that it’s your town too.”

Travis shook his head, still playing with the label.

“Technically, I shouldn’t even be here. I was brought here to make this whole thing happen.” He looked at David to gauge his response. “Charlie brought me here to… make things happen. You know, make people want a government. Make them feel unsafe.”

The ramifications of that statement slowly fell upon David Asher’s understanding. He sat back, seemingly pushed back by the weight of what he’d just been told. The fire on the 4th of July. The beatings, the robberies, the murder of the family. David looked wide-eyed at Travis.

“I guess it all makes sense now,” David said dumbly.

Travis just nodded.

“So what do they want with me?” David asked, trying to regain his confidence after the startling news.

Travis leaned in closer, his elbows resting on the table. David subconsciously did the same.

“They want you to be their puppet. They’ll put you up as the leader, but they’ll be making all the decisions behind the scenes. Anna has been telling Charlie all about you. You’re handsome, you’re articulate, you’re charming. She says you’re perfect to be—”

“—their puppet,” David finished. He nodded and sat back, trying to process this new information.

“I just wanted you to know,” Travis said with a mirthless smile. “Charlie plays for keeps. If they told you everything and you didn’t go along, I’m not sure what he would do. It’s all a big secret right now. If it were to get out… who knows what would happen. Anyway, Charlie’s not willing to take that chance.”

The implication was clear. If David was let in on the secret and he didn’t go along, he and Travis might be meeting again, under very different circumstances.

“So why tell me?”

“Because Charlie is insane. He’s going too far and there’s no talking him out of his ideas. Let’s just say that I’m contractually obligated to do what he says. If he wants me to shut someone up, well, I have to do it.”

David nodded and swallowed hard. This was unnerving news. Not that he was afraid of Travis—he was confident he could hold his own—he just felt that his new world was crashing down around him. Sure, he’d had similar feelings—he wanted to bring about changes that matched his own beliefs about how things should be run. But to kill people to bring it about? He’d never considered such a thing. David shook his head in wonder at the sheer audacity of the plan.

“Well,” David said. “Let’s hope it doesn’t come to that.”

CHAPTER 12

Bao was filling machines at his favorite account. The building was loaded with attractive women and the owners treated him like a human being, not an errand boy. As he was refilling the Snickers, he could sense someone behind him.

“Hey Daniel.”

“Hey Charlie,” the man said, chuckling as he walked down the hall and into his office.

Daniel, whose actual name was Mike Wilson, called Bao “Charlie” because of his Vietnamese heritage. Bao wasn’t offended, he merely returned fire. Once Bao found out that Mike was from Texas he started calling him “Daniel” for Daniel Boone.

In his role as Insight Resource spy, Bao found the place to be highly important. Not only were these people becoming the most successful business in town, they had the person who took Charlie Henry on at the meeting at the amphitheater—Patton Larsen. He had yet to spend significant time with Patton, but he was working on it.

“What’s up Bao?” asked Frank, who was the nicest to Bao—probably because he knew what it was like to be an outsider. Also, as a Northern Californian, Frank had been around a lot of Asian people.

“Not much, Frank. How’s it hangin’?”

Frank chuckled.

“I’m good Bao, but I’m not sure you know what that saying means.”

Bao did know, but he let it go.

“You seen Patton today?”

Bao usually asked about Patton, but he always tried to seem nonchalant.

“He was off site this morning but I think he might be in his office.”

“Thanks,” Bao said, returning to his work. Frank walk past him and down the hall to his office.

Patton friggin’ Larsen, Bao thought, nearly laughing out loud. Among the Insight employees, and especially among the spies, Patton was now a legend. One of the spies had been able to capture footage of the “conversation” between Larsen and Charlie Henry. The video had been passed around the office dozens of times. Another spy had actually been able to infiltrate the committee that was forming the government. That was why Bao was working this account today—to leak some of the information gleaned from the spy on the committee to Patton Larsen and then see how he would react.

As he continued his work, Bao tried to concoct a reason to speak to Patton. By the time he got the snack machine filled, he had his reason. He gathered his things and made his way towards Patton’s office, which was on the other side of the building.

Bao peeked in and saw Patton working on his computer. He knocked lightly.

Without turning to see who it was, Patton said, “Yeah?”

Bao stepped in meekly and approached Patton’s desk.

“Hey Patton,” Bao said, fighting the urge to remove his baseball cap and twirl it in his hands.

“Hey Bao. How’s business?” Patton asked, still not making eye contact.

“Good. Not as good as here apparently,” he said with a goofy laugh, “but good.”

“What can I do for you?” Patton asked, finally making eye contact, but still business as usual.

“I like my clients to see their account sheets every quarter and I was wondering… well, some of the ladies were asking for a new machine.”

Patton’s eyebrows rose at that and he asked, “What kind of machine?”

“Refrigerated,” Bao said, pulling out a brochure. “Some of them want healthier food.”

Patton nodded, understanding their problem. He rarely ate junk food and he sometimes forgot to stock his mini fridge with healthy snacks.

“Okay,” Patton said, perusing the brochure. “Email me a price breakdown and I’ll get back to you on it. Sound good?”

Bao nodded. Usually he would say his goodbyes at this point and walk out, but he needed to float him the information. As Patton was leafing through the brochure, Bao cleared his throat. He decided to just come right out with it.

“I hear they’re forming a government after all,” Bao said, bracing himself for Patton’s reaction.

Patton set the brochure down gently and slowly met Bao’s gaze.

“Where did you hear that?” Patton asked, a tinge of anger in his voice.

“Around,” Bao said dumbly. “I’ve been hearing it all over. One of my accounts is someone on the committee,” he said, lying. “They say it’s a done deal.”

“Do they now?” Patton said, giving the young man an icy glare. “What else did you hear?” Patton asked.

Bao pulled up a chair, and for the next twenty minutes, he told Patton everything he knew.

Charlie was in bed, just about to go to sleep when his phone rang.

“Hello,” he said grumpily.

“Charlie, tell me you’re watching this,” came Anna’s voice through his earpiece.

“Watching what?” Charlie mumbled, trying to clear the sleep out of his voice.

“The news. I don’t know how this happened, but someone found out,” she said, trying to keep the panic out of her voice.

The committee had most of the details for the town’s government hammered out, but they weren’t ready to announce anything. Charlie and Anna knew that most people wouldn’t care, and that those who did care would be vastly outnumbered. People like the thought of government, Charlie had told the committee seemingly thousands of times. It brings a sense of safety and stability.

“Hurry Charlie,” she said, frustration creeping into her voice.

“Okay darling. I’ll watch and then call you back.”

Charlie found the remote and flipped on the TV.

“So Mr. Andrews, where did you hear this?” asked the female reporter.

Before venturing to Blue Creek, Devin Andrews had owned a small cell phone store in Nebraska. He was middle-aged, overweight, with mostly gray hair and bad wire-framed glasses.

“I heard it from another Blue Creek resident,” he said simply and confidently.

When the big recession of 2008 hit, his business was greatly damaged. Not only because of lagging sales, but because it was difficult to get loans to operate his business. As the country was driven further into the recession by bad economic policy, he had to lay off all but one of his employees—his own son. His frustration led him to joining his local Tea Party group.

“And who is that?” the reporter asked sweetly, but the man could tell she was digging for something he didn’t want to reveal.

“I’d rather not say,” Andrews said, trying to maintain his cool.

The reporter asked the same question in a different way, but Andrews stonewalled her.

“I don’t see how it matters. We’re talking about a very small group of people that want to establish a government for everybody and not giving everybody a say,” he said, finally betraying his annoyance.

The reporter was taken aback at his sudden anger, but returned her face to its normal, plastic, fake smile.

“Well, we just want to be able to follow up,” she said, betraying a little frustration herself.

The man glared at her, shaking his head.

“As always, you’re looking at the wrong story. The story is that a small group of people want to establishment a government for Blue Creek and we don’t know who these people are. Where are they from? What do they want to do? What will the government be like? Will it be based on the Constitution or will it be something new? Why don’t you find out who this ‘committee’ is,” he said, flashing his fingers as imaginary quotation marks, “and find out what they’re planning?”

The young reporter was blushing now, angry that some fat old guy was trying to tell her how to do her job.

“Sir,” she said, gathering herself, “I’m trying to get this angle locked down and then we’ll move on.”

Andrews laughed at her, shaking his head again.

“You’re just trying to cover for them. I bet you know who they are and you’re spewing out their talking points. Look,” he said, staring directly into the camera, imagining that he was speaking directly to his neighbors, “you people need to wake up and figure out what’s going on here. You think a government won’t affect you? Get involved. Ask questions.”

The camera returned to the reporter, who was now visibly upset with her guest’s rant.

“Thank you Mr. Andrews,” she said, her hands demurely in her lap. “We’ll now go back to the anchors’ desk.”

“Go get ‘em!” Patton yelled at the TV. He was up on his feet, clapping and smiling down at his fiancé. “I told you he could do it,” he said, beaming.

Patton had recruited Devin to appear on the news. The two had started as clients of one another’s businesses, but they quickly became friends once they realized they had similar political beliefs. One of Devin’s friends knew the owner of the news station and the two had finagled Devin’s appearance.

Jennifer rolled her eyes and pulled on Patton’s back pocket to make him sit back down on the couch.

“Alright, alright,” she said, feigning annoyance. “Can we turn the channel now?”

Patton sat and handed her the remote. She selected a very boring and depressing show to watch, but Patton smiled the whole way through it.

“What the hell was that?” Charlie raved.

Anna clenched her phone and was tempted to throw it against the wall. As annoyed as she’d been watching the interview, Charlie was annoying her even more.

“How the hell should I know Charlie?” she asked. “I’ve never seen the guy before. Calm down. We need to think this through.”

The cat was out of the bag. They would need to devise a strategy to confront the opposition that was obviously forming in the shadows. The plan had been to sneak the thing through and get it to a vote by the loyal sheep of Blue Creek. That plan, however, had been shot to hell.

“When can we meet?” Charlie asked, still angry, but Anna could tell that he was trying to calm himself.

Anna sighed. It was past ten o’clock and she was in no mood for his anger. And she was especially not in the mood to deny his advances.

“Tomorrow. It’s late and I’m tired.”

Her desire had been to see Charlie in person as little as possible, but this was something they were going to have to figure out face to face. They might have to get Travis involved again, and when that happened, people tended to get hurt.

Word of the interview with Devin Andrews spread by word of mouth. The TV station refused to post it on their website, but it reached Blue Creek’s social sites nonetheless. Discussions led to further questions and it got a larger portion of the community interested in the potential government and what effect that might have on them. A group spearheaded by Patton and others was able to force the committee, led by Charlie Henry, out into the open for a public discussion. Eventually, the committee agreed to hold a forum where concerned citizens could ask questions, raise concerns, and air grievances. The meeting was held at a school auditorium. When the meeting was called to order, the venue was filled to capacity. Additionally, thousands of citizens were logged onto the intranet site to watch the proceedings.

Many spies, Bao included, attended the meeting, knowing that its outcome was going to have huge ramifications for the town. They were all logged onto a chat room where they could post their reactions in real time. They all filed independent reports when the meeting was over, but many Insight employees and researchers watched in real time. The most captivating narrative was in the spies’ chat room.

The person who’d infiltrated the committee wrote cryptically: Meeting originally set to begin at 7 P.M. now delayed. C. Henry and other members visibly nervous and agitated. Have it on good authority that committee plan was to establish gov’t by stealth. Rumor that P. Larsen behind movement to slow down establishment.

A spy in the crowd wrote: Crowd visibly anxious and jittery. Some with pro-government signs. Others with anti-government signs. Standing room only. Blue Creek Fire Service had to clear many out and send them home. Most in crowd seem to understand importance of mtg.

Then another wrote: Mtg. finally begins. Emcee is introducing committee. P. Larsen D. Andrews spotted among audience. Expecting fireworks. Question from crowd about how people will vote on different measures told via intranet, mobile devices, paper ballot under each chair available.

The person on the committee wrote from the stage: Before cmte came onto stage overheard C. Henry telling another member, “If Larsen causes a ruckus I’ll wring his gd neck.”

Another wrote: Emcee claims that 75% of eligible voters are either present or watching online. Unlikely, but it has been agreed that only 50% needed to be “present.”

Another wrote: Committee member reading proposals: exec. officer to be called “Governor”. Leg. body will be called “Council” with 21 members…serve 3 yrs with 7 members up for election every year. Gov. and Council will appoint three judges.

Another wrote: Proposed voting age of 18. Voted on and agreed to.

Another wrote: P. Larsen standing to be recognized. Asks that government be based on U.S. Constitution, including only first 10 amend. C. Henry says that Gov. and Council should decide laws and will be voted on after that. P. Larsen reiterates need for U.S. Const. before gov’t is established, says “How are we going to be able to hold (gov’t officials) accountable” without Const.? Heated back and forth between Henry and Larsen. Larsen getting crowd behind him. Asks for vote on whether to use U.S. Const. Henry objects, states that much of Const. doesn’t apply to this gov’t as there is no bicameral leg. Asks to reword Bill of Rights into plainer English. Will vote amend. by amend.

Both the in-person and online audiences considered amendments one by one. They were reworded and then voted upon by the people. Many amendments, like instituting and ending Prohibition, were considered to not be applicable so they were skipped. However, all of the Bill of Rights was passed, even the 3rd, which prevents the government from quartering soldiers in private citizens’ homes.

The meeting dragged on and many people began to log off and leave the meeting, but enough people remained to make the votes legal. By the time the voting was over, Charlie Henry was about to kill someone.

The spy on the stage wrote: C. Henry visibly angry. Hands shaking. Speaking angrily with other cmte member A. Radinski.

When all was said and done, the long-awaited showdown between Charlie Henry and Patton—at least by those who knew about the first confrontation—did not disappoint. There were few, if any people, who thought that Mr. Henry came out on top in the exchange. After the meeting was over, Jennifer and Mike congratulated him, but he didn’t feel like celebrating.

He’d won the battle, but lost the war. A government was going to be established. It was like the Allied invasion on D-Day. The war wasn’t won that day. In fact, it would take nearly a year to make the Germans surrender. However, they did eventually win. Not that Patton wanted to liken himself to the Nazis, but the analogy fit. The committee took a beating, but they established a toe hold. It would only be a matter of time before they expanded their influence on Blue Creek.

His friends complimented Patton on his debating prowess and congratulated him on his “victory.”

“I didn’t win anything,” Patton said, surprising everyone.

Confused, Mike Wilson asked, “What do you mean? You just kicked the old man’s ass.”

Patton shrugged.

“That’s the thing. Just because I beat him tonight doesn’t mean that it’s over. People like him don’t give up. We have to keep paying attention to what they do. Otherwise, they’ll end up doing what it is they had planned all along.”

Mike, Frank and Shontae, and Jennifer were deflated. Noticing that he’d taken all of the fun out of the room, Patton tried to put a positive spin on it.

“But I did kick his ass,” he said, grinning widely.

“That son of a bitch!” Charlie screamed, throwing his whiskey glass against the wall. It shattered and sprayed bits of glass all over himself. The next morning he would notice the broken ceramic tiles on his wall where the glass had hit. Charlie resembled a child, standing there, just inside the open door. He held his chin to his chest, shoulders hunched, fists clenched. He was literally seething.

Why couldn’t they have killed Larsen when they had the chance? He walked to his bar and made himself a vodka tonic. He slugged it down and then made another. He fought the urge to throw the second glass. He had a big enough mess to clean up already.

How could that bastard have outwitted him so easily?

Charlie went into a small washroom and turned on the light. He splashed cold water onto his face. He looked at himself in the mirror. It was an ugly sight. Disheveled hair, bloodshot eyes, drawn and pale skin. Charlie would usually smoke some marijuana to take the edge off, but this was going to take something with a little more punch. Charlie reached into his nightstand and pulled out a small black leather case, unzipped it, and readied the contents. He removed a small plastic bag from his night stand. It contained an off-white colored powder, a spoon, and a lighter.

Charlie was trying to quit this habit, nasty as it was. Shooting heroin was like playing Russian roulette, he knew, especially when he was amped up. He prepped the dose using pure muscle memory. He could, and sometimes did, do it in the dark. Charlie depressed the plunger and untied a rubber hose from his arm. The rush was immediate and incredible. In his mind’s eye, the last thing he could see before drifting off was Anna’s glorious, naked body. Then… everything… went black.

CHAPTER 13

As autumn progressed so did preparations for the implementation of the government. Elections would be held in January and candidates were lining up to run for either the office of governor or as a member of the Council. A new government building was being built a block south of Main Street. A local architect had been commissioned to design it and his renderings were placed on the Microcosm.org website. It was going to be a very large and simple, yet beautiful red brick building. The design called for three stories, including a basement. The building and its annexes would swallow up nearly an entire city block. A groundbreaking ceremony was scheduled for January, just after the elections. A sense of calm was beginning to emerge. Many citizens felt that with a government in place, and with an official police department and fire department, the town’s residents would be much safer.

Insight spies were out, trying to gauge citizens’ feelings about the government. An unofficial poll of hundreds of voting aged residents showed that a large majority wanted a government and many felt that the experiment’s organizers had been irresponsible by not having a government in place. Along with the approval of the establishment of a government was the sense that following the U.S Constitution was the only way to go. The once divisive issue of establishing a government was beginning to reunite the people. A sense of calm, after the turbulent and violent summer, was beginning to return to the town, as was the sense of community.

The deadline to file petitions to run for office was October 1st, less than two weeks away. If Anna was going to persuade David to run for the town’s governor she decided she would have to tell him right away. That would give her a week to help him overcome any objections he might have.

There was another problem—Charlie. The thought of him caused Anna to reflexively roll her eyes. The physical relationship was long since over, something that Charlie complained about less and less. Her problem was that she needed him and his experience. He needed her for her youth, her energy, and her ability to network with younger people. They both acknowledged, furthermore, that they needed a face to their movement. That’s where David would come in.

Charlie could see the benefits of including David Asher. He was handsome and charismatic, relatively intelligent, and was articulate. However, he’d discovered through his spy network that Anna had become romantically involved with him. This fact irritated him every time Anna brought up David’s name. Still, there were bigger things to worry about. He was willing to overlook Anna’s relationship with the younger man, but it wasn’t easy.

Despite all of her reservations to ask David to join their consortium, he proved to be willing. Not just willing, but eager. What Anna didn’t know was that David had known for weeks that she was going to ask him to join her and Charlie’s enterprise. What she and Charlie didn’t know was that David Asher was no pushover. He would have his say, or he would not participate.

Anna and Charlie’s followers quickly got the signatures needed for David to run for Blue Creek governor. They were the first campaign to organize, to raise money, and to advertise. Before any other prospective candidates had even found campaign managers, the Asher campaign was already well underway.

Now that the battle with Charlie Henry and company was now over, Patton was able to concentrate on other things, namely his wedding. Once the dust settled from the government fight, he realized how much he’d neglected his fiancé and their planning. Most of the big things were already planned, but it was the small things that needed to be decided. A pianist for their ceremony and reception, final arrangements for the honeymoon, flight and lodging for his mother.

Patton was in a daze thinking about these things when he looked up and glanced at a billboard. It was one of only a few billboards in all of Blue Creek and he drove by it every day since it was erected. This time, however, something caught Patton’s eye that he had never noticed before. It was an image of a smiling man. He was at least ten years younger than Patton, possibly more. He was extremely handsome—even Patton had to admit that. He had blondish hair and crystal blue eyes. There was something about the smile that seemed familiar.

Patton stewed about it for the rest of his ten minute drive into his office. He’d seen that face somewhere before. Not just in passing either. Patton reached his building and parked. He walked to his office and greeted his employees as he always did. Still, his mind was on that face. He logged onto the Blue Creek intranet site. There was that picture again, the same advertisement. Patton finally took the time to read what the ad was for—the man was running for Blue Creek governor. He clicked on the ad and a new webpage opened up.

The main page featured a few different pictures of David Asher and some stock photos of people, supposedly Blue Creek residents. There was the obligatory photo of Asher shaking someone’s hand, his sleeves rolled up, his tie loosened and askew. Veins stood out from his tan, muscular forearms. Patton clicked on a hyperlink that said “What I Believe” and waited for the page to load.

The title and some text loaded immediately, but Patton could tell that a picture was also loading. Once the picture appeared, it all became clear.

“The guy from the train!” Patton shouted. His secretary flew into his office, her face pale, obviously alarmed by Patton’s outburst.

“What?” she nearly shouted herself.

Patton gestured for her to calm down and that everything was okay.

“Sorry. It’s just… I saw someone and I finally figured out where I know him from.”

She looked at him blankly.

“The guy from the billboard out by my farm. The guy running for governor. You know, the one that’s all over the intranet.”

Recognition dawned on his secretary’s face.

“You mean the really hot guy?”

Patton blushed and then smiled. He realized how frantic he had been. He chuckled lightly and patted her on the shoulder.

“Yeah. The hot guy. Sorry I startled you. I met him on the train coming from California. He was all full of himself back then. I guess I shouldn’t be surprised that he’s running for governor.”

His secretary nodded again, relieved. She turned and exited Patton’s office, trying to reduce her heart rate. Patton returned to his computer screen and began to read Asher’s website, page by page. What he believed in. Why he was running. What his plans were for Blue Creek. Why he was the best person for the job. The typical BS that politicians claim.

It was while reading that Patton remembered something the man—this David Asher—had said. Someone needed to “shake things up.” It had struck Patton at the time, and it bothered him now. The context of the comment returned to Patton’s mind. This Asher was saying that it was up to individuals to make things happen politically—to purposely push the town in a certain direction. This seemed to be a violation of the purpose of the experiment. Things were supposed to naturally come about by people’s actions and reactions.

Then Patton realized that the problem with tyrannical governments was the leaders’ desire to manipulate and control events. This was done first to gain power. Once power was achieved, these people could then control the people. If you can control the people you can control their resources. If you can control resources you can add to your power through money and political influence. Patton realized that this Asher campaign was what this was all about. Something was going on and he didn’t like it.

Mike Wilson had similar misgivings about the impending government, but he wasn’t as politically savvy as Patton. He wanted to get involved somehow but had no idea what to do. Mike drove the highway the circled the valley. It was his way of decompressing after a hard day. Mike rounded a bend and saw the billboard that had set Patton off. Instead of just driving by it, he pulled his truck to the side of the road and stepped out onto the shoulder of the highway.

The billboard was well lit, even at that time of night. Mike wondered if they kept the lights on all night, but he wasn’t about to camp under the sign to find out. He looked up at the grinning face and felt a sudden disdain for this man, even though he didn’t know who he was. Yes, there was something he could do and once he figured out what that was he was going to put his entire soul behind it.

Patton was paranoid about many things, but he was different about this thing. Maybe Patton was acting strangely because the situation was so close to home. If Patton was right about this guy, his ideas would most definitely affect their business and their livelihoods. Instead of getting worked up as he usually did, Patton was quiet, almost sullen. He had a determined look about him that Mike hadn’t really seen before. Mike wasn’t a weak man, but he had to admit that Patton intimidated him. They were friends, but there was something about the man that Mike couldn’t explain.

Mike shook himself from his daze, realizing during his drive home that he’d stood under the sign for over a half hour. He finally climbed into his bed around midnight. Before he fell asleep, he understood what he had to do. He was going to run for governor and try to stop what Patton claimed was going to be a runaway train. Mike clicked off his reading lamp. As he fell asleep, he prayed that he could make some difference here. Here in his new home.

Anna was accustomed to her lover’s moods, but this was the worst she’d ever seen. She’d almost had to beg him to come to her apartment in the first place and when he made love to her it was angry and passionless. Almost as soon as they were finished, he was up, out of bed, and getting dressed. She grabbed at his arm as he was trying to pull up his pants and he looked back her angrily.

“What!”

She knew better than ask him what was wrong. Instead she sat back on her bed and watched him finish getting dressed. If he wanted to talk about what was bothering him he could bring it up. Without a word, however, David Asher grabbed his keys, his wallet, and his phone and made his way towards the front door. Not wanting him to leave angry, Anna followed him with only a sheet wrapped around her naked body.

“David!”

He stopped and turned but didn’t say anything. Anna had gotten him to stop from leaving but now she didn’t know what to say. Her questions seemed to be in her eyes so he finally let her know what was bothering him.

“I met your friend Travis,” he said, letting the implications of his statement sink in.

It took a few moments but the meaning finally did sink in. In all of her attempts to keep David separate from the rest of her life, apparently, something had leaked.

“And?” she said, not wanting to admit to anything she didn’t have to.

“And… he told me about yours and Charlie’s plans,” he said, pausing again to let this sink in.

Anna said nothing but stood there, turmoil on her face. The cat was out of the bag, so it did no good to try to lie to him. However, she didn’t want to cause any more trouble than was necessary.

“Plans?” she asked innocently.

“To make me your poster boy while you and Charlie tell me what to do and what to say.”

She chewed on this for a moment, trying to think of a way to spin it. She suddenly wished that Charlie was there with his quick tongue.

“I don’t know why Travis would have given you that impression. We want you to be a candidate, yes,” she said, proud that she’d pushed back a little bit and not shied away from his anger. It suddenly dawned on her that Charlie and David were more alike than she’d previously realized.

“I don’t think he gave me an impression. I think he told me what was said to him in confidence.”

Anna wanted to roll her eyes. Instead, she moved towards him, grabbed him by the arms and pulled him towards her couch. He finally relented and the both sat down.

“I don’t know why he would have told you that. If you want our support, you’re going to have to listen to our ideas, but we are going to have to listen to your ideas,” she said, trying to avoid a motherly tone. While she only partially agreed with what she’d just said, she’d made it sound good.

With no immediate response, David just sat there thinking, seeming to be assuaged. Anna went in for the kill.

“Without Charlie’s experience, my skill, and your talents, none of this will work,” she said confidently. “But if we’re divided in this they’ll chew us up.”

David nodded slightly. What she said made sense, but he still felt like she was trying to play him somehow. He stood slowly and looked down at her.

“I’ll go along with this, but if you guys try to screw with me I’ll hurt you both.”

Before Anna could respond, David walked out and slammed the door behind him.

Mike Wilson felt hesitant about his decision to run for governor, but the deadline to file was fast approaching. He knew that he would need Patton’s help—at least some money, and probably some help with his actual campaign. Running was the right thing for him to do, but he was afraid that Patton would laugh in his face. Instead, he was shocked to find out that Patton had reached the same conclusion at almost the same time.

Patton had the passion and knowhow, but he didn’t feel comfortable as the face of a campaign. Instead, he would help Mike in his run. He didn’t think it would take much money. With his outgoing personality, his charm, and his ability to succeed, Mike had a good chance of winning.

Mike was one of seven people to submit paperwork to run for the town’s executive office—five men and two women. Once the deadline to enter the race passed, a meeting was held for all of the candidates. The meeting gave Mike a chance to size up all of his opponents. The rules of the election were laid out at the meeting.

First, the candidates would be given a couple of months to campaign. On the first Election Day, there would be an initial round of voting. If any candidate were to win an all-out majority, they would be declared the winner. If that didn’t happen, the two highest vote getters would move on to the second round. All of the candidates were given the opportunity to introduce themselves. This would be their first opportunity to campaign since the local press was going to be present.

David Asher was the only candidate that impressed Mike. He was young, probably in his late twenties or early thirties. He was above average in height, very fit, and had movie-star looks. When he stood and introduced himself, he didn’t stammer, or struggle with what he wanted to say, to the point that he seemed rehearsed. After everyone introduced themselves, Mike felt that Asher was the only person that could beat him.

Mike had read all about Asher on his campaign website. He knew what he wanted to do. Meeting the man in person was a different story, however. David Asher was very charismatic. He dominated the room with his presence. Mike had a larger-than-life personality, but he decided to speak only when necessary. Asher, on the other hand, was switched on at all times. He kept up a healthy chatter, even while others were speaking. It was distracting to everyone, but they seemed to give him a pass because of his looks and persona.

Mike returned and reported to Patton, who had a long list of questions. Patton would need to develop a special strategy, he knew. David Asher was going to be the favorite. It was going to take some creativity to overcome his natural advantages.

Feeling overwhelmed with finalizing his wedding plans, however, Patton sought for help in organizing Mike’s campaign. They advertised on the Blue Creek intranet site and on social media sites, finally settling on a young woman who had experience in some Republican Party campaigns in the Midwest. She would help Mike put things together while Patton was on his honeymoon. They would have over two months to mount a campaign so they all thought they would have a good chance to win.

“What did you think of them?” Anna said, running her finger along his bare shoulder blade. David’s body was turned away from her, covered from the waist down with a cotton sheet.

He chuckled lightly and said, “Nothing. Those people are a joke. You should have seen it. I felt like I was a Wal-Mart after midnight.”

She laughed out loud, her bare chest rubbing against his back. “None of them can beat you?” she asked, still giggling.

“Not really. They have no idea what they’re up against,” he said confidently.

She sighed, continuing to rub his back.

“Not surprised.” Anna pulled her hand away to cover a yawn.

She loved these times, lying here naked with him. Tonight he’d been especially good. He was always better in bed after a confidence boosting experience. They didn’t talk for another moment and she drifted off to sleep.

When David felt her breathing slow he rose quietly out of the bed. He quickly got dressed, knelt down and kissed her forehead. He exited her apartment, quietly closing the door behind him..

Charlie Henry seethed behind his stone-silent face. In the passenger seat of his Cadillac was a .38 snub-nose revolver he had procured from Travis Snedley. When he saw David Asher walk out of Anna’s house, his impulse was to jump out and confront him. However, Charlie reconsidered. David Asher, though a mental pigmy compared to himself, was much younger and stronger and he would most likely put him in the hospital. Charlie decided that it would be better to slink up behind him in the dark and shoot him in the back of the head. Then, Charlie could stand over him and watch while the life drained from his eyes.

Charlie’s personal jealousy had begun to tangle with his goals and that was something he’d never allowed himself to do. That pretty boy was his ticket to ultimate political power. The desire to lead this people, even indirectly, won out and it saved David Asher’s life… for now. Once they were firmly entrenched in the seat of power, they could get rid of Asher—maybe make him a martyr, the way Lyndon Johnson had done with John Kennedy.

A plan was starting to percolate, but the question was whether he would have the guts to pull it off when the right time presented itself.

The weather changed as mid October approached. Indian Summer lasted almost all the way through September, but the October days began to cool. However, a rain storm seemed to bring in the cool Autumn weather for good. For Bao An Hahn, who’d spent nearly his whole life in the Bay area, the new weather felt like winter. He’d prepared for the inevitable change in weather months before, buying top-of-the-line winter clothing, but he hadn’t been prepared mentally.

The biggest problem with the colder weather, however, was the fact that he had to be outside so much more than he was used to. As a computer programmer by day, and hacker by night, Bao had rarely ventured outside in any kind of weather. Now, as the owner of a vending company, he had to work his route—either rain, snow, or shine. If he didn’t, he might lose his cover as an Insight Resource spy within the experiment. He grumbled about it every day with his bosses, but he always got out and filled his machines.

The one thing that motivated him every day was knowing how much his fellow spies envied him. He was easily the closest to Mike Wilson, the only person who could possibly beat David Asher in the upcoming election. Bao and Mike had developed a friendship. This helped Bao create the most interesting and in-depth reports about the political goings on in Blue Creek. He was also privy to the private lives of those who worked with Mike, including the notorious Patton Larsen. Bao had even succeeded in finagling an invitation to Patton’s wedding through Mike.

A serious problem was developing, however. Bao found it increasingly more difficult to maintain his cover as an Insight spy. He’d already leaked information to Patton about the committee that organized the government. Fortunately for him, he claimed he’d gotten the information via his job as a vending machine owner. For his part, Bao found it difficult not to continue to leak information about the Asher campaign to Mike—information he received from another spy who’d gotten a paid job with the campaign.

It was a daily battle and today was no different. The Asher campaign spy had reported the connection between the candidate and two members of the organizing committee, namely Charlie Henry and Anna Radinski. She had found it troubling that these two would be directly involved in a campaign. The report was also troubling to some of the higher ups at Insight Resources, but they had no power to do anything. The experimenters wouldn’t allow any kind of intervention because that would defeat the purpose of the experiment. On the other hand, no one in Washington was listening anymore.

Bao wanted to walk into Patton’s office, close the door, and spill everything he knew about David Asher and those behind his campaign. However, he was afraid he would lose his job. He had no doubt that Patton would do something with the information and when he did so, it would become obvious how Patton Larsen had come by the information in the first place.

No, Bao decided, he would sit back and let things play out… unless things got really bad.

CHAPTER 14

Soft piano music played as Jennifer started slowly down the curved stairway. The music was from the Pride and Prejudice film starring Keira Knightley. It was Jennifer’s favorite music and it seemed to perfectly match the mood of the day. When Patton first saw Jennifer standing at the top step he had to catch his breath. Her wedding dress had been a secret and Patton was suddenly glad. The strapless gown showed off Jennifer’s tanned and toned shoulders and arms. Lace gloves covered her skin past her elbows. The gown itself was mostly simple, but Jennifer looked gorgeous. When their eyes met, tears stung at her eyes and she fought the urge to wipe at them.

It was a crisp, but beautiful October evening. A few soft clouds dotted the darkening blue sky, which could be seen through the gigantic, ornate windows. The sun was beginning to descend, sending its array of colors through the sky. There wasn’t a place classy enough in Blue Creek to hold a wedding so Jennifer found this venue. It used to be a privately owned home, but new owners converted it to a wedding chapel and reception hall. It offered a breathtaking view of the Great Salt Lake and the mountains to the West. However, while many of the guests were enjoying the panoramic views, Patton only had eyes for his bride.

Patton’s mind began to drift. The music, the room, Jennifer’s dress made him think of his first wedding. It wasn’t like he was yearning for those times—those years with his first wife. Instead, it was a chance to dwell with her, with his departed children. His old life and his new life were one again. No longer would he need to keep them separated with some imaginary wall. Without noticing, tears began to stream down Patton’s face.

Jennifer was off the stairs now, making her way down a cream-colored carpet. Patton stood alongside a Mormon bishop who had been recruited to perform the ceremony. She held her bouquet close to her chest and Patton could see that her knuckles were going white from the grip. As she reached the dais, Patton reached out and took her hand, helping her up the two steps. The bishop greeted them and then they took each other by both hands and stared into one another’s eyes as if no one else in the world existed.

Jennifer laughed and the movement revealed the muscles in her back. Patton traced the line of them with his forefinger, then down her scapula to the middle of her back where her well defined back muscles created a little ridge. He reversed the path and she almost started purring. They were both naked with only a flat, white sheet covering them. Jennifer marveled because this was the first time she’d ever seen Patton, now her husband, completely relaxed and at ease. He seemed to always be carrying some sort of burden. That’s how type-A people are, she thought. He was now actually, and visibly, content. No worries looked good on him. She could definitely get used to it.

“Are you happy?” she asked him, her back turned to him, but welcoming his touch.

He made a quizzical look that she couldn’t see and asked, “Is that a rhetorical question?”

She giggled and said, “I guess so. You seem pretty relaxed right now.”

Patton chuckled. “Weren’t you here just a few minutes ago?” He sighed and rolled over onto his back, putting his hands behind his head. She rolled over and snuggled close to him. She loved hearing his heartbeat and feeling the air go in and out of his lungs.

Not wanting to ruin his good mood, she asked, “What do you want to do tomorrow?”

He leaned up and looked down at her.

“This,” he said, kissing her softly and passionately.

When the kiss was over she pushed him away and laughed.

“No, silly. Of course we’ll do that, but we can’t do that all day,” she said.

He had a pretend hurt look on his face and asked, “why not?”

A devilish grin crossed her face and she said, “Honey, it’s not like you’re thirty anymore.”

He rolled his eyes and he dropped down onto his pillow, laughing loudly. Once he recovered he said, “Touché.”

They bandied about different ideas and didn’t come up with anything. They decided to look for things to do on the Internet in the morning. In the meantime, Patton tried his best to show his wife, that although he wasn’t thirty anymore, he was far from being an old man.

The next day they drove to Salt Lake City. They ate at a Japanese steakhouse and saw a movie. They enjoyed being away from their lives in Blue Creek. It was a strange feeling for Patton—being away was like having a weight off his shoulders. All of his concerns about the impending government and the elections had vanished, at least temporarily. He just wanted to enjoy his new wife and be away from everyone they knew. They flew to San Francisco the next morning to start their honeymoon. They would spend a week touring northern California, including the Napa Valley.

Patton then took Jennifer to meet his mother. As expected, the two women, whose mutual love for Patton gave them something in common, felt an instant affection for one another. Patton drove Jennifer around his hometown. Seeing the places Patton had played with his friends and had gone to school made Jennifer feel like she was beginning to know him—the way a wife should know her husband.

They returned to Blue Creek during the first week of November. By the time they got home, the weather had cooled drastically. Cold rain fell almost every day and leaves had already changed colors. In contrast to the cooler weather, Patton’s attitude about life was warming. It amazed Jennifer to watch him. He was almost a completely different man now. He no longer saw a conspiracy around every corner. He just went to work and then came home to spend time with her.

Soon, though, Patton returned to the realities of his new life. He had a business and a political campaign to run. Mike had also spent some time away from Blue Creek, but had returned before Patton. He was antsy to get his campaign started in earnest. David Asher’s campaign was already in full bloom. Early polls, as unscientific as they were, showed Asher with a near majority, which would guarantee him the victory and avoid a runoff with any of the other candidates. It was time for Patton to get into the game again.

Asher‘s face was grim, his face pale. What Travis just told him disturbed him deeply. His demeanor wasn’t merely a reaction to Charlie and Anna’s plans to keep him under their thumb—Travis’s suggestion on how he could avoid that scenario was also was nagging at him. He drained a whiskey glass and winced as it burned. He spent a long moment thinking, trying to add up all of the costs and benefits on some sort of mental ledger. Finally he looked at Travis, trying to read his face as if they were playing a hand of poker.

What Travis had just suggested to him was to kill them, or as he’d put it, “take them out.” Asher had wanted to scoff at the suggestion, but there was something in the younger man’s eyes that let him know that he was serious.

“You saying you could do them? Why would you do that? I thought Charlie brought you here.”

Travis nodded and leaned back in his seat, a mirthless grin on his face.

“He did. But he’s crazy. He’s erratic. He’s overly emotional and is going to ruin everything we’ve already done.”

This statement revealed many things at once. First, Charlie Henry wasn’t as much in control as he probably assumed. Whether it was Anna or Travis that was actually pulling the strings, David didn’t know. It was clear that the real power behind this thing was still up for grabs, though. The second thing it showed was that Travis was a true believer in what they were doing. All along, David had thought of him as a hired gun, a mercenary.

The third, and potentially most important thing this statement revealed was that Travis was implicitly offering to enter into a partnership with him. Instead of David Asher being the third wheel, he could be a partner. He could have more control and more influence. He sat back in his seat, pensively looking around the bar. It was a lot of information to take in at once. Still, he had to be clear.

“So you’re saying it could be you and me in it together?” David asked finally.

Travis nodded, happy that the man understood his implication.

“How do I know I can trust you?” David asked, then taking a swig of beer from a glass.

Travis shrugged noncommittally.

“You can’t know that, just like I don’t know if I can trust you. But there are a lot of people here that aren’t happy with Charlie. He’s a smart guy. He’s experienced. He knows a lot of players. But he’s—”

“—erratic,” David said, interrupting him. “Yeah, you mentioned that. My question is, why would we move on them before we even got control of this thing? It would be easier to take something that has already been established.”

Travis nodded again. He was impressed. Of course he and his cohorts had thought of this, but they were anxious to get Henry out of the way as soon as possible.

“That’s a good point,” Travis acknowledged. “But you don’t have to work with that son of a bitch every day. You don’t have to get his calls at three in the morning because he’s angry or depressed. Like I say, he’s not easy to deal with. But… you make a good point. Maybe we should wait until you’re in office.”

“No maybes about it,” David said after a pause. “I’d insist on it. It’s pointless otherwise.”

Travis nodded calmly, his arms folded across his chest. He was glad to hear that his companion was seriously considering his proposition. It would be messy, but he knew that they could work together. Hell, working with anyone other than Charlie Henry would be better by default.

“Okay,” Travis said then pursed his lips. “You win, you get the ball rolling, and then we start to make a transition.”

Transition, David thought. A wry smile formed on his face. Transition was another way of saying “We kill everyone in our way and then we take control.” But Asher accepted the guarded words. No reason to broadcast their plans to the patrons in the bar.

“Good, then,” David said, offering his hand.

Travis shook it firmly. He sat grabbed his beer and drained the remainder of its contents. He belched lightly and wiped his lips. He stood.

“So are we good?” Travis said, clearly ready to leave.

“Yeah, for now.”

“We’ll be in contact,” Travis said and then walked towards the bar.

“We” will be in contact, not “I” will be in contact, David thought. Why the “we” instead of “I”? He wondered if Travis was trying to intimidate him—to make him feel that he was past the point of no return in their agreement. David swallowed hard then thought he might be reading too much into the statement.

He swirled the remnants of a whiskey and Coke in his glass and then swallowed it down. In an attempt to get his mind off of Travis’s last statement, he began to scope the bar for tonight’s companion.

“That’s him,” Patton said, handing the binoculars to Mike. He raised a digital video camera and started to film the man walking down the sidewalk that was now wet with rain.

Mike held the binoculars to his eyes and clicked his tongue. “That shaggy haired kid is in cahoots with David Asher huh?”

“Uh huh,” Patton said quietly, nodding grimly.

While Travis and Asher were sitting together in their booth, Patton walked by and saw them. There were obviously in the middle of a serious conversation because neither of them noticed him.

Patton and Mike followed David Asher to the bar to see what he would do and who he would talk to. It seemed strange to Patton that he would meet up with another man. And it was something about David Asher’s drinking buddy that raised those silent alarm bells inside of his brain. It was an instinct he’d developed in his old life, in his old work. There was something going on here, Patton thought, and it wasn’t innocent.

“Did he walk here?” Mike asked.

“I don’t know,” Patton said, shaking his head. I guess he was here before Asher got here. We followed Asher remember?”

“Well, wherever he’s going,” Mike said, gesturing towards Travis with the binoculars, “he’s not getting there in any kind of hurry.”

The kid was loping along at a leisurely pace, oblivious to the fact that he was being stalked. He got to the corner and then crossed the street. Patton pulled away from the curb and followed him, making sure to stay at least a half block behind their prey. The longhaired man walked another block and then turned left, continuing to walk casually, his hands in his pockets.

“Must be going home,” Mike said, hating the silence. Patton grunted in agreement but said nothing. He had his game face on and he didn’t want any distractions.

The kid walked two and a half more blocks and then jogged diagonally across the street, entering a narrow driveway. There were trees obstructing their view, but it looked to be a small apartment building. Patton drove past, drove halfway up the next block and then turned around. He parked a block away on the opposite side of the apartment building and shut off the engine.

“Looks like this might be where he lives,” Patton said almost to himself. “It’s weird, though. Anyone who wanted to could have a house. Why wouldn’t he have a house instead of living in an apartment?”

They both sat in the dark and pondered the question. Finally Mike said, “Well, people were given a house, a business, a car and cash… or the equivalent in cash, remember?”

Patton hadn’t remembered that fact but that must have been the reason. What was he going to do with all that cash but buy a house, car and what not? It didn’t make sense… yet.

It wasn’t just the loud clattering of pots and pans that let Patton know Jennifer was angry with him. She hadn’t talked to him since he’d tried to sneak into the house just before dawn. Worse, he’d been unwilling to tell her where’d been or what he’d been doing. He was in a tough spot. If he told Jennifer he’d been following people in the streets of Blue Creek all night she would tell him that he was acting crazy and paranoid. Instead, he chose to go with the silent treatment. He would tell her everything once he verified the thing that had been bothering him.

There was something about the guy at the bar. It was his walk or how he carried himself or something Patton couldn’t put his finger on. He watched the video he took the night before. He started the video, paused it, watched it again, rewound it, and watched it yet again. This process went on for nearly an hour and then something clicked. Patton double-clicked a file folder on his desktop and double-clicked an icon. A new video popped up. Patton double clicked the icon and waited. Three minutes into the video he saw it. When Jennifer walked in to tell him breakfast was ready she found Patton watching his computer screen, his mouth wide open with shock.

“What—” she began to ask, but he stopped her with a raised hand.

Patton rewound the video and watched the video again, sliding over so she could see it. Jennifer had seen the footage in question at least a dozen times.

“Why are you watching this again?” she asked, obviously still annoyed with him.

It was the security footage from the break in of Patton’s house months earlier.

“Watch this,” he said without looking at her. He rewound the video a few seconds and clicked play.

“What am I looking for?”

“Just watch. Notice how this guy with the long hair walks. You see that little hitch in his walk?” Patton asked her, pointing at the monitor. “It’s like he’s lifting up on the balls of his feet when he takes a step.”

She grabbed the mouse and rewound it to the beginning. She clicked play and watched it again. Patton was right—he had a noticeable walk. Still, she didn’t see why her husband was in such a huff.

“Okay?” she said cynically.

He frowned at her and took the mouse out of her hand.

“Now… this is video I shot last night. Watch the walk,” he said, pushing play and leaning back so she could get closer to the screen.

The video was shot from behind, and although it was taken outside, the light was similar to the first video. After watching for a few moments, Jennifer gasped loudly, her palm covering her wide-open mouth.

“Same person?” she asked, knowing full well that it was.

Patton nodded solemnly.

“Okay, it’s the same person that broke into our house, but who is he? Why did you take video of him last night?”

Patton leaned back again and crossed his arms, satisfied with his discovery—satisfied that she was finally catching on.

“We weren’t even interested in him… until after we saw him meeting with David Asher.”

He watched her, waiting for the information to register.

“David Asher? Why would the person who broke into our house be meeting with David Asher?”

Patton grimaced and said, “Well… that’s why we followed him home—to see where he lived. Turns out, he lives in an apartment building not far from the bar where they met and talked. They were in there together for over a half hour.”

Her expression told him to keep going.

“We waited and waited. Finally we saw someone coming out of that building this morning.”

He didn’t finish and she was about to explode at him.

“Who!”

He chuckled, glad that he finally had her attention.

“Okay, do you remember that night we went to that restaurant and there was that really young brunette with that really old looking guy?”

She nodded and then her eyes went wide. “Her?”

Patton nodded. “Yep. I’ve got video but I’m sure you believe me right?”

She smirked at him and kicked him playfully on the shin. “Smartass,” she said, obviously no longer angry with him.

Patton chuckled.

“So the person who broke into our house with a gun is connected somehow to the guy who is running to be the governor?”

“Yes. That’s scary but I’m not sure that’s all,” Patton said, contemplative now. “I need to find out more about this kid before the election.”

She nodded at him and said, “Yeah, but don’t you think that if this girl is involved that the old man is in on whatever is going on too?”

“Oh yeah. Absolutely,” Patton said seriously. “He’s got to be.”

Charlie was trying to simultaneously fight off a hangover and pay attention to Anna. Bless her heart, he thought. She won’t let me have her but she’s more than willing to show me practically everything. Anna was wearing one of her jogging outfits. The blue and white Adidas jacket was unzipped halfway down, exposing a plain black sports bra and a generous amount of cleavage.

“So what do you think?” she asked, looking at him with her large, gorgeous green eyes.

He shook his head, confused.

“Sorry Honey. What did you just ask?”

She sighed and shook her head.

“Dammit Charlie! If you’re going to plan a meeting for this early in the morning don’t get fall-down drunk the night before!”

He closed his eyes and rubbed his forehead. Being screamed at by this girl wasn’t helping his hangover any.

“All right all right!” he shouted back, just trying to get her to stop yelling at him. “Now… would you kindly repeat what you just said? I have a hard time concentrating with your tits hanging right in my face,” he said, his eyes still closed. When he opened them he was surprised to see that she was smiling at him.

He chuckled hoarsely and said, “Sorry Honey. Continue.”

Anna sighed then said, “I just asked if we should spend the money to do some polling.”

He laid his head back and closed his eyes again. Without raising back up to speak he said, “Yes, but we need to frame the questions. And we might need to oversample the numbers, you know.”

She laughed at him again. “Charlie, with David running, we’re not going to need to tweak the numbers. We just need to get him on TV. We need to get him out doing speeches. We need…”

“I got it. I’ve played this game before you know,” he said, trying not to show his annoyance with her. “He’s the perfect candidate. We just need to make it about him and nothing else.”

What he didn’t tell her—what really bothered him—was that every time she talked about David Asher, her eyes lit up like night on the Las Vegas strip. He could only imagine what memories conjured those expressions. A twinge of jealousy suddenly made him feel ill.

“What about the message?” she asked.

He grinned at her naiveté.

“The message will come after he’s elected. And it will come to the people in the form of policy. And when some people stand up and piss and moan he’ll get on the TV and make them like it. Just think Obama in 2008.”

“Charlie, these are good ideas we have. You don’t think the people will get behind this?” she asked, offended at this brushing aside.

He looked her in the eye and delivered an answer that nearly took the wind out of her sails.

“No. They won’t. Not with the way things are now. Things are good right now. People are happy. Most of these people have more money and possessions than they’ve ever had before. The good thing is that they’re spending their money like crazy. The haves and have nots thing is already developing. In a year it will be much worse.

“And when some try to remind the people that ‘Hey, we don’t need social programs to help the poor. These people started out with everything everyone else had,’ we’ll put up the smokescreen. We’ll distract and disrupt.”

“Charlie—”

He raised his hand to her.

“It’s not that I don’t believe in what we’re doing,” he said in his grandfatherly voice, “it’s just that we have to create the situation that will allow us to implement our program.”

Anna had never been more disappointed in her life. She felt like the little girl that found out that Santa Claus, the Easter Bunny, and the Tooth Fairy were all fake. She felt disillusioned, an emotion Charlie had dealt with when he was about her age. All her political life she knew that she was right. She believed it when Marx said that capitalism would bring about its own destruction and that socialism would take its place. What Charlie was telling her was that they had to bring about capitalism’s destruction and replace it.

Charlie could sense the turmoil Anna was going through. He eventually understood that Marx had been wrong about history, but not wrong about what created a fair and equitable society. What mattered was the outcome, not the process. Charlie patted the couch beside him and she reluctantly sat next to him. And, like his own patient schoolmasters had done for him, he spent the next couple of hours educating her on how the world actually worked.

CHAPTER 15

Election Day in Blue Creek broke clear and cold. Turnout was expected to be low to moderate. If people turned out in droves, Patton figured that David Asher could pull a majority, thus negating any chance of Mike Wilson becoming Blue Creek’s first governor. To win they needed to get David Asher in a one-on-one runoff and then make the case that Mike Wilson was more qualified to lead. Polling locations opened at two in the afternoon and closed at seven that evening. This allowed business owners to operate normally and still have an opportunity to vote. With little news anywhere else in town, all of Blue Creek’s media outlets constantly reported any updates, no matter how meaningless they were.

The media released their first exit polls at five o’clock. Results showed a likely rout for Asher, who had nearly fifty-seven percent, with Mike Wilson at a just under thirty percent. The rest of the vote was split between the other five candidates. By six, however, and this was just as Patton had predicted, the vote count started to close up. The second exit poll showed that Asher was coming back down towards the fifty-percent line while Mike’s count was increasing. When the polls closed at seven, the count had David Asher at forty-five percent, with Mike Wilson edging up to thirty-five percent.

Although exit polls were often inaccurate, Patton was sure they showed what was going to be the final outcome—the one he wanted, a head-to-head matchup between his candidate and David Asher. It was going to be a tough climb for Mike, but if they could find something negative about Asher, they might just have a chance. Patton had two weeks to put a campaign together. It was going to be difficult, considering the media’s fawning coverage of David Asher. It reminded Patton of the 2008 election, when America’s national media lost their mind for Barack Obama. Asher’s controllers obviously knew what they were doing—they were merely following the playbook that got Obama elected twice.

Because of the campaign, David Asher became the biggest celebrity in Blue Creek. His campaign team transformed him from a candidate for a small town mayor into a rock star. Asher’s face was on billboards, the local newspaper and magazine, and plastered on posters all over town. His face was constantly on television screens and social media videos, either doing interviews or on his commercials. Of course it had a polarizing effect. There were those who loved him, those who hated him, and those who just wanted the damn election to be over with, no matter who won.

Standing in stark contrast to David Asher was Mike Wilson, who was definitely the more serious of the two candidates. He talked about keeping government “light, lean and effective” but his message had not resonated as much as Asher’s mere presence had. Mike wanted to get Asher to commit to a series of televised debates, but to that point, Asher had turned down the offer. Patton knew it was because he was afraid that some of the luster would come off the coin when he had to answer some questions, but Asher’s campaign would never admit to that.

What Patton had to do was to dig deeper into Asher’s connection with the girl and the mystery man from the bar. He thought the trail would ultimately lead to the old man, and he knew that there was something the old man wanted to keep hidden.

Travis felt uneasy. He took a sip of coffee from a gigantic porcelain coffee mug and then set it down on a hand-carved mahogany coaster with a thin, gold inlay. Travis wanted to laugh at how pretentious Charlie was, but he didn’t want to set the old guy off. Not that Travis was afraid of Charlie Henry. He just didn’t want to deal with his infamous temper. The unease came from the way that the old man was looking at him—as if Charlie was a psychiatrist, trying to determine if Travis was telling him the whole story. And although Travis wasn’t a wet-behind-the-ears kid, he had a hard time sitting in front of Charlie Henry’s gaze.

“What does Asher know?” Charlie asked, twirling a pair of reading glasses in his right hand. He was leaned back in a large stuffed leather chair, his feet propped up on a matching Ottoman. Travis took another sip of coffee and held onto his mug this time. He gave a slight shrug and shook his head.

“Has Anna said that she’s told him about his role?” Charlie asked, anger starting to form in his eyes.

Travis just shook his head again.

Charlie sat up and set his feet on the floor, shaking his head at the younger man as stood out of his chair.

“I didn’t bring you here to nod at me,” he said, pacing back in forth in front of the stuffed chair. He stopped and looked at Travis with a piercing gaze. “Well? Are you going to respond?”

Travis set his coffee mug down and looked at Charlie with a playful grin. “Was there a question in there somewhere?”

Not wanting to lose control in front of a subordinate, Charlie decided to say nothing. Knowing that he wasn’t going to get anything out of Travis he invited him to leave.

“He’s coming out,” Mike Wilson said, handing the binoculars to Patton.

Patton didn’t need the glasses to see his prey. He could spot that walk a mile away now. He clicked his tongue against his cheek and exhaled deeply. “If I’m right, the old man lives in that house,” Patton said, feeling like he’d just clicked the last puzzle piece into place.

“Well, I’m sure it is,” Mike said. “But what does that even mean?”

Patton thought about it for a moment.

“I’m not sure,” he said, sighing, “but I’m sure it’s not good whatever it is.”

Two hours later it was just Patton on the stakeout. After watching the long-haired kid leave, Patton drove Mike home, figuring it wouldn’t be good David Asher’s opponent to be caught spying on Blue Creek residents.

“There he goes,” Patton said to himself as he watched Charlie Henry pull out of his driveway in his black Cadillac crossover.

So here he was, about to commit what would be a felony back in his home in California. Technically, though, Blue Creek had no laws on the books yet so what he was doing wasn’t really a crime. Patton cringed at his hypocrisy in justifying his actions, but then he shrugged and waited for darkness to come.

The sun had set but it still wasn’t dark enough for comfort. Patton didn’t know how long Charlie Henry was going to be away from his house and that was a problem. Luckily he had a backup plan to keep Charlie away. After another half hour of waiting in his borrowed vehicle, it was sufficiently dark to make his move. Patton reached into the backseat, grabbed a black duffel bag, and exited the vehicle.

The streetlights were on now, making it easier for a nosy neighbor to see Patton. As camouflage, he walked as casually as his nerves would allow. He continued down the sidewalk and then turned into the alleyway that ran behind Henry’s house.

The old man was obviously wary of break-ins, Patton could see. He had an eight-foot privacy fence with lots of trees and tall, leafless bushes. Patton threw his duffel bag over the fence and then knelt down and listened. He looked both ways to make sure no one was watching. As he pulled himself up and over the fence, a security light came on. Patton dropped into a crouch and waited and listened again. Nothing was amiss so he grabbed his bag and made his way towards the house.

Patton found an open window and made his way inside. He pulled a pair of night vision goggles from his bag and put them on. He pulled on a pair of latex gloves, slipped the strap of his bag over his shoulder, and made his way down a hallway. The main level was clean and well organized, filled with expensive furniture and decorations. A clock on the stove told him that it was just after 6 PM. He figured he had an hour to do what he had to do, clean up, and get out unseen. Jennifer and Mike were watching the old man and would warn Patton if he started on his way home. Until then, Patton had to get busy.

Patton found the master suite and pushed open the heavy oak door. A large, four-poster bed dominated the room. It reminded him of his grandparents’ bed that he slept in as a young child. Patton set down his bag and pulled out a Ziploc bag that contained the tools he would need. After riffling through the drawers of the vanity, Patton found a hairbrush. He removed a pair of tweezers from his pocket, locked onto a few of the hairs locked in the bristles of the brush and pulled them out and placed them into a plastic tube. Patton then pulled out a spray bottle and a white light. He sprayed Luminol onto the sink, hoping the chemical would reveal traces of blood that Patton could use for a DNA sample. He shined the black light across the sink’s surface. It was nearly spotless, but after close inspection, he found a light smudge of what was probably blood. He wiped the smudge with a cotton swab and placed it into another plastic tube.

Finished in the bathroom, Patton made his way back into the bedroom and removed a small fingerprint kit from his bag. He spread some powder on the nightstand and on the lamp. The white light revealed several prints. Patton took a clear, sticky patch, stuck it on the clearest print, and put it in the bag. He looked at his watch. He’d only been inside the house for fifteen minutes. Not wanting to press his luck, Patton cleaned up any evidence that he’d been inside the house, stowed his gear, and exited the house the way he’d come in.

When he got home, Patton placed all of the samples he’d taken from Charlie Henry’s home in a FedEx box. He printed the label, affixed it to the box, and walked out to his truck. Not wanting to wait until morning to send his package, Patton drove nearly an hour to Brigham City, Utah, and mailed the package.

Days later, the email Patton had been waiting for finally came. Part of him was nervous that he wasn’t going to get the news he expected, but one sentence in, Patton let out a loud breath, relieved that his instincts were still sharp.

To: patton_larsen@gmail.com

From: watson.w@cobrasecurities.com

Cc:

Subject: Harrell, Charles aka Henry, Charles

Attachments: dossier: Harrell, Charles

Patton,

Your instincts were right on this one. Charles “Henry” was hip deep in Students for a Democratic Society and a Weather Underground wannabe. Not only does he have an extensive police record in three states, he has an FBI file…and get this…a CIA file. Supposedly he bragged about meeting Castro in 1974. I did some back checking and it seems like the story might be true.

This guy is a radical leftist ideologue. I wouldn’t even call him a Marxist, really. That would be putting it very lightly. Go through the dossier. Just know that whatever he has planned, it’s not going to be good. Extreme measures may be necessary to deal with this situation.

Your Buddy,

Wildcat

It was as if his old friend, now private investigator, had reached into Patton’s brain and extracted the very words he’d been thinking of since he met Charlie Henry—or Harrell. The attached dossier was over forty printed pages, including mugshots from Henry’s arrests in Detroit, Seattle, and Los Angeles. There were police reports, a copy of Henry’s FBI file and an outline of what was in the CIA file. The fact that Henry had a CIA file was incredible. Outside of that revelation, there were several statements in the document that caught his eye.

“Henry was a second or third tier personality in the Students for a Democratic Society organization,” the dossier read. “He tried several times to get accepted into the more radical Weather Underground. According to one ‘Weather’ member, Henry was an intellectual lightweight, seen as a coward, unwilling to earn his stripes.”

This revelation filled in some of the missing picture for Patton. Charles Henry was a Sixties radical, still bent on making his mark, much like the other members of the SDS and Weather Underground. After realizing that a revolution was never going to happen, those people wised up, put on collared shirts and ties and earned college degrees. Some wrote papers and got jobs with federal agencies where they could bring about their “change” in more meaningful ways. And not only that, they could do it under the guise of being legitimate members of society.

Patton shook his head in disgust, remembering how he felt in 2008 when Barack Obama shot to power, bringing so many Sixties radicals on board to help him “fundamentally transform the United States of America,” as he’d put it then. If the media would’ve done its job and vetted Obama and his radical associations, he never would have entered the race let alone won two terms. Now, in a small town created to serve as an experiment, the old playbook was being used. Take a young, handsome, dynamic person and sell them to an electorate as the next messiah. Plaster their face on billboards and TV, never let him answer a serious question, and watch him rise to power.

However, what could Patton do with this information about Charlie Henry? This Asher punk was already a media darling just like Obama had been. Would he eliminate any chance that Mike Wilson had to win by trying to make the connection between Asher and Henry, or would the move be seen as crying wolf? Probably both, but the only the chance they had to beat David Asher was to connect him to someone unpalatable like Charlie Henry. That thought sealed it—they were going to slash and burn with this or they were going to lose. It was a risky strategy but Patton knew that it was the only chance they had to win.

Patton vowed that he wasn’t going to go down without a fight.

Mike Wilson hated having to wear makeup and he hated the bright lights shining in his face. Most of all, he hated having this brash pretty boy as an opponent, but there was nothing he could do about that. Tonight was his one and only chance to land a blow that would hurt David Asher’s candidacy, but he knew he’d have very few opportunities to do so. Mike knew that he had to be aggressive because the moderator of the debate was unlikely to give any openings.

“And so, I think we need this government to bring some stability to this experiment. I mean, honestly, I think the people that set this up were negligent when they didn’t set up a government at the same time,” Asher said confidently. “Look at all that has happened since we got here last March. The murder of the Gruber family. The fires. The burglaries and vandalizing of stores downtown. Now, with a government in place would any of that have happened?”

“Rebuttal Mr. Wilson?” the moderator asked.

Mike nodded and cleared his throat.

“First of all, let me touch on one thing Mr. Asher just said. When it comes right down to it, laws are theoretical. Back in Texas we had laws that were broken every day. Murder. Rape. Arson. Burglary. Just because a government passes a law doesn’t mean that it can’t be broken.”

Asher snorted in derision at the answer, which made Mike all the more willing to go for his Hail Mary attempt later on.

“Well, I’d like for Mr. Asher to show me how I’m wrong. Had a government existed already when the crimes he mentioned happened, would they have been prevented? If Mr. Asher thinks so, what’s his proof?”

“Would you like to answer this Mr. Asher?” the moderator asked.

“Yes, I would. The problem with this thinking is that it’s based on the idea that human beings can control themselves. History has proven that they cannot. Laws are established to keep man from moving to his nature.”

“That’s ridiculous,” Mike scoffed. “This is exactly my point. Crime happens no matter what laws are in existence.”

Asher knew that he’d made a mistake and he tried to interject but the moderator wanted to move on.

“Mr. Wilson, this has been a lively debate but we’re running out of time. Before we have our closing statements, would you like to ask your question of Mr. Asher?”

Mike nodded and opened up a manila folder he had on his lectern. “This will need some background before I ask him the question,” he said to the moderator. She nodded and he smiled at her. It was the first time she’d allowed him any leeway during the entire debate.

“The biggest problem with this town and the idea that we would elect leaders is that we are all new here. Everyone has come from different parts of the country. We all come from different walks of life. We have no real way of knowing if people are being honest. And that is why I’m leery at the idea of establishing a government in the way that Mr. Asher would have it.

“And I include myself in that assertion. You folks don’t know me either. I’m glad we’ve had the chance to be seen and heard by the people of Blue Creek tonight and hopefully they’ll have a better idea of who we are and what we stand for. But that brings me to the question. It has come to my attention that Mr. Asher has associated himself with some people, who I think do not represent the mainstream thinking that we have in this country and here in Blue Creek.”

With these words, Asher’s face turned bright red for a moment. Unfortunately for him, the camera caught his reaction.

“It has come to my attention that Mr. Asher has been in consultation with a man named Charles Henry. If you’ll remember, Mr. Henry was part of the self-appointed committee that is organizing this push for government. My concern is that Mr. Henry has a very shady political past and has some views that most people would find disturbing…”

Anna swore under her breath and looked over at Charlie. Her face had gone ashen white and she suddenly wanted to vomit. Charlie was on the edge of his seat now, his elbows planted on his knees.

“…Mr. Henry was involved in some violent groups during the 1960s and 1970s. He was a member of the Students for a Democratic Society, and it has since been proven that it had ties to the Soviet Union during that time. Mr. Henry became disillusioned by SDS and wanted to join the Weather Underground. If that sounds familiar it’s because Barack Obama associated himself with a Weather Underground member named William Ayers.

“The Weather group bombed the Pentagon and was responsible for many deaths, including the robbery of an armored car and death of a policeman. Although Mr. Henry was not accepted into the group, the mere fact that he wanted to join that group says a lot about him.”

“Charlie?” Anna said pleadingly, prodding his shoulder to get his attention.

“Shhh!” he said, slapping her hand away. “I’m trying to listen.”

“Mr. Henry had files with the FBI and the CIA. It has been verified that Mr. Henry left the United States and went to Cuba where he met Fidel Castro in person. The FBI file mentions the fact that Mr. Henry was also trying to get into the Soviet Union, although it doesn’t specify what his motives were.”

“How the hell did they find this out?” Anna exclaimed, throwing her hands in the air.

“This isn’t good. I hope this kid is up to this,” Charlie said, swallowing nervously.

Patton’s posture was similar to Charlie’s, but his was due to eager anticipation, not apprehension.

“We know that both Henry and Asher are associated with these two people,” Mike said, holding up photos of Anna and Travis. “The woman is Anna Radinski. She is a registered member of Microcosm and was officially accepted as an official participant of the Blue Creek experiment. However, this young man is not. She was also a member of the committee. His first name is Travis, but my campaign wasn’t able to discover his last name. He is here without permission. What he is doing here is only a matter for speculation at this point…”

Jennifer yelled, clapping her hands and grinning at Patton.

Patton returned the smile then returned his attention to the TV.

“This young man has been seen with both David Asher and Charles Henry since this campaign has begun. Also,” Mike said holding up a grainy photo taken from Patton’s security video, “he was part of a group that illegally broke into a Blue Creek resident’s home.”

Charlie swore viciously. Not just angry at himself, but angry with Travis and Anna and Asher for letting this slip away. His greatest nightmare was coming true.

“So my question is, Mr. Asher, who is this Travis character and why are you associated with a man who used to be involved in the SDS and Weather Underground?”

TV viewers could see David Asher swallow visibly and tug at his shirt collar. A bead of sweat formed on his forehead. He swallowed again and then tried to smile.

“That was two questions,” Asher said chuckling. The joke fell flat and he knew it. He was trapped. “Well…” the pause went on for a brutally painful few seconds. “However you received this information, I can tell you that I don’t know anyone named Travis or Charles. I know a woman named Anna, but that has nothing to do with this campaign.”

The moderator tried to stop the carnage but Mike beat her to the punch.

“So if a video and photos surfaced of you meeting with this Travis what would your response be?”

Asher swallowed again and reached for his cup of water that was on his lectern. He felt like an animal in a trap.

“I would say that if such a video or picture existed then it would be a coincidence that I met him… look,” he said, gesturing awkwardly with his hands but beginning to feel a surge of confidence come back. “This is ridiculous. My question is if there are videos of me and people I may have met, why were they taken in the first place? Isn’t that illegal behavior?

“And furthermore,” Asher continued, speaking over Mike Wilson’s attempt to interrupt, “I think that this is political gamesmanship, pure and simple. Mr. Wilson and his people are trying to link me to some shady characters in a desperate ploy to derail my campaign. I’d say show us the video and the pictures if you really have them. There is an innocent explanation I’m sure. Look, we’ve all come here, like Mr. Wilson said, from different parts of the country. We’ve been here for less than a year. There are thirty thousand people and you’re accusing me of consorting with shady characters. It’s kind of James Bond isn’t it?”

Some members in the audience cheered and laughed at the last part and the moderator had to silence them. It was a good retort, Patton thought. However, Asher didn’t know that Patton wanted him to call their bluff. They already had an interview scheduled for TV the next day, exclusively with just Mike Wilson. They would then upload all of their videos to the microcosm.org website. Asher had gambled, not knowing his opponent had four aces.

“So in conclusion,” Mike Wilson said, still confident that his bombshell was still resonating, “I think that it is very important that we are careful about what type of government we establish and, more importantly, who we put in as our leaders. I have offered myself for interviews. I have been open and honest about my past, about who I am and what I want to do. I know that there is a lot of enthusiasm for Mr. Asher here but let’s be cautious about jumping the gun and electing him.

“But more than that, I don’t want this to be a vote against Mr. Asher, I want you people to vote for me. Thank you and I hope that you will consider your decision very carefully. Good night.”

Between the allegations Mike Wilson made during the debate and his appearance on TV the next morning, there was a giant change in the feeling surrounding the Asher campaign, which was now in total damage control mode.

“Is he out of Blue Creek?” Charlie asked Anna, referring to Travis.

“Yes,” she said, swallowing hard. “We got him out last night.”

Charlie nodded. That was the first step. The next best thing the two of them could do was to lie low and get Asher’s face out in front of this mess.

“When is David going on TV?” he asked, much more calmly than he was feeling at the moment.

She took a long swig of water then answered, “Tonight. Six o’clock.”

Charlie nodded again. “Good time. People are usually watching TV then.” He made as if he was going to stand up but stopped. “Oh, and make sure we get access to the video of what he says so we can put it on the intranet later.”

“I will. We’ve been working on what he should say. I’ll email it to you when we have it done.”

“Okay,” he said, standing and walking to the door. As he opened it he said, “Just let him know that the whole thing could fall apart if he doesn’t say the right thing tonight.”

“He knows,” she said, trying to assure him. “Charlie, we’ve come way too far to let it all fall apart right now. Trust me, he’ll have them eating out the palm of his hand.”

And she was right, Charlie knew. That was part of the reason he hated Asher so much. Worse, however, was the fact that Charlie needed Asher to get his hands on the reins of power.

“So what do you make of these allegations, the videos and the photographs?” the attractive female blond reporter asked David Asher.

A picture from the night before flashed in his memory. He smiled, thinking how much more attractive this reporter was naked than dressed.

“Well Ashley, I think that Mr. Wilson knows that this campaign has gotten away from him and that he is desperate to bring it back to a point that he can possibly win it. And more than that, I think it’s reprehensible that these people would follow other people around like that. Recording and taking clandestine pictures of these people…” he said. He shook his head, unable to finish his thought.

The reporter agreed with him but she had to at least appear to be playing devil’s advocate.

“But Mr. Wilson says that since there are no laws on the books right now, so how can these acts be illegal?”

Asher took a deep breath, glad she tossed him a softball question.

“Well, technically he’s right, of course. But this guy is all about the Constitution right? That’s all he seems to talk about. We haven’t officially adopted the Constitution yet, yet he seems to hold us to that standard. And then he has the nerve to throw these pictures and videos around like they mean something.”

She gave him a quizzical look and asked, “They don’t?”

Asher chuckled, smiling his most charming smile.

“It’s a ridiculous charge. Okay, they have pictures of me sitting next to a guy in a bar. Big deal. To the left of this ‘Travis’ person is yet another person. Is Wilson looking into that guy too?”

“That’s a fair point,” she said, knowing that if she said it, her audience would think it. She was relaxed now, as was he. She was lofting the softballs up and he was crushing them.

“What about this Charles Henry person?” she asked him.

Asher grimaced and shook his head. “It’s another farce. Look, if this Travis is in league with this Charles Henry person, what does that have to do with me?”

The reporter had no answer so she went to Wilson’s talking points.

“Mr. Wilson says that it’s dangerous to elect a person they don’t know… someone who might be tied to a Sixties radical. How do you answer to that?”

Asher leaned back and looked at her. A camera picked up the move and made it appear as if he was talking directly to the audience.

“I won’t answer to it because it’s a desperate political ploy. Look, it’s clear from polls that you and others have run that this race hasn’t been very close for a while now. I think this is all about getting Mr. Wilson back into the race. I don’t see how anyone could think it’s anything more than that.”

Without taking his eyes off of the TV Charlie dialed Anna’s number. She picked up after one ring.

“He did it,” he said without emotion.

She was giddy and it took her a second to compose herself.

“Yes! He did! It’s over. We did it Charlie!”

“Tell him good job from me,” Charlie said then hung up. He knew what the two would be doing tonight to celebrate and he didn’t want to think about it. Charlie knew that the election was basically over and he had to credit Asher for getting the ball across the goal line. Now, he had a new set of plans to work on.

Patton had come to the same conclusion as Charlie Henry. They had David Asher on the ropes but he wriggled free with his slick answers in his TV interview. The final round of elections were held a week later, but to Patton and Mike, it was a foregone conclusion—David Asher was going to be elected Blue Creek’s first governor.

And it happened just that way. The silver lining, however, was that it was much closer than either of them could have foreseen. Like with the first round, David Asher got off onto a huge lead, but then the business owners got out to vote and closed the gap. By the time that ninety percent of the vote had been counted, Wilson had closed the gap to five percentage points. After that, however, the count leveled off and Asher won by a convincing eight percent.

Jennifer’s house, which was serving as Wilson’s campaign headquarters, was empty by eleven o’clock. The balloons and confetti they had bought to celebrate a Wilson victory would stay in a cupboard for now. Sitting on the couch and commiserating over beers, Patton, Frank and Mike vowed to remain vigilant and keep a wary eye on David Asher and what he had planned for Blue Creek.

PART THREE

THE DEVIL YOU DON’T KNOW

CHAPTER 16

Bao was headed into work yet again. Since the creation of the government in Blue Creek, work had become a nightmare. Bi-monthly meetings had turned into weekly meetings. Weekly meetings turned into bi-weekly meetings. Now it was a meeting nearly every day. Bao was so busy, he was finding it nearly impossible to maintain his cover as a vending service owner. Not only were his two lives blending into one another, he was utterly exhausted.

Bao’s Subaru WRX zipped across the landscape. He guzzled an energy drink and cranked the volume on his music. Without caffeine and loud music he wouldn’t be able to function in either job. In fact, he was so exhausted it was becoming more difficult to keep his two lives separate.

Today’s meeting was about the latest economic reports coming out of Blue Creek. The new government had been elected in January and began work on March 1st. Governor Asher and the Council had gotten off to a fast start. In fact, so many bills were passed in the first week, many people suspected that they had been drafted before the government had been formed. Bao was convinced of this idea—not because he knew anything about politics—but because he had been spending a lot of time with Patton and Frank. Patton had some wild theories, including one that Charlie Henry was behind everything that David Asher was doing. Furthermore, Henry was instituting policies that liberals had dreamed about pushing on Americans.

However, as things progressed, Bao became convinced that Patton was right about everything. In the beginning of the summer, Bao wrote a report discussing Patton’s conspiracy theories. The report was passed up the chain. Many of the higher ups at Insight Resource took it as a joke, but the report had struck a chord with many of the scientists behind the experiment. That’s what was bringing Bao to work today. He was being asked to discuss his report in greater detail.

Bao approached the shack that served as the entrance and exit to Blue Creek. He slowed down and was about to give a nod to the security guard and then drive through. Luckily he looked up in time to see the closed gate that blocked the road ahead of him. Bao slammed on the brakes. He fish tailed, but luckily came to a stop inches from the gate. He swore and slammed his hands onto his steering wheel. He let out a deep breath and was about to start hyperventilating when he noticed movement out of the corner of his eye. It was the security guard. Bao glared at him angrily through his window, but rolled down his window. The security guard seemed embarrassed.

“Hey Bao,” he said nervously.

“Hey Bryan. What’s with this?” Bao asked, gesturing towards the large, white metal gate that nearly demolished his beloved car.

“New policy. Bill passed last week and they just installed it last night.”

“What bill?”

The kid—Bao thought of him as a kid, although they were probably the same age—straightened his dark uniform and looked around as if he was being watched.

“Asher talked about it on TV last night. No one can come in and out without checking in here. They have to register their vehicle. People from outside can only come into town for twelve hours.”

Bao exhaled deeply. He’d stopped watching any news or speeches or anything political. He was tired of the whole thing. Now it was starting to affect his everyday life, which was starting to piss him off.

“So how does this affect me?”

The kid shrugged. Bao rolled his eyes at the gesture.

“Well, what am I supposed to do then? I have to go out and talk to a client.”

The security looked around again and leaned in closer.

“You can leave for four hours without prior notice. You can leave for twelve hours with permission.”

“Permission? From who?”

The kid shrugged again. “Don’t know. I’m sure it’s on the city website. Anyway, it’s 9:34 AM right now. You’ll need to be back by 1:34.”

Bao looked at his watch.

“Back by 1:34 huh? Well, if I’m late, you can tell Asher to kiss my ass.”

The security guard smiled and walked back to his shack. He opened the gate and smiled wider when Bao did a Hollywood-style burnout and sped through the gate.

Bao cranked up his stereo again and tapped his fingers on the steering wheel to the beat. He looked at himself in his rearview mirror and grimaced.

“Patton’s gonna love this,” he said out loud. “Damn.”

Damn was right, but Patton already knew about the gate. One of his employees had gotten a job with the city in the planning department and she’d been leaking information to Patton ever since. He still paid her the full wage. It was well worth it to him. Not only had Patton known about the gate before Bao, he drove out and watched it be built. Everything that had come before had made Patton angry. The income taxes, the minimum wage, the talk of other policy ideas. Those were boiler plate ideas, typical of any government. And Patton had written about them in his blog where he explained their negative impact on the economy. However, he knew they would largely go ignored because they were policies that most people were accustomed to. This, however, was different.

When Patton was a kid, his father watched everything political—speeches, news conferences, and debates. During one particular news conference, Ronald Reagan was asked about his Berlin Wall speech. He’d said something to the effect that some countries build walls to keep enemies out, but other countries build walls to keep their own people in. Why would a country do that? The only explanation was because people would flee if they had the choice. Patton wondered what Asher and Charlie Henry were up to.

It had been a solemn moment for Patton and that feeling had carried on with him. He’d seen the evils of control by a nation’s elites, but that had been in someone else’s country, not his. These policies were now affecting himself and his friends. When Patton returned home just before daybreak, he sat at his computer and wrote a blog piece.

“I have long been a critic of David Asher and his puppet master Charlie Henry. I have been ridiculed as a conspiracy theorist for my continual claims that these men are connected behind the scenes of your new government. I am fine with this ridicule. This has always been part of politics. I would be a hypocrite for complaining because I have often ridiculed others, including the Asher regime. I have also tried to infuse humor and sarcasm into my blogs. However, today I do not feel humorous. Let me tell you why.

“Early this morning I drove out to the security gate that has been a part of this town longer than many other buildings. When we arrived here we all saw the gate. It’s nothing special. It resembles guard shacks at apartment buildings and businesses all over the country. However, Blue Creek’s front gate has a new feature.

“No longer can a person drive through the gate. A security guard has to verify that you have a reason to leave Blue Creek or to enter Blue Creek. Up until this morning, we residents could drive in and out at will. Scanners and cameras recorded your license plate to see who was coming in and out. Now, however, you have to have a reason to leave. Even worse, you have to justify leaving Blue Creek.

“During the Cold War, half of Europe’s population lived behind walls and fences. Those barriers were built to keep enemies out, but they were also there to keep those people in. Nazi Germany and the Soviet Union had these barriers. If they didn’t, how many people would have fled for freedom?

“I know I will be ridiculed for claiming that the government building a gate is the first step to establishing a dictatorship. But the question remains, why would the Asher regime put in a gate? The simple answer is, for the same reason why countries in the past, and present, build walls to keep people in—because their policies will drive them away, but they don’t want them to leave. This is particularly problematic for we residents of Blue Creek. To leave, we have to pay the penalty.

“This makes us a captive audience to whatever the government decides to implement. This is exactly why I fought against having a government and why I fought against David Asher and Charlie Henry. They don’t want what’s best for you and me. They want to build their power and control over us. Why do they want this, you ask? I have never found a logical reason why people seek power and control over others. There are theories about this in the field of psychology, but none of them are complete. One thing is clear, however—seeking power over others is evil and can only lead to negative outcomes.

“There are many policies in the pipeline. The government started operating on March 1st. It is now nearly Labor Day. Already, the government has passed a series of bad economic policies. There are discussions of many more bad economic policies that will be passed in the coming months. These policies will have nothing but a negative impact on an economy that has already slowed down. Unless we work together as a city and elect better leaders, we will someday be forced to flee.”

Patton wrapped up his blog post and closed his computer. He wouldn’t be going into work today. In fact, he was thinking about taking some time off. He undressed and climbed quietly into bed. He must have woken Jennifer because she turned and wrapped her arms around him. As thoughts of the gate, and the fears they conjured within him, poured through his mind, Patton began to shudder.

Bao gazed around the conference table and chuckled to himself. These meetings were usually very formal. Even the agents like himself had to wear button down dress shirts and slacks. Now, however, everyone was dressed down. Even Mike Varner, the CEO, was wearing jeans and a hoodie. The crush, caused by the massive amount of legislation, was taking its toll.

“So Mr. Hahn, what differences have you noticed at the street level?”

Bao was shaken out of his mental stupor and forced himself to engage in the conversation that had been going on for over two hours now. He sat up straight in his chair and cleared his throat.

“First of all, I was almost late today because of the new gate.”

“What gate?” asked Varner, his interest obviously piqued.

“There’s a gate,” Bao said, then paused. “Big white metal thing that the security guard has to open and close. The guard also told me I only had four hours outside of town without prior permission.”

Many people looked at each other in shock at this development.

“And with permission?”

Bao leaned back in his seat again. “Twelve. I guess you have to contact the city office to get permission to leave.”

There were several whispered side conversations. This went on for a half minute until Varner started tapping on the glass table with his coffee mug.

“People! People! Let’s get through this.”

The CEO turned his attention back to Bao and gestured for him continue. Bao shrugged, having nothing more to add. Varner turned to someone on the opposite side of the table.

“Dr. Hunter, can you give us a rundown of the legislation that’s passed?”

Dr. Emily Hunter was a political scientist from somewhere in the Midwest. Bao thought she was attractive, even though she had to be at least ten years older than him.

“Sure Mike,” she said, pulling out a binder. She stood and leaned over the table. “First was the tax bill. It established a progressive income tax with three brackets. The rates are five, ten, and 12.5 percent. This bill also established a corporate income tax with two rates. This was based on number of employees. Um…” she said, turning the page and running her finger down the paper.

“Then we had the tariff that taxes goods coming from outside Blue Creek,” she continued. “Then there was the minimum wage and the restrictions on outsiders from working in Blue Creek.” Her finger continued down the page.

Bao thought of his conversations with Patton after the laws had passed. He shook his head and chuckled again. A massive headache was on the horizon. He was going to need another energy drink and an Excedrin.

“…then there’s been talking of a living wage, printing money to monetize experiment credits, price fixing, wage caps…”

Bao massaged his temples. Mention of the living wage policy idea was going to push him over the edge. Patton’s reaction to the minimum wage was bad, but when he heard about the living wage, his anger became volcanic. In fact, after the idea was floated by one of Asher’s aides on a news talk show, Patton took a week off of work. By the time Patton had returned to his office he had a new website with a daily political blog, which was now the most viewed webpage in Blue Creek.

Dr. Hunter finally finished rehashing the last few months worth of legislation and sat down. Bao watched under the glass table as she crossed her long, muscular legs. He exhaled loudly. She must have noticed because she glanced over at him and smiled seductively.

“Thanks Dr. Hunter,” Varner said, glancing down at his own binder. “Now Dr. Edmunds, what have been the ramifications of these policies at this point?”

Edmunds, who had nearly dozed off, jerked awake and straightened himself in his seat. He was average height and a little pudgy. He looked to Bao to be half black. He was one of the economists, and seemed to be the best at tracking economic changes in real time.

“Well,” he said, clearing his throat. “The personal income tax was well received, believe it or not. People are accustomed to paying taxes and they see the benefits they get from them. The economy hasn’t been affected by these taxes too much, but the corporate income tax is a different story,” he said, flipping to the correct page in his binder.

“The corporate income tax—or business tax, as it’s been called—has put a dent in economic activity.” He motioned towards an assistant, who turned on a large screen and a projector. A graph appeared on the screen. The assistant handed Dr. Edmunds a remote control. He stood and walked to the front of the room.

“From March, when everyone arrived, through Christmas and into this last spring, economic activity was robust as you can see here,” he said, pointing at a large bar on the left of the graph. “However, once the government took over March first, activity began to slow.”

“Could that be due to any other factors?” another researcher asked, obviously skeptical that the economic slowdown was due to the government beginning operations.

Edmunds was either a very patient person, or he was too tired to be annoyed with being questioned.

“That’s a good point, and you are correct. The government began to operate March 1st. However, you have to remember that during the election, and after Asher and the Council were elected, there was a two month period of time where they revealed their strategy and talked about policies they were going to implement. We’re still analyzing the data, but our initial findings are that post-election rhetoric helped to cause the slowdown.”

He looked around the room to see if there were any other objections to his claim. After a brief pause, Varner spoke up.

“What other factors led to the slowdown that we’ve seen?”

Edmunds clicked to the next slide. “These are the results of our analysis. As you can see, there are many variables here, but based on survey data, citizens were really affected by their perceptions based on rhetoric.”

“That also shows that previous spending was also a factor,” replied the critic.

Edmunds rubbed his face, obviously annoyed. His lack of sleep was definitely catching up with him.

“That’s true and that is the biggest factor, statistically speaking. It’s also an obvious control variable that we expect to be significant. However, the fact that political rhetoric from elected officials shows up as being significant is huge. Remember, in these kinds of analyses we can’t capture variables perfectly.”

There were nods all around the table. Sensing the contention that was beginning to build, Varner stepped in with another question.

“So why have things gotten so bad so fast?”

Edmunds returned to his seat and opened his binder. He looked around at his colleagues, hoping someone else would take the floor. After an awkward pause, Edmunds continued.

“Like I said, the personal income tax was well received, but the corporate income tax has clearly had a negative impact on spending. Governments see these taxes as an extra avenue for revenue. However, these taxes are basically inflators. They drive up the costs of both goods and services because business owners have to maintain their profit margins in order to keep operations steady and predictable. They are able to do this by passing their tax bill onto customers.”

Edmunds stood again, returning to his role as professor.

“The increase in costs hampers spending on both goods and services because wages don’t automatically increase. You see, wages increase when companies’ profit margins increase. Because companies are trying to maintain their profit margins they’re not investing in expansion or in raises to their employees.”

“What about the minimum wage. That’s an increase of wages,” said another researcher, obviously not an economist.

Dr. Edmunds rolled his eyes at the question before he could catch himself. Everyone in the room was more and more on edge.

“Again, the key term is artificial. When a governmental implements a policy, it tends to have an artificial influence on the market and what we call the business cycle. Let me use an example.

“Let’s say you own a pizza restaurant and you have four employees,” he said to one of the research assistants. “Your labor costs are fixed at $1600 per week. You can’t increase them unless you cut into your profit margin. However, if you do that, it affects your own income, the quality of your restaurant, or you have to borrow money to keep operating. Okay now, let’s say the government forces you to pay your people more. However, your revenues haven’t increased. That money has to come from somewhere.

“So now, instead of increasing your payroll, which you can’t really do, you have to fire one of your employees. You pay three people more money, but one of your employees has lost their job.”

The logic of the example cut through the room like a sword. However, there were still some doubters. One of them finally spoke up.

“Why do employers have to maintain their profit margins? I mean, how much is enough for them?”

Edmunds removed his glasses and rubbed his eyes. Bao could tell that he was about to blow a gasket. Edmunds took a long swallow from what must have been cold coffee and returned his gaze to his questioner.

“Have you ever owned a business or have you only worked for other people?”

“Other people,” the researcher replied, sheepishly.

Edmunds nodded, as if to say ‘that figures’.

“Well, you should ask some business owners that question. How much is too much money for you? I mean, if Mr. Varner here offered you a million dollars to do the same job, would you turn him down?”

There was no response to the obvious question.

“Let’s not question the motives of business owners. They’re human beings just like us,” Edmunds said calmly. “These are people who are acting out their dreams. They have children and mortgages and car payments. Also, while building their own dreams, they allow others to start to build theirs.

“While the kid who gets the job cooking the pizza isn’t living their dream, they’re making money to live while they’re working towards other goals, like schooling. This is the beauty of capitalism—everyone benefits… unless someone gets in their way, like governments.”

And with that, Dr. Edmunds sat in his chair. The eloquence of his words stunned the room. After a few moments of silence, Michael Varner stood.

“Thanks Dr. Edmunds. With that we’ll take an hour for lunch. When we return we’ll try to get through these other policy ideas.”

Charlie Henry did understand economics, but he also had goals. He knew that the policies he was implementing would lead to some misery, but that misery would be temporary. Prolonged economic misery in the United States was due to people holding on to capitalism. Hybrid economies—free market capitalism with only moderate governmental controls—could not work. Charlie’s plan was already working. In fact, they were a year ahead of his projections.

His goal was to establish redistributive welfare programs. This was only one or two steps away. In mid September there was an increase of personal and corporate income taxes. This, in combination with the minimum wage and restrictions on outside goods and labor, led to a greater slowdown of the economy. It was the series of policies enacted in the late fall that had the biggest impact, though. Just a week before Thanksgiving, the Blue Creek Council voted to begin printing money based on the total credits that were allotted to all of the Blue Creek residents. David Asher quickly signed it into law and then hit the news talk shows to explain the policy. He promised that the government wouldn’t print more money than was represented in the Blue Creek economy.

Patton Larsen quickly wrote a blog post that blasted the policy, noting that money printing always leads to inflation because governments can’t stop at the proper level of currency. He did note that the Great Depression was partially caused because the Federal Reserve didn’t print enough money to keep up with the economic growth of the Roaring Twenties. This led to deflation, which Patton noted was as bad, or worse, than inflation. He closed with a scathing accusation, writing “even if David Asher and his puppet master Charlie Henry could be trusted, which they cannot, giving this government the ability to print money is a disastrous development for this community. You’ve been warned.”

The city outsourced the printing of the money to a printing company in Salt Lake City. Patton pounded the Asher administration again, this time for hypocrisy. In another blog post, Patton wrote “I hope the Asher regime will pay its own fees for violating its own policy. I think the government should donate these penalties back to the Blue Creek residents that he stole the money from in the first place.”

The impact of the policy wasn’t immediate, but as the paper money began to reach Blue Creek residents, some residents started to feel nervous. No longer could you just use your credits card to purchase items at the store. People now had cash in their wallets. Some loved it, but some hated it. Most people, however, didn’t understand the danger that comes when a government owns a printing press.

Then a curious thing happened. Once people received cash, many went on a second spending spree. It was almost a Pavlovian response. There was a surge of economic activity, which, on the surface, was a good development after almost a year of near recession conditions. Of course David Asher, and some members of the Council, touted the development. However, the bad times would return at the end of the winter.

Just before Christmas, the negative impacts of the minimum wage and restrictions on outside goods and services began to take hold. Unemployment increased dramatically. Younger people, particularly teenagers, were impacted most because when employers lay off workers, they keep the most experienced workers. The tariff on outside goods drove up the cost of doing business. Business owners, in turn, raised their prices even further. Because wages were static, and most residents had already spent their cash reserves, spending throughout the economy decreased even more. This led to additional layoffs and a decrease in hours because profits were down.

In March, just after the government reached its first anniversary, the inevitable happened—the first family mortgaged their home. The story hit the TV news, the two newspapers, and the blogosphere. Soon after, Blue Creek’s two banks were flooded with requests. Simply put, most residents were accustomed to having house payments. Many wanted cash instead of full ownership of their homes. Following the flood of mortgages, there was another period of heavy economic activity and again, government officials touted the effectiveness of their policies.

But the heavy spending was temporary. The economy quickly returned to recession and, for some reason, the politicians avoided the news talk shows. As things continued to get worse, the government began talk of programs to help families with food and housing. Patton protested with a couple of blog posts, but he quickly relented. He understood that Charlie Henry had won this round. Blue Creek residents grew up in a society where government programs were the norm. He also understood that griping about policies on a blog site was not going to be enough to stop Henry and Asher. They were going to have to be removed from power.

CHAPTER 17

Anna called the meeting of the Blue Creek triumvirate. Charlie requested it be held at his house. He sat, reclined in a large stuffed chair. Anna and Asher sat across the living room from each other. They didn’t want to throw their relationship in Charlie’s face. He was already difficult to deal with. The silence was like an acid fog hanging in the air. No one knew where to begin and Asher started to wonder why Anna had called for the meeting. Besides that, it was dangerous for Asher to be seen with Charlie, although there was a small risk of that. They’d taken every precaution, but still, if word of the meeting got out, Asher could kiss any chance of reelection goodbye.

“I expected this,” Charlie said, finally breaking the intense silence. He knew that the others blamed him for their current situation, but he had to set them straight and get them to see the big picture. He had to let them in on some things and hopefully then, they would regain their former faith in him. Both just looked at him in shock. He gestured for them to calm down with his hands.

“These people out here are sheep,” Charlie said, pointing out the window. “They’re hurting some now, sure, but they’ll adjust to the new realities. We still have our secret weapon. If they start fighting back we’ll hit them hard. Travis is still close right?” he asked Anna.

She nodded. Although Travis had been forced to flee Blue Creek during the election fiasco, he had stayed close. Currently he was living in Salt Lake City, waiting for a chance to return to Blue Creek.

“He’s changed his look,” Anna said. “He got his hair cut, grew a beard, put on some weight, stuff like that.”

Charlie nodded approvingly. He was glad to know that option to use violence was still on the table but if he had his choice, he wouldn’t resort to terrorism again.

“We have a year to turn things around,” Asher said.

Charlie glared at him. He was obviously annoyed but said nothing. Charlie no longer dealt with Asher directly. All of their communications went through Anna. It was Charlie that formulated policy. Then, after he felt like he had policy fleshed out, he would tell Anna what he wanted Asher to do. It was a simple formula, but in his mind it had worked so far.

“Turn things around?” Charlie said, smirking. “You’re not understanding me, David,” he said, knowing that using his first name annoyed him.

“People are pissed off, Charlie,” Asher said angrily. “I’m the face of this thing. If I can’t get reelected we’re done. That hick Wilson gets put in and God knows what will happen then.”

Charlie chewed on this for a moment. Anna’s eyes darted back and forth between the two as if she were watching a tennis match.

“I say we double down,” Charlie said, his hands making a steeple at his chin. He didn’t look at either of them but he could tell he had shocked them again.

Asher shook his head. Anna looked down at the carpet in disbelief. Without any response, Charlie went on. “These people are angry, yes, but what are they going to do about it?” he asked, looking at both of them in turn. It was meant to be a rhetorical question—one that would be answered during the coming summer. However, in the moment, it seemed to Charlie to be a legitimate question. He continued.

“They’re not going to protest in the street. They’re not going to show up at your house with torches and pitchforks, David. How do you think we’ve gotten away with so much in American politics? All of us in the Underground knew that we were a gigantic minority. Still, over the years we have pushed America to where it’s at now.”

He stood and began to pace around the room. “They’ll grin and bear it. It all depends on two things. We have a plan in place to use force if they ever do rebel. But before that, we blast the people with propaganda. Class warfare. We create a boogeyman. Not all of these people are Mike Wilson and Patton Larsen. Most of them are sheep. They follow the message with the prettier package. All you gotta do is bundle it right.”

A deranged laugh escaped Charlie’s mouth. He despised these simple people, his new neighbors with their trite, inane lives. Most of them were just like his father, who had never truly lived a day in his life. With Asher and Anna’s morale at a low ebb, Charlie realized it was his chance to reassert his control. He wasn’t going to hold their hands anymore. He was going to formulate the plans and these people were going to carry them out. It was as simple as that. Finally fed up, Charlie made a move to leave the room.

“Where are you going Charlie?” Anna asked.

He looked at her with pity in his eyes then turned to walk out the door. She stood and grabbed his arm in hopes of keeping him there and telling them what they needed to do.

“Anna, that’s very unbecoming of you,” he said with an evil little sneer.

She let go but the pleading look did not recede from her face. He felt some remorse then. He hated the fact, but he had to admit that he was still very much attracted to this girl. He still thought about her. Her passion. Her beauty.

“What do you want me to do?” he asked her finally.

She moved back to her seat, hoping that Charlie would do the same. He didn’t budge.

“Charlie, please stay. Let’s talk about this. David and I are new at this, right David?” she said to Asher pleadingly. Turning back to Charlie she said, “We need you.”

Charlie looked over at Asher who had his face in his hands. Finally noticing that he was being stared at, Asher looked up to meet the older man’s gaze. After a moment he reluctantly nodded his agreement. Satisfied, Charlie returned to his seat.

“So… what shall we do next?” Charlie asked, obviously relishing the moment.

Anna blew out a breath and looked over at Asher, who was still displaying his petulant, childish posture. “You tell us,” Anna said.

“I already told you. We need to double down. We need to keep pushing the envelope with policy and drive it home with propaganda. If that all doesn’t work we’ll bring Travis and his friends back to town…” he said, letting the words trail off. He let the implication hang in the air.

“What policies?” Asher asked.

Without turning to look at the younger man, Charlie said, “We need to ramp up the taxes, both on business and individuals. Value added tax to businesses and we really need to push an income tax increase. We also need a program to help families that are losing their houses. Lastly, we need to print some more money.”

“And when do we announce it?” Asher asked, seeming to be thoroughly whipped now.

“Next month.”

“What’s going to happen?” Anna asked, feeling a surge of confidence. Charlie’s arrogance was contagious.

Charlie shrugged noncommittally and said, “People will become more angry than they already are but I can’t see them doing anything about it. Once a government is set up, particularly through democratic means, the people are less likely to fight against it.”

Anna nodded, but inside she felt wary. Charlie was being much too cavalier about all of this. She thought they were on the brink of losing everything they’d worked for. Nevertheless, she would advise David to follow his advice and help him draft the new policies. Satisfied that the meeting was now over, Charlie stood again, much happier this time. Neither of them tried to stop him and he walked down the hallway to his bedroom.

Despite all the bad news emanating from Blue Creek city hall, Patton decided to throw a party at Jennifer’s house in town. All of his employees were invited, as were many friends. Frank invited Bao and the two were having a private conversation in the living room. Music blared from a stereo in the living room. Televisions throughout the house showed different sporting events, including the UFC fights in Las Vegas. The house was filled with happy people. Any neighbor that showed up to complain about the noise was invited to join the party. Some left bickering, but many joined the festivities.

Noticeably absent from the party was Mike Wilson. He was usually the life of the party, but recently he had been distant. Before tonight, Mike would show up, but would sit alone in corner drinking hard liquor. Patton and Frank were getting worried about their friend and colleague, but he hadn’t been working much lately either. The party continued on past midnight but slowly petered out. Frank took Shontae home but returned. After everyone else had gone, it was just Patton and Frank. Jennifer went to bed when Patton promised he’d clean up. Frank assured her that he’d help and keep Patton on task. They quietly cleaned up beer bottles and paper plates without a word. After a half hour of awkward silence, Frank finally addressed the elephant in the room.

“No Mike again. You seen him?”

Patton continued cleaning and seemed to be trying to avoid the question. Finally he shook his head no. Frank grunted and moved to the living room to begin cleaning.

“I’m worried about him, Patton. He hasn’t been himself since the election and he’s gotten worse since everything started going wrong.”

Patton was worried too, but Mike’s recent behavior hadn’t been weighing on his mind as much as Frank’s.

“He’s adjusting, Frank. His mom died. His business is cruising along so he doesn’t have anything to challenge his mind. You know how he is.”

And Frank did know because he was exactly the same way. People like he and Mike needed something to get them out of bed. Since the election, Mike seemed to be wandering through life, looking for something important to do. Unbeknownst to Frank, Patton had something planned that might bring Mike out of his emotional funk. He wasn’t ready to reveal it, though, because he wasn’t sure it would work. Patton hadn’t even told Jennifer about his idea. She would probably try to talk him out of it.

“We have to do something soon, Patton. He’s not right in the head.”

Patton nodded. He understood the concern, but he wasn’t ready to commit to any sort of intervention. “I’ll talk to him,” Patton said quietly. “He’s just working through some stuff.”

If either of them knew what Mike was planning, however, they would have rushed over to his house and talked sense into him right then.

The dark figure turned his collar to ward off the cold. He patted his pocket to feel the weight of the pistol for the hundredth time. Mike Wilson felt like a James Bond wannabe, but, he realized, spies must do it like this for a reason. Here he was, a cold April rain falling, waiting to meet someone in a dark alley.

Mike’s business partners thought he’d changed. In a sense he had, but not in the way they thought. On the outside, Mike had been calm and reserved—maybe a result of his losing the election. Inside, however, something dangerous was brewing. After losing the election, Mike returned to operate his business. He desperately wanted to deny the governorship to David Asher, but he was never sure that he wanted to hold public office or to have that much responsibility. In hindsight, it would have been much better for Blue Creek had he won. Asher and his puppet masters had made a mess of things. Patton thought the negative outcomes were purposeful. Mike told him that it didn’t matter. Whether the results of these economic policies were purposeful or not, the result was the same—people were suffering. Many had lost their homes and many couldn’t find jobs.

Mike paced nervously, stamping his feet to keep them warm. There was the occasional snowflake mixed in with the large drops of cold rain. He shivered and checked his watch. The kid was late. Ten minutes now. He thought about what he was about to do. No longer was he weighing it in his mind, whether it was moral or immoral, just or unjust. The killing of a man, in theory is wrong, but is it always wrong? What if good comes from it? Would the assassination of Adolf Hitler or Josef Stalin have been wrong? Wouldn’t millions of human beings lived?

No, Mike thought, shaking his head, this was the right thing to do. One person was nothing, particularly when that person was causing so much pain to others. If caught, he was willing to sacrifice his own life and livelihood for the betterment of the town and people he’d grown to love. That was magnanimous, he realized, grandiose even.

Fifteen minutes late now.

“Damn, where is he?” Mike thought out loud. He looked at his watch again and shivered. He walked to where the alley ran into a cross street then back to get warm. Mike felt for the gun again, this time sliding his hand into the pocket and fingering the metal. It was a .38 special, much like the one his father used to keep in his nightstand. It was small and easy to handle. The kid assured Mike that he knew how to use it. Of course Mike was skeptical—the kid was only eighteen. Mike would do the job himself, but he knew there was no way he could get close enough to Asher. The pistol was only effective from about twenty-five feet and even that was pushing it. The kid needed to get close.

“You have to hit him with the first shot, Jimmy” Mike had told him emphatically. “If you don’t, you won’t have the chance to make the kill shot. His security guards will surround him and probably shoot you down before you can get away.”

“Okay Mike, I’ve got it,” Jimmy responded impatiently.

The kid’s tone rankled Mike and he wanted to grab him by the shoulders and shake him. Instead, he put his hand on the kid’s shoulder and spoke to him seriously.

“Look kid, we’re not playing games here. This isn’t the range your daddy took you to alright?” Mike said emphatically.

That first meeting was almost a week ago. Between then and now, Mike mentally battled himself. The pros, the cons, the morality. Having finally convinced himself that it was indeed the right move, Mike called for another meeting.

Mike reached the sidewalk and turned. When he did, he saw a solitary, hooded figure standing in the rain. He reached the spot and motioned for the kid to follow him. He led him further down the alley then ducked between two buildings. Typical Hollywood stuff, Mike thought, but again, it must be the best way to do this type of thing. Mike stopped at a door and pulled a set of keys from his pocket. Mike took one last look around to see if anyone was watching them and then walked through the door after the kid.

They had just entered Maddie’s Diner, Jimmy realized. It was a typical diner with booths along the wall opposite the long counter.

“You’re late,” Mike said, brushing the rain from his hair.

The kid pulled his hood off and starting brushing the rain off of his jacket and pants. “Sorry Mike. I had to walk. My Mom wouldn’t let me take either of the cars.”

Jimmy looked sincere so Mike let it go. Still, he needed to make a point. He put his finger in the kid’s face and said, “That’s fine, but from now on, you make our meetings. I don’t pick times and places for no reason.”

The kid nodded. He wasn’t necessarily frightened by Mike, but he didn’t want to argue, especially since he was in the wrong.

“Okay Mike,” Jimmy said humbly. His quiet tone disarmed Mike and the issue was settled.

Mike looked at him again and then nodded. He reached into his pocket and pulled out the revolver. The steel of it was cold in his hands. He held it by the barrel and handed it to the kid, butt first. Jimmy hefted it and turned it back and forth, inspecting it. What struck Mike was that the kid looked like an adult handling the weapon instead of a kid playing with a toy. Jimmy looked comfortable with the pistol in his hands and that relieved Mike. The kid hit the release lever and flipped the revolver open, inspecting the six bullets. He dumped the bullets out in his hand and flicked the cylinder back into place, cocked the hammer, and pulled the trigger to make sure it functioned correctly.

“Nice, Mike,” he said, nodding approvingly. “Nice balance. Nice weight.”

Jimmy opened it again and reloaded the pistol. He slipped it into his jacket pocket and looked at Mike for guidance on what to do or say next. Mike led him to a booth and sat down.

“Where you gonna do it?” Mike asked.

Jimmy shrugged. The gesture reminded Mike that he was indeed a kid.

“Depends. You just wanna punch his ticket or do you wanna send a message?” the kid said with an aloof air that didn’t match his words. He was only eighteen, but his mother assured Mike that her son was up to the job.

Despite her efforts to corral Jimmy, he joined an Irish gang in South Boston when he was only thirteen. By the time he turned fifteen, she figured it was too late to get him to straighten out. Mike knew Jimmy through his mother, who he’d gone out with a few times. She joined the experiment to get Jimmy away from the gang—the staying out all night, the fights, the drugs and the drinking. Jimmy was lucky to be alive, but since coming to Blue Creek, he’d been bored. He was used to living in a big city where there was always something to do.

“I don’t care about a message. I just want him gone,” Mike said curtly.

Jimmy nodded and then pulled out a small notebook. He opened it and said “In that case, it’s gonna be best to hit him either at his house or his ho’s apartment.”

Mike looked at him, eyebrows raised.

“His ho?” Jimmy repeated. “His lady. His skank. Nigga shacks up with her all the time,” he said, grinning.

“Okay,” Mike said, relenting, glad that the kid had been doing his homework. “When he stays there does he have any of his security with him?”

Jimmy shook his head. The governor was careful about his security, but he wasn’t smart after hours. To Asher, any threat ended the minute he left City Hall.

“No, man. It’s gonna be easy pickins,” Jimmy said, grinning broadly. “This guy thinks he’s bulletproof or has no idea someone’s green lighting his ass.”

Mike’s eyebrows raised again. Jimmy sighed and rolled his eyes.

“Green light. Have it out? Put out a hit?”

Mike nodded, and put his palms up. “Alright, I got it. I just don’t understand all your slang, kid.”

“That’s aight. Look, if you want me to hit this guy, I’ll hit him. No problem. The thing is, what am I gonna do after? Act like nothing happened and come work for you in one of your dinky little factories?”

Mike thought about that for a minute then asked, “What do you wanna do, kid?” He felt foolish for never having considered that.

“I wanna go home,” Jimmy said simply. “This place sucks. I wanna go home to Boston.”

Mike nodded. That could easily be arranged. The kid was not under the contractual obligations of his mother. He could leave anytime he wanted. It would just take the money to get him on a flight or on a train.

“Okay. Once it’s done you’re going to get out of town. I’ll arrange it all. You let me know the day before you’re going to do the hit and I’ll fill you in on all the arrangements.”

Jimmy nodded then held out his fist. Mike didn’t know what to do. Jimmy made a short jabbing motion with his fist, telling Mike he wanted knuckles. Mike made a fist and bumped the kid’s knuckles.

“Straight!” Jimmy said, laughing.

Mike just rolled his eyes and smiled.

It was Anna who was asleep now. Asher wanted to touch her before leaving but didn’t want to wake her. He stood there for a moment, gazing down at her. She was so beautiful, he thought. She looked like a little girl when she was sleeping. It was just after midnight and he had a long day of meetings ahead of him. He didn’t want to leave sleeping beauty but he never got enough deep sleep when he was in her bed for some reason.

He finished dressing and slinked out of the bedroom, hoping his movement wouldn’t wake her. Rooting around for his coat, he looked outside and saw that it was drizzling. ‘Damn,’ he thought. He hated the rain and this time of year, early April, seemed to bring lots of it. He pulled up his collar, grabbed his keys, and made his way out of Anna’s apartment and to the street where his car was parked.

It had started to rain that cold, drizzly rain around ten, but Jimmy was glad for it. The older guys in his gang told him to use the elements because the sounds of rain and wind cloaks everything and keeps people indoors. Jimmy pulled his hood over his head and found a dark spot across the street from Asher’s car. The plan was to ambush him as he was unlocking his car—something that took time and concentration.

Mike told him to take him down with two shots, but Jimmy thought it would be better to empty all six bullets into Asher’s body. That would ensure a kill and then he could get out of this lame-ass place. He’d miss his Mom, but to a kid who was used to running around one of America’s largest cities with enough money to do pretty much anything he wanted, Blue Creek was a prison.

The tempo of the rain increased, forcing Jimmy to hunker down. He felt like lion in one of those National Geographic movies, just waiting for his prey. He smiled at that thought. He mindlessly fingered the pistol that was in the pouch of his hoodie and hunched down further. It could be a long night.

“You sonofabitch!” she screamed into the phone and then ended the call. She was tempted to roll down the window and throw the phone out. It would be symbolic of her ridding herself of her sonofabitch husband. That would be great, she thought. Too bad the bastard wasn’t with her right now. She heard her baby’s cries from the backseat and groaned. Why couldn’t she catch a break? Why couldn’t she have married a responsible man who would help her raise their child?

The sole purpose of this drive was to get the baby to sleep, but once the baby finally fell asleep, her asshole husband had to call and piss her off and make her yell and now the baby was awake again. The phone was ringing again but she ignored it. The baby was crying louder now. Hungry? Tired? ‘It was always something!’ she thought.

Why couldn’t she go out and get drunk on a Monday night and hang out with her friends? Oh yeah, because she was responsible. She had to work and she had the baby to take care of and daycare and the cleaning and the cooking and the laundry. And, oh yeah, she had no friends because her asshole husband didn’t want to let her out of the house unless it was to do something for his lazy ass.

The phone rang again but she hit the ignore button. She didn’t want to listen to his slurred speech and the rock music in the background. If it weren’t for the money thing she would have been gone a long time ago.

“Bastard! Dragging me out to this lame-ass place with no friends and nothing to do but take care of you!” she mumbled to herself, forgetting that it had been her idea to fill out their information on the experiment’s website without telling him and then forging his signature on the paperwork without his even knowing it.

Now, he reminded her time and time again, if she was so unhappy she could go out and earn the money to buy their way out of this place and she could go home to her precious mother. The phone rang again and this time she almost did throw it out. Instead, she let it ring and ring and ring.

The crisp air and rain wakened Asher’s senses but he knew he would be exhausted when he got home. He needed to get some sleep. ‘Damn meetings,’ he thought. He reveled in the power and influence he held over others, even though none of the proposals he made were actually his. He was just the public face, he remembered bitterly. That was going to change soon, though.

He rooted around his pocket for his keys. When he pulled them out he heard something plastic click on the ground, probably his debit card.

“Damn.” he said, bending down to pick it up.

Jimmy was frozen and soaked with rain. He’d almost bailed on this stakeout and gone home to warm up, but he didn’t want to put it off for yet another night. He wanted to get this over with. He needed to get it over with. Boston was beckoning him home and hitting Asher was his ticket. Just when he was about to leave he saw Asher exit the apartment and walk towards the street. He could see Asher rooting around in his pocket. Probably looking for his keys. When Asher walked around the car, his back was turned to Jimmy. Jimmy made his move and started to cross the street, slowly at first. He reached into the pouch of his hoodie and pulled out the revolver. Moving faster now, Jimmy concealed the gun behind his right hip.

Halfway across the street, Jimmy raised the gun and fired a shot. Just as he was about to pull the trigger, Asher bent over to pick something up, causing the shot to miss high. He missed but his target was still there, not moving. Jimmy was focused now. He wouldn’t miss again. He was so focused, in fact, he didn’t hear or see the SUV bearing down on him.

Although the rain had muffled the gunshot somewhat, Asher still recognized the pistol’s loud report and the snap of the bullet flying overhead. Asher turned to see someone walking towards him with a pistol raised towards him. The best thing for him to do would have been to close the distance and push or punch or do something to disarm the gunman. Instead he ran away, giving the attacker a chance to fire another shot.

Fortunately for Asher, though, the second shot never came. However, another type of roaring sound ripped through the night air.

She finally answered on the bajillionth time her sonofabitch husband called.

“What!” she screamed.

Her husband was so drunk now she couldn’t understand anything he was saying.

“Hey asshole! I don’t want to talk to you! Quit calling me!” she yelled and hit the end button. Before she could set the phone down it rang again. She looked at the screen to verify that it was him, but she already knew it was. Who else would call her? She angrily punched the ignore button and set the phone down on the passenger seat. She was mad and her windshield was covered with rain and her baby was crying so loudly that she barely noticed the loud thud.

Asher estimated that the body flew at least twenty feet in the air before landing on top of another parked car. The kid, who’d tried to kill him, crashed through the back window. Not knowing what else to do, the governor retreated to Anna’s apartment. He found her standing on her front stoop, a blanket draped around her shoulders.

“What the hell just happened?” she asked, her face wrenched with shock.

“Some bastard just tried to shoot me!”

“What?”

Asher grabbed Anna by the shoulders and led her inside. He called his security detail and told them where to pick him up. He should probably go to the hospital, but he was the governor. The doctor could come and see him at his house.

Now that they were in the light, she saw that his face was bruised and had road rash. His hair was matted down with rain. Altogether, he looked like Mike Tyson had punched him.

“What happened to your face?” she asked, concerned. She gently reached her hand towards his face. He grabbed her wrist and moved away from her.

“What?” he asked, distracted. He looked at himself in the hallway mirror. “Oh,” he said, “I must’ve hit my head when I jumped out of the way.”

“You should go to the hospital,” she said, still quite concerned about him.

“No. Look, I’m fine. My security detail is going to be here any minute. I’ll get checked later. I’ve got to get out of here. Who knows if someone else is after me too.”

Anna looked at him with wide eyes. She hadn’t considered this. Less than five minutes later a large, black Suburban pulled into her driveway. Two security agents exited the vehicle and came to the door. They surrounded Asher and escorted him to the SUV. He looked back at Anna, who was now standing outside her door. He waved at her and then ducked into the Suburban.

News of the attempted assassination of Governor Asher spread quickly. During the attack he took a header and bruised his face. He went to the hospital as a precaution. Anna called the media and made sure they were aware of the incident. Pictures of the governor’s face were quickly plastered all over the internet. A freelance photographer got pictures of Asher’s car with bullet holes in it. The local media was having a heyday and many bloggers tried to connect the story to something bigger. One reporter insinuated that Mike Wilson had possibly been involved. Luckily for Mike, the story went nowhere.

Jimmy, the perpetrator, suffered a broken hip, three broken ribs, a cracked vertebrae, a fractured skull, and a separated shoulder. Nearly his entire body was black and blue. He was life-flighted to a hospital in nearby Ogden, Utah, where he would be treated for his injuries. Once recovered enough, he would return to Blue Creek to face justice. During a visit to the hospital, Mike promised Jimmy that he wouldn’t spend a single day in jail for what happened. Jimmy couldn’t speak, but Mike could tell that Jimmy believed him.

CHAPTER 18

As time passed, the story of the assassination attempt began to fade from the public consciousness. Instead, the citizens of Blue Creek began to remember the misery they were feeling. Unemployment was still high and the economy continued its downward spiral. No amount of sympathetic press coverage for Governor Asher could wipe those facts away. Yet, while economic conditions in Blue Creek continued to worsen, the trio of Charlie Henry, Anna and Asher pushed ahead with their agenda. The new set of economic policies was about to be introduced. To give them a better chance to pass, they would be voted on as a package instead of individually.

First was an income tax increase, followed by the implementation of a value-added tax, an increase of the minimum wage, and last, the printing and insertion of additional cash into the economy. This would create inflation, which would, in turn, force businesses to increase their prices. Consumers would ultimately take the hit. More would be taken from their wallets and products and services would cost more. Again, businesses would be to blame and people would turn to the government for help.

As the weather began to warm, so did the divisions in Blue Creek’s politics. While Governor Asher was becoming wildly unpopular—a recent poll had put him at thirty-four percent approval—he still had his die-hard supporters. A group of business leaders, formed by Patton Larsen and his associates, built momentum and quickly became the loudest voice in the town’s politics. A vote on the economic package was set for May 1st. Because of the negative attention of the impending vote, anticipation of the outcome was palpable. The separate anti-Asher groups coalesced into a single, large political movement. They held a letter writing and email drive to pressure members of the Council to vote against the package.

When the day of the vote finally arrived, Blue Creek was terribly divided. The pro-Asher movement, behind Anna and Charlie, was pushing their pro-package message through the media. The publicity helped the policies gain some popularity, but overall, the people of Blue Creek were very much against it. The vote was scheduled for seven that evening and was going to be carried on live TV. Hours before the vote, hundreds of people, representing both sides of the issue, gathered in front of City Hall. The Blue Creek Police Department was in “all hands on deck” mode to provide security and keep the two sides separated.

In an attempt to bring calm and keep order, Governor Asher went on TV to give an address. Although he was undoubtedly in favor of the proposals, he beseeched citizens to accept the results of the vote, whichever way it went. A half hour before the vote, a large bus pulled up in front of City Hall. All twenty-one members of the Blue Creek Council stepped off and made their way into the building. There was some cheering and jeering, but mostly, the crowd was quiet, mostly out of dreaded anticipation of the outcome.

Council member Peter Grace was in a tough spot. The vote was tied ten to ten and just his luck, he was the last person to vote. He wasn’t really on the fence—he had known for weeks how he was going to vote—he just knew that he was about to become a symbol of derision and anger. He would’ve voted for the package anyway, but a visit to his home the night before helped him make his decision. He hadn’t recognized the man, but he knew it was someone he shouldn’t mess with.

The man was there to inform the Councilman that he knew why Grace fled his home in Ohio. If he didn’t vote the right way on the tax package, the rest of Blue Creek would know. The man threw in the last caveat—if he voted against it, not only would everyone on Blue Creek know that he had committed various crimes back in Ohio, and was wanted by the law there, he would also be beaten within an inch of his life. Swallowing hard, Grace nodded again. He closed the door and started to think about what to do after being voted out of office.

“And how does Mr. Grace vote?” came the voice of the Speaker.

Peter Grace was shaken out of his trance. He looked at the Speaker, then ahead to the gathered audience. A pregnant silence hung in the air. He nervously cleared his throat and leaned closer to his microphone.

“I vote yes, Madame Speaker,” he said, his voice cracking.

Loud applause broke out from one half of the room. The Speaker nearly pounded her gavel through her desk.

“Let’s have some order!” she said to no avail.

Although Councilman Grace had just become the hero to half of this room, he had just become the enemy to nearly three-quarters of Blue Creek. On one hand, he would be voted out of office—there was no doubt about that. On the other hand, he wouldn’t have to spend months in a body cast.

Supposedly they had just won a victory, but Anna and Asher didn’t feel like celebrating. It felt more like they had just had a near-death experience. They usually would have been in bed by this point, but the Governor was too frazzled by the near miss. He chalked the victory up to his charm and political acumen, but Anna knew better. She was the one who had deployed the thug to the Council member’s house. Not wanting to deflate what was left of Asher’s ego, she decided to not mention it.

Anna was nursing her second drink while Asher was either on number seven or eight. She wished he would just pass out. However, he was still going strong on his anti-Wilson rant, something he was doing more often the less popular he became.

“So what’s the old bastard going to have me do next, buy a nuke from the US government and drop it on all of our heads?” Asher asked, almost completely drunk now.

Anna almost laughed, but this wasn’t the time to encourage him. The last thing they needed to do at this point was divide themselves. There were outside forces at work trying to do that. What she needed to do was help him see the big picture. Yes, they would take their lumps in the polls and at the ballot box, but once they had power, it was going to be hard for anyone else to take it away from them. Instead of placating Asher and giving into his woe-is-me mood, she set her drink down and glared at him.

“You know what,” Asher said, raising his glass towards her, “you look like my mother when you make that face.” He chuckled and downed the rest of the dark yellow liquid.

“Screw you, David,” she said viciously. “Why don’t you pull your head out of your ass and listen to what we’re trying to do here? It’s not about one election or one policy.”

Asher scoffed at that. He wanted to remind her that the experiment started with everyone equal in socioeconomic status, but she would just brush this aside. It was at that moment that he decided to go ahead with his plans. She didn’t know this—sitting on the floor with her back up against her recliner—that David Asher had just decided to take Blue Creek in his own direction.

There was a similar scene at the Larsen house—a depressed, drunk man with a woman trying to comfort him. Patton had alternated between rage and disbelief at the outcome of the vote. He’d poured hundreds of hours and thousands of dollars into stopping passage of the economic package. He’d cranked up the activity on his blog, writing what he believed were his best pieces. Traffic at his site had been at its highest. Patton had every reason to believe that they would stop the new policy proposals. But something had gone wrong.

Part of Patton wanted to relent—to give up the fight and let Charlie Henry have his way. He’d still make his money for a while. If worse came to worse, he could pay his way out of the experiment and go home. Another part of Patton understood the consequences of his leaving. He was the only thing standing in the way of Charlie Henry bringing “utopia” to Blue Creek.

“You tried everything you could, Patton,” Jennifer cooed. She rubbed his neck the way he liked and he was finally starting to relax. Patton grunted in disagreement. However, he couldn’t think of anything else he could have done.

Their conversation drifted onto other topics and eventually led to Mike and what he was up to.

“What’s wrong with him?” Jennifer asked, obviously concerned.

“No idea. I haven’t even really seen him.”

Patton suddenly started to chuckle.

“What?” Jennifer asked, smiling. She was glad to see him smiling.

“Do you remember that story Mike was telling us about him and his brother when they went to Brazil?”

Jennifer’s eyes gleamed as she watched her husband recount the story.

“You really don’t remember that?”

“No. I don’t recall.”

Patton chuckled to himself again then stopped.

“What did you just say?”

“What?” Jennifer replied, confused at Patton’s sudden change of mood.

“What did you just say?”

“You asked me if I remember the story and I said I don’t recall him telling a story like that.”

Patton sat up quickly in bed. The effect of the alcohol in his system was suddenly gone. He swore and slapped himself on the forehead.

“What?”

“Recall. Why the hell didn’t I think of that?”

Jennifer was starting to get concerned. Patton was on another one of his rants.

“What are you talking about?”

“There’s over eighteen months until the election. Once these policies kick in they’re going to crash the economy worse than it is now. We can recall Asher because people will be impatient and angry.”

Jennifer chewed on this idea for a minute then realized something.

“Is a recall in the constitution?”

“I don’t know. I’ll check in the morning. If it’s not we’ll have to get it on there.”

Jennifer looked skeptical.

“Wouldn’t Asher have to sign that?”

Patton nodded.

“Yes, but ten people voted no tonight. That means we would need four people to override a veto. They’re going to be too scared to not vote for a recall.”

Jennifer was still unsure but she let it go.

“Anyway,” Patton said, yawning. “I’m tired. Let’s go to bed.”

Bao was sitting through yet another meeting. The schedule returned to normal for a time, but recently, they were back to multiple meetings per week. Bao was working on his second energy drink, but it would be his last for the day. Despite that, he still had to fight to stay awake.

There were two main agenda items in this most recent set of meetings. First was the economic package that passed months earlier. The second was a more recent development—David Asher was being recalled.

A surprisingly happy Michael Varner led the meeting.

“What we got economically?” Varner asked Dr. Edmunds, the head economist.

Edmunds pulled a report from a folder and cleared his throat.

“To be frank, the policies have been an utter disaster for the economy. They’re so bad you could almost say that someone is purposely trying to make the economy tank.”

Bao laughed out loud at this, but quickly stifled it. Most at the table turned to look at him, but he took a sip from his drink, embarrassed at his outburst. He reacted this way because this was exactly what Patton Larsen claimed during the debate over the policy package. Larsen continued to make the claim on his blogsite, but he’d largely been ignored.

“Something to add Bao?” Michael Varner asked, a somewhat playful look on his face.

Bao stifled another laugh and said, “No sir. My report speaks for itself.”

He’d recently submitted a long, detailed report on this exact topic. Most of it was taken word for word from discussions he’d had with Patton.

“What do you think Dr. Edmunds?” Varner asked.

Edmunds tapped his pen mindlessly on the report. He was obviously debating how to answer.

“I used to laugh at Larsen’s claims, but now I have to wonder. I mean, these policies, especially when taken together, are absolutely horrible. Growth is stagnant at best. Consumer confidence is almost nil. Prices are high, wages are low. Unemployment is growing because the business tax burden is so high and people aren’t spending much right now.”

“What about the economic stimulus?” asked one of the political scientists, who was obviously supportive of what the Asher government was trying to accomplish.

Edmunds rolled his at the question.

“That did nothing but cause consumer prices to go up. Yes, they printed and gave money to people that were hurting, but businesses had to increase prices because the value of the currency decreased. It had zero effect overall.”

Bao could tell the woman wanted to respond, but she had no facts to retort with. Edmunds continued, predicting further economic problems for Blue Creek. Someone asked Dr. Edmunds when things would improve.

“When David Asher is out of power,” was all he said.

Michael Varner turned the conversation to the recall of Governor David Asher. Bao figured there were over a hundred years of experience in politics. After a half hour of discussion, though, Bao realized that no one had a clue how the recall had come about. Bao knew that it began and ended with Patton Larsen, but no one else wanted to acknowledge this fact for some reason. He must have reacted because Varner asked for his opinion.

“Again, my report speaks for itself. I submitted it a couple weeks ago.”

Several researchers pushed back against Bao’s conclusions, but he didn’t back down. He watched Patton put the movement together. He’d even tried to recruit Bao to spread the word, but Bao was able to reject the offer without revealing himself as spy for Insight Resources. Despite his reticence to participate directly, Bao was able to see how it all unfolded. Once everyone agreed to disagree they moved on to the election itself.

The vote would take place on the Tuesday after Memorial Day. Like the original election, if none of the candidates won a majority it would go to a runoff between the top two candidates. Recent polling showed Asher’s positives to be low and his negatives high. Voters were engaged in the process, which didn’t bode well for Asher’s survival. Bao left the meeting certain of two things. First, David Asher would not survive the recall. Second, it was possible that Blue Creek might not survive the removal of David Asher.

David Asher finally came to terms with the fact that he was facing recall. There were a lot of reasons and a lot of blame to go around, but no matter the cause, David Asher blamed Charlie. Furious, he pulled his phone from his pocket and called Anna. She hesitated to answer, but she knew she would have to deal with him sooner or later.

“Hello David.”

There was a pause, but Anna could hear him breathing.

“David?”

“He said those policies would be fine.”

Anna paused and took in a deep breath. She was tired of dealing with prima donnas and she had them in both ears. If Asher did something wrong, she’d hear about it from Charlie. If Charlie did something wrong, she’d hear about it from Asher. She was starting to think it was time to pare their partnership down to two… or maybe just one.

“Yes, he did,” she finally answered. She was trying to keep her cool, but she knew it was going to be difficult.

“And he was wrong. Again.”

“Yeah. What am I supposed to do about it at this point?” she asked, her voice raising in intensity.

Asher didn’t answer. He knew it was too late for them to do anything. They would just have to weather the storm. The only question was whether they would hang together or go their own ways.

“Have you talked to Charlie?” Asher asked, calmer now.

“Yes. He’s… in shock. He guesses he underestimated Patton Larsen.”

“Yeah. No shit,” Asher scoffed.

Anna laughed, but quickly stopped herself. She realized that Asher was technically the only person affected by the recall. A long, awkward silence fell between them.

“What now?” Asher asked, sounding almost desperate.

“I don’t know,” Anna replied, frankly. “We can’t give up, though.”

Asher sighed loudly, annoyed with the obviousness of the comment. He steeled himself for what he was about to say next, knowing she would protest.

“Tell Charlie I’m done with his advice. He obviously doesn’t know what the hell he’s talking about. I’m going to have to save this myself.”

Asher paused, but Anna remained silent.

“The only question is, are you going to help me?”

Another pause. Anna felt trapped and wasn’t ready to make this important of a decision.

“Well?” Asher asked.

“I don’t know, David. I’m going to have to think about it.”

“You mean, you’re going to have to talk to Charlie.”

She closed her eyes and bit her lip. She wanted to end it all now and let him do what he wanted. But they’d come too far. And besides, Asher was right—Charlie messed up and made a lousy decision, based on what? Ego?

“Okay. I’ll help you. I don’t care what Charlie thinks.”

Asher nodded, relieved. He was determined to save his office, even without her. However, he knew that having her on board was going to be a lot better for his chances.

“Okay then. When do we get started?”

“I’ll call you,” Anna said and hung up.

She set her phone down on her lamp table. She rubbed her eyes and massaged her temples. A massive headache was coming and she needed to head it off somehow.

Worse than the headache, though, was the inevitable conversation with Charlie. She and Asher were going to continue and Charlie would have to take a backseat. It could go either way, really. He could be calm, which always made him seem more psychotic. Or, he could fly off the handle and yell and scream at her. She never knew which Charlie she was going to get.

Mike Wilson was the first person to submit his paperwork for the recall election. Another candidate from first election, and two newcomers, entered the race. All told, five people, including David Asher, would run for the governorship of Blue Creek City. As the campaign progressed into the summer, it became apparent that Mike Wilson was going to win handily. Not only that, he was likely going to win an outright majority in the first round.

Governor Asher hated to debate, but he was desperate. Those in the campaign knew it was his only chance to close the distance. In every speech and television appearance he claimed that Mike Wilson was afraid to debate. The pressure for Wilson to debate increased and he finally relented. It was set for the Friday before the election. It would give voters one final look at the candidates and give them four days to make their final decision.

The debate had largely been a draw. All of the candidates made good points, but no one landed any heavy blows. The purpose of the debate was to give David Asher a chance to catch up in the polls. He needed a Hail Mary and he got his chance when the moderator allowed the candidates to directly question an opponent.

“I’d like Mr. Wilson to tell us why he’s opposed to setting up programs that will help the poor people in our community,” Asher said to the moderator. He didn’t have the heart to look at, or speak to, Mike Wilson directly.

Wilson grinned and he tried, unsuccessfully, to wipe it away with his hand. This was the opening they had been waiting for. Offstage, Patton wiped his forehead and chuckled, unable to believe that David Asher would give his opponent such an opening.

“Well Mr. Asher, I believe the answer to that question is quite easy. When everyone came to Blue Creek, they had the opportunity to have a business established for them. Some chose not to do this, opting, instead, to work for others. That’s fine, as long as there are jobs. But I’d like to remind you and you voters out there, that Mr. Asher’s dreadful policies have absolutely destroyed jobs in this community.

“And,” he said, cutting off the governor, who was trying to interject. “I find it offensive that he of all people would have the gall to ask me about welfare programs when it’s his fault that there are even people in these desperate situations. It’s laughable, really,” he said, looking over at Asher, who was now shuffling nervously through his notes, looking for something… anything… to get him out of the trouble he was now in.

“So, does that answer your question, Mr. Asher?”

Asher’s nervous swallow was visible on camera. He didn’t answer, not knowing what to say. Wilson pressed him.

“I asked you a question, Mr. Asher.”

Another pause.

Watching at home, Charlie Henry knew that it was over. Part of him was relieved. He was tired of this prima donna. Just as the thought left his mind, his phone rang. It was Anna.

“Charlie?”

“Yes,” he responded, noting her quavering voice.

A pause, then, “it’s over, isn’t it.”

He closed his eyes, hating to hear her upset, particularly when she was upset at Asher’s pain and failure. “Yes,” he replied matter-of-factly.

Silence.

“Anna?”

“What.”

“Are you ready to run next year?”

She laughed a humorless laugh. All of their work, pain, toil, and effort had been for naught.

“You’re kidding, right?”

“No, darling,” he said in his grandfatherly tone. “He’s done. He’ll never be trusted again. You on the other hand… you know what we’re trying to do.”

She didn’t want to admit it but he was right—at least at the part about Asher. He was done. There was no way he could beat the Texas hick, and people would never forget what havoc his policies had caused the town.

‘Damned impatient people,’ she thought bitterly. These things take time. Didn’t they know that? Did Franklin Roosevelt do what he did in a week? No. It took years.

“Okay Charlie,” she said, resigned to their new reality. “He’s done, but I’m not sure I’m the candidate type.”

“Sure you are, darling. You’ll be better than Asher ever was. We won’t have to coach you on what you say because it’s all already in your mind and in your heart.”

She closed her eyes, beginning to dread what Asher’s reaction would be. Would he be sullen and sulky or would he be angry and violent?

“We’ll figure it out, Charlie. We have a few months.”

“Okay, Anna,” he said, and ended the call.

The reaction to Mike Wilson’s resounding debate victory was much different. Many of the campaign workers were present. Bottles of Dom Perignon and cases of beer were on ice, ready for the celebration. There was a chance that Mike wouldn’t win a full majority. However, not even Patton thought he’d fall short of a first round victory.

When the candidate arrived, he received a hero’s welcome. The drunken partiers hoisted Mike and Patton onto their shoulders and carried him around Jennifer’s living room. The party continued on well past midnight. Mike Wilson was finally himself again. He was happy and outgoing and telling stories again. He also had a gorgeous woman hanging on his arm—the truest sign that he was feeling like himself again.

Four days later, Blue Creek citizens poured into the polling booths. Patton was happy to see the heavy turnout, which he thought was a good sign for Mike. Every part of Patton’s prediction came true. He won the election with a full majority, with nearing sixty percent of the vote. David Asher took less than thirty-five percent. The remaining candidates combined for less than ten percent of the vote. It was a resounding victory, and as Mike Wilson put it during his victory speech, “It wasn’t just my victory but a victory for everyone in Blue Creek.”

In his concession speech, David Asher was visibly upset, but he was able to say, “This was a tough race. I think that a mistake was made here tonight, but the people have spoken. I called Mr. Wilson and congratulated him on his victory. We have agreed on a two-week transition period. He will take office soon thereafter.”

He looked up from his notes. The camera flashes and questions began to fly at him. He looked tired, beaten, haggard. No one had ever seen him so down in public. Asher didn’t take any questions. He read his statements. Now he was going to go home and get drunk.

The party to celebrate Mike’s victory made the debate celebration seem tame by comparison. Patton and Jennifer went all out, holding the rally at Frank’s warehouse. Hundreds of people showed up to watch the returns and then celebrate with the candidate once his victory was announced. There were streamers and signs and balloons. Patton hired a local rock band to perform for the crowd after Wilson had given his victory speech. The party went well into the early hours of the morning. After everyone finally left, it was just Patton and Jennifer.

“Who’s going to clean up this mess?” Jennifer said to Patton as they sat on the edge of the stage.

Patton looked around the large, open area and smiled. At the moment he didn’t care how the place looked. They won. It was all that mattered.

“I’ll call a cleaning service tomorrow,” he said, grinning like a little boy. It was the happiest she’d seen him since their wedding.

She smiled back at him and said, “Good, because I don’t want to have anything to do with it.” She kicked at an empty plastic cup that was on the floor. “You did it,” she said, cutting him off from his attempt to be humble. “No. You know you were the one who made this all happen. Don’t try to be humble with me right now because I’m your wife. I know better.”

He smiled at her and put his arm around her shoulder.

“Okay, I’ll let you say it just this one time.”

CHAPTER 19

The Governor-elect woke up in a great mood. He was so happy he didn’t even have a hangover. He’d polished off a whole bottle of champagne by himself and God only knew how many shots of tequila, not to mention all the beer. The euphoria of victory must have pushed the alcohol right through his system. Mike felt a stir and remembered the woman and how fun the post celebration celebration had been. He was lying in bed, completely relieved and relaxed. The Asher administration was over and the campaign was now in the history books.

Never one to relax for too long, Mike began to think of his day. It would be a light day—hell, anything compared to the last two weeks of the campaign was light. He had a planning meeting with Patton in the afternoon and a TV interview that evening. Mike turned and looked at the lovely brunette lying there. She was sound asleep. He lifted the sheet and looked at her beautiful body. A debate between his head, his heart, and another part of his body began. It wasn’t much of a debate.

Asher was physically ill. It had been a tough campaign. His people, particularly Anna, had pulled out all the stops. Still, he’d lost to the Texas hick Mike Wilson. He shook his head in disbelief. The motion made him feel like a billiards ball rolling around his skull. He groaned and touched the side of his head. Unlike his foe, he did have a hangover. Like his foe, however, he woke up to a mess and a naked woman in his bed. Anna stirred at the sound of his groan but didn’t wake. He turned to her and sneered. ‘How the hell could she sleep right now?’ he thought. They’d lost and he was blaming her. If anyone else had been there he would have blamed them too.

Asher sat up and his head started to throb. His goal was to make it into the bathroom for some Excedrin and a shower. Asher looked to his right and saw a glass of water on his nightstand. He reached out for it and nearly knocked it over. He tilted his head back and gulped the water greedily, spilling huge drops all over his bare chest. In a sudden fit of anger, he threw the glass against the far wall, punctuated with a violent curse. Water and glass exploded all over the room. A piece of it even landed at the foot of the bed. Anna jumped up to her knees from her prone position when she heard the crash of glass.

“What the hell!” she groaned. Apparently his headache was contagious because she was rubbing her forehead, her eyes clamped shut.

Asher didn’t respond. Instead, he threw the sheets off the bed, stood, and made his way to the bathroom.

“What time is it?” Anna groaned.

“I don’t know,” he croaked through his parched throat. He walked across the bathroom and turned the shower on. “I don’t care,” he said, almost as an afterthought.

He stepped into the shower and let the warm water massage his head. It cascaded down and the tension seemed to wash away with it. He was enjoying the water so much he didn’t notice that Anna had gotten in with him until he felt her chest on his back and her arms reach around his stomach. She kissed his back and nestled her cheek against him.

“It’s going to work out. We’re just going to have to push things faster than we wanted to,” she said, trying to reassure him.

She felt him nod.

“Before you know it you’ll be right back on top with more power than you had before.”

He turned around to face her, her hands now clasped at the small of his back.

“You think it’ll work?”

She leaned her head back so she could meet his gaze. “I know it will,” she said with her eyes now closed, letting the warm water massage her aching head. “They’re getting ready to go as we speak.”

In a small house on the outskirts of town, a seven-person team was gearing up. All seven of them—five men and two women—wore all black, including their bullet proof vests. All were equipped with wireless radio earpieces that would allow them to communicate with one another. Once they were ready, they split into two teams.

The leader was Brian White. Like Travis Snedley, he was a former combat veteran recruited by David Asher. White served two years in the Army before washing out. After his dishonorable discharge, he joined an anarchist group that hired its services out to various Leftist groups, including the Democratic Party. Realizing there was money to be made in the business of mayhem, White advertised his services in the violent Leftist underground. He was contacted through one of Asher’s friends back home. He’d arrived in Blue Creek a month earlier.

“Everyone ready?” White said over his radio, slamming a full magazine into his .50 caliber Desert Eagle. He loved this pistol because of its unique shape. When people had it held to their head they tended to give him what he wanted. He slid the pistol into his thigh holster and Velcroed it in. In turn, the other members of the team communicated their readiness. White then signaled for the driver to get going. Two cars pulled away from the small house. The first made its way towards downtown while the second paused at a stop sign. Two minutes later, it finally followed the lead car to the destination.

Patton was smiling. The TV was on but the sound was muted. In just a few minutes, Mike Wilson was going to be on with the much hated and biased reporter Sharia Jackson.

“Honey, it’s about to start!” he yelled to Jennifer, who was in the kitchen preparing them a snack.

She finished and walked into the living room, handing Patton another beer as she plopped down beside him on the couch.

“I’m so excited!” she said, nearly squealing.

Patton looked at her and smiled. He grabbed her hand and squeezed it. Letting out a deep sigh.

The first team arrived, their van skidding to a halt behind the one-level brick building that housed one of Blue Creek’s two television studios. They would have to cross a small patch of grass and the studio’s parking lot. All told it was about fifty feet of open ground. They each cautiously scanned the area before exiting the vehicle. They all pulled on a black ski masks, quickly surveyed their surroundings again, and then exited the vehicle.

The three intruders closed the distance between the street and the back door of the studio in less than ten seconds. Crouching at the back door, the man in front grabbed the handle and pulled the glass door open. They entered the hallway in a crouch and then ducked into a small office.

“In position,” the smaller team’s leader said, keying the radio on his shoulder.

There was a crackle and return of “Roger. En route.” White was glad to hear proper radio discipline. He’d trained these people well.

Sharia Jackson was trying hard to keep a smile on her face and Mike Wilson’s Cheshire Cat-like grin wasn’t making it easier. They had avoided each other since he’d arrived, getting their final makeup touchups in different areas of the set. The lights were on now and it was almost time to go on air.

Jackson badly damaged her reputation as a partisan reporter during the campaign. Her assignment to do this interview was a punishment for damaging the channel’s reputation. Either do the interview, she was told, or she could quit or be fired. Had he won, Governor Asher was going to make her his press secretary, but that was now out the window. Asher’s defeat had been her defeat and the asshole Texan wasn’t making it any easier. She was just grateful he wasn’t wearing his dopey cowboy hat.

Suddenly the producer said, “Let’s get ready. And five, four…”

The reporter turned to the camera, and with a smarmy grin said, “Hello. I’m Sharia Jackson. Tonight with me is the winner of last night’s exciting election, Mike Wilson. He’s been kind enough to sit down with us for a few moments to discuss the election and what his plans will be for Blue Creek.”

As the interview progressed, it was clear to everyone in the studio and in the viewing audience that the woman was having a hard time, especially when she had to address him by his new title.

“So Governor-elect Wilson,” she said, almost gagging on the words, “how does it feel?”

The camera view changed to a mid-range shot of Wilson. His grin answered her question and Patton and Jennifer let out a huge laugh.

“Well Sharia, it was a hard campaign, but I feel like I’m not the only person one who won something last night,” he said, subconsciously puffing out his chest. “I think the people of Blue Creek spoke a clear message last night. They’re tired of David Asher’s failed policies and they want to return to how things were when we all arrived here.”

Luckily for Jackson, the active camera hadn’t captured her rolling her eyes.

“Are you relieved that it’s over?” she asked dumbly. She decided that she would throw him meaningless questions until time was up. How could they fire her for that?

Wilson exhaled and looked her in the eye.

“You could say that,” he replied humbly, “but I’m more relieved that it was the right outcome. I know we have a couple weeks before we take over for real and hopefully the transition will be smooth. I’ve talked to Mr. Asher and he’s assured me that he will do his best to help me and my team hit the ground running.”

“That’s crap,” Patton thought out loud, harrumphing. He knew the transition was going to be a joke. However, Patton didn’t care. They were going to do everything differently. Once Mike won reelection they would have more time to make the necessary changes. It was going to take years to get the Asher stink out of the Blue Creek government.

Jennifer turned to face him and he smiled broadly. The relief in his eyes was palpable.

The second team finally reached the studio. All four members jumped out and pulled on black ski masks. Three members of the team fanned out and quickly moved towards the building in a wide triangular formation. Brian White, the team’s leader, strode confidently behind them, no longer concerned about being seen at this point. By the time any police could arrive, the deed would be done.

The first team member reached the glass door and pushed it open while his team members guarded either side of the door. The team leader stepped into the studio and into the radio said “Go!”

“So what is the next step?” Jackson asked Wilson. Maintaining her smile was getting more and more difficult. Her head was starting to ache and her right cheek was beginning to twitch.

“Well, my team and I have made some initial plans for in case we won,” Mike said, “but we met today and we’ll meet every day until we have all of the details hammered out. And of course we’ll be meeting with Mr. Asher and his people…”

The three-member team came out of their hiding place in the empty office and stepped out into a narrow hallway, walking single file. The man in front had his pistol in firing position, ready for any type of interference. They didn’t expect any because Asher had ordered a training exercise for police and firefighters up in the western hills. Only Asher cronies in the police department would be able to respond, but they were actually in on the plot.

As the first team was making its way down the hallway, Brian White was walking through the carpeted lobby. He turned left into a connecting hallway that opened up into a small lobby. One of Wilson’s security guards was there, sitting on a small Formica table. Lost in some thought, or otherwise not paying attention, the security guard was caught off-guard. The team leader raised his pistol and shot the security agent between the eyes. The report of the gunshot was deafening in the confined, brick-walled room.

On the other end of the building, the three-person team also encountered a security agent. The team’s leader, who was leading the procession through the building, shot him in the back of the head. He crashed hard and was dead before he hit the tiled floor. Two of the three pulled the body away from the door that it was now blocking, and behind that door was the studio’s control room.

Sharia flinched at the loud sound, thinking that some careless ass had slammed a door or something. Mike also heard it but didn’t pay it any mind. The reporter composed herself and looked down at her notecards.

“Anyway,” she said, visibly annoyed, “what are your plans with the Council?”

Mike lifted his right foot and rested in on his left knee, making a steeple of his fingertips, which were touching his chin.

“Well…” Mike responded, looking concerned. This had been one of the biggest issues he’d run on and he was glad to have an opportunity to address it. Voters had successfully recalled three of the five Council members. This turned the body to Wilson’s favor, but the result was disappointing. “…The Council has shown that it is very unconcerned with what the people want. We’ve found some serious corruption in the Council and I plan on running against those who have gotten greedy with the people’s money. Overall, though, it will be easier to enact changes that I think we need.”

“Changes?” she asked with an attitude then tried to recover her professionalism. She forced a neutral expression that almost made Mike giggle. She looked constipated.

He smiled and nodded.

“Sharia…” he paused and shook his head, “…why would we be here right now if the people were satisfied with Mr. Asher’s performance as governor? His tenure has been a disaster. We’ve been over this and over this. I won the election and so the people out there obviously agree with me,” he said, gesturing towards the cameras.

Brian White looked down the long hallway. It was clear. At the end of the hallway were two swinging doors. Behind them was the studio where the interview was being televised.

“Let me know when you’re ready,” he said into his the radio.

“Roger. We’re just outside.”

The leader of the smaller team burst through the door, his pistol raised head high. “Everyone stay put! Get your producer up here!” he said, wildly brandishing the weapon.

No one in the room moved. They were all in shock.

“Producer! Now!” he screamed and they jumped. Finally a young man at the control terminal pressed the intercom.

“Jason get up here,” he said nervously. “We have a situation up here. We need you up here now.”

Down on the studio floor, the producer looked ten feet above to the control booth. He could see that something wasn’t right but couldn’t tell exactly what was going on. He motioned for Sharia to continue and he walked up to the booth. When he entered he saw three people in black masks. They were all holding pistols, generally into the direction of his employees.

“Sir, what I need you to do is keep your people calm. I’m sorry to say, but we’re taking over your little broadcast. We have something we need to tell your viewers.”

The producer, who had never really seen a gun in real life, let alone had one pointed at him, started to shake. He wasn’t one for confrontation, but his shock wouldn’t allow him to process what he was seeing.

“What are you doing?” he stammered. “What do you want?”

The man in the mask stepped towards him and put his gun into the balding producer’s face.

“I told you. We’re taking over your broadcast. What I need for you to do is make sure that your people stay calm.”

Suddenly, his brain caught up to the moment and he ordered his employees to sit and remain calm. He assured them, although he didn’t know this for himself, that they would be all right if they cooperated.

The second team’s leader keyed his radio and said, “We’re in position.”

Mike saw the man first. When Sharia noticed that Wilson’s attention was elsewhere she followed his gaze to the corner of the room. She stared at the intruder and began to hyperventilate. He was tall, dressed in all black, wore a bulletproof vest, and was carrying a large pistol. Mike recognized its type at once. The Desert Eagle’s muzzle was a dead giveaway. Mike immediately knew what was going to happen. It was strange, but a surge of calm came over him. Subconsciously, he must have expected this.

“Something’s wrong Patton!” Jennifer screamed at her husband, who had gone to the kitchen for another beer. While he was away Mike had looked away from the camera over at the corner of the studio. The camera changed into a wide shot and she could see the interviewer’s shocked face.

The camera panned further back, revealing that intruders were in the studio. The man in front was holding a large handgun. He stood tall and erect, reminding Patton of an Olympic fencer. There was no time to get to the studio, but he called the police. He knew it would do no good, however. There just wasn’t time. He was going to watch his friend die on live television.

The leader motioned for Sharia to exit her chair and for Mike to stand. Sharia bolted from her chair immediately, but Mike sat there, erect and proud. He knew they were going to kill him and refused to give them the satisfaction of showing fear.

“Suit yourself,” the man with the gun said, walking behind Wilson’s chair. Guessing where Wilson’s spine was located, the man aimed and fired a bullet through the back of the chair. Mike arched in pain, but it would be the last voluntary movement he would make.

“Oh my God!” they both yelled as the man fired the shot. Jennifer jumped into Patton, closing her eyes.

Patton was unfazed with the collision. He just sat calmly and watched the man with the gun. He felt strangely calm, his jaw set rigid with rage. He stood, steeling himself against the horror he was about to watch.

“Go upstairs Honey. I don’t want you to watch this.”

Jennifer, who was weeping now, stood and walked up the stairs.

The force of the bullet pushed Mike forward but he wasn’t able raise himself back up. The bullet had severed his spinal cord in between his kidneys. He would be paralyzed for the remainder of his short life. Two more black-clad people walked into the studio and stood like sentries beside their leader.

“We are here to set right a wrong that was inflicted upon this city last night. This man was illegally elected.”

The tall, imposing figure paused. The silence hung over the moment like a shroud—both for those present and those viewing through their televisions.

“The city of Blue Creek elected David Asher for three years. This so called ‘recall’ election was illegal and undemocratic. We cannot abide by the results and know that Mr. Wilson is unwilling to acquiesce. Therefore, we have to force him and his followers to do what’s right.”

Another pause.

The masked figure stepped forward and grabbed Mike Wilson by the hair and pulled him straight in the chair. Mike’s face was pale and unresponsive.

“We do not, in any way endorse David Asher. Mr. Asher, this is a warning to you. If you violate the people’s voice and the democratic process, this same punishment will be meted out to you also.”

The man pulled his pistol and held it to the back of Mike’s head. Without any further dialogue, he unceremoniously pulled the trigger.

Patton forced himself to watch the barbaric act. He stared daggers at the figure through his television. At one point he nearly lost control and punched his fist through the screen. Instead he just stood there, his chest heaving.

He had felt this emotion before—the sense of righteous indignation. That was another time and in another country, but the feeling was the same. He watched the mayhem that followed the gunshot. The perpetrators hurriedly left the studio. Witnesses ran in and out of frame. Finally, the video feed was cut, replaced by the studio’s logo. Still rigid from shock, Patton stood there, his eyes still glued to the screen. He silently vowed that he would find out who did this and he would get revenge for his friend.

The next evening, an ashen-faced Governor greeted Blue Creek television viewers. He appeared to be traumatized by what had happened to Mike Wilson. This was a testament to the makeup artist. The hardest thing for Asher was to feign shock and anger. He found himself having to stifle a grin.

“I come to you tonight to express my disgust with these animals and what they did to Mike Wilson, your Governor-elect. He was my political foe, yes, and he and I went the rounds, but that was politics. Behind the scenes, Mr. Wilson and I had a cordial relationship.

“These people will be brought to justice, I assure you,” Asher said, a look of grim determination on his face. “This is particularly devastating to those of you who elected him to be the new governor. This really complicates our situation here in Blue Creek.

“Mr. Wilson was set to take office soon and we were supposed to begin the transition next week. Since that is no longer possible, I will retain office until a new election can be held. Until that point, I cannot relinquish this office at this time for the sake of stability.”

Anna stressed to him that he use the term “this” rather than “my” to show his deep regret for Wilson’s demise.

“But I assure you that a new election will be held just as soon as Mr. Wilson’s supporters, or anyone else, can come up with the necessary signatures and paperwork for a replacement candidate. Those arrangements for a new election are being made as we speak so I expect to hear from Mr. Wilson’s people soon.”

Patton was barely able to watch the broadcast, but he was glad that he did. He mentally accepted Asher’s challenge. He picked up his phone and dialed a number. It rang just once on his end before Frank answered.

“It’s either you or me,” Patton said tersely.

He could hear Frank hesitate on the other end of the line and that was all the answer he needed.

“Frank? You there?”

“Yeah,” Frank said breathlessly.

“I’ll do it then,” Patton said, still glaring angrily at the man who was about to become his political rival.

There was a pause and then Frank said, “Good,” and hung up.

Within a week Patton had the necessary signatures to run against David Asher. However, a date for the new election wasn’t soon in coming. There was one delay after another until, finally, there was such an outcry from the public that city officials had to set the date. Yet, after another month, the people began to see that the Asher administration was breaking its promise.

Asher took to TV to admit as much, telling the audience that “The logistics of a new elections was just too complicated,” and that since the regularly scheduled elections were approaching anyway, it would be better if they just waited until that time. He also argued that removing him from office with just over a year to go would create chaos, and wouldn’t give his replacement enough time to get anything done.

Patton took to his blogsite and any TV show that would have him. He countered with the argument that getting David Asher out of office just one day early would be worth it. At first, voters were experiencing campaign fatigue—they’d just endured an election and watched their governor-to-be assassinated. However, Patton built a grassroots movement that slowly gained momentum. David Asher eventually relented and set a date for a second recall election for the Tuesday after Labor Day.

CHAPTER 20

“He’s our guy,” Anna said to Asher and Charlie after the young man closed the door behind him. “He has the look, the attitude. Nobody knows him.” She looked at them in turn, waiting to hear their opinions.

Asher looked at Charlie. Their eyes met and Charlie nodded.

“Okay. Let’s meet with him again tomorrow and finalize your plans,” Asher said in his best authoritative tone.

Anna patted his arm and stood. She needed to get high. She disappeared into her bedroom to find her stash of marijuana and her pipe.

“What’s wrong with you?” Asher asked her as she loaded her pipe.

She glared at him, not answering. She lit the bowl and took a deep hit. She closed her eyes, holding the smoke in her lungs, letting it out slowly. She held the pipe and lighter up towards Charlie. “You want some?” she asked him.

He stood and reached out for the pipe.

“What will this kid do for us?” Asher asked, trying to not sound naive.

“He’ll run as a conservative and split the vote with Larsen,” she said simply. “Nobody knows who he is and what he really stands for. It doesn’t matter what he says. He’ll be the conservative version of you.”

Asher smiled at her appreciatively. Annoyed as she was with him—she was tired of holding his hand every step of the way—she couldn’t help but be turned on by him. She’d rejected his advances for a while and considered waiting a little longer. Or maybe not. She was feeling mellow now, the effect of the smoke had started to kick in.

“So he’ll pretty much parrot everything Larsen says, but he’s younger, more dynamic. He seems sharp and articulate,” Asher said, nodding.

“Yes,” Anna replied. She took the pipe and lighter back from Charlie and took another hit. “You’re going to win, even in a runoff. The other two are going to make people so sick of political fighting they’re going to drive down interest and turnout. Then, we are going to announce some reforms that will help build support.”

Asher was skeptical. He looked over at Charlie.

“He’ll tell you the same thing,” Anna said, trying not to be offended that he didn’t believe her analysis. “You performed well after the assassination. The people feel like you brought calm.”

Anna took another hit and looked over at Charlie, who was now practically unconscious. She looked at Asher and then stood and walked down the hall towards her bedroom. As she opened the door she looked back at him. He took one last look at Charlie—he was snoring now—and followed her to into her bedroom.

The young man they met with was Tyler Redding. He closed the door behind him, knowing they were going to talk about him, but he didn’t think it would be anything but positive. The girl, Anna, had found him through her a friend and had convinced him to participate in this little charade. What David Asher didn’t know was that Tyler was going replace him when his term was over.

Tyler decided to walk the two miles home to where he was shacking up with one of Charlie’s recruits. Anna told him that he needed to find a new place to live. If it was found that he wasn’t supposed to be in Blue Creek—that he hadn’t been selected for the experiment and was just an “illegal”—he would be ineligible for the election.

Tyler was intrigued by his new hometown. It was quaint, the people were generally nice, and the mountains were spectacular. Still, he couldn’t help but pine for his adopted hometown of New York City. Much like Anna, he was urbane and thrived in the big city. However, he felt the pull of this experiment. It was the only true laboratory to implement progressive policies.

After finishing his undergraduate degree at Princeton, he was accepted into Columbia’s School of Law and immediately moved to New York City. During a self-imposed, yearlong hiatus from school, Tyler heard about this experiment and he applied. He wasn’t accepted and he was about to give up and enter law school, but he remembered something his favorite professor at Princeton told him.

“Young man, a true progressive doesn’t let rules or conventions get in his way of doing what is right.”

That had stuck with him. His study of the anti-Vietnam protests drilled this maxim inside. If your end goal is right, he was also told, whatever you do to get there is okay. If you break the law but don’t get caught, did you really break it? Riots, violence, even bombings. Liberals were on the right side of history and it was their right—no, their obligation—to defeat their enemies and pass their agenda. Now, here he was, about to embark on a journey that would one day take him to the seat of power. Yes, he would have to pretend to be a conservative—the thought of doing so nearly made him sick—but again, the ends justify the means.

‘Who is this little bastard?’ Patton thought, looking at one of Tyler Redding’s yard signs. The red sign had large white letters, which read, “Redding for Governor.” To the left of the writing there was a large photo of the smiling, attractive young man. The kid reminded him of Asher, not knowing that that was precisely what his handlers wanted.

Patton wasn’t worried, necessarily. Governor Asher was polling just above forty percent. Still, he had no idea who the kid was or what he stood for. His cynical nature led to the impression that this new candidate was a fraud. Maybe that old bastard Charlie Henry and that little tramp were putting this new kid up to it—to split the vote or something.

But he quickly waved this idea away. Why would they run a decoy candidate when they had their own candidate to worry about? It was probably some cocky young kid who thought he could win with his good looks and crafty speeches. He would take a small part of the vote, either from himself or from Asher, but Patton figured he wouldn’t be much of a factor.

And of course, in that thought, he was wrong.

Bao felt trapped. The line between his two lives was continuing to fade. He was loyal to Insight Resources, the company that helped him escape his boring life in California. However, he was concerned about Blue Creek, his neighbors and friends. It was explicitly against Insight policy to reveal his identity as a “spy”. To do so would cost him his job. However, the information he now held could have a serious impact on the upcoming election and possibly the future of Blue Creek citizens.

Earlier that day one of his colleagues, a fellow spy, informed him that Tyler Redding was a Charlie Henry plant. This person had infiltrated the Asher government and had gotten to know Anna Radinski casually. While at a party of a mutual friend, Bao’s colleague saw Anna Radinski and Tyler Redding together. Even Governor Asher made an appearance. The only person missing was Charlie Henry. After asking around, Bao’s colleague verified that, not only did Radinski and Redding know each other, Tyler Redding wasn’t an official participant in the experiment. Again, if Bao leaked this information to someone like Patton Larsen, he could lose his job. If he didn’t tell Patton the situation in Blue Creek could get worse and worse. People had died, including the governor-elect on live television.

Bao grabbed a six pack of beer and logged in to his World of Warcraft account. It was his way of relaxing and thinking. He played well into the night and into the early morning. He was about to log off and go to bed when the answer came to his mind. He exited his game and opened up his email. Instead of breaking company policy and putting his job at risk, Bao decided to write up a standard report and copy the one man who could actually do something with Bao’s concern—Insight Resource CEO Michael Varner.

Bao worked on the report until daybreak. He made several edits and saved and attached it to an email. The proper process was to send it to his direct supervisor, who would take all of the agents’ reports and combine them. He would then summarize the reports, removing any unnecessary information. Bao was concerned that his supervisor would think Bao was overstepping his bounds and would cut out most of his report. To avoid this, Bao sent a copy directly to the CEO. It was risky, but he knew that Varner had also grown to love the people of Blue Creek and was concerned about these political outcomes.

He sent the email and closed down his computer. He had a series of deliveries scheduled for later that day, but he sent an email to his customers telling them their orders would be late. Bao stripped down to his underwear and turned on the TV that was on his dresser. He was asleep within three minutes. He dozed off, praying, as nearly as he knew how, that his email would fall upon sympathetic ears.

Michael Varner read the email again for the third time and gazed out his window towards the jagged mountains to the east. The attached report came from one of his company’s top agents. He was valuable for many reasons, but his number one attribute was his close relationship to Patton Larsen.

Asher understood the kid’s concerns and after reading the report he shared them. Just like Bao, however, he was trapped. Of course he had some influence. He was the head of the company that had implemented and now ran the experiment in Blue Creek. However, it was strictly against his company’s contract to influence events, people, and thus outcomes. Extremely valuable data for almost every conceivable scientific field had already been culled. A series of books and articles had already been published with scores, if not hundreds more, to come.

Varner was a family man. He could hear his two children playing in their room at that moment. This sent a pang of worry through him. What about those people, those little kids, who would be affected by these impending social and economic policies? Varner rubbed his hands through his hair, messing it worse than it already was. He didn’t know what to do, but he felt he had to do something.

No, Varner finally decided. He would set the example for his employees and follow proper procedures. He picked up his phone, hesitated for a moment, then dialed the number to the head researcher. Varner figured the scientists would balk at anything that would bias their data. However, he knew he wouldn’t feel right unless he asked.

CHAPTER 21

At the end of August, the poll numbers began to tighten. The three candidates were nearly neck and neck with just days to go until the election. In a move that was obviously made to favor the incumbent, the Council passed a law that stated that the recipient of the most votes would win. Both the original election, which brought David Asher into power, and the more recent recall election, the winner was required to win a majority. Now, however, a plurality would do it.

All three candidates favored the idea of a debate. It would be Patton’s last chance to differentiate himself with Tyler Redding. As the campaign progressed, Patton began to feel more and more that Redding was a ringer brought into the campaign by Charlie Henry. And while Patton’s instincts were correct, it was too late for him to do anything about it. He had to hit a home run during the debate or he was going to lose.

But, he realized, as the debate progressed, the moderator wasn’t going to give him any openings. They were probably in on the fix, instructed by Charlie Henry to keep the ball out of Patton Larsen’s court. He reminded his co-conspirators that it was a debate that put Mike Wilson ahead for good back in May. The moderator did, however, give Tyler Redding many opportunities to parrot Patton’s talking points. This would serve in weakening Patton’s points, and make the governor’s arguments seem stronger.

“While I agree with Mr. Larsen on many things,” Redding said, gesturing wildly with his hands as he spoke to the camera, “I just don’t think he goes far enough in some areas—”

“—Like what?” Patton interrupted angrily. He’d pretty much been left out of the debate so this was his only chance to get a word in.

“Sorry?” Redding asked him, gulping nervously.

“I said… like what? What don’t I go far enough in? You keep saying that but you haven’t specifically said what it is.”

The younger man swallowed again, trying to maintain his facade of confidence. He had been hammering Patton on this “issue” and gaining traction with it in some recent polls, but Patton was calling him out.

“Well… I think your idea to reopen business relations with the outside is good but I think you don’t go far enough.”

Patton smirked and shook his head.

“Again,” he said, losing his smile and appearing angry again, “you didn’t mention how. You make up this phony issue with no details. You sound an awful lot like Mr. Asher on this issue,” he said, looking at the incumbent and smiling at his shocked reaction to the jab.

“There’s no call for that,” the moderator said, trying to bring some order back to the discussion.

“Well, Sir,” Patton said sarcastically, “I haven’t had much of an opportunity to say much of anything, so I guess when I get the chance to speak I should take advantage of it.” The moderator blushed profusely. “I’m sorry to get your panties in a wad,” Patton continued, “but I have every right to speak as much as these other candidates, so either you’re just a pompous jerk or you’re in on the fix here.”

The man was so angry now that Patton could see the red under his TV makeup. In his earpiece the director was calling for a break, but the debate was a commercial free event. Either the moderator had to gain control of the debate or continue to be made to look like an idiot.

“Again, Mr. Larsen, there really is no need for this. You’ve had ample opportunity to respond tonight.”

Patton chuckled contemptuously and shook his head in disgust. “We all know where you stand, Joe,” Patton said to the moderator. “The only question is whether you’ll be visiting Mr. Asher’s dressing room after this is over.”

The nervous tension that had been building up among the audience dissipated with that remark when an audience member started laughing. That caused a chain reaction of laughter and pretty soon most of the audience was caught in the moment. Patton laughed to himself but managed to keep his composure. When order was restored he didn’t relent.

“I’ve been hearing how I’m not this or I’m not that for months now. Mr. Redding here is basically unknown. No one I know has ever met him before he ran for office. If it were proper, I would ask the Microcosm people whether he’s even an actual registered member of the experiment.”

Now it was Redding’s turn to get hot under the collar.

“Now wait a minute,” he said, raising a bony finger in protest at Patton’s remark. “Just because you don’t know me, Mr. Larsen, doesn’t mean that nobody else does. That’s just ridiculous.”

Patton stared at him and realized that he was starting to get under his skin. Meanwhile, David Asher stood there at his lectern like a statue, trying not to get caught up in the drama.

“Well Mr. Redding, let me tell you something. I’ve been one of the most successful businessmen in this community since its founding. I have gotten to know a lot of people. You’re right, I don’t know everyone, but I know a lot of people and not one of them… not one… has claimed to have known you or seen you at any point before your face began to appear on posters around town.”

Once red, Tyler Redding’s face was now nearly bone white. There was something more to this than just a blank accusation. Patton must have dug up some dirt on him to bring it up. Still, Redding had only one tack.

Rolling his eyes dramatically for the cameras, Redding said, “This is just another boy crying wolf episode for Mr. Larsen. First Governor Asher is part of some conspiracy with some old guy that no one has ever heard of. And now I’m some kind of impostor.”

Patton pursed his lips and nodded. “That’s a good way to put it,” he said with a cocky air. “But let me say one thing to that. We had every bit of proof that we needed to show that the Governor and Charlie Henry were in cahoots, but the media wanted him to win so badly they ignored the evidence. Now they’re ignoring the fact that you’re probably not even supposed to be in this community and that Charlie Henry recruited you to run so you could split votes with me.”

It was just conjecture on Patton’s part, but the truth of it struck both Asher and Redding so hard that it was impossible for them to not react. The cameras caught the reactions, and many in the audience and watching on TV noticed. And for the remainder of the debate Patton kept up his attack by basically filibustering. He decided if they weren’t going to give him the time he was going to take it. To no one’s surprise, the moderator ended the debate fifteen minutes early.

Patton didn’t feel that he’d blown his chances by what he’d done. It was his last gasp, Hail Mary pass. Polls taken after the debate showed that Patton’s debate outburst had worked, at least to an extent. He was now statistically tied with Tyler Redding but still trailing the incumbent by five percentage points, just at the margin of error. The two TV channels gave Patton little coverage, and what they did give him was negative. Still, the people viewing the debate saw the reaction of both candidates when Patton had accused them of being connected. However, his debate performance shifted a large part of the vote towards himself in just one night.

The unfortunate thing for Patton, though, was that he didn’t have enough time to build any momentum. Elections were crazy things. One simple moment or a careless slip of the tongue can ruin an entire campaign. Patton had less than a week left to make something happen. Otherwise, Blue Creek was going to be stuck with David Asher and God only knew what damage would be done.

After watching the debate and considering other factors, Charlie decided that no matter the result of the upcoming election, David Asher was out. Either Tyler Redding or someone else, preferably Anna, would replace him. David Asher had forgotten his role and he was becoming a liability. Politics aside, Charlie Henry had grown tired of the governor.

Would Asher bow out gracefully? That was the question. Charlie preferred a meek and humble exit on the part of David Asher. However, if need be, he would force the issue. Charlie Henry had the muscle behind him—both Travis and Brian were able and willing to convince David Asher that his time had come and gone.

The biggest roadblock that Charlie could foresee was Anna. She was the one who had brought Asher into their enterprise. And sure, it had proven to be a great move, but the young man had forgotten his place. It was time to knock him down a rung or two, and that is why he had asked Travis and Brian over for a late dinner and drinks. After weeks of beating around the bush on the topic, Charlie finally asked the two what his next move should be. They both waffled, wanting to draw out of the old man what he had in mind. When he told them his idea they looked at each other, hoping the shock wasn’t evident on their faces.

“Are you sure that’s a good idea?” Travis asked gravely. He looked over at Brian, who was noncommittal, and then looked back at Charlie. “I mean… if you do this, it could tear everything apart. Everything you’ve worked for.”

Charlie reclined back, lacing his fingers together behind his head and propping his right ankle on his left thigh. He looked at the two in turn through narrowed eyes, chewing on the inside of his cheek. What they didn’t know, however, was that he was reading them, like a professional poker player would read an opponent. The old man couldn’t have known that the two younger men had a similar conversation with David Asher.

They had their answer, in a way. Charlie Henry had just told them that David Asher was going to be out of power. More than this, he expected them to do the deed.

It was hard for Asher to find someone to trust after Travis Snedley had been burned. He was back now, looking nearly unrecognizable. It was a relief to have someone on his side—someone he could confide in.

“So have you decided?” Travis asked, leaning against the fender of his borrowed SUV. The governor had obviously learned from his mistakes of meeting in public. They were parked at a trailhead, well up in the western hills above town. It was windy and threatening rain. Both figured the weather would keep people at home.

Asher nodded, looking down towards his town. It appeared peaceful from this vantage point. Part of him regretted the pain that their policies had brought upon the people, but he was beginning to appreciate the big picture. Charlie Henry was right about political power—it could only be built through one type of government. The old man was wrong about who should be in power, though.

Travis had just informed him that Charlie Henry was planning to not only replace him with Travis Redding, but possibly have him killed.

“Together or separate?” Travis asked, pushing away from the vehicle and bending down to pick up a golf ball-sized rock. He tossed up it and caught it a couple times and then heaved it down the hill.

“Maybe not together, but at least the same night,” Asher said, finally looking at his co-conspirator. “You got somebody to help you? Somebody you can trust?”

Travis sat back and blew out a loud breath. “I’d have to think about it,” he said. “Everyone involved in this is in Anna’s back pocket. The old man is hated, but respected. We’re probably going to have to look for somebody outside of town.”

Asher nodded again, this time displeased—not with Travis, necessarily, but with the situation in general. The governor, obviously, could have no direct involvement in this. He was too close to the situation.

“How long is that going to take?”

Travis shrugged his head as if to say ‘I have no idea,’ and walked back and leaned on the fender of the SUV again.

“Well, we need to have something in place and ready for right after the election. I don’t want those two to feel like they have options,” Asher said, pulling his car keys from his pocket.

Travis nodded solemnly and then started back towards his own car. The realization that he was now Blue Creek’s kingmaker suddenly hit him. Both parties, who were in a very vicious power struggle, had come to him personally and asked for his help to remove the other. And as he watched David Asher drive away, he honestly couldn’t say what he was going to do. He knew which way he was leaning, but he decided that it all depended on what he was going to get out of his decision.

The next day was Election Day. Anna and Asher had just done their best to put it all out of their minds. Lying together in bed now, with Asher asleep beside her, the dread of the coming day returned to Anna’s mind. Charlie hadn’t told her his plans for Asher, but Travis had.

Her biggest conflict was that she wasn’t sure that Charlie wasn’t doing the right thing. The man lying beside her had been the key to their current level of power. Charlie, however, was right—David Asher was becoming a liability. Not that that was Asher’s fault—he’d only implemented the policies they had given him—but his brand was badly damaged. If the Tyler Redding gambit didn’t work, and Patton Larsen became the next governor, their plans would be ruined. Then there was the bigger picture to consider. This wasn’t just about Blue Creek. They were going to broadcast their success in Blue Creek to other progressives to prove their philosophy of governance was correct.

What Anna needed most was a backup plan—one for David Asher’s eventual exiting of the political scene and another for Charlie Henry’s demise, whether natural or otherwise. She made a mental note to bring this up with Travis and the guy who had rid Blue Creek of Mike Wilson—Brian White. She had much more to offer them both than either Asher or Charlie, she thought, looking down at her tanned, naked body. More than her physical attributes, Charlie had taught her enough to run things on her own.

Patton had never struggled to sleep before. He now understood what it was like for athletes the night before a big game. He tried a double Scotch, then another. When that didn’t work he switched to beer. By the time he discovered alcohol wasn’t working he had a massive headache.

To Patton, it wasn’t as much wanting to win as it was the stress of the ramifications if he lost. He knew that Asher and Charlie Henry were going to crank up the pain if they retained power. It was the weight of this that had been pressing down on him, especially since Mike was killed. It was these fears that prevented him from sleep. Patton decided to take a hot bath and watch a movie. He began to feel tired and made his way to his bed, where he finally had some fitful sleep. At 4 AM, Patton finally gave up. He went downstairs and put on a pot of coffee. Almost as a reflex, he opened up his campaign schedule in his iPad. He was shocked to see empty slots.

The sparsity of his calendar further drove into him the dread and pressure of losing. There was one spark of hope, however. He’d been working on a side project—one that was possibly more desperate than running for political office. This project was mostly out of his hands, however. His friend Wildcat, the man who’d given Patton background on Charlie Henry, was trying to track down Travis. He was the only person who could connect David Asher and Charlie Henry. Patton also suspected that the young brunette was involved, but wasn’t sure how. Travis was the key and Patton was sure that Wildcat would eventually find him.

That was Patton’s “Alamo” however. He needed to win this election and stem the progressive tide. Otherwise, he was going to have to resort to more drastic measures.

Election Day saw overcast skies and threatening rain. So-called experts on TV and radio argued both ways of how the weather might affect voter turnout and how voter turnout would affect the three campaigns. What it was going to ultimately come down to, though, was how much of the vote Tyler Redding was going to skim from Patton Larsen.

As in previous elections, the polls opened at two in the afternoon and closed at seven. All indications were that turnout was going to be low, much lower than the first recall election. Early exit polls showed a very tight three-way race and neither TV station was willing to call the election either way until a much larger number of the polling stations reported their vote count.

When the polls closed at seven, all three campaign headquarters were buzzing. By nine, Asher and Larsen were still in a tight race with Redding slowly falling behind. His numbers were strong enough, however, that Patton’s people began to be nervous that Redding was going to push the election towards the incumbent.

At eleven, one of Blue Creek’s TV stations called the election for David Asher, projecting that he was going to win with forty-four percent of the vote, followed by Patton at forty-one, and Travis Redding with fifteen percent. Thirty minutes later the second of Blue Creek’s TV stations did the same.

By midnight, the vote count was complete. David Asher was going to retain his office as governor of Blue Creek. His plan, at least for the moment, was to do everything he could to maintain his power.

A dejected Patton took a swig of beer and looked across the dinner table at his wife. She had tears in her eyes, but was trying to be strong for him.

“What’s next?” she asked with a smile, trying to cheer him. Little did she know that what was next was already in motion.

“I don’t know,” he said sullenly. “I guess we’ll just get back to work with the business.”

Jennifer knew that Patton’s heart had been set on winning and avenging his friend’s death, but that was over now. The next election wasn’t for another year and he would not run for City Council or any other political office. It was going to be this office or nothing.

“Come on, Honey, I know you’re thinking something here. What is it?”

He took a bite of chicken, took another swig of beer, and then looked at her. He shook his head as if to say ‘no, I don’t,’ but she knew him, possibly better than he knew himself.

“Well, we have the money. We can buy our way out of this whole thing and go home.” He looked down at his plate again, knowing that she would be ashamed of him—of him becoming a quitter.

She stood and walked around the table to kneel in front of him. She grabbed his hands and he finally looked at her. “I know you wanted to win, Honey. And I know why you wanted to win. You feel like it’s up to you to save these people from what’s going on.”

With tears forming in the corner of his eyes, he nodded. She was right. He was trying to play the hero and he failed. Being called out for his delusions of grandeur embarrassed him.

“But Honey,” she continued, “if anyone could save these people and this place it’s you, Patton. You’ve seen what’s been going on and you’ve fought against it. You lost but that doesn’t mean you can’t still fight.”

He nodded and was tempted to tell her that he was already working on that. Instead, he stood and took her in his arms and kissed her. He was tired of talking about it. He took his wife’s hand and led her to their bedroom.

CHAPTER 22

The man exited the plane feeling fresh and ready to get right to work. The flight from LAX to Salt Lake City took less than two hours and he’d flown first class. He made his way through the concourse to the baggage pickup. Although he wasn’t planning to stay in Utah long, there were things he needed for this trip that he couldn’t fit into a carry-on. He rented a luggage cart and grabbed his two large suitcases off of the belt. He checked his watch. It was past ten in the evening. He had a rental car and hotel already reserved. He would spend the night in the city and then make his way to Blue Creek the next evening. Nightfall was supposed to be before 5:30 that evening and he would use the darkness to help him slip into town unnoticed.

When he got to his hotel room he pulled out his iPhone and texted his old friend Patton.

“Here. ETA 1900 tomorrow.”

He flipped the TV on for the noise, laid back and closed his eyes. This was far from his first time in a hotel room the night before a mission. His phone buzzed. He opened it to find a return text from Patton.

“Roger,” is all it read.

He set the phone on the nightstand and laid back again. He tried to focus his mind on what he had to do the next night. It wasn’t going to be easy, but he’d done this so many times he’d lost count. While he would usually charge tens of thousands of dollars for his services, he offered his friend to do this one for free. It would be his pleasure.

Travis was taking the night off. No Asher. No Anna. No Charlie. Now that the election was over, he just wanted to spend time with his friends at his favorite bar, get drunk, get high, and maybe get laid. His night was on track. One of his friends had brought some primo weed to their little party and he’d drunk more than he had in months. The girl he’d been set up with seemed to be into him, so he was beginning to feel like all of his goals were going to be met.

“Hey dude,” he said to his friend, “you got any more papers?”

Travis’s friend shook his head no. Feigning anger at his friend, Travis stood and said, “I’ve got some in my car. I’ll be back in a sec.”

Travis exited the bar, fumbling in his pants pocket for his car keys. The weather had recently warmed some, so the street was slushy rather than icy. He reached his vehicle and was finally able to pull out his car keys. While fumbling to unlock his car, he didn’t notice the large twelve-passenger van pull up beside him. Had he been fully aware of his surroundings, he probably wouldn’t have felt the tiny pinprick on his back. Either way, four strong hands pulled him into the van.

Travis woke to find two angry faces leering over him. He felt both groggy and nauseous. Whatever happened to him, the effects were still lingering. He tried to bring events into focus but his thoughts remained blurry. Even these people’s voices, whoever the hell they were, sounded as if they were under water. His “Where am I?” and “Who are you?” questions came out as mush-mouthed nonsense.

One of the figures moved out of his field of vision and then he could feel a tiny stinging sensation in his arm. Suddenly he felt himself becoming more awake and aware and he saw that Patton Larsen was standing in front of him. Not smiling. Not angry. Just lingering there, hovering over him like a ghost. When Travis tried to speak his mouth actually worked.

“What’s going on?” he asked, still somewhat groggy.

No answer.

He heard a small whirring sound, like a small motor working. Then he could feel himself being raised up. Patton moved his head and now there was a bright light shining directly into his eyes. He tried to raise his hand to shield his eyes but straps held his hands down to some sort of gurney. He tried to kick his feet but the result was the same. He was completely incapacitated.

“Hey!” he screamed. “What’s going on here!” he yelled, both angry and frightened now.

Still no answer. He sensed some movement behind him and then felt another prick in his arm. His world went black again.

When he woke up again, he noticed that an IV had been started on his left wrist, which was still restrained. He tried to move his head to look around but the movement made him nauseous. He wanted to throw up, but instead, he closed his eyes and went still. Travis, who was usually a very calm individual, wanted to kick and punch and claw his way out, but there was no way. The feeling of helplessness caused a wave of fear to come upon him.

“Okay guys, I’ll stay calm I promise. Just tell me what’s going on!”

There was silence for a moment, but then he heard Patton’s voice.

“You’re being taken out of the game, Travis,” Patton said coldly. “We know you’ve been acting as Charlie Henry’s go between. You’ve gotten away with it until now but those days are over. You’re done.”

“What are you talking about?” Travis asked stupidly.

Patton moved around the chair so Travis could see him. He leaned in close, leering at him viciously.

“What I’m talking about is that you’re the little cockroach that’s been helping Charlie and his little whore and Asher. Don’t play stupid or we’re going to make your life a living hell.”

Travis felt a pang of nervousness, but he tried to regain his bravado. “You can’t do anything to me,” he said, more calmly than he felt.

Patton scoffed and looked at the other man, who was also coming into Travis’s field of view. He was a big man. Not fat, but with huge arms and shoulders. He looked like a bodybuilder. The man was also wearing a baseball cap. A large, bushy beard covered most of his face. He was holding something in his hands, but Travis was still too groggy and too nervous to focus.

“We already have, Travis,” the man said in a soft voice that contrasted greatly with his appearance. “We’ve done something to you that can’t be taken back.” The man turned behind him and grabbed something. He turned back and thrust his hand into Travis’s face. At first Travis couldn’t see it because it was very small, but his eyes finally focused onto a little brown ball, about half the size of a bb.

“See this?” the man asked. “You now have one of these in your brain. This tiny little thing, believe it or not, is an explosive device that can be controlled by this.” He showed Travis his other hand, which held a sleek cellphone.

Travis shook his head defiantly. Part of him knew these guys were serious. They wouldn’t have him here as a joke. Travis closed his eyes again and swallowed hard. He had cottonmouth and couldn’t produce enough saliva.

“Okay. So what am I doing here? What do you want with me?”

It was Patton who responded.

“I already told you that, Travis. You’re done. You’re gone. You’re going to leave and never come back here. I know you killed that family and I know it was you that came out to my house to kill me. Now you’ve been running back and forth between Charlie Henry and Anna and Asher and that little ass wipe Tyler Redding. Now what you’re going to do is admit it all on tape.”

Travis’s eyes went wide. He wasn’t a rat. He was loyal to those who hired his services. “You’re high if you think that,” he said, his calm beginning to give way to panic.

The big guy smiled.

“I was hoping you would say that,” he said. He lifted a little shelf in front of Travis’s face—the kind that dentists use when they’re operating on a patient. He took the little brown ball and clamped a wire to it, screwing the other end onto the remote control. “Stand back Patton,” Wildcat said with all the drama he could muster, then pushed a button on the phone.

There was a loud crack, causing Travis’s ears to ring loudly. Worse than that, he had burn marks all over his face and part of his eyebrows had been singed off.

“Damn! You trying to kill me?” Travis screamed.

Patton and the big man started laughing at the younger man’s discomfort. Then Patton turned serious.

“That’s exactly what we’re going to do, Travis, if you don’t do what we tell you to.”

Travis gulped audibly. He was tough, but these guys had the upper hand and they seemed willing to do whatever it took to get him to cooperate. To punctuate the point, Patton put his face close to Travis’s, almost to the point where their noses were touching.

“We will kill you Travis,” Patton said blandly, letting his words hang ominously in the air. “It would be the just thing to do. You’re behind a lot of the stuff that’s happened. Now you’re going to fess up to it.”

Travis hung his head. He had no more cards to play. Hadn’t he just been complaining to himself about Asher and Anna and this whole mess? Wasn’t he looking for a way out? What better way to do that than to be forced out? To run away and never come back?

He raised his eyes to meet Patton’s gaze and nodded.

It was the third time he’d tried calling the number, but Asher kept getting a ‘disconnected’ notice. Asher blew off their meeting two nights before, but he knew Travis would never hold a grudge—at least not this long. He was tempted to call Anna and ask her if she’d seen or talked to Travis, but they’d made a deal—no more direct contact.

But he didn’t need Travis to talk to Anna. He needed a direct line to Travis. As far as he was concerned, Governor David Asher no longer needed Anna or her pet monkey, Charlie Henry. They’d accomplished what they’d set out to do. What were they going to do if he struck out on his own? If they lost him they would lose their connection to power in this community. Before Asher could close the book on the entire enterprise, though, he needed Travis one more time. He opened his phone and dialed the number again.

“Is he gone?” Patton asked his old friend Wildcat, who was driving back to the airport.

“You could say that,” the man said cryptically.

Patton’s interest piqued, but he was pretty sure what his friend and old comrade meant.

“Was there a problem?” he asked, almost wanting to not know the answer to his own question.

“You could say that,” Wildcat said again, laughing this time. “Okay, sorry. Our friend had a nasty nose bleed and I had to take care of him.”

Patton’s thoughts were confirmed.

“Okay, so it’s done then?” Patton asked hopefully.

“Done and done.”

Travis’s phone didn’t even go to voicemail when Asher dialed the number. Asher hit the “End” button and thrust his phone angrily into his pocket.

Asher wondered if he’d left town again. If he had, who told him to do so? Was Charlie behind this? A ball of nerves formed in Asher’s gut and he began to wonder if something was about to happen to him. Without Travis, he had no real connection to the others. He and Anna were basically finished. He suddenly thought of one other person who he could talk to, he just needed to find a way to contact him.

Wasn’t he supposed to be the most powerful person in town? Despite having the office and title, Asher felt powerless now, like an island out in the middle of the ocean. Never the type of person to take things lying down, Asher started to concoct his plan.

Bao slid the trays into the compartments on the side of his delivery truck, slammed the doors closed, and blew in his hands to warm them. He was finishing up a long day that started when it was dark and was now going home in the dark. He just wanted to get home, take a long, hot bath, drink some tea and play some computer games. Canceling out the euphoria of his completed workday was the fact that somebody had been following him.

Bao was technically a spy, but of the corporate variety. He’d never gone through specialized training in either surveillance or counter surveillance. Despite that, he was a street-smart kid who knew when he was being watched and followed. Whoever it was apparently didn’t watch many movies, he thought. They’d been in the same vehicle all day and had rarely been cautious enough to lag behind him in traffic.

There they were, though, sitting in their car, apparently waiting to follow him home. Not knowing what else to do, Bao decided to do what they thought he would do—he returned his delivery truck to his small warehouse and then drove home in his personal vehicle. And just as he’d thought, the dark red sedan had followed him there.

After his bath, Bao looked for the car out his front window. He saw it sitting across the street. He checked again before heading to bed, but to his relief, the car was no longer there. Not taking any chances, or let doubt about his instincts creep into his mind, Bao sat at his computer and typed out an encrypted report.

Bao’s instinct to ask if other agents were reporting being followed had been brilliant, his superiors thought. He was the fourth agent to report such suspicious activity. Had there been a breach? Why would someone follow their agents? How did they even know that Insight had spies in Blue Creek? He was worried that something dangerous was happening and the issue quickly became Insight Resources, Inc.’s CEO, Michael Varner’s number one priority.

CHAPTER 23

Although many Blue Creek residents felt like their vote was stolen with the death of Mike Wilson, they had no choice but to move on with their lives. David Asher’s pain-inducing economic policies would continue despite the ferocious opposition. Although the governor remained very unpopular, most people were burnt out by politics and didn’t want to be involved anymore. This was exactly what Charlie Henry had counted on—people get angry at first, but after a while, they accept the new normal. If things happened to get better, it would be a bonus. If they get worse, the leaders would get out and find a boogeyman to blame, distract with a disaster or a scandal, or make new promises.

As planned, Asher proposed to lighten some of the city’s regulations on outside parties. While the marginal lessening of these laws didn’t have a huge impact on the economy, the fact that citizens felt like things were opening up made them feel better. Consumer spending increased slightly and other surface economic indicators looked better. Lying just under the calm surface, however, was a return of higher unemployment, higher government spending, a larger debt, and higher taxes.

As fall turned to winter, and winter gave way to spring, the feeling that things were improving emerged. While the long-term economic outlook was bad, things in the short-term were improving. With this, Governor Asher regained some of his popularity, and with popularity came more trust. If Governor Asher came on TV and said things were looking up, well, things were damn well looking up.

This new positivity continued on through April, and this was only intensified by the warming weather. The triumvirate of Charlie Henry, David Asher, and Anna Radinski seemed to have weathered the storm, at least for now. Anna felt that this calm in the storm was their opportunity to repair their broken relationships and begin to move forward.

Their ploy had worked. David Asher would continue to serve as Blue Creek governor for the remainder of this original three-year term. Despite this, the room did not have a celebratory feeling. The five people in the room—David Asher, Charlie Henry, Anna Radinski, Tyler Redding, Brian White—were united in purpose, but were in disagreement on how to get there.

It was particularly sinister for Brian White, who’d had individual conversations with all of the conspirators besides Redding. They all expressed their desire to split the trio and go forward, either alone, or with one other. Both Charlie and Asher implied they wanted each other eliminated. Anna wanted to be rid of Charlie and Asher by exposing their connection by leaking it to the media. She would then use Tyler Redding as the new face of the movement. As she had with Asher, she would use to her wiles to keep him under her control.

Essentially, the three of them had made him the de facto kingmaker. They could either continue to trudge along together, or they could cede some power to White to gain his loyalty. With Travis Snedley gone, Brian White was the only person that could break their triumvirate and set only one of them up in power. Charlie, Asher, and Anna discussed their future plans, but it was all playacting. White knew that all of them were ready to dissolve their union.

Essentially, they decided they would stay the course through the summer. Once autumn arrived, they would implement new policies. The elephant in the room—one that was not discussed—was whether David Asher would run for another term. Unbeknownst to Asher, he was the only one who thought this was a good idea. Everyone else in the room knew that he would be gone after three years, if not sooner.

White watched the continuing conversation with rapt attention—not to hear what was being planned, but to determine which person would be his best bet going forward. By the time the meeting concluded, Brian White still hadn’t decided who would become the future power in Blue Creek. He would give them a chance to make their case to him, knowing they would all approach him again before long.

It was an unseasonably warm day in May. Anna had to turn on the air conditioning in her car to fight the heat. She was stopped at a red light, mindlessly tapping her fingers on her steering wheel to a song she’d never heard. She hated traffic lights and thought that maybe she should talk Asher into taking all of them out of Blue Creek. She chuckled to herself at this thought. Her mind turned to the meeting that she and Asher and Charlie had held a few days before, and the good humor left her. Against her better judgment she’d invited Tyler Redding. Asher had gotten very upset about that, to the point that the governor and his former opponent almost came to blows.

She shook her head, still tapping her fingers along to the music. The light finally turned green. Without looking, she hit the gas and drove into the intersection. She sensed motion in her peripheral vision, but didn’t even have time to react. The dump truck struck with astonishing force, nearly splitting Anna’s car in two. Her seat was pushed up and over the console, on top of the passenger seat and almost through the passenger door. The truck’s front bumper broke through the driver’s window and struck her head directly.

The truck was much larger than Anna’s Toyota, but the force of the collision damaged the front axle enough that the truck would no longer steer. The driver, a pimply kid in a beanie cap and red windbreaker, bolted from the truck and tried to get away. An onlooker, initially shocked by the collision, gathered his wits in time to run the offender down and tackle him. He and another bystander restrained the assailant until authorities could arrive.

Another passerby who had witnessed the collision—who, coincidentally, worked as a nurse at the local health clinic—ran to the car to see if she could render assistance. She reached the car, but there was nothing she could do. The driver, barely recognizable as human, was clearly dead. His or her dark hair was matted with blood and brain tissue. The woman’s training gave way to the shock and she began screaming for someone to call for an ambulance. No ambulance would be needed, however. The morgue’s van was more suitable in this particular situation.

The meeting with the others had been extremely stressful. Tyler Redding retired to his favorite fishing spot. He came here when things got hard, or he felt lonely. Fishing was his favorite outdoor activity—nothing relaxed him more. Now, seemingly everything in his world was chaotic. At one time he was the heir apparent. Now he wasn’t sure where he stood in the pecking order. Anna wanted him to take over, unbeknownst to David Asher. Charlie also wanted Asher gone, but Tyler wasn’t sure who Charlie wanted to replace the governor. The plan had always been for Tyler to step in, but he got the impression that Charlie preferred Anna.

Anna was the driving force behind getting David Asher elected and keeping him in office. Tyler knew, however, that if and when Anna wanted a change, she would make it happen. She knew how to use her mind and her body to get what she wanted. She’d promised him the keys to the kingdom. Little did he know that his avenue to power had just been crushed by a dump truck. More unfortunate for him was the fact that his own death was seconds away.

As a young boy, Tyler loved watching nature shows, especially the ones about lions. Those enormous, yet sleek and powerful beasts, would lie hidden, nearly invisible in the tall yellow grass. Then suddenly, they would spring forward and run down a zebra or a wildebeest or some other unfortunate creature. Eventually the lion would tire them out and take them down.

And this scenario was similar. The hunter lay hidden in the grass, waiting for the perfect moment to pounce on the unsuspecting prey. When Tyler exited the water and bent over to remove his waders, the man with the 9mm pistol stood out of his crouch and approached silently from behind. Without a word, the assassin got to within three paces and pulled the trigger, sending a hollow-pointed lead slug into the back of Tyler Redding’s head.

Two down, one to go.

The team tasked to follow Charlie Henry knew that he was a home body who rarely left his house. This created some advantages and disadvantages. Advantageous to them was the fact that they wouldn’t have to track him down or wait for the exact right place at the exact right time—they could just break in and get it down quickly and brutally. Or, they could wait until the lonely old bastard was asleep and go in and do the deed quietly. The bad part was that it would be much more difficult to make his death look accidental. Furthermore, it would be nearly impossible for them to dispose of his body. An “accidental death” wasn’t a necessity in this case.

When the killers entered Charlie’s house, they caught him lying in bed, watching the nightly news report. His former mistress had perished in an accident earlier that day. Luckily for them, he seemed to be very relaxed and docile, perhaps drunk or high. They entered his bedroom and stood quietly until he noticed them. When he saw the intruder who was standing closer to the bed, he was shocked at first, but then seemed to realize what was happening. It was almost as if he’d been expecting it.

“We’re going to give you a choice, Charlie,” the intruder closer to the bed said. He pulled a plastic bag out of his pants pocket and unrolled it. It contained a particularly high-grade, very pure heroin. “You can either shoot this up yourself, or we’ll go to work on you.”

Charlie sat up in bed, gasping for words that didn’t come.

“Trust me, old man, we’re good at keeping you alive while putting you through hell. We can make it last for hours. Like I say, it’s your choice.”

Charlie tried to swallow but couldn’t summon up enough saliva. He coughed, covering his mouth as his mother had taught him so long ago. It was true, he thought. Your life did kind of flash before your eyes when you knew you were going to die. But the reverie didn’t last long—he was snapped back into reality when one of the intruders placed his hand on Charlie’s shoulder.

“Charlie?” he said, shaking him, making sure that he was still with them.

The old man stammered, looking for the perfect words to say to them to get him out of one more jam. Just one more. He wanted to cry, to beg for mercy. ‘Pathetic,’ he thought. He’d lived his life like a warrior, or so he’d thought. But what could he do? There were two of them. Much younger and stronger than he was. They most assuredly had knives, probably guns.

No. He was checkmated. The king must accept defeat and lie down.

“Okay okay,” he said, raising his hands in surrender. Tears began to roll down his face. He didn’t even attempt to wipe at them. What would be the point of that? “I… I can’t mix it myself,” he stammered. “I’m shaking too damn much. You’re going to have to do that.”

The man standing closest to the door nodded and exited the room. A few moments later he returned with a spoon, one big enough to take Charlie on his biggest… and last… ride on the Devil’s Highway.

Charlie watched the intruder who was standing at the foot of his bed. His accomplice was rolling up the right sleeve of Charlie’s pajama top. He wrapped surgical tubing around the skinny but flabby arm and started looking for a vein.

“Damn Charlie,” he said, almost laughing, “you’ve used these veins up haven’t you!”

Charlie had accepted his fate and he was no longer nervous. He would go out like a warrior. He was a Weatherman, after all. While he did not fight them, he raised his chin in defiance as they filled the syringe and stuck it in his arm. He looked down as the leader depressed the plunger, sending enough of the drug to kill three people into his bloodstream.

The deaths of Anna Radinski and Charlie Henry hit Blue Creek like a hurricane, but the media did their best to downplay the mess. Despite their best efforts, the result was inevitable—Patton Larsen’s screwy conspiracy theories crept back into the public consciousness. More importantly, it made its way back into the public square. One of the news channels hunted him down for an interview and Patton basically gave them one big “I told you so.” Tyler Redding was also sought out for a response, but he could not be found.

It was a half-hearted effort by the media to find the truth. They shepherded Governor David Asher through the recall debacle, the delaying of the elections, and his slim victory over Patton Larsen. It seemed unlikely that they would do anything to damage the governor at that point. Despite the media’s best efforts, though, the controversy lingered in the public’s mind for another month. Asher’s popularity inevitably suffered. Things were so bad, in fact, that Asher and his security agency drew up plans in case Blue Creek citizens rose up against the government. It all became moot, however. Nothing of consequence happened. After a few weeks, people went back to their lives.

The public didn’t know that the other shoe was about to drop. The final set of policy proposals, which Anna and Charlie developed before their deaths, was about to hit the City Council for a vote. Charlie and Anna had planned on gradually putting these policies in place, with Tyler Redding as governor of Blue Creek. However, with his fellow conspirators out of the picture, Asher thought that it was the right time to submit the policies to the Council.

Instead of reducing taxes and regulations, Asher doubled down and increased both, all in the name of helping those who couldn’t help themselves. He increased his security and police force even more and started construction on a huge prison complex on the eastern hills overlooking the city. It didn’t end there. During the campaign against Patton Larsen, Anna learned that the organizers of the experiment had inserted spies into the community. Luckily for Asher, she’d notified Brian White of this fact. Anna had all of suspected spies followed. She had notebooks full of names, addresses, and other identifiers. Now that Anna was gone, Asher was going to take things a step further.

For Bao, the killings marked the moment when everything changed in Blue Creek. Things had been on a downward tilt ever since David Asher had become governor, but after the deaths of Charlie Henry and Anna Radinski, events in the city began to feel like a runaway train. Perhaps Patton hadn’t been so crazy and paranoid after all.

In early July, the unthinkable happened. In the cumulative report to the executives of Insight, the line that usually read “all agents in place and reporting” had changed. Instead, it read, “2 agents unaccounted for.” This change sent a shockwave through Bao’s community. His suspicions that he had been followed were confirmed. Someone was onto their network and now two people were missing.

A week later the report was amended to show that the agents were again in place, but something didn’t feel right to Bao. He knew one of the two who had disappeared. Although direct contact between agents was forbidden, Bao decided to contact her to see what had happened. When she him on her doorstep, she tried to close the door in his face. Bao blocked the door with his foot.

“Hey,” he whispered, “let me in.”

When she relented and opened the door to let him in, he looked both ways down the street to make sure no one was watching them. Satisfied that no one was there, Bao stepped into the woman’s house.

Lindsay Andres was a young and pretty African American woman, two years older than Bao. She’d applied for the experiment, but with her experience with computers, Insight asked her if she wanted a job instead. She accepted and now here she was. Bao watched her walk into her living room. She was noticeably limping.

“Lindz?” he said, concerned.

She turned and smiled weakly at him, then turned and sat on her large leather couch. She was obviously in pain. Bao sat next to her and an awkward silence passed between them. When he asked her what happened to her, tears sprung to her eyes and she looked away from him.

“Have you been followed too?” he asked her, his hand placed affectionately on her knee.

She winced at his touch, but instead of being apologetic he became angry with her.

“Dammit Lindsay! This affects me too! I’ve been followed by someone. Did someone follow you?”

Lindsay was taken aback by his reaction. She nodded vigorously, tears now streaming down her face.

“Who?” he asked.

Lindsay shook her head, refusing to answer.

“Who?” he asked, angrier than before.

“Bao…” she whimpered. “They told me they would kill me if I told anyone anything,” she said, her whole body shaking now.

Bao’s eyes went wide and he pulled away from her.

“Bao…” she said, looking around the room conspiratorially. “You need to leave. And you need to watch your back.”

Bao stood and staggered away from the couch. He opened the door slowly, just a crack, and looked across the street to see if anyone was there. He didn’t see the car that had followed him before. He pulled the door open wider and stepped out into the warm, dry air. Not knowing what else to do, he decided to leave his car, which he’d parked around the corner. He walked home. As Bao crossed the first street, a dark car pulled away from the curb behind him and slowly followed him as he made his way down the sidewalk.

CHAPTER 24

Now that Frank and Patton were both in semi-retirement, they vowed they would get out on the lake to fish at least twice a week. This was going to be their first outing since Mike was killed. Instead of using Patton’s boat, they decided to go out with their old friend, Tom Perry. When Tom was out fishing with them, at least one of them would have a great day. Their excitement turned to disappointment, though, when they got to the door of the shop and found a “Closed” sign on the window. Patton looked at his watch and then looked at the hours of operation sign on the window.

“What the hell? He should be open,” he said to Frank, who was checking his own watch.

They set their gear down and took turns looking inside the shop. There was no one inside. No lights. No movement.

“You got his cell number in your phone?” Patton asked Frank, searching his own phone for the number.

“Let me check,” Frank said, pulling out his phone.

Neither of them had the number, but before they could return their fishing gear to Patton’s truck, they saw a big red Ford pickup coming towards them, trailing dust from the gravel road. It was Tom. They left their gear and approached their friend.

“There you are, Tom,” Patton said with a relieved smile. The smile faded when he saw Tom’s expression. His face was a mixture of anger and dejection, resembling a sad child.

“What’s wrong Tom?” Frank asked, who walked past them without a hello. Tom dug into his pockets for his keys and finally found the right set.

“Sorry guys,” Tom said morosely. “I’m not opening. I just need to come out and get something at the shop.” He brushed a lock of white hair out of his eyes and unlocked the door.

Patton and Frank looked at each other in dismay.

“You’re not closing for good are you?” Frank asked, partially joking, knowing it was a preposterous idea. Tom looked at them and then looked away off into space. “Tom. What’s going on?” Frank asked, serious now. Tom snapped out of his trance. He turned and entered the store, greeted by a ringing bell.

“Come in boys. I got somethin’ to show you,” he said, walking towards a workbench that was strewn with tie-flying equipment. He walked over to his cash register and picked up an envelope that had been roughly torn open. He handed it to Patton and said, “Take a look at this and see what our good buddy Governor Asher is up to now.”

The mention of that name alone caused Patton’s hackles to rise. He snapped the envelope out of Tom’s hand and pulled out a two-page letter. He opened it to find the “City of Blue Creek” logo on the top. It was a professionally printed letter. It read:

Dear Dr. Perry,

According to our records, before your arrival at Blue Creek you were an oncologist. Our records also show that you are not currently working in that field or any other health-related field.

A law, recently passed by our City Council, and signed by our Governor, states that any profession that has a shortage must be filled by the most experienced person who is not currently working in that field. Any person that is selected to fill a vacancy must cease operating an alternative business or employment (if applicable) as soon as they begin in their new profession. Another part of this law states that any economic enterprise that continues after the selected person has begun in their new career, said economic enterprise will incur a 25% tax penalty.

We apologize for any inconvenience that this may bring to you, but there is a drastic shortage in your field and we need your services for this community. Please report to City Hall no later than ten days past the date of this letter. Any delay will incur fines and penalties, and possibly arrest, for failure to abide by this city statute.

Thank You.

It was signed by some bureaucrat that none of them knew. Patton desperately wanted crumple the letter, but it didn’t belong to him. He fought the urge and handed it back to Tom.

“You got a copy machine?” Patton asked.

“In the back. You want a copy of this?” he asked, puzzled.

Patton nodded.

The older man walked out of the room into the office. After a few minutes he returned with the original document and a copy for Patton.

“Here you go,” Tom said, handing him the papers and looking around his shop. Two small tears ran down his cheeks and he embarrassedly wiped them away. “Gettin’ old,” he said, turning away from them, continuing to wipe at his face.

Frank went to him and placed a hand on his shoulder. The older man didn’t shy away from the affectionate gesture. “There’s gotta be something we can do about this,” Frank said, first to Tom and then looked at Patton with hopeful eyes.

Patton wasn’t feeling very hopeful at that moment. He’d done all he could for this city, but this move felt like checkmate. He’d engineered a recall election, helped his candidate win, and then nearly won himself. Now, after all that, it seemed like they were deeper in the hole. Patton nodded absent-mindedly, not really believing it himself. He couldn’t see any way out of this one.

“I’m retired,” Tom said, his head hung low. “Man, I retired ‘cause I couldn’t hack it anymore. Nothing but problems and people not paying their bills and crabby nurses and secretaries…” he cut himself off and threw up his hands. He ran his thick-knuckled fingers through his hair, mussing it as he did so.

“I’m mentally checked out of being a doctor,” he continued. “Once that happens, you can’t go back. You can’t ever get that fire back and that’s what it takes. Sure you get paid pretty well, but is it worth it? Hell, that’s got to be the most stressful job in the world. Even the best of us mess up. Even when we don’t mess up, things just sometimes go wrong you know? And whose fault is it?” he asked rhetorically.

Patton and Frank just stood there dumbly. Neither of them had anything useful to say so they said nothing.

“You know Patton, I really admire you,” Tom said. “I know you wouldn’t put up with this. You’d tell them to all go to hell. But guess what. I’ll be going down there and doing what they tell me to. And I’ll close up this shop, I reckon.”

Patton looked at him, a new courage surging through him. He was about to speak but stopped himself, obviously deep in thought. He paced away a few steps and then paced back. After a few more moments he looked back up at Tom.

“Tom, howbout I buy the place from you and let you run it for me?”

The older man’s first impulse was to reject the offer, but he stopped himself and thought about it for a moment.

“Would they let you do that?” he asked hopefully.

“I don’t see why not,” Patton said, his voice regaining his confidence. “You won’t have to close up and you won’t get taxed for it.”

“But what if you get called to do something for them?”

Patton looked at Frank and Frank looked at Patton and they both laughed.

“What?” Tom said, smiling for the first time since he’d arrived here.

“Tom, these bastards are stupid and greedy, but I don’t think even they have the need for a retired plastics manufacturer,” Patton said.

Tom smiled then chuckled. He extended his hand to Patton who took it and shook it warmly.

“Name your price,” Tom said. “I’ll have the paperwork drawn up by the end of the week.”

The drive home from the lake seemed long. Patton dropped Frank off at home and then made his way to Jennifer’s house, where they were staying that week. When he walked into the house, he saw a familiar object in his wife’s hand—a two page letter from the City of Blue Creek.

“You’re kidding me,” he said to her, wide eyed.

She looked at him, confused.

“You haven’t even read it yet.”

Patton grabbed it and shook his head and began pacing around the kitchen.

“Tom got one just like this,” he said, holding the letter towards her. “They’re making him close his shop and he has to go work at the hospital in a couple weeks.”

He pulled the pages out of the envelope and unfolded them. He read for a minute and then looked up at her.

“How the hell do they know this is what you did before you came here?” he asked her, throwing the letter onto their kitchen island.

She shrugged and walked to him, grabbed him, and pulled him in tight. Her fingers were laced behind his neck and she buried her face into his chest.

“I don’t know,” she said with a groan. “The last thing I want to do is work as a government lawyer again. That’s half the reason I signed up for this damn thing in the first place.”

She sometimes got into moods like this. Not angry or sad, just kind of… “blah,” as she would put it. He knew she just needed him to hold her and she would eventually come out of it. He stroked the back of her head and began to rock with her side to side as if they were dancing.

“Well, at least you didn’t start your own business. I mean, there’s your private firm, but you’ve hardly done anything with it,” he said, trying to console her. Inside though, he was seething with rage.

The bastards had done it again. And it obviously wasn’t Charlie Henry’s idea this time. Asher must be doing everything on his own now. No, Patton thought, that was why Asher had the other two killed—so that he could have the power to push his own ideas.

“Yeah,” she said, pulling away from him. She had her girlish pouty face now and he couldn’t resist kissing it. He kissed her and the small, soft kiss he’d planned turned into a long and passionate one that let him know what he would be doing later that evening. She pulled away again, a little breathless.

“I just like working for you,” she said, a little whine in her voice. He thought she was cute when she was like this.

“I like it too baby. But these guys aren’t letting up. I tried to stop them, but they just outfoxed me.”

She pressed her cheek to his chest and said “Yeah, but the game isn’t over yet.”

He smiled. She knew him a lot better than what he gave her credit for sometimes.

Everything about Bao’s current situation was bad, but nothing was worse than the fact that no one had talked to him for two days. At least he thought it was two days. He didn’t have anything to serve as a time reference. He remembered going to his friend Lindsay’s house, then leaving. But after that, everything was a blank. The only thing he knew was that he was very sore. When he woke up in a dark, unfamiliar room, he knew that he was in trouble. He was on a painfully hard bed and the blanket he was lying on was coarse, almost like an Army blanket. At first he yelled for help, but he gave this up after a half hour. Instead, Bao felt around the room. The floor was concrete. The walls were either concrete or cinder block. The only light in the room emanated from cracks around the heavy door, which, he realized, had no knob on his side.

Most people in his situation would have climbed up the walls out of fear, but Bao was different—at least, he’d been trained to be different. As a child, Bao was terrified of the dark. Instead of giving into Bao’s desire to sleep in his parents’ bed, Bao’s father walked him back into his own room and taught him how to meditate and to pray for calm like a good Buddhist. Eventually, Bao stopped waking in the middle of the night to seek comfort from his mother. Now, as he sat in this dark room, those lessons flooded back into his mind.

“Breathe in slowly, now… let it out even more slowly,” his father told him so many times, so gently and patiently. “And don’t just let it out of your mouth and nose. Let the breath out of your whole body.”

“That isn’t possible,” Bao would say, giggling.

But now Bao didn’t feel like laughing. Thankfully, though, he wasn’t afraid either. Two times he had been led out of the… the what… a cell? No one talked to him either time. They placed a bag over his head before leading him out of the room. Bao figured that whoever had him now were the same people who’d taken the other spies. His thoughts returned to his father, but just then, he heard the door opening. Not knowing what else to do, Bao sat at attention on the edge of his bed. Two hooded figures walked in and the light in the hallway blasted Baos’ sensitive eyes.

“Stand up and turn around,” one of the figures said gruffly.

Bao followed his orders immediately. He felt a plastic zip tie being tied onto one wrist, and then another onto the other wrist. Effectively handcuffed, one of the figures places a cloth bag over Bao’s head and then marched him forward. They pushed him down the hallway, then to the right, then to the left. He heard a door being unlocked and opened. Through his hood he sensed that the room was well lit. One of the people pushed him down onto a hard chair. Although he could sense someone’s presence, including those who’d brought him into the room, no one said a word to him for what seemed to be five minutes. Suddenly, somebody removed the bag. He was blinded again. Once his eyes adjusted, he found himself in a stark white room, sitting at a stainless steel table.

“Mr. Hahn,” came a surprisingly high-pitched male voice. The thin-faced man was balding and wore thick-framed glasses. “Sorry for this little inconvenience, but it’s come to our attention that you’re a member of a group of people who were hired to spy on Blue Creek.”

“We—,” Bao started to say, but was smacked in the head by someone that had been standing behind him. Someone straightened him and stepped away, but he could tell that they were still very close to him in case he spoke out of turn again.

“No need for explanations,” the voice said again. “We’re not asking for an admission or anything. We already know who you are and what you’re doing at Blue Creek. We’re just here to tell you that you will no longer be sending any falsified reports—.”

“I—,” Bao tried to say again, but was slugged in the stomach.

“Mr. Hahn, like I said, there’s no need for you to speak right now. I’m simply telling you,” the man said, impatience creeping into his voice, “you will not be filing any more reports that are negative towards the government. We have access to the entire network and we will know if you try to inform anyone. If you go against what we’re telling you now you’ll disappear.”

The matter-of-fact tone gave Bao chills. He considered speaking again but thought better of it. Instead, he sat there and nodded. Internally, though, he was weighing his options. What could he do? How was he going to let Patton know about this? There was no doubt that he was going to try, come hell or high water.

Governor Asher was in the hills west of town, sitting on a large boulder, overlooking the city—his city. Charlie Henry and Anna Radinski were now gone. No longer would he have to deal with the brooding old man or the controlling, manipulative little vixen. It was his time to shine. His ideas would finally be heard and implemented. His new level of power and influence felt right, like a custom-made saddle. At times like this, however, power felt like an itch that he couldn’t scratch. David Asher had reached the pinnacle of power, but he often found himself asking the same question of “What now?”

He hadn’t even been able to share in his latest triumph—the elimination of his former comrades. He regretted that and thought that he probably always would. He hated leaving important things up to other people, but he was learning on the job. As Anna told him time and time again, the person in charge couldn’t get their hands dirty. His only consolation was that he’d chosen the modes of their deaths. They’d treated him like a child, not giving him any say in what they were doing. And then the two bunglers had almost pissed it all away. He’d gotten recalled, for crying out loud. It was bad enough to lose in a reelection campaign, but to be recalled was worse.

But here he was—the king of the mountain. It was like the game that he and his friends used to play on a big dirt mound in their schoolyard. The competitors would start at different points at the bottom and then try to claw their way to the top. It didn’t matter who got their first. The winner was whoever could get there and then stay there. Young David often won because he was willing to play a little dirty. Sometimes he would throw dirt in the other boys’ eyes. Sometimes he would pull hair and bite ankles. Asher chuckled to himself at the memories, but then the painful ones inevitably crept their way into his mind.

His mother, if she was worth calling that, gave birth to him but that was about all she did for him. His father, a surf bum, merely donated the sperm. As David grew up and saw more of the world, he realized that his mother was just a skanky girl that used to hang around with the local surf bums. By the time she was twenty years old, she’d given up on trying to be a mother and dropped David off at her parents’ house. She would come around once in a while, but David was glad when she finally stopped trying to be a mother.

Not that his grandparents were much better. Losers beget losers, he thought. His grandfather was a retired member of a pipefitter’s union. His grandmother just smoked and drank and bitched at him and his grandpa all day. To escape, David spent nights with friends or slept out on the beach, and when he returned home no one ever asked him where he’d been. He’d always gotten the impression that his grandparents wished he would just go away for good and stop bothering them.

During the last semester of his senior year in high school he obliged them, finally leaving their house to live with a friend. He scraped enough credits together to graduate from high school, and after a couple of years in a community college, he had good enough grades to get into UC Santa Barbara. He studied philosophy and political science, but like most people with those degrees, he couldn’t figure out what to do for a job. He worked his way up to assistant manager of a Starbuck’s, but that quickly became boring. What he craved was action.

That was around the time that the Occupy Movement emerged. He attended some events in Los Angeles, but it was too tame for his taste. When he and his friends heard about the Occupy rallies in Oakland, they went immediately. David got a taste of what real protest was like. There was just something about continuing to fight with tear gas going off all around you.

His thoughts suddenly turned to Charlie Henry. The old man had regaled him and Anna with stories of the Vietnam protest—the “real” protests, as he called them. It was really the only time he admired Charlie, because, it was during those times he reminded Asher of his grandfather.

It was all moot now. Charlie was gone. Anna was gone. David Asher had come out on top. Once the dust had settled, Brian White told him about the others’ plans. Charlie wanted Brian to kidnap Asher, drive him out to the desert, shoot him, and bury his body. Anna would then eventually take his place. Anna wanted Brian to threaten Asher if he ran for reelection. Tyler Redding would then become governor with Charlie and Anna pulling the strings. White based his decision to back Asher on the fact that he hated Charlie and wasn’t taken with Anna’s manipulative ways. More important, Asher had offered him the best deal. He would be the head of security for Blue Creek City. Essentially, it was the top non-political position in the entire city. Asher assured him that Brian would only answer to him.

So what is the comic book character that has vanquished all of his enemies supposed to do, take up scrapbooking? Asher laughed at that. Maybe the maintenance of power would prove to be as challenging as the acquisition of it. He suddenly thought of his number two, his right hand man Brian White. He quickly proved to be much more loyal, cunning, and potentially dangerous than Asher thought possible. So what was there to do now? He was the power in Blue Creek now and there were things that had to be done. And if they had to be done, why wait? Things were about to change in Blue Creek.

He thought of Patton Larsen and grimaced again. The man had always seemed to be one or two steps ahead of Charlie Henry. The governor couldn’t help but wonder how things would’ve turned out if Larsen had been taken out that first summer. Asher shook his head with regret—both with missed opportunities and the fact that something would have to be done about Larsen at some point.

The sun was setting behind him. The mountains where he stood on cast a long shadow down towards the valley and the town. Asher thought it symbolic—his shadow would lie over the town and these people would finally realize what he was capable of doing.

Whether it was the hot weather or the current economic and social conditions in Blue Creek, no one knew, but it seemed as if the life and spirit had been sucked out of the people. While traveling around town and working his business, Patton thought his neighbors were beginning to resemble the people of New York City—a people so stressed about merely surviving they didn’t have enough energy to smile. The fact that these people had been beaten down by their government and their leaders bothered Patton more than anything. Part of him wanted to shrug his shoulders and let them suffer. He’d fought the good fight and gotten his friend killed in the process. He’d given up so much for them and what did they do? They let themselves get fooled and re-elected the man who had caused all of their pain.

Still, there was part of Patton that couldn’t let go. He either couldn’t, or wouldn’t, give up on these people. He was their protector, and no matter how many times they let him down, he would always try to protect them. However, things were in such a bad state that nothing came to mind. Running for City Council would be useless—he would only be a solitary voice in a sea of Asher sycophants. He could run against Asher again, but he didn’t have it in him. Another option was to cash out and go home. He had the money. Hell, he and Frank had cleared enough money they could both buy their way out and go home. In fact, that very idea had come up again the day before.

As a kid, Patton watched old western movies with his Dad. Patton loved the simplicity of those movies—there were good guys and there were bad guys. The good guys wore white hats. The bad guys wore black hats. Usually in those movies, the good guy would leave or be forced out of town. However, he would gather himself and come back to make things right. Could he leave? Could he be that man who left the townspeople in need of a hero? He thought of Jennifer and Mike and Frank and everything that had happened to them and decided that yes, he could leave them.

Frank was taking his wife Shontae home to be with their children and grandchildren. She had been feeling those old pains returning. Frank got his Blue Creek letter a week after Jennifer and he had already left the business. He was now working at City Hall as the head accountant, and predictably, he was miserable. Frank stopped by their old offices every day to see Patton and told his old business partner that he had to do something about what was happening. Patton would just purse his lips and shake his head. He stopped repeating the fact that there was nothing he could do.

The Insight spy network was still intact, but it had been compromised. No longer would the bosses receive accurate reports that reflected true events. As David Asher tightened his grip of the city, he was doing the same to more of Bao’s colleagues. Bao tried to find a way to get around the scrutiny he was under, but he was too scared. If people were willing and able to kidnap you and hold you captive, they were also likely to be willing to do much worse.

Though his life was mostly back to normal, Bao wasn’t happy with the way things were going in town. The thought that he was under someone else’s control galled him. He’d always been a free spirit, which is much of the reason he was in this place to begin with. He didn’t want out, but he didn’t want to take it. Bao’s thoughts turned to Patton Larsen as they often did when he felt this sense of righteous anger.

He’d tried to contact fellow spies but none were willing to talk to him. He could tell that all of them had either been taken, or had heard of others being taken, and didn’t want the same to happen to them. Bao also knew that there was no way the Asher regime would let him leave Blue Creek for any reason, fearing that he’d try to contact his bosses. No, Bao reasoned. He may have been trapped geographically, but he decided he wasn’t going to be trapped psychologically anymore.

Suddenly, something dawned on Bao—a way to contact Patton without arousing suspicion. Since his abduction, Bao sent an employee to service Patton’s offices. He didn’t want Asher’s goons to suspect that he was trying to slip him information. Bao now had a way to contact him. He took a small notepad and started writing.

The breeze off the lake was brisk at two in the morning. Patton had never been out here at this time of night, but, then again, he’d never had a reason to do so. A light mist clung to the banks and hung out over the middle of the lake. The scenery reminded Patton of some bad horror movies he’d seen as a kid. If he weren’t here for such a serious reason, he might have laughed at that thought. He checked his watch.

Patton was out at the fishing shop that he’d purchased. He now owned the boat, and for this little meeting, he was going to use it to get out into the middle of the lake. To remind himself of why he was out at such an ungodly hour, Patton pulled the slip of paper from his pocket and read it by the shop’s security light.

“Patton. Important. We need to meet. Bao.”

Patton found the note underneath the label of the bottle of Diet Pepsi he bought from the vending machine. He was the only person in the building who drank that particular drink, and Bao must have somehow known that. The two continued this ruse, sticking notes in places where other people wouldn’t look, in order to arrange this meeting.

It finally struck Patton, though. Here he was, supposedly living in a free society, having to meet another supposedly free citizen in the dead of night out in the middle of nowhere. He contrasted the town’s current situation with what the city’s original charter was supposed to be—complete freedom. The contrast was striking. He suddenly understood how the Founding Fathers would feel were they able to see modern America.

Patton was beginning to wonder if an outside government would intervene now that things were bad and getting worse. He had no way of knowing that the organizers of the experiment had essentially gotten a jurisdictional waiver from all levels of government. They assured government officials that everything would be fine. If anything went wrong, they would notify the government. Somehow there had been a breakdown. Maybe that’s why Bao was so hell-bent on meeting him out here now, and just as he thought that, Patton could hear the crunch of gravel under a car’s tires. Bao was only using his fog lamps, obviously trying to be discrete. When he opened the door, however, the dome light blazed through the darkness.

“So much for being inconspicuous,” Patton said to Bao after he reached him.

Bao looked at him sheepishly. “Sorry,” he said. “I forgot to turn off the light.”

Patton shrugged and started walking towards the dock where his fishing boat was moored. Bao followed behind him quietly. They both boarded without a word. Patton started the motor, untied the lines, and cast off. Patton steered the boat north and they traveled for five minutes before Patton killed the engine and brought the boat to a coasting stop. He unwound his anchor and threw it out, shut off all lights, and then sat down in the padded seat across the Bao.

Bao was waiting for Patton to say something, but Patton gestured for him to speak.

“You wanted this meeting. What’s up?”

Bao looked around cautiously and then hunched over, drawing Patton in close.

“Bao. We’re out in the middle of nowhere. You can just talk to me,” Patton said, trying to assure him.

“Okay, man. I’m just nervous,” he said.

Patton finally noticed how frightened his young friend seemed.

“They know about us,” Bao started, but then realized Patton wouldn’t necessarily know what he was talking about. “Asher knows about the Insight spies,” he clarified.

Patton straightened in his seat, never taking his eyes off of Bao’s.

“How?” he asked, his voice a little tense.

Bao shook his head. “I don’t know.” All the sudden one of the reports that goes to the bosses at Insight says that two agents are missing. Then poof! They reappear,” Bao said, making an elaborate gesture with his hands.

Patton chewed on this information for a moment and then Bao said something even more disturbing.

“They picked me up too,” he said, subconsciously wincing at the memory.

“Who?” Patton asked, his eyes narrowing with anger.

Bao shrugged. “They had me in a dark room the whole time. Whenever they took me out I had a hood on my head.”

Patton let out a loud breath of air and stood up. He paced around the boat for a moment and then asked, “Why do you think they did it?”

Bao cleared his throat, surprised how difficult it was for him to talk about his experience.

“They told me not to report anything negative. I’m still supposed to report, but they know that the company is taking the reports and if anything gets too bad they might bring in the authorities.”

“Is that your bosses’ plan? To bring in the authorities if things get out of hand?”

Bao shrugged again, frustrating Patton. The kid was a spy but he really didn’t know anything about what was going on above him in his company. Patton sighed and sat back down in his seat. He looked at Bao then away from him then across the water at nothing in particular.

Finally he said, “What do you want me to do then?”

Bao arched his back and reached into his pants pocket. He removed something and handed it towards Patton.

“What’s this?” Patton asked, confused.

“It’s a thumb drive. It’s got all the contact information for people at Insight. It’s got the names and contact info for the network in town.” Then Bao looked at him earnestly. “You need to get in touch with them. You need to let them know what’s happening here, or what you think is going to happen. They all think everything is fine and dandy because all of our reports are telling them so.”

Patton looked at the drive as he twirled it around in his hands, deep in thought.

“They’re watching me too, Bao,” Patton said, swallowing hard. “I know that they watch me and whatever I do.”

Bao became even more nervous, but he thought it through.

“Look,” he said, perhaps more confidently than he actually felt, “they’re watching you but you can leave Blue Creek. You’re too prominent a figure for them to do anything. They know you’re against Asher and if anything weird happened the whole town would know who did it.”

Patton nodded but said, “Yeah, but what if they decided to make their move while I was outside of Blue Creek? How would anyone ever know about it?”

Bao sat back in his seat, deflated. He hadn’t thought of that.

“But I’ll do it,” Patton said. “I’ve had a vacation on the books for a while now. It’s coming up in a couple weeks. I’ll just take this,” he said, looking at the drive and then putting it into his pocket, “and I’ll take it to them.”

Bao exhaled loudly in relief.

“But remember, we tried this before and they didn’t do anything about it remember?” Patton said. Bao nodded. Patton continued. “Who’s to say that they’ll do anything now? Who’s to say that any police will come in here and try to stop Asher? I’m just saying… just because we get this to them doesn’t mean anything will come of it.”

That thought had never occurred to Bao, but he realized that Patton was right. No matter. They had to do what they could.

“We need to try,” Bao said with conviction. “I think they’re going to start putting us all in that big prison,” he said, pointing up towards the eastern hills where David Asher’s monstrosity was being built. “I’d rather go down fighting than go there,” he said, not realizing that was where he was held captive.

Patton smiled and nodded at that. “That’s the spirit, kid,” he said and got up to start the boat’s motor.

PART FOUR

REBELS

CHAPTER 25

As much as it was possible, life began to return to normal. Asher’s new restrictions on travel outside Blue Creek initially had a chilling effect on the citizenry, but again, it became something that people got accustomed to. More difficult was the constant presence of police and Blue Creek Security agents. Not only did they patrol the hills that surrounded the valley, but they also roamed around downtown. Many of them were armed with pistols. Though the prison wasn’t completed yet, it had its first “visitors.”

Two families, who had been neighbors since the experiment began, went into the eastern hills to hike and camp. They struck camp in the middle of the night and tried to make their way through one of the many low passes that leads through to the other side of the mountains. They were caught by a roving patrol of security guards. The parents were arrested and became the first occupants of the prison, which was becoming the symbol of all that was wrong with Blue Creek. The children were placed in the care of the city. There were even news stories that showed how compassionate Governor Asher was towards the kids, who had so obviously been led astray by their parents.

But it wasn’t just the story about the family that tried to escape—the media was in protection mode 24 hours per day. They published puff pieces about Asher and other government officials. Those who suspected collusion between the town’s TV stations, newspapers, and news websites were right. Editors from the many media outlets had weekly meetings with the government to coordinate future messaging. Charlie and Anna would have been proud, Asher thought. If not proud per se, they would have to be impressed. The governor couldn’t imagine his former cronies could have done any better. The wounds from the recall election and Mike Wilson’s assassination still hadn’t closed, but Asher could feel that the city was starting to move past it. Things were starting to ebb.

Perhaps most important was how quiet Patton Larsen had been. He’d removed his blog site from the intranet. He no longer wrote op-eds for the papers or appeared on the news. He’d basically become a non factor in Blue Creek politics. Asher was worried that Larsen was up to something. Those worries would have to go to the backburner, however. He had a city to run.

In early September Frank received a call from his oldest son. He’d returned to Blue Creek to handle some problems with his business, but he was scheduled to return to his wife’s side a month later.

“She’s fading, Dad. You better come home.”

Frank had already packed a bag for this inevitability. On his way out of town he stopped by Patton’s farm. Patton heard his car pull up and watched his friend walk to his door. Frank looked defeated. He could see that the news wasn’t good. Jennifer answered the door and invited him in. Frank hesitated, thinking he’d better get back on the road, but he stepped in the door, his head hung low. With his large fingers interlaced in front of him, Frank looked at Jennifer and Patton in turn. He started to speak but only a sigh escaped. Jennifer went to Frank and hugged him. Apparently her touch was the last straw. They both broke down and began to weep. Huge tears rolled down Patton’s face and he stepped in to hug his friend.

When he regained his composure, Frank said, “Thanks guys. You were the best thing that ever happened to us.”

Patton waved it off, but Frank nodded sincerely.

“Shontae loved you Jennifer,” he said, taking her dainty hand in his. “You made her feel like she was just one of the girls. I don’t think she ever felt that way before. And you, Patton, you helped me so I could spend more time at home with her. That meant a lot to her.”

There was another round of hugs and Frank walked out to his car.

A week later, on the day that Shontae died, Frank called and broke the news to them. The funeral would be held later that week. Frank would return a week after that, he told them.

“You’re coming back?” Patton asked, surprised.

“Yeah. My kids are okay. I need to get back to where Shontae was the happiest. Besides,” he said, and Patton could hear the twinkle in his voice, “you’re going to need me for what you have planned.”

“Planned?” Patton asked, his eyebrows raised. “And what is that exactly?”

Frank chuckled and said, “Well, I don’t know exactly, but I know you. You, my friend, have always got something cookin’ up in that head of yours.”

Patton laughed. “You’re right,” he said, “I’ll tell you all about it when you get home.”

“Sounds good, buddy,” Frank said, and hung up.

As he often did after work, Patton took the long way around the lake to his house in the eastern hills. He’d caught himself daydreaming a few times, almost running off the road. He thought of his first wife, his kids, his mother. He thought of Mike and Shontae and hot tears stung at his eyes. He wiped at them awkwardly, fighting to keep a clear view of the road.

Patton continued to speed along the highway, gazing down towards the beautiful town below.

This experiment could have been a great experience for everyone involved, he thought. The organizers had given thousands of people an opportunity to have a life they couldn’t before. People who once lived in trailers and apartments now had homes to call their own. They had yards and fences and nice cars. If they’d played their cards right they could have perpetual wealth.

But then there were people who had to have control—people who have to have their ideas heard and their egos appeased. Patton never understood the impulse. The desire to control others through political means was psychotic and something he couldn’t explain, let alone understand. He shook his head and forced these thoughts out of his head. His mind turned to his recent vacation. He and Jennifer hadn’t made it far. They were supposed to go to California to visit their respective families, but Patton changed their itinerary. Instead, they loaded up his truck and headed south the Salt Lake City. On the way there he made a special stop.

Patton smiled when he recalled the look on Michael Varner’s face when he opened his door and saw Patton on the front porch. Confusion turned to recognition, which quickly turned to shock. Patton Larsen, the legend of Blue Creek, was standing on his front porch. Varner invited him in and led him to a large study at the back of his house. They sat in an uncomfortable silence for what seemed forever. Varner glared at Patton, who gazed around the office, admiring the beautiful wood trim, the stylish desk, and the shelves full of books.

“Mr. Larsen, no offense, but what the hell are you doing at my house? This is clearly out of bounds for a resident. Hell, you’re not even supposed to know who I am and where I live,” Varner said finally.

Patton stared across the desk at Varner. He looked younger than Patton would have thought. He was classically handsome, with piercing eyes and a strong chin and jaw line. To most people, Varner’s appearance and his status was intimidating. Patton wasn’t most people, though.

Patton wasn’t sure how to proceed. He suddenly felt uncomfortable and started to regret his visit.

“I’m sorry. I have something for you. Bao gave it to me to give you.”

Varner’s eyes went wide. He leaned forward in his seat.

“Bao talked to you? He’s not supposed to—”

“—I’ve known for months who he is and what he does. He contacted me. Something’s happened in Blue Creek. He said that all the spies have been discovered by Asher. Some of them have been abducted and interrogated, including Bao. He’s worried something is going to happen to them all.”

Varner stood and paced nervously behind his desk.

“How come he didn’t put this into a report?” Varner asked, running his hands through his hair.

“He can’t. He’s under surveillance including his computer. All of them are. That’s why you’re not getting any negative reports. Things are terrible and getting worse and they have no way of telling you.”

Varner sat in his chair and pushed it away from his desk. Patton was impressed with the genuineness of the reaction. He seemed to really care about his employees.

“He gave me this,” Patton said and handed the thumb drive to Varner.

“What’s on this?”

“Lists of spies, updated reports, what’s actually going on in town.”

Varner held the drive like it was a priceless object.

“What are you going to do?” Patton asked.

Varner looked up at Patton, surprised by the question.

“I don’t know. I need to see what’s on it first.”

Patton leaned forward in his chair.

“I’ve told you. Things are bad. It’s getting dangerous. Asher has put together some kind of secret police. It’s his own little Gestapo. A family tried to escape Blue Creek. They wanted out but didn’t have the money. The parents are up in the prison Asher is building. The kids are in the City’s custody.”

Varner blew out a loud breath.

“Asher had Charlie Henry and Anna Radinski killed,” Patton continued. “He’s doing things on his own now. That old bastard Charlie Henry was evil, but there’s something about this Asher guy. He’s evil, but he’s less predictable than Henry was.”

Varner grimaced.

“I’m not sure what I can do here, Mr. Larsen. My company is under contract. If I’m in breach I have to pay a huge penalty. Just like you have to pay to get out. There’s a lot of money at stake in this thing. Lots of PhDs with lots of data to collect. These people are some of the most vicious people I’ve ever met.”

Patton nodded. “I know the type.”

Varner fiddled with the thumb drive. Patton was glad to see that the man was concerned about the human element and not just the bottom line. He was obviously torn.

“It’s not just your people, Mr. Varner. It’s about the people in Blue Creek. I mean, didn’t you people consider this to be a possibility? Didn’t you think that someone would rise up and try to take control of this thing?”

Varner shook his head no. He looked ashamed.

“I don’t remember this even being mentioned. That doesn’t mean the researchers didn’t think it was possible. I wasn’t at every meeting.”

Patton sighed loudly and shifted in his seat. He leaned forward to drive home his next point. He looked directly into the Insight Resources CEO’s eyes.

“I know I have no way of convincing you or the researchers or whoever else is involved with this debacle, but people are going to die. They already have. Asher has control of Blue Creek. He’s built himself a little private army. He’s trying to close us off from the outside world. When, and I mean when, things start to get worse, what are you and the scientists willing to do to stop it? You have to draw a line in the sand somewhere. Otherwise, someone else is going to have to take matter into their own hands.”

By “someone” Varner knew what Patton meant. Varner nodded. He knew Patton was right. He had no right to put a price on humans’ lives.

“I’ll talk to my people. We’ll come up with a plan. Then we’ll talk to the researchers. They hold the government grants. They have the politicians’ ears. I have to convince them. I need more evidence, though. If what you say is true—that I’ve been getting fake reports from my people—then I’ve got to open another channel of communication.”

Patton nodded. “That’s no problem. I just need proof that you know about this situation and that you want them to create real reports. You need to tell them to give their reports to me and I will get them to you.”

“How can I do that?”

Patton pulled his iPhone from his pocket and smiled. Varner smiled and nodded.

“Good idea.”

Ten minutes later they had a video that Patton would take back to Blue Creek to distribute to Bao and his colleagues. They shook hands on Varner’s porch. Before leaving, Patton said one last thing.

“Spread the word to whoever you talk to—if this thing gets further out of hand and more people get hurt, I’m going to hold someone responsible.”

Varner looked into Patton’s eyes and knew that he meant it. He swallowed hard and then nodded agreement.

That visit was two weeks earlier. Upon returning, Patton gave the video to Bao, but he hadn’t heard anything from any of the spies. Right now it was a waiting game. It was now out of his hands. If he didn’t hear anything soon, he would put his other plans into higher gear. In fact, that was part of the reason he was out on this long drive.

In his long career as a land developer and builder, this was easily the latest meeting he’d ever had with a potential client. The man looked at his watch again. He blew out a long breath, which he could see in the cool autumn air. Finally, after another ten minutes, the man could see headlights approaching. The driver parked beside his own truck and approached him, hands in pockets.

“Mr. Larsen?”

“Yes,” the figure replied quietly.

“Jerry Snow,” the man said, offering his hand.

Patton shook his hand. “Nice to finally meet you. And thanks for meeting me out here this late at night. It’s a long story.”

Jerry Snow nodded and smiled, but said nothing. He apparently wanted to hear the story. Patton explained the situation in town. The governor, the growing police presence, the arrests, the spies. By the time he was done, the old contractor’s mouth was wide open.

“So you see, I had to meet out here after dark. In fact, the reason I’m late is because someone was following me.”

“Are you sure?”

Patton nodded grimly.

The two men got down to business. Jerry Snow owned a large tract of land, over the mountains, to the west of Blue Creek. He and Patton negotiated the price for the land and for the cost of an initial development. The agreed on a figure—one that was in the millions—and Patton signed a contract. The work would begin immediately, Jerry assured Patton. They would put in sewer and water lines and would build the first few roads for the new town. Downtown buildings would begin before the first snows flew. They would also start building a few homes and then expand as more and more people decided to flee Blue Creek.

The men shook hands and parted company. Patton jumped into his truck and took a few moments to warm himself. Instead of turning on his lights and making his way back home, Patton donned a pair of night vision goggles. He scanned the road ahead, looking for Blue Creek security vehicles. There were none within his immediate view so he began to drive back towards the mountains.

Patton realized this conflict with Asher was becoming a chess match. This analogy was ironic—their first interaction started with an offer to play chess on the train to Utah. Patton turned Asher down that time, but now he was being forced to play. People’s lives were at stake. Asher had set the new board. Patton just made the first move. He knew there was no way to keep his new town a secret forever. Governor Asher would discover it at some point. It was up to Patton to figure out what Asher would do when he found out. He just hoped that things would fall into place before that happened.

CHAPTER 26

Patton slammed his laptop closed in disgust. The sound startled Jennifer.

“What the hell Patton!”

He glared at her but said nothing. He set the computer on his nightstand and slid further under the covers. She could see that it wasn’t his usual sense of annoyance. He was angry and disturbed by something.

“What’s wrong?” she asked, gentle now.

“Varner just emailed me.”

“And?”

Patton shook his head. “They’re not going to do anything. The researchers have no proof and right now it’s almost impossible to get anyone in here to monitor what’s happening. He said they used to have a huge network of cameras but that was shut down months ago.”

Jennifer let out a loud breath and closed her book.

“Not surprised are you?” she asked.

He shook his head. There was something else.

“He said he disagreed with the researchers and went over their head. He contacted the senator that sponsored the bill. He contacted the agency that supplied the grant money. He says they all ignored him. He hasn’t even heard back from the senator. Some bureaucrat sent him a generic email. He says he’s stuck.”

Jennifer moved to him and laid her head on his chest. He wrapped his arm around her.

“I don’t know…” he said quietly. “Something bad’s going to happen. I just hope—”

“—What? That you can save everyone?” she asked, raising up on her elbow.

Patton sat up and began to speak but Jennifer cut him off.

“I know this is what it’s about and it’s okay. I can’t talk you out of it. I know you and I know how you operate. And it’s a big part of why I love you.”

Patton was stunned. He’d expected a lecture instead of this. She continued.

“If you want to stay I’ll support you. But if you want to buy our way out and go home I’ll support you. If you leave for the wrong reason you’ll never forgive yourself.”

Patton was still silent. He couldn’t disagree with her. He laid his head back down, obviously deep in thought.

“I’ll think about it,” he said grimly. “I feel like I’ve given so much already.”

She laid her head back on his chest and quickly fell asleep. Patton, however, laid awake for hours and pondered his next move.

Smoke flew into his face as he surveyed the scene before him. The feet of children and adults—mostly women—were intertwined in the rubble. Patton removed his helmet and held it at his hip.

“Sir,” came the voice of one of his team sergeants.

“Yes?” he said, distracted, looking at a child’s foot.

“You’ve got a call from the general,” holding a satellite phone towards him.

“Yeah, thanks,” he said, still not looking at his subordinate. He took the phone.

“Yes sir?”

“I need an update, Major Larsen.”

Patton began to speak but choked on his words. He couldn’t take his eye off of the girl’s tiny foot.

“Major?”

“Sorry sir. They’re all dead,” was all Patton could say before the emotion crept back into his voice.

“What happened?” the general asked, his tone softening.

“The enemy hit the village from down below with mortars and machine guns. It looks like they formed up and killed anyone that survived the mortars.”

“Any survivors?”

“We’re checking that, Sir. There don’t seem to be any, though. All of the buildings are demolished. We have a stack of bodies here.”

There was silence from the other end of the line then, “Keep me posted, Patton. I’m sorry you had to see that.”

Major Patton Larsen ended the call and put the sat phone in his cargo pocket. The sergeant returned.

“Drone shows the tangos are still close. We need to—”

Patton felt something warm and wet on his face. When the sergeant fell, Patton realized the man had been shot. There was an explosion behind him and bullets tore the ground at his feet.

“Get down, Sir!” yelled another of his men.

Patton dropped to the ground and came face to face with his fallen comrade. The man’s eyes were still wide with fear, blood gushing from a wound in his neck. Fire continued from down below him. He activated his mic.

“Where’s that fire coming from?” he yelled into his helmet-mounted microphone.

“Hundred meters down, behind those boulders!” came the voice of one of his men. He didn’t recognize which.

“Get some fire on that. Do we have drone coverage?”

“Yes Sir. We’ve had one on overwatch!”

“Call in and get them to engage!” Patton yelled into his mic.

He got to his knees so he could better survey the chaos going on around him. There was another explosion, followed by yet another. Patton stood and pulled his fallen sergeant into a fireman’s carry. He ran towards a demolished building as bullets continued to pepper the ground around him. Something impacted his leg—it felt like someone had hit him with a baseball bat.

Once he got behind cover, he realized he’d been shot. He examined the wound. It wasn’t bleeding badly so he turned his attention to his comrade. While working on him, trying to get the man’s throat to stop bleeding, he heard his name in his ear.

“Patton! PATTON!”

There was another explosion outside. It was probably a hellfire from the drone taking out the enemy down below.

“PATTON!”

Someone was grabbing his shoulder and shaking him.

Patton woke with a start and found himself lying in his bed. He was in Blue Creek, not in a demolished village in Iraq.

“Patton, what’s wrong?” Jennifer said, still shaking him.

He mumbled, trying to gather his wits.

“Patton!”

“Okay!” he said, pushing her hands away.

“You were yelling in your sleep. I’m sorry, but you were freaking out,” she said, trying to calm herself.

He sat up in bed and realized he was covered in sweat. He rubbed the scar tissue on his thigh—the mark that would forever remind him of those events.

“What were you dreaming about?” Jennifer asked, still not quite calm. She’d lived with him for over two years and had never seen him do this.

Patton was still breathing hard. Not sure if he should drag his wife through his memories. He wasn’t sure if she wanted to know.

“Sorry,” he said finally. “I was just dreaming about something that happened in Iraq.” He wanted to leave it at that, but knew she would press him.

“And?”

Patton shook his head, indicating he didn’t want to talk about it.

“Come on, Patton, I’m your wife.”

Once Patton calmed down, he told her about the Iraqi village that ISIS fighters flattened with mortars and then killed any survivors they could find. Patton said they were actually able to save the lives of two children, but everyone else, nearly a hundred people, had been massacred that day. As he relayed the story, even while awake, he could still see the little girl’s foot. He shuddered involuntarily and then tried to change the subject. Jennifer could tell that he wanted to end the subject so she let it go.

The dreams continued. They didn’t come every night, but nearly so. Patton would react to the dream, which would wake Jennifer. Some nights she woke him, but others she let him get through the dream by himself. After another week of almost sleepless nights, she begged Patton to get help. He refused, claiming that no one, especially in Blue Creek, could help him. They just needed to get out of town, or get rid of David Asher. Neither seemed realistic, so they continued to deal with the dreams.

Patton began to spend less and less time at work—turning operations of his business to an associate—and spending time in his workshop. Every time she went out to see what he was doing he asked her to leave, noting it was his way of decompressing. Little did she know that he was building an arsenal for what he thought was an inevitable showdown with David Asher.

“You’re sure?” Asher asked, wide eyed.

Brian White nodded. He opened a file and laid it on the desk in front of his boss. Asher leaned forward in his plush leather office chair and looked down at the surveillance photos.

“Construction. Across the hills?” Asher asked, pointing towards the west.

White nodded again.

“How many workers? How much equipment?”

“I’d say about a hundred workers or so. Maybe more. Tons of equipment. About everything you could imagine.” He picked up the photos, shuffled through them and then handed one to his boss. “As you can see here, this place is going up pretty fast. Don’t ask me where they got the money for this, but this company is top notch. They’re out of Ogden, Utah.”

A pensive David Asher leaned back in his chair.

With his eyes still on the photo he said, “Those guys have been raking in the cash ever since they got here. I wouldn’t doubt if they had millions. Wilson made a fortune trading on the outside. That’s part of the reason we shut it down. These guys were getting too rich and powerful.”

Brian White nodded. Personally, he’d never had more than three thousand dollars in any account he’d ever owned. Now, because of the city’s largesse, he was becoming very wealthy.

“What should we do about this?” White asked.

Asher stood and walked towards his liquor cabinet. He poured himself a drink without offering one to his subordinate. He took it down in one swallow and poured himself another.

“I’m not sure. I don’t think it would send a good message to stop them, but it would show people that we’re weak if we don’t,” he said pensively. “Either way it’s going to be bad, I just think we need to decide which set of people we can afford to piss off.”

White stared at Asher and watched him pace back and forth. Asher continued.

“If they go through with it, we’re going to lose a lot of people and a lot of money. The richer people support Larsen. The bastard would have beaten me without that little pissant Redding in the election.”

White smiled, remembering the day he’d put an end to Tyler Redding. It had been his pleasure to personally fulfill that little duty.

“Nope,” Asher said, finally. “We need to stop this. We need to shut it down and quick. Plus, we need a pressure point on Larsen. Something that will let him know we can control him, no matter how much influence he thinks he has.”

The “pressure point” immediately came to Brian White’s scheming mind. Hell, she worked in City Hall. He saw her almost every day.

“The wife?” he asked his boss.

Asher stopped pacing and grinned wickedly. He nodded and White walked out of the office.

The light for line two on Jennifer Larsen’s office phone lit up, accompanied by a low buzzing sound. She’d been concentrating so hard on her paperwork she didn’t noticed it.

“Jennifer,” said her pretty brunette office mate, “you gonna get that?”

“What?” she said confused. “Oh, the phone,” she said, smiling at her own absent-mindedness. She finally answered.

“Larsen,” she said tersely. She had no etiquette in the office. What were they going to do, fire her?

“Jennifer. We’re about to start that meeting downstairs. Didn’t you get the memo on that?” came the voice of her bitchy, frumpy boss.

Jennifer shuffled through some papers that were on her desk but didn’t see any memo about a meeting. “No. Sorry. I’ll be right down,” she said hanging up without a goodbye. She shut off her monitor and pushed in her computer chair. “You coming?” she asked her officemate, who looked up at her with a confused expression.

“Where?”

“To the meeting. The beeyotch just told me I’m late,” she said, grabbing her attaché case and her jacket.

“She told you, not me,” the brunette said, not meaning to sound snotty, but did so anyway.

Jennifer walked out without a response and made her way to the basement. It really was a beautiful place to work. The office she had with the Department of Agriculture in Los Angeles was old and run down. Although she hated almost everyone she worked with, Jennifer Larsen didn’t mind the surroundings.

Instead of taking the elevator, which was slow and full of people she didn’t want to talk to, she used the stairs. The stairs were closer to the basement conference room, anyway. Jennifer made her way down a long hallway and turned left to find an empty conference room. She walked inside and found a phone on a small table on the side of the room. As she dialed her boss’s extension, a figure approached her from behind. Without a word, and nearly without a sound, the man clubbed her on the back of the head, knocking her out cold. Unable to cushion her own fall, Jennifer hit her head again on the floor.

Jennifer’s assailant picked her up in a fireman’s carry and carried her to an isolated area of the basement. He laid her down on the thinly carpeted floor and rolled up her sleeve. He removed a leather case from his back pocket, opened it, and pulled out a syringe that was already prepped with a heavy sedative. The assailant stuck the needle into Jennifer’s shoulder and watched her go limp. All he had to do now was wait for darkness to fall and for everyone to leave the building.

Patton was annoyed when Jennifer didn’t return his texts or emails. When she didn’t call at five on her way out of the door, something she always did, he was even more annoyed. But when five-thirty and then six and then seven o’clock rolled around with no contact, Patton began to feel very nervous. They were both sticklers for their routine, and she was definitely breaking it right now. When the clock hit seven-thirty he grabbed his keys and charged out to his truck. Rocks flew as he tore out of his driveway. He frantically dialed her number again but it just rang and rang. He called Frank.

“Have you seen or talked to Jennifer?” he asked frantically.

“No Patton, what’s wrong?”

“She’s always home by five-thirty. And when I say always I mean always!”

“Where you at? Come pick me up and I’ll help you find her.”

“Okay,” he said breathlessly, “be there in five minutes,” he said and ended the call.

Six minutes later, Patton screeched to a halt in front of Frank’s house. Frank was already waiting outside and he jumped into the large pickup.

“Calm down, Pal,” Frank said, but when he saw the look in Patton’s eyes he decided that talking him down would do no good. “Tell me what you know.”

Patton looked at him and then back at the road. He pressed the accelerator and headed towards City Hall. After a loud and violent stop in front of the city building, Patton jumped out and made his way to the front door. It was locked but he could see a uniformed security guard inside. He pounded on the glass to get the guard’s attention. The guard saw him but took his time getting to the door. From the inside he pushed a button to an intercom.

“How can I help you, Sir?” he asked in a slow and annoying drawl.

Patton’s glare was the only response he got. Against his better judgment, he opened the door. Without asking, Patton charged in.

“Sir, you can’t just come in. The building is closed!”

Patton turned back to him and grabbed him by the collar of his maroon suit coat. “I don’t give a damn about your hours! My wife was supposed to be home three hours ago! I haven’t heard from her since noon. Now, are you going to help me find her or do I need to stick your Taser up your ass and see how it works from the inside out?”

The man, young and inexperienced at conflict, began to shake and stammer. “Sir… Sir. I don’t know anything about this. Just… let… me… go.”

Patton did so but gave him a little shove in the process.

“Did they teach you how to use that radio or is it just decoration?”

The guard unclipped his radio and pressed the button.

“Anton. Anton we have a situation in the front lobby. Can you come down here please?” A hiss of static punctuated his last words.

There was a crackle over the radio. Apparently this Anton was responding.

“Use proper radio protocol on this net, over.”

The young security guard rolled his eyes at this. “Anton, just please come up here. I have an unauthorized person in the lobby.”

“Will be there in two mikes. Out,” came the response.

He looked at Patton and shrugged his shoulders. Patton rolled his eyes at this inexperienced moron. “That means two minutes,” he told him. “It’s the military way of saying minutes.”

The kid shrugged again and turned away. Just over a minute later, a powerfully built black man descended a short set of stairs and approached Patton.

“Can I help you, Sir?” he asked politely.

Patton held up his phone, which had a picture of Jennifer on the screen. “Yes, I’m looking for my wife,” holding his phone in the security guard’s face.

The second guard looked at the picture. It was obvious to Patton that he recognized her, but he was waiting for the obligatory lie that he didn’t.

“Yeah I’ve seen her before but not today. She usually signs out right at five o’clock.”

Patton nodded. She did sign out right at five because she didn’t want to be in this God-forsaken place for any longer than she had to be.

“So she didn’t sign out today?” Patton asked, feeling the panic beginning to rise.

Anton shook his head. “No, Sir. Like I said, I haven’t seen her today.”

Patton gazed up and saw a surveillance camera. If there was one camera, he figured, there had to be many more. Enough, probably, to cover the entire building. Rather than continue on with these people, Patton said thank you and walked out the door. He briskly walked back to the truck and Frank could tell that something was wrong.

“What’d they say?” he asked Patton.

“She didn’t sign out and the security guard hasn’t seen her all day.”

Patton was driving angry again, tearing down residential streets, headed towards Frank’s house. When Patton turned the last corner, he saw three Blue Creek Security Service vehicles in front of Frank’s house, their lights blaring.

“What the hell?” Frank said, looking at Patton with wide eyes.

Patton wasn’t about to stop and find out what was going on. Instead, he trolled by slowly. Three city vehicles were parked at the curb, but Patton could only see two uniformed city officials. They were outside milling around. That meant that at least one person was inside, looking for Frank or for something inside of Frank’s house. Patton pressed on the gas and sped away from the scene.

“Where are you going?” Frank asked. “Let’s go see what the hell they’re doing in my house!”

Patton ignored him and kept driving. Once he turned the first corner he accelerated and headed for Jennifer’s house. When they came into sight of her house, though, they saw a familiar sight—more city vehicles. Patton pulled over and stopped at the end of the street. They were too far away to be seen, but they were too far away to see what was going on. The two friends looked at each other with two completely different expressions. Frank was scared and confused. Patton was angry and focused.

There was only one more place to go, but Patton figured they had people at his house also. They would have to hole up and wait for dark where Patton could think. Apparently something had set Asher off and had forced his hand. Asher didn’t know that Patton had prepared for this very thing and that he was the wild card.

Jennifer woke up groggy and in unfamiliar surroundings. When she tried to lift her head she saw stars and felt a wave of nausea pass over her. She laid her head back down on the hard pillow and took inventory. She definitely wasn’t at home and if she was at the hospital, doctors and nurses would most likely have been milling around her. No, she definitely wasn’t at the hospital. Rather than lift her head again and run the risk of bringing on another wave of nausea, Jennifer turned her entire body at once. Lying now on her left side, she was able to take in her surroundings. She found that she was on a very small bed that was part of the wall. There was no frame or headboard or footboard to speak of. Across the very small room was a stainless steel sink. To the left of that was a stainless steel toilet. Towards her feet was a desk and a chair. The room couldn’t have been any larger than… a prison cell.

She gasped audibly, stifling it with an open hand. She pushed herself up to a sitting position to get a better view of the room. It was indeed some sort of cell, probably measuring no more than eight feet by eight feet.

“What the hell am I doing here?” she asked herself, subconsciously rubbing her head. There was a large bump… no… two large bumps there. She raised her wrist to her eyes to check the time but saw only bare skin. Of course there was no clock on any of the walls. A small window above the desk let her know that it was night. What she didn’t know was that she was now an inmate in the new prison. Construction started that spring, and while the facility wasn’t completely finished, the offices, the medical facility, and one wing of cells were far enough along that a few dozen prisoners could be housed.

Jennifer went to the small window and looked out. She couldn’t see very far in either direction and the only thing across from her were more cells. Beginning to feel claustrophobic, she walked across the cell to the window. A sliver of sunlight was beginning to break over the eastern horizon. Suddenly she thought of Patton. Some mornings they would wake at daybreak and take the dogs for a walk, or go for a run on the highway above the lake. It had become one of the favorite aspects of her life and the thought of her husband, her being taken away from him and him not knowing where she was, made her cry. She tucked her chin into her chest and watched her tears splatter onto the desktop.

Daybreak found Patton and Frank sleeping in their offices after a long and busy night. They knew that city officials would eventually look for them here, but for now they were safe. Patton parked his truck inside their warehouse so there were no outward signs that they were there. In case they were discovered, Patton had a small stash of weapons and ammunition in his office.

The night before they drove out to Patton’s house and found a familiar scene—four city vehicles. Numbered among them was a large, black Chevrolet SUV. The ominous looking vehicle encouraged Patton to keep driving. He needed to get inside his house, but didn’t want any trouble—at least not yet. A mile past his house, Patton turned up a narrow gravel road. They curved and switch-backed and eventually made their way back towards Patton’s house. After thirty minutes of meandering through the hills in the dark, they crested a rise. Disoriented, Frank finally realized where they were—on a hill about three hundred feet above Patton’s house.

From this vantage point, the valley opened itself up to their view. Down below them was the lake. Further to the north and to the west was the city of Blue Creek, looking peaceful and calm. There were still cars out on the streets and the streetlights were blazing. It was a breathtaking view and the two men took it in, thinking about how such a beautiful place could have come to this.

“What we doin’ here Patton?”

Broken out of his reverie, Patton took a moment to respond. “When those people down there leave, we’re going to go down there and grab something,” he said, his gaze never leaving the panorama below him.

“Get what?” Frank said, his interest piqued by his friend’s curious mood.

Patton finally looked at him. He loved Frank’s innocence. He hated to spoil it, but he felt it the right time to tell him what he really did before coming to Blue Creek.

“On my property I have a trunk full of stuff that I need to get. It’s… well… tricks of my old trade, I guess you could say.”

With his eyes, Frank urged Patton to continue.

“Well, I did work in plastics. That much is true. The part I left out is what I did with plastics.”

Frank shrugged, gesturing for him to continue.

“I went into the Army right after I graduated from high school. While I was in basic training I was asked if I wanted to try out for the Rangers. I was told by my recruiter that if they ever asked me to try the Rangers I should. He said it was his best time in the Army.

“Then I was a Ranger for a while. We went on a deployment with some guys who weren’t like the rest of us. They wore the same uniform, but they had different gear, had long hair and they used to modify their own weapons. That kind of stuff was unheard of in my unit. Anyway, I got to talking to one of them and he said he was in Delta Force. I guess he knew he could trust me. He gave me the number to one of their recruiters back home and when we got back I called the number.”

Frank had heard of Delta Force, of course, but to think that this mild-mannered man who had become his best friend in the world was part of that… he couldn’t believe it.

“You don’t look—”

“—Like the type?” Patton interrupted, laughing. “I’ve heard that a lot, believe me. We’re not all big beefy guys running around with guns. Some of us were techies. I could shoot and do all the other stuff like the other guys—of course I wasn’t as good as a lot of them—but I grew up fixing stuff. I was always making stuff in my dad’s shop. Anyway, I did my time with Delta and then I got out to be with my family.”

Patton trailed off, looking down at his fingernails, trying not to let his emotions get the better of him. He’d lost his family, and to escape the pain he’d signed up for this experiment. Now he’d fallen in love again and gotten married. He had no idea where his wife was, but he was going to find out.

Patton’s appearance was his greatest asset as a Delta Force operator. He was of average height and average build, much different than the image that most people have of Special Forces operators. It allowed him to perform jobs that a lot of the others couldn’t, which made him a very valuable member of the unit.

“They’re leaving,” Frank said, sitting up in his seat to get a better view. “They’re headed back to town.”

Patton followed Frank’s gaze. When he saw the vehicles leave, he started the engine, but only turned on his fog lamps. He slowly backed away from the edge of the drop and took a few minutes to carefully get the truck turned around and back down the hill. Twenty harried minutes later, they were in Patton’s large, graveled parking area. He backed the truck up to what seemed an empty spot beside a large storage shed, but when they got to the back of the truck, Patton pulled a large rectangle of some type of fabric. It was partly covered in dirt and had grass and weeds woven into it. It turned out to be a camouflage cover for a secret storage bin. Patton pulled out his keys and opened a large metal container. Inside was a large plastic bin that looked like a large cargo carrier.

Patton started pumping a jack that was built into the metal container. After a few minutes, one end of the trunk was sticking up towards them. Patton grabbed the bin’s handle and pulled it up and out, then gestured for Frank to grab the other end. It was surprisingly light, but still the thing was too bulky for one person to get into the back of Patton’s truck. Patton slammed the tailgate closed and they both got back into the truck. Instead of turning right onto the highway, which would have taken them into town, he turned left to go the long way around the lake to their warehouse and offices. And that was where they remained the rest of the night. They would take the day to catch up on sleep and make a plan to find Jennifer.

Anton, the head security guard at City Hall, looked at the picture and nodded.

“Yeah, that’s him,” he said matter-of-factly. “My guy opened the door to ask him what he wanted and he just busted in right by him.”

Brian White dropped the picture back onto his desk and sat back. White wasn’t surprised at Larsen’s brazenness. He was upset that the man they’d been trying to find for nearly twenty-four hours had basically been in their clutches and had gotten away.

“Patton Larsen was here, in this building, and you didn’t think to call me?”

“Why would I have, Sir?” replied Anton, the no-nonsense former Marine. “I wasn’t informed that we were looking for him so how could I have known to detain him?”

White was annoyed with is subordinate, but he was right. It had been a quiet order that had been given only to a very few. It was an oversight on his part to not include City Hall security personnel, but there was nothing he could do about that now. Anton was one of his most trusted employees. He wasn’t going to fire him over something that wasn’t really his fault.

“Okay. Let me know if you hear or see anything,” White said.

“Will do, Mr. White,” he said, did an informal sort of about face and walked out of the room.

The security chief drummed his fingers on his desk in frustration. A plastics manufacturer and an accountant had outsmarted them. They had to find them before they could get away and start causing trouble.

The two troublemakers waited for the cover of darkness before they departed the warehouse. During the day, a couple of city vehicles pulled into the parking lot. They drove around, but no one made a serious attempt to enter the locked building. The warehouse had proven to be a perfect hideout—for now, anyway. When night finally came, they loaded up and headed into town. Patton figured that Asher’s security agents knew which vehicle they were in, so they switched from Patton’s truck to one of their unmarked work trucks.

Patton took side streets once they got into town and looked for tails. After a half hour of his cautious driving, Patton was satisfied that no one was following him. He continued to weave through residential streets.

Patton parked two blocks away from City Hall and handed Frank an iPad.

“What’s this for?” Frank asked. Patton loved Frank, but he realized his friend was out of his depth.

“I’m going to tap into their security system and relay it to this,” he said, pointing at the iPad. “I’m going to need you to stay here and watch my back. Also, one of us needs to stay with the truck in case we need to get out of here in a hurry.”

Frank nodded and reluctantly took the device.

“What do I do? I mean, how will I know you’ve gotten in?”

Patton held up his cell phone.

“I’ll text you. Trust me, Frank. I’ve done this stuff for years.”

Patton exited the truck and quickly disappeared into the night. It was a three-minute walk to the city building from where they’d parked, but it took Patton ten minutes. He was in enemy territory now. He couldn’t take any chances. Patton finally reached the building and searched around for his entry point. Most of the building was complete but there was still a lot of finishing work to be done. On the south side of the building there was a large air conditioning unit that wasn’t yet in operation. The workers had merely set the AC unit in front of where it would hook up to the building’s high tech ventilation system.

Patton looked around one last time and then pulled the AC unit away from the opening. He had to hunch as he walked, but he quickly made it to the end of the large duct. In front of him was a large, metal intake grate, which he simply kicked open. The room he found himself in was mostly dark. Patton had no idea if the building had a round-the-clock security detail—there were probably two or three guards at the most. He would deal with that problem if it cropped up, but first things first—he had to find the surveillance equipment.

Patton made his way to the main floor with no incident. If he was going to be surprised by security, this was the place. He crouched and quickly moved through the doorway that led into the lobby. It was a big, open space, open all the way to the top of the building. In the front of the lobby was an elevated desk where visitors got information and signed in. Sparse furnishings were spaced throughout the rest of the space.

Patton made his way to his left. Above him was a short set of stairs that led up to some offices. This was the area from where the security guard had approached him the day before. As Patton approached the stairs, he heard radio static. He quickly ducked behind the large desk and waited for the security guard to approach. To Patton’s relief, the guard walked quickly through the lobby and down the stairs he’d just ascended. Patton charged up the steps and ducked into the first enclosed room he could find. He peered out again slowly. Straight ahead of him was a long hallway with several doors on both sides.

Patton bolted down the hallway when he saw the way was clear. He reached a door that was secured with an electronic keypad. A placard told him it was the security office. He investigated the keypad and found it to be a relatively cheap model. He figured there was no alarm attached to it so he smashed the digital monitor with a small hammer and pried the face off.

Patton heard footsteps and breathing behind him. He heard the static crackle of a portable two-way radio. He turned but saw no one, but figured someone was on their way towards the security office. Patton kicked the keypad debris out of sight and dove to his left into a small alcove. He crouched and waited.

The sound of footsteps got closer, and eventually, the guard who’d earlier walked by Patton was standing in front of him. The guard went to type in the code, but paused when he saw there were no buttons. Without warning, Patton exploded out of his crouch and struck the security guard’s jaw with a palm punch. The big man dropped like a wet towel and Patton’s momentum carried him up and almost over the now unconscious man. Patton pulled himself up and returned to his work at the control panel.

With a jerk he pried it open with his tool, revealing a small green motherboard. He pried at the board and pulled a series of wires off of its back. Patton stripped the wires with his teeth. He removed an electronic device, about the size of a cell phone, out of his cargo pocket. He hooked the device to the bare wires with the device’s gator clamps. The screen lit up and it beeped. Patton entered a code and he heard the door click. Patton and one of his Delta Force comrades designed the device because unit members were often slowed down by these types of locks. Rather than fiddling with random-number generators, which could take minutes to find the right codes, they used an electric surge, which burned out the wires and rendered the locks useless.

Before entering the office, Patton pulled two sets of flex cuffs from his pack. With the smaller set he bound the security guard’s wrists. With the larger set, he bound the guard’s feet. He then pulled out a rectangular object. It was like duct tape, but was much stronger. He pulled off the plastic backing and covered the guard’s mouth. Patton then retrieved the guard’s radio and entered the security office.

Frank was nervous. It had been almost an hour since Patton left. There was no sign of him, no text—nothing on the iPad. Two police cars had trolled by, causing Frank to hunch down in his seat. The big man sighed. Since returning from California, he had made it a point to be around other people as much as possible. It was moments of solitude like this that forced him to think of her. Think of her cold body rotting in the ground… he shook himself out of that thought. It was just too sad and disturbing.

Frank’s parents had been good, God-fearing people who took their kids to church every Sunday. His father served as a deacon in their Baptist congregation for a time. His mother and older sisters had sung in the choir. But church and thoughts of God had never grown on Frank. Once he left for college, he left his parents’ religion behind. Shontae had tried to get him to go a few times, and he’d reluctantly gone a few times early on in their marriage, but as he began to climb the company ladder, he worked on Sundays, partly because he wanted an excuse not to go to church.

Now that she was gone, though, he couldn’t help but generate a faith that maybe there was something out there. He didn’t want to imagine his wife lying there in that cold and dark grave.

His phone buzzed. It was a text from Patton.

“Turn on iPad. Unlock code 5549. Open ‘Cyberlink’ program.”

Frank activated the iPad and found the app. The program window opened with the obligatory “Loading” bar. When the program finished loading, the screen broke into eight panels, each showing images from one of the many surveillance cameras on the premises.

He hit reply on the text and typed, “It’s running. How’d you do that?”

After a moment the reply “Don’t worry about that and watch my ass. ;)” came. Frank smiled and set down the phone.

“Bastard,” he thought out loud, shaking his head. He picked up the iPad and scanned all eight panels. For now, Patton was home free.

Luckily for Patton, the man he’d knocked unconscious was tasked to man the surveillance room. Patton half expected some flunky rent-a-cop to be sitting in here asleep, his feet up on the desk. Instead, he found the room empty. He sat at the desk He activated the computer and scanned files. Under the “Archive” file folder, he found an icon with the date of his wife’s appearance under it. He double-clicked it and waited for it to open. Luckily for him, the system was digital and it stored files hour by hour. He clicked through the cameras and found the one he thought was closest to Jennifer’s office and clicked “Play.”

He watched then fast-forwarded frame by frame. After a few moments he saw a glimpse of her and his heart seemed to skip a beat. In one frame she was looking up, not right at the camera, but to where he could clearly see her face. Tears stung at his eyes and his breaths began to get shallower. He wiped at his eyes and tried to regain his focus. Skimming through the hour logs, he clicked on 3 P.M. and clicked “Play”. Forwarding through it again, he saw her walk in and out of her office a few times. Not satisfied that this was the correct file, he clicked on the 4 P.M. time file. Just past halfway through the video, he saw her walk into her office and then walk back out with her attaché case and her purse. It hadn’t been time for her to sign out and go home so he was confused that she was carrying all of her things.

Patton browsed through more files. He checked his watch. It was almost 2 A.M. He texted Frank to get an update on what was going on outside.

Frank was nearly asleep when he felt his phone vibrate. It was another text from Patton.

“How are we looking?”

Frank hit “Reply” and texted “Fine. All clear.”

Awake now, Frank lifted the iPad onto his lap and started to scan it again. After a half hour he began to nod off again. He was beginning to feel like his role in all of this was pointless. Suddenly, he heard an engine roar and then saw the blur of a large, dark vehicle pass by on his left. The Chevrolet SUV, possibly the one that they’d seen earlier at Patton’s house, was now turning left. It made the turn and then zoomed down the street. Frank turned back to the iPad and watched as the vehicle came into one of the panels. He double tapped it and it zoomed in. Four men, who all looked to be armed, were jumping out of the SUV and running towards the front of the building.

Frank fumbled with his phone and then finally was able to text “Trouble! Four armed men coming through front.”

CHAPTER 27

It had been a long and frustrating and fruitless night. Somehow Larsen and Frank Norton hid from Asher’s people for nearly thirty-six hours. They were nowhere to be found. Larsen must have been tipped off that they were looking for him. Otherwise, how the hell would he have been able to evade them for this long?

Brian White, usually a calm and able leader, was about to blow his lid with frustration. He and his small team had been out on the prowl until about midnight, but he’d given up and sent them packing. All of the roads out of town were being watched so it wasn’t likely they’d try to escape through the mountains—not without Larsen’s wife, anyway.

Then around one in the morning they got a call—someone had broken into City Hall. When the call was relayed to White, he jumped out of bed and sent a mass text to his team. Less than ten minutes later they were assembled and were speeding towards City Hall. While en route, White assembled another team to back them up. He didn’t think they would need more than his four-man team to take the plastics manufacturer-turned farmer down, but, you can never be too careful. Anton, White’s most experience man, was riding behind the driver. The former Marine had kicked down many doors during his military service and he advised his boss that they should go in fast and hard.

“Shoot first and ask questions later,” the grim-faced former Marine said.

The security chief nodded approvingly. Now, as they were within seconds of the city building, the butterflies were surging in his gut.

His phone was ringing.

“What now!” he said, rolling his eyes. It was Governor Asher. White figured he’d been called and informed of the break in. He was probably in bed with some skank. Now all the sudden he wanted to feel like he was part of the action.

“Yeah,” he said, not trying to hide his annoyance at the intrusion.

“White?”

“Yes?”

He could hear the Governor clearing the sleep out of his throat. “Is it Larsen?” Asher asked.

White wanted to respond with something sarcastic, but he kept his cool. “Yes. I can’t imagine it being anyone else.”

“How many men do you have going in?”

The security chief rolled his eyes again and thought, ‘why the hell doesn’t this guy just go back to his little whore and let me do my job?’ Instead he said, “Two teams. Eight men in all.”

“Good. Let me know if you need anything,” the Governor said with his usual false bravado. Asher hung up before White could respond.

White looked back at Anton who gave him a knowing grimace. The two had been having an ongoing “bitch session” about their boss. The SUV came to a halt. White took a deep breath, unbuckled his seatbelt, and charged out of the vehicle.

Patton heard his phone jingle and he checked it. When he read the text message from Frank he spun in the chair and bolted to the door. Just past the unconscious security guard’s head was an emergency exit door. The team sent for Patton didn’t make their presence a secret. He could hear them open the glass doors and charge into the lobby. He heard one of them yell, “Spread out! You upstairs! You downstairs! You right! Me left!” The voice sounded like it had military command. Maybe this was going to get hairier than he’d bargained for.

From his vantage point, in a side hall, perpendicular to the main hallway leading to the security office, Patton could see the edges of a military tactical light flickering along the walls and heading his way. His captured radio crackled.

“Anton, got a break-in in the security office!” came the voice, both over the radio and echoing down the hallway.

Patton knew he had to make his move now or he would be trapped in a corner against four men with rifles when all he had was a handgun. A tall figure came into view and he pounced. Instead of delivering a punch, Patton decided he needed to use more force. As the person approached, he’d retrieved his hammer and pry tool. Luckily, the man reached the door with his back slightly turned towards Patton. Patton sprung from his crouch and delivered a wicked, cracking blow to the figure’s head. His prey was now unconscious and unable put up a fight. Now, however, Patton had to carry nearly two hundred pounds of dead weight.

He frantically pulled out his cell phone and speed dialed Frank. After three rings Frank finally answered.

“Need you out front! Hostage in tow!”

Frank, who’d been half asleep when the call came in, was only able to give an awkward acknowledgement. He tossed the phone and the iPad and jumped over to the driver’s seat. He cranked the engine, and with screeching tires, he pulled away from the curb. He rounded the first corner too fast and hit the curb on the passenger side. He blew out a nervous breath of air and tried to focus. As he approached the front of City Hall, he could see Patton struggling under a body, carrying it towards the curb as fast as he could.

With a screeching halt, Frank pulled to the curb and almost forgot to put the transmission in park. He hopped out and ran around the truck to help his friend. Together, the two of them were able to heave the unconscious man into the truck’s bed. Instinctively, Patton ran to the driver’s side and Frank ran to the passenger’s side. Patton burned rubber and he drove away from the city building.

After receiving his boss’s frantic call over the radio, Anton Brown raced towards the security office on the main floor. He’d barked out the orders earlier, sending one upstairs, one downstairs, and his boss, Brian White to the right, towards the security office. In the next few seconds, Anton had cleared the lobby and made his way to a side door that was protected by an electronic lock.

That door did not lead downstairs, so he’d made his way upstairs to the second floor. Having cleared his sector, he was on his way to the third floor when the call had come over the radio. He was now nearly two floors above, and almost entirely across the building from where his boss needed him to be. Ever loyal, Anton double-timed down the first flight of stairs. On the second flight down he took a bad step and badly twisted his ankle. Using the butt of his M4 rifle for support, he stayed on his feet, but when he tried to continue the chase, a shot of pain surged from his ankle, up his leg, and he almost collapsed again.

“Joe! Randy! Answer that call!”

“Okay!” came one voice, then another “Okay!” from the other. He rolled his eyes at the lack of proper radio etiquette and pushed through the door leading through the lobby.

As he approached the short set of stairs leading up to the security office, two things happened simultaneously. The loud, blaring emergency alarm went off and he heard screeching tires in the front of the building. The first was caused by someone opening an emergency door exit, most likely the one by the security office. Anton figured the truck stopping in front was related to the alarm. Knowing that he wasn’t going to be able deal with his boss’s radio call, he changed direction and headed for the front door. He burst through the door, half using his rifle for a crutch, and made his way out onto the front lawn. He saw two men jumping into a truck and speeding away.

His next action, as he would later play back in his mind, was totally instinctual and reflexive. He lifted his rifle into position, leveled it, and sighted it on the cab of the truck. He took a deep breath and held it. The truck was now about a hundred and fifty yards away. Adjusting for a bullet’s rise and drop, he aimed a little low and pulled the trigger.

Patton was about to make a hard left-hand turn when he felt Frank’s body slump forward. He wouldn’t realize it until later—when he was cleaning himself up—that he’d been splattered with his best friend’s blood and brain matter. Patton made the sharp turn, the tires howling as he did so. The movement forced Frank’s slack body into the passenger door. Luckily Frank had closed the door tightly— otherwise, he might have fallen out of the truck.

When Patton had gotten sufficiently far away from City Hall, he glanced over at Frank. He white-knuckled the steering wheel and ground his teeth. They’d done it again. They’d killed his best friend. No emergency combat medic skills were needed here. Patton had been in enough combat to know when a comrade was down for good. It would be risky, knowing he would have police on his tail, but Patton pulled the truck over to the side of the road. He pushed Frank’s body, the front of which now covered in blood, into a sitting position and fastened his seatbelt around him. He did so for safety reasons, and, out of respect, he didn’t want his buddy’s body flopping around the cab.

Pulling back onto the road, Patton refocused himself on the task at hand. He looked to the back of the truck to see how his unconscious passenger was doing. Not seeing any movement, he smashed the accelerator and sped towards a place that only he knew about. Police would be descending on his home, Jennifer’s home, or anywhere else they would anticipate him going. He needed to be secluded and he needed time to get some information out of his new “friend.”

Even before waking, Brian White had an eerie feeling that something wasn’t right. Although he wouldn’t feel the full effects of the blow to his head until he was fully conscious, there was already a dull throbbing behind his eyes. As his mind began to wake, the pain sharpened and he swore he could feel little cracks in his skull.

But maybe that was a little melodramatic, he thought. His head was killing him, but he had to ignore that and concentrate. He opened his eyes slowly and a wave of nausea overcame him. He tried to turn to his right but was unable. Instead, he spewed a stream of vomit onto his legs and all over his front. The sensation of liquid hitting skin made him aware that he had no shirt or shoes or socks on. It was strange, but after vomiting, he felt much better. He tried to open his eyes again and this time he was able to see that he was in a mostly dark room that was completely unfamiliar to him.

‘God, where am I?’ he thought, not in prayer, but blashphemy.

“Brian White?” came a soft voice, completely out of place in these strange surroundings.

He tried to answer but his lips were nearly fused to his gums and teeth. Whatever had happened to him, it had sucked every last bit of moisture from his mouth. A raspy breath was all he could muster.

“Briiiiaaan,” came the voice again, sing-songy and playful.

He could feel his chin being forced down. At first he panicked, but when he realized what was happening, he didn’t fight it. Whoever it was calling his name was pouring water into his mouth. Gorgeous, wonderful wetness. Most of it dribbled down his chin and neck, but now being able to separate his gums from his lips and teeth and tongue was pure ecstasy.

The bottle was removed and the voice returned.

“Are you Brian White?”

Not wanting to risk another vocal dry fire, Brian nodded as well as he could with his head strapped to the chair behind him.

“You’re the head of security of Blue Creek?”

Another nod.

Finally the owner of the voice revealed himself. At first, White’s brain didn’t register the familiar face. After a few moment, the name came to him.

“Larsen,” he said, rasping.

Patton nodded and smiled.

“Where is she?” Patton Larsen asked calmly.

At first White didn’t know what he meant, but then remembered events from almost two days before. Jennifer Larsen was summoned to the basement of City Hall where he knocked her unconscious and then shot her up with a sedative that would make her… cooperative.

“Who?” White asked with a trace of a sly grin.

Patton Larsen’s smile quickly faded, replaced by a scowl.

“I’m going to give you one more chance to answer. After that, I’m going to reintroduce you to an old friend,” he said, holding his hammer and pry tool in front of his face.

Brian White, who wasn’t easy to scare, almost laughed. Considering his position, however, he knew that wouldn’t be a good idea. Instead, he said nothing.

“Where is she?” Patton said, his voice now increased slightly in its intensity.

No response.

Without another warning, Patton slammed the hammer end of his tool down onto White’s hand. A searing, white-hot pain shot through his nervous system. When the shock of the blow dissipated, he could tell that the bones in his hand were shattered. He shrieked in pain and trembled as much as the restraints would allow him.

“Where is she?” Patton said, raising the hammer again.

Through his trembling and his pain, White was able to mumble the words “She’s dead.”

Patton looked like he’d been slapped in the face. He looked away for a moment, seemingly deep in thought. He turned back to meet his captive’s frightened gaze. “I don’t believe you,” he said, raising the hammer and bringing it down on White’s right hand. He saw white as the pain exploded. He screamed and gritted his teeth.

“Brian, I’m telling you this can go on all night,” Patton said with a leering stare. “I’m in no hurry. Nobody knows where we are and I promise you I know how to keep you alive while giving you more pain than you ever thought possible.”

White was shaking uncontrollably now. If he wasn’t bound he would have rolled on the floor, writhing in pain.

“Brian, don’t make me do this. I want to just take you into town to the hospital. Don’t make me be the bad guy here.”

The city’s top security agent was crying now, and he was ready to give in. Telling Patton that his wife was dead had been a stupid move—probably something David Asher would have done. Through gritted teeth he nodded, as if to say he was ready to cooperate.

“Okay. One more time Brian. Are you with me?” Patton asked, trying to hold White’s wavering gaze. White nodded again.

“Where is she Brian? I’m going to warn you. If you smart off again, if you try to lie, your kneecap is next. I promise you that you don’t want that. You hear me?”

White nodded again and tried to compose himself. Finally, he was able to speak. “We grabbed her at City Hall. We sedated her then I don’t know what happened. When it got dark an ambulance pulled up and I helped put her into it. I don’t know what happened after that, I promise.”

Patton nodded, grateful for the cooperation. He hunched down so that their eyes were level. His voice was softening and White was beginning to feel that maybe this was going to end soon.

“I believe you. So when you said she was dead you were just trying to be a tough guy?”

White nodded, closing his eyes and wishing he could just go home now.

“Did they take her up to the prison?” Patton asked, the pieces beginning to click into place.

White closed his eyes, trying to concentrate. He was sure, but his instinct for loyalty was kicked in as the pain faded.

“I guess so, yeah. I don’t know though. I know if you go up there and try to get her out they’ll catch you. I’m sure Asher has that place swarming with people.”

Patton nodded and said, “Thanks for the advice.” He stood and walked away from the restraint chair. He grabbed something and put it into his front pants pocket and turned to White again.

“One last thing,” Patton said calmly. “Where were you when Mike Wilson was shot?”

The question, totally out of order with the others, hit Brian White like a freight train. He had no chance to make up a story or hide his reaction. The reaction was answer enough for Patton Larsen, who now had a resolved expression.

“That’s what I thought,” Patton said, pulling a small pistol from his pocket. He pointed it between Brian White’s eyes and pulled the trigger.

By dawn the whole Security Service was on alert and actively looking for both their boss and the person who’d most likely abducted him—Patton Larsen. No one dared to call the Governor, but by 7 A.M. he was down at City Hall, trying to get answers about the previous night’s debacle.

“So you saw Patton Larsen and Frank Norton load Brian White into the back of a pickup truck and drive away?” Asher asked the new leader of his security team, former Marine Anton Brown.

Anton looked down at his right foot to bring Asher’s attention to the huge walking cast that was there.

“And?” Asher asked petulantly.

Anton wanted to jump across the desk and knock his ass out, but he wanted this job, especially when it looked like he might become the new Chief of Security.

“I was hauling ass down the stairs to answer Mr. White’s distress call but I twisted my ankle,” Brown said. “However, I saw the truck pulling away and I got a shot off.”

Asher’s eyebrows raised at that. He was impressed. ‘At least someone had the balls to fight back last night,’ he thought.

“Did you hit anything?” Asher asked stupidly.

The former Marine looked proud now, drawing himself into an almost full parade rest.

“Yes Sir,” he said, his chest poking out in pride. “My round entered the rear window and exited the windshield. I don’t know if I hit anyone inside, but I know I didn’t hit the driver because the vehicle continued to drive away.”

Asher was getting weary of the formality, but he knew he would get nothing less from this guy. Asher excused Anton and once he was out of earshot, the governor swore bitterly under his breath and went to his liquor cabinet. It wasn’t yet 9 A.M. but he badly needed a drink, both to fight his hangover from the night before and to calm his frazzled nerves.

Headlights shined through Bao’s window. He carefully approached the window and peeled back the curtain, careful to not be seen. He was probably being overly paranoid, but he knew how David Asher operated. He’d already been his prisoner. Bao moved away from the window and sat on his couch. Bao’s house was nearly dark. He sat and watched, waited, and listened. He realized he was literally wringing his hands. He consciously placed them in his lap, but, within seconds, he was doing it again.

Word of events at City Hall spread through the spy network like a virus. Although the spies’ communication network had been compromised and, no doubt, was under constant scrutiny, Bao and his colleagues had built an informal network. However, the linchpin had been Patton Larsen. He had gathered the spies’ reports and had transmitted them to Michael Varner. With Patton in the wind, however, this line of communication was now broken. Bao had to do something, but what? He was sure that everyone was being watched. Any attempt to contact another Insight spy would lead to his arrest.

Bao moved to the window again. Another car was driving by, but it didn’t stop. There were no dark, suspicious looking cars parked along the opposite curb. He moved to the couch again, and after another hour of sitting and doing nothing, he realized he was being ridiculous. Bao screwed up his courage and walked to his front closet. Already dressed in all black, he put on a black hooded jacket. He pulled the hood over his head and opened his back door. The air was brisk and Bao could see his breath as he exhaled. He jammed his hands into his jacket pockets and headed through his back yard. He walked down a dark alley and tried to drum up a plan.

If he tried to go through the main city gate, especially this time of night, he would surely be caught and arrested. His Subaru would never make it over the rough terrain, or even on the gravel roads that led out of town. He needed a truck, but didn’t know anyone that owned one. He had his delivery truck, of course, but it was too conspicuous. He needed another way. He thought of Lindsay.

She would be angry with him showing up at her house, but Bao knew that his friend and fellow spy hated David Asher as much as anyone. It wouldn’t be easy, but he knew that he could talk her into leaving Blue Creek. What they would do after that… he had no idea. No, he knew what he should do, but getting to Michael Varner’s house in Ogden, Utah without getting caught by Blue Creek Security guards was going to be difficult.

The closer Bao got to Lindsay’s house, the crazier he thought his idea was. What did he have to lose?

Bao made his way to the alleyway behind Lindsay’s house, careful to stay in the shadows. It was past midnight and the streets were empty, but he forced himself to remain vigilant. Bao entered her backyard through a gate and crouched low. The house was mostly dark, but Bao could see the flickering lights from a TV. Lindsay was a night owl like himself.

He took a deep breath and made his way to her back porch. He stalked slowly towards the stairs. Halfway across the grass, a security light suddenly came on. The backyard was basically as bright as day. To add to his failure, a large dog started barking. Bao ducked behind a small shed, but the game was up. Lindsay was at the back door, peering through the glass for her intruder. His cover blown, Bao removed his hood and walked briskly towards the door where Lindsay stood. He could tell that she was rattled.

“What the hell Bao! What are you doing here?”

“Shh!” Bao whispered harshly. Go inside. We need to talk.”

Bao led her into her living room, making sure to shut off every light on the way. He sat her down and explained why he had come.

Ten minutes later they were both on the couch, sitting in an uncomfortable silence. He looked at her, but her gaze was miles away and she was trembling in fear.

“Bao? What are we going to do?”

Bao didn’t want to seem over confident by responding too quickly, but he had concocted a plan while walking to her house.

“We have to get out of here. We have to tell Mr. Varner what’s going on.”

She finally looked at him, her eyes wide with terror.

“Bao, if we try to leave they’ll catch us. They know our cars.”

Bao nodded. This was the hardest part of the plan. They had to find a vehicle that wasn’t linked to either of them—preferably a truck. He described his plan. Fifteen minutes later they were on their way to Patton Larsen’s office building west of town. Bao had been given a key to the offices. Inside of the warehouse was a fleet of trucks. Bao knew where the keys were because he serviced a bank of vending machines that were right by the key box.

Ten minutes later they were in Lindsay’s car. He drove slowly, guided only by her daytime running lights. He knew the roads better than she did, and despite not having full headlights, they made decent time. Bao parked her car behind the warehouse, between a large dumpster and a loading dock. They exited the car and quickly made their way to a rear service door. Bao worked his key and unlocked the door. They both stepped in and closed the door behind them. He peered through the window, making sure no one had followed them. Bao found the key box and removed a random truck key. He hit the unlock button. A truck parked three bays down lit up.

“Let’s go!” Bao said, pushing Lindsay towards the truck.

She was annoyed with him but said nothing.

Bao drove up to the electric bay doors. He searched the truck and finally found the opener. Minutes later they were back on the highway, making their way towards town. The adrenaline of the moment was starting to fade. They looked at each other in wonder and simultaneously burst into laughter. They drove slowly along the highway, again guided only by the daytime running lights. They were nearly halfway to their turnoff when Bao glimpsed something in the rearview mirror.

“It’s headlights Bao!”

“I know!” Bao said, looking back nervously.

“What are we going to do?”

Bao let off the gas pedal and concentrated on the road ahead. The road was coming at any moment. He didn’t want to make the turn too hard and fast.

He looked at the rearview mirror again. The headlights weren’t visible but he could see their glow above a rise. They appeared again. Whoever it was appeared to be gaining speed.

Lindsay’s hand shot out and clenched down on Bao’s arm. He shook it away.

“Stop that! I’m trying to drive!”

The road curved to the left and then straightened out. Bao could see the reflectors that marked the road. Whoever it was behind him was too far back to see their turn. He just couldn’t afford to use the brake to slow down. Doing so would give their location away.

They reached the turn and Bao yanked the wheel to the right. The tires nearly gave out on the gravel. The back tires fishtailed slightly, but he was able straighten out. He pulled his foot off the accelerator and the truck slowed up the slight rise. Bao and Lindsay looked back to the highway and watched a nondescript sedan zoom by. They looked at one another and exhaled.

Bao accelerated again and crested a rise. They descended again and Bao finally used the truck’s brakes and brought them to a stop.

“Whoa,” Lindsay said, exhaling loudly.

They were now less than three miles from the city limits. There were posts that marked the boundary, but no wire yet, in this particular part of the border. They should be able to get through without a problem. Bao began driving again, still creeping along very slowly and with minimal light.

Just over ten minutes later, Bao could see the boundary posts reflecting the truck’s dim lights. He figured they were less than a hundred yards away from freedom. There were still probably some patrols between Blue Creek and the Interstate 84, but Bao felt the worst was behind them.

“Thank God!” Lindsay exclaimed, relieved. “I can’t believe we—”

They both lurched as one of the truck’s tires deflated. Bao then saw a flash and heard a pop. The other front tire went flat. Another flash and a neat hole appeared in the windshield.

“Bao!”

Another flash and pop and a spray of engine oil hit the windshield, obscuring Bao’s view. He had no choice but to bring the truck to a stop. He couldn’t see a thing. Once they were stopped, headlights from several vehicles filled the cab of the truck. Bao could see Lindsay’s frightened face. He felt himself trembling. There was a knock at Bao’s window and he rolled it down hesitantly. Although a bright flashlight was shining in his eyes, he could tell these were Blue Creek Security personnel.

“Mr. Hahn? Please step out of the vehicle.”

Bao looked at Lindsay, his hands raised.

“Sorry Lindsay. I’m so sorry.”

CHAPTER 28

Patton was cold. His muscles were so sore he felt like someone had injected his insides with concrete. The pack on his back was supposed to weigh eighty pounds, but with all the rain that had fallen in the last 24 hours, it probably weighed over a hundred pounds. Worst were his legs and feet. He’d sprained both ankles and was worried that he might have stress fractures in his legs. It was the most miserable he’d ever felt.

He would allow himself to stop, but not sit. If he sat he would probably never get up again. Instead, Patton did what his old platoon sergeants in the Rangers had taught him—lean back against a tree. It wasn’t as good as sitting, but it took most the weight off your shoulders and legs. Patton spotted two trees whose trunks were about a foot apart and leaned in the same direction. He walked over to the trees and turned around. He leaned slowly until his pack was resting on the tree trunks. The relief was instantaneous. He moaned audibly.

Patton woke with a start. Cold raindrops splashed on his cheeks, nose, and forehead. He pulled his baseball cap away from his eyes and saw that it was full dark now. He looked at his watch.

“Dammit!”

A surge of adrenaline hit Patton and he stood quickly. He pulled a clump of map pages from his cargo pocket and clicked on the flashlight that was clipped to his chest. Before he stopped to rest, Patton figured he was over four kilometers from his destination. With his wasted time, he would have to double his previous pace. When Patton started walking again, however, he felt strangely vigorous. There wasn’t as much pain in his legs and back. He set off at a fast clip and checked his watch again. In spite of him losing over four hours, he was more confident now that he was going to reach his destination on time.

He saw a flash of lightning in his peripheral vision. Thunder cracked and rumbled across the sky. The light sprinkling turned into a downpour. A cold breeze whipped into Patton’s face. He pulled his cap down further over his eyes and moved forward up the dirt and gravel trail.

Two hours later, Patton crested the rise that had loomed above him for hours and for many miles. A large valley, faintly lit by moonlight, stretched out before him. According to his maps and his constant calculations, Patton was right on pace to reach his final point. It would be tight, but figured he had ten to fifteen minutes to play with. He was either going to make it or he wasn’t, but he would succeed or fail on his feet. He pulled a package of M&Ms from his pocket and downed it in two mouthfuls.

Nearly two hours later, Patton rounded a curve in the trail. To the right was a large clump of trees. He stopped and removed his maps again. He checked his compass and then surveyed his surroundings. This was it, but he didn’t see what he was supposed to see. He checked his map and compass again.

“This is it, I swear,” he thought out loud.

Patton stopped. He thought he’d heard something. He stood there motionless and waited. There it was again. Human voices. It seemed to be coming from inside the clump of trees. Patton left the trail for the first time in hours. He pushed limbs away from his face as he made his way through the trees. He broke through a small stand of trees and then he saw it. There was an Army Humvee surrounded by soldiers. This was it. He’d made it.

Patton approached the Humvee. A soldier with a clipboard stood there, looking impatient.

“Larsen,” Patton said to the soldier.

The sergeant looked at him blankly and shifted a toothpick from the left side of his mouth to the right.

“About time Captain Larsen. What happened, Sir? You fall asleep?”

Patton blushed and was glad that it was still dark so the seasoned sergeant couldn’t see his face.

“Go sit over there,” the sergeant first class said blandly. “A truck will be here to pick you up at dawn, which is about two hours away. We have some soup over there for you. You’re done so take a load off.”

Patton nodded, too exhausted to reply with words. He walked over to where a group of soldiers was laying around, eating soup from canteen cups. There wasn’t much talking going on. Patton figured they were all as tired as he was. He heard his name but was too tired to turn around.

“Captain Larsen,” came a familiar voice. It was the Colonel he’d seen earlier that morning… or was it yesterday?

“Yes Sir?”

The Colonel came into his view and stood, proudly erect—the same stance that most seasoned soldiers had.

“I was a little worried you weren’t going to make it. You slept for over four hours.”

Patton looked at the Colonel with wonder and then embarrassment.

“You saw me?”

“Son, you made it, but if you ever tried to pull that in the field you’d be dead.”

Patton turned away in shame and nodded. He gathered himself again and turned to the Colonel again.

“I know, Sir, but I did make it.”

The Colonel smiled and clapped Patton on the shoulder.

“I know son. And welcome to Delta Force.”

Patton snapped awake. He looked around him and saw no one. No colonel, no Humvee, no sleeping soldiers. He sat up and took in his surroundings. At first he was confused but it finally sunk in. He was in the Rocky Mountains, not the Appalachians. He was no longer a Delta Force operator. His wife and children were dead. His second wife was being held prisoner by a sociopath. He’d just buried his best friend, whose brains had been blown out all over inside of Patton’s truck.

The cold air surged through him and he shivered violently. October was no time to be in the Rocky Mountains, especially when it was raining, and especially when you don’t have proper gear. Patton stood and rubbed his shoulders. He was glad to find that he’d found a concealed area before falling asleep. The trees had done nothing to protect him from the rain, however. He was freezing.

He glanced down to a spot a hundred feet or so below him and to the south. It was rocky there, but one particular mound stood out from the rest. It was the spot where he’d buried Frank. It shamed him to leave him there—in the cold, hard, rocky ground. He didn’t see what other choice he had, though. No doubt David Asher would have people on his tail, if he didn’t already. He allowed him one last glance and then forced himself to move on. He would return someday and he would give his friend a proper burial, next to his wife. Now, though, he had things to do.

Patton had some important decisions to make. Most important was rescuing his wife, of course. He figured that he wasn’t far from the prison, but his journey would be over rough, rocky terrain. He wouldn’t have access to a vehicle. It was moot because driving a vehicle would get him caught for sure. He would have people hunting him today, and knowing David Asher, they had probably been given orders to kill on sight.

The former soldier took a quick inventory of his possessions. He had his rifle and his handgun with plenty of ammunition. He also had some very specialized weapons he’d built in his shop. Patton pulled out one of his pistols made from composite and grimaced. He thought this would be a new beginning. Now he’d been thrust into his past and former profession.

Patton built a small fire. He would need a warm breakfast and coffee if he was going to do anything that day. Once the fire was going, he poured water into a canteen cup and placed it in the coals. He rummaged through his pack and found an MRE—Meal Ready to Eat. He removed the coffee and dumped the grounds into the hot water. MRE coffee was notoriously high in caffeine. He nursed the drink, feeling its effects, and started to warm the entree in the plastic MRE oven. When the meal was warm Patton ate it slowly and thought about his next move.

He had access to his gear, but he could only carry so much. He had a two-man tent, some cold weather gear, and a Gore-Tex-lined sleeping bag. Most important, he had his Camelback, his survival straw, and three canteens.

A sudden sense of loneliness poured over him and he almost began to weep. It took every bit of his self-control to remain calm. Eventually his focus returned and he was able to overcome the emotions. Only one thing mattered—that was finding and rescuing his wife. If he was able to free others as he went along, that would be fine, but his mind was focused on that one task.

It was late morning and the sky was more overcast. It looked like it might rain for a while, and autumn rain is usually accompanied by wind and cool air. This would be to his advantage because he was accustomed to operating in adverse weather, whereas Asher’s poorly trained people would be reluctant to get out into the elements. If Asher wanted to win this war, he was going to have to get better people.

In the early afternoon, Patton geared up and climbed higher up into the mountains. This would provide him a better view of what was happening down below him. He had a powerful pair of binoculars and he was sure that he would be able to spot a convoy of vehicles headed his way. The afternoon dragged on and still there was no sign of a search party. Perhaps they were looking somewhere else, Patton thought, or maybe they thought he’d run away.

Patton decided that he would be safe for one more night, so he decided to put his tent up and build a fire. For what he was about to do, he needed to be well rested and well fed. There was a good possibility that he would be on the run from Asher’s people for many days. As a precaution he set an alarm for daybreak, sure that no one would be searching for him earlier than that.

The next morning broke clear and cold. Patton woke feeling rested and ready to strike out on his mission to find his wife. He steeled himself for a rough hike. Although he’d been in rougher terrain in much worse weather, he hadn’t done so for years. The thought that he’d let his training slip depressed him.

Patton climbed up higher and surveyed the activity going on down below him. There was light traffic on the highway that headed south along the rim of the valley, but he couldn’t see any police vehicles. Patton packed up his gear and set out towards the prison.

The weather turned warm around noon and he decided to stop for lunch. He’d probably only made a half-mile of progress in that time, but caution was more important than distance at that point. He couldn’t afford to twist an ankle or get caught out in the open. Speed definitely was not his friend.

After finishing his MRE, Patton stowed his wrappers and re-donned his pack. It seemed heavier now that he’d stopped, but once he got moving again, the hike over the loose, rocky ground became easier. Just as he was about to move out, Patton heard something mechanical. He stopped and craned his neck towards the sound. The sound went away but returned a few seconds later. He stopped and listened again. It was the deep rumbling sound of a large engine, definitely a large pickup truck or SUV.

Patton instinctively crouched down while simultaneously pulling the large pack off of his back. He brought his rifle to the ready—something that was more a reflex action than a necessity. He didn’t want to kill anybody. In fact, much of his ammunition was non-lethal, made out of the composite material he’d invented while he was in the Army. While the bullets didn’t kill, they definitely didn’t tickle.

While lying on the hard, rocky ground, Patton steadied his breathing, trying to concentrate on the sounds around him. There was a strong gust of wind from his left, but through it, he could still hear the truck’s engine. He guessed that it was down below him to his left, although sound in this terrain often did strange things.

It was mid-afternoon now and the sun was creeping towards the west. There were still a few hours of daylight left, so Patton had to decide what he was going to do. With the possibility of a search party closing in, he couldn’t just trek across these hills as if he were alone—he had to wait these people out. If they decided to build some sort of camp, Patton would have to confront them at some point.

The daylight hours passed without incident. Luckily for Patton, he was able to find a large outcropping of rock to hide in. He wouldn’t call it a cave, but it did give him good cover and concealment and protection from the sun. He made a temporary camp under the rock and ate and drank a canteen full of water. He decided that he would set out at dusk and reconnoiter the area down below him. He needed to be sure that the Blue Creek security people, or police, or whoever they were, were gone so he could move on towards the prison.

When the sun dipped down below the horizon, Patton covered his face with camouflage paint, grabbed his rifle, a canteen, and headed out. The rocky ground was loose with weeds and dry prairie grass. The terrain made it difficult to stay quiet, so Patton moved slowly, often crawling on his hands and knees when the ground was too steep. He made it to the edge of the hill, to the point where he could look down below him. Just as he’d expected, the small search party was setting up a camp about two hundred yards below him and to his right. They’d probably picked the spot because it was as far as their truck could go.

‘Lazy,’ he thought, ‘and stupid.’ Patton had been in this situation many times, both as the hunter and as the prey. ‘The best prey is the creature that thought it was the hunter,’ Patton thought. He was outmanned, yes, but he had the training and the will to fight that these people probably did not. They were Asher’s dupes, Patton realized, and that was why he didn’t want to harm these people. One man—just one evil man—was responsible for all of the misery. If Patton could neutralize him, he knew that this little war could end.

It was fully dark now and Patton finally had a plan. He watched the men set up camp, including tents, a generator, and cots and then made his way back up to his temporary camp. He counted nine people, possibly ten, with two large pickups. Many in the party were carrying rifles, he saw, no doubt loaded with lethal ammunition. Patton would carry some regular ammo with him just in case, but both his M4 and his pistol were loaded with his non-lethal bullets. Also with him were his non-lethal concussion grenades and a special toy he’d built when things started going haywire in Blue Creek.

Things had quieted down at the camp and Patton quietly made his way towards it. The idiots had built a fire, he could see. He shook his head and grinned. It was going to be too easy. David Asher was going to regret sending these amateurs into the fray. Moving like a panther now, Patton was only fifty yards from the camp. He crouched and pulled a smaller pack off of his back and set it down at his knees. He removed two round devices, about the size of baseballs, and shoved them into his cargo pocket. He was ready.

Armed now with his rifle and two homemade grenades, Patton circled to the left, making sure to stay the same distance away from the camp. There were two tents, likely with five people asleep in each tent. Two men were on guard now, but neither of them seemed to be excited about their duty. One looked to be half asleep, the other was smoking and looked to be reading. Patton shook his head again, in disgust this time. Both in his time as a Ranger and a member of Delta, Patton and his comrades always took guard duty very seriously. In fact, it was one of the most basic, vital aspects of being a soldier.

Patton was now completely out of the view of the guard force and he began to close the distance with the tent. He fished the two grenades out and examined them in the dull glow of the fire. They were perfectly round, a dull brownish-yellow color, with a button instead of a pin and lever. When activated, the grenade would explode like any other, but with the composite material instead of metal as the casing, the blast wouldn’t be deadly. Instead, anyone within the blast radius would be knocked out and possibly receive some cuts and bruises.

And that’s the way Patton wanted it to be. He was an enemy to these people, but he didn’t consider them his enemies. The more that he could incapacitate Asher’s people without killing them, the less likely they would be to hunt him. More importantly, he didn’t want to give the government any fodder for propaganda against him.

Patton approached the first tent, depressing the button on one of the grenades while he moved. He reached the flap of the tent and tossed the grenade as close to the middle of it as he could. Before it went off, he had already depressed the button on the second grenade. After tossing the second grenade, Patton sprinted away. Before he could reach the spot he’d approached from, he heard and felt one explosion and then another. He turned back to watch the guards’ reactions to the detonations. The one closest to the tents was knocked off his feet, almost landing in the fire. The other guard brought his rifle to the ready and pointed it towards the tents. Patton raised his own rifle, sighted in the man’s back, and pulled the trigger. His target arched in pain and fell to the ground, writhing around, trying to catch his breath.

With everyone seemingly incapacitated, Patton approached the camp, rifle at the ready, prepared to shoot at anything that moved. When he was within twenty yards, a man stumbled out, holding his face in his hands, bleeding from what must have been a gash.

Patton increased his pace and yelled, “Get down! Get down now!”

The man was too stunned by the blast to follow Patton’s orders, so he just staggered out towards the fire. When Patton reached him he slammed the butt of his rifle into the man’s head, knocking him out cold. He looked up and surveyed the rest of the damage. He could hear moans and groans from inside both tents, but no one else emerged. Patton waited. When no one else exited the tents, he grimaced at the carnage, angry at what David Asher had forced him to do. Patton had won this little skirmish, taking down ten men with no fatalities. Of that last fact he was very glad, but he was sure he was going to have to deal death at some point.

By dawn, Patton had all but two of the search team flex-cuffed and in the two vehicles. He left the hands and legs of two of the search team so that they could drive the rest of the men back into town. All had been injured in some way—the man he’d shot in the back definitely had a broken rib or two. Three or four of the others had concussions, and everyone had a laceration of some sort.

Before sending the vehicles away, Patton warned the men that he wouldn’t use his toys next time they came after him—instead, he would kill them. The tougher ones scoffed at him, but he could tell his message made a few of the others nervous. He was sure that many would quit their new line of work rather than try to hunt down a man that was outmanned ten-to-one and had still beaten them.

Patton made his point by reloading his rifle with lethal bullets. He kept his rifle pointed at the vehicles until they were out of sight. Once gone, Patton made his way back to his temporary camp underneath the outcropping of rock. Every ten steps or so, Patton turned back to make sure the search party hadn’t doubled back. Satisfied that they were on their way back to town, Patton double-timed it to his camp to rest up.

The old Delta Force warrior’s training and instincts were returning now. His senses were at their fullest height. By dusk, Patton was convinced there would be no second search party—at least that day. Asher was probably trying to put together a new team, and most likely having a difficult time doing so.

When full dark shrouded the valley, Patton geared up and again made his way towards the prison complex, which was north from his current position. He suddenly wished he had his night vision goggles because the ground ahead of him was going to be very tough. Instead, he let his eyes adjust to the dark. There was enough moon and starlight to guide his way.

By midnight, after trudging slowly over the terrain, Patton was halfway to his destination. He silently wished that he had the blueprints for the prison, but they had never been posted anywhere online. He was going to have to rely on his training and experience to come up with a plan for his incursion into the prison. That meant that he was going to have to spend a day scouting out the prison and its surroundings. This, in turn, meant that he was going to risk the chance at being spotted. He would have to get to the prison before dawn and find a good hiding spot.

Patton hefted and readjusted the pack on his shoulders. He groaned with pain and discomfort. He put his head down and started making his way to the place where his wife was being held hostage.

“And then he just let you go?” the woman asked incredulously, dabbing at the gash on her husband’s forehead.

He nodded, shuddering at the memory of the rifle being pointed at him. The man wielding the weapon was obviously Patton Larsen. Larsen had the chance to kill him, but for some reason, he didn’t pull the trigger. Why?

When Larsen fled the city, his face had been plastered everywhere. Hatterly, who was brand new to the Blue Creek City Security Service, had been selected to go out with the first search party. When he applied for the job, which had been one of very few available in town, he thought that he would drive around in a patrol car, writing tickets, stuff like that. Now though, he realized that he was part of David Asher’s secret police. After the incident the previous night, he thought he might be better off unemployed.

“Yeah,” Hatterly said, a sullen look on his face, “He cuffed us up and told Mike and Randy to help us into the trucks. He had us dead to rights but just let us go.”

Hatterly’s wife shook her head. Not just at the fact that her husband had been as close to death as he’d ever been, but because Patton Larsen—supposedly a monster—had just let him go.

“We’ve got to get this story out there,” she said, still dabbing at her husband’s head with a washcloth. “People need to know what’s going on.”

The man looked at his wife, shocked at her naiveté.

“Honey,” he said, a pleading look on his face, “don’t you know what’s going on here?”

Her eyes opened wide with surprise at the expression on his face. “What do you mean?”

He looked around the room conspiratorially and then leaned in close to her. “Baby, we’re practically living in a police state and I’m part of it. David Asher has taken control of everything and everyone in this town. No one can leave. People that are speaking out against him are being arrested. If you spread what happened last night around town, you’re going to be arrested.”

She turned away from him, tears stinging at her eyes. She grabbed his forearm, looking for any strength that he could give to her. Instead, when she looked in his eyes, she saw nothing but fear—fear in the eyes of the man who’d she’d always considered to be so strong. Despite the danger, Ashley Hatterly felt that news of what happened to her husband and nine other husbands, had to get out. People in Blue Creek needed to know that their true enemy wasn’t Patton Larsen, it was the man who professed to be their leader.

Patton must have underestimated his own marching speed because he reached the prison complex an hour earlier than his projections. The complex was built in the middle of the bowl-shaped depression in the hillside. Much of the geographical feature was natural, but to build the prison as large as was needed, more ground was excavated.

Patton was at the southern edge of the bowl now, looking down into the depression with his binoculars. He had a large, dry bush on his left and a large boulder behind him to keep him hidden from prying eyes. From this vantage point he could see the entire rear of the complex and what looked to be a temporary structure in the middle of a large field. It was roughly the size of a soccer pitch, but more square than rectangular.

As the day progressed, Patton became familiar with the guards’ patrol patterns and he scouted out the security features. In many places, the security was tight, with lights, finished fencing, and good sightlines between what had to be a guard post at the rear of the main structure and the temporary structure in the middle of the field. The more he looked, however, the more flaws he found. The field was uneven, which would allow for him to approach the structure from many angles. Secondly, the guard force was obviously poorly trained. There were no dogs, and when darkness began to fall, Patton noticed that much of the lighting system had not been completed yet. He hunkered down and slept for a few hours, waiting for full dark.

Around midnight a storm blew in, bringing with it a light and cold rain. It was uncomfortable, but bad weather made people complacent. While Patton would rather be at the beach, taking in the warm sun and water, he was comfortable in these conditions. He would strike at four in the morning, when the guard shift was about to reach its most tired phase. Also, it would give him enough dark to get down into the building, try to find his wife, and then get back out.

David Asher stared at the ceiling of his new bedroom, in the new mansion the people of Blue Creek had built for him. The woman beside him was snoring. He grimaced and turned away from her to his side. It was funny how the most gorgeous women in the world often had some of the worst private habits, especially when they were comfortable with someone.

There were so many things on his mind he couldn’t concentrate on anything. Rumors of the failed search party spread like wildfire through town. The rumor was that Patton Larsen had taken on ten men and beaten them. Not only that, he’d done it in a way where no one was seriously harmed—all sent home to Blue Creek to tell everyone just how merciful the fugitive was. Asher scoffed at that. He knew that Larsen had to be behind the disappearance of both Travis and Brian, the two men that he’d desperately needed to keep things running after taking out his rivals Charlie and Anna. Neither of them were around when he needed them most.

Supposedly the most powerful man in town, David Asher felt impotent—incapable of handling his business. No doubt he was becoming a laughing stock, and with these new rumors about Patton Larsen, he was beginning to feel it slip away from him. He cursed Anna under his breath. Why did she have to betray him? Why did she have to plot to remove him from power when his use was gone? Didn’t they have a good thing going?

It must have been the old man that had poisoned her against him. Part of him knew, however, that Anna probably planned to remove him the entire time. She’d been so good at using her body to get what she wanted. No matter, though. She was gone for good. He just wished he had her around for some advice right now because he really needed it.

The two guards were supposed to circle the field that surrounded the temporary structure and maintain the same distance between them at all times. These two, however, must have gotten bored and decided to walk together so they could talk and entertain themselves through the last couple hours of their shift. They passed in front of Patton, headed east. They then turned north for a football field’s length. When they made their turn, Patton made his move. He was carrying both his rifle and his pistol with both lethal and non-lethal ammunition. He really didn’t want to kill anybody, but if faced with the choice between his own life and theirs, he would choose his own.

He struggled to remain quiet while sliding down the hill. The rocks were slick now, and tended to roll when Patton contacted them with his boots. When he reached the bottom, Patton stopped to make sure the guards were still moving away from him. They were still facing away so he sprinted to the structure. The distance was about fifty yards, but he made it quickly. He reached the back of the building and found cover. He checked the guards’ position again. He could see them standing on the far side of the field. At least one of them was smoking.

The door had a simple padlock, which he knew he could defeat in only a few seconds. Patton removed a small block of homemade plastique and mashed it into where the shackle met the body. He inserted a tiny blasting cap, which was attached to a receiver. Patton turned away and activated the detonator. There was a small crack. When he turned back to the door, he found the lock on the ground in several pieces. Before opening the door and entering the structure, Patton looked again to see where the guards were. They were out of sight. He quickly entered the door and closed it behind him.

The door led to a small office, probably used by the guards and nurses. He unlocked the door leading out of the office and cautiously walked through it. He had his pistol held high, loaded with his non-lethal ammunition. He entered a long hallway that had heavy-duty doors on both sides. Above the door to his left hung a sign that read “Men.” A similar sign reading “Women” was to his right. He made his way towards the Women’s side and tried the knob. It was unlocked. He crouched low and walked in as quietly as he could.

There were seven or eight bunk beds on either side. Not all of the beds were occupied—not yet, anyway. Patton sneered in disgust. With every tyrannical government come arbitrary arrests, and crackdowns on what are usually considered natural rights. Patton figured this prison would be full to overflowing with prisoners in a few months. Instead of letting that happen, he was going to empty it.

On the front of each bed was a page holder that displayed the prisoner’s name. Patton made his way up the right side, looking at the names. None said Jennifer or J. Larsen or anything like that. He went the other way, searching the names, but still no luck. As he looked at the name at the last bunk, he hung his head. The disappointment hit him like a kick to the gut. It took him a few moments to collect himself and decide what he should do next. Patton made his way to the woman in the closest bed. She was a blonde who looked to be in her mid-twenties. He tapped her lightly on the shoulder. She awoke with a gasp. Patton covered her screams with his gloved hand. He whispered in her ear, trying to reassure her that he wouldn’t harm her. After what seemed like an eternity, she finally calmed herself.

“Jennifer Larsen. Where is she?”

Her eyes were still wide with shock. She was still breathing heavily, but she was able to answer him somewhat quietly.

“She’s not here anymore. They moved her inside yesterday.”

A mixture of disappointment washed over him. He was disappointed she wasn’t there, but at least someone had recently seen her. Even though he’d assumed Brian White was trying to throw him off by telling him his wife was dead, a grain of doubt had lodged itself in Patton’s mind. Having a sure knowledge that she was alive gave him better focus.

“What’s your name and why are you here?” he asked her, trying to lighten the mood between them.

She took a deep breath and sat up in her bed. “I’m Ashley Hatterly. To be honest, I don’t know why I’m here. I just called a friend of mine and told her what happened to my husband. He got hurt in an ambush the other night. They were out looking for somebody and the guy got the jump on them.”

A surge of guilt washed over Patton. He knew that he had been somewhat responsible for her being here now and completely responsible for hurting her husband.

“Is he okay?” Patton asked, swallowing hard, not quite sure he wanted to hear her answer.

“Yes,” she nodded, “he got cut up a little, but… hey!” she said loudly, and he had to clamp his hand on her mouth again.

“Shh!” he said harshly. “I need you to be quiet.”

Ashley nodded then took a deep breath when he let go of her face. After a few seconds of catching her breath, she got her courage up again and said, “You’re Patton Larsen.”

Patton looked around the room to make sure than no one else was awake. He turned back to her and nodded. It shouldn’t have been hard for her, he realized. He’d just run for governor and now his image was plastered all over the media.

“Yeah, and I came here to find my wife. Where is she and how many guards are around?”

The woman shrugged, making Patton realize that asking her was pointless. She’d just gotten here the day before. She was still probably in shock from being arrested and put into prison. She wasn’t about to know much. An idea suddenly came to him and he couldn’t believe that it hadn’t occurred to him earlier.

“Do you want to get out of here? Do you feel like you could get away if I let you out?”

The young woman turned away from him and seemed to stare off into space. Tears formed in her eyes and then poured down her cheeks. He’d struck a nerve of some sort, but he wasn’t sure if it was sadness or resolve. Finally, she turned to look him in the eye.

“I want to get out of here. I want to get back to my husband,” she said strongly, leaving him no doubt that she was capable.

Patton nodded and told her to wake everyone and tell them what was happening. If they wanted to escape, they would have to get dressed and be ready in no more than five minutes. Meanwhile, Patton went to the men’s side and woke the prisoners. Once everyone was gathered, he peppered the prisoners with questions. Where was his wife? How many guards were on duty?

A woman told Patton that his wife was inside the permanent prison structure under heavy guard. A man told him there were more guards at the prison recently. Patton figured it was because of his break-in at City Hall and subsequent mauling of Asher’s search party. The next statement changed Patton’s plans altogether.

“I was in the medical office waiting for a doctor. The door was cracked open so I could hear two guards talking. They said they’d been ordered to kill Jennifer Larsen if you tried to come and break her out. She always has someone with her. I don’t think you’ll be able to get to her,” the prisoner said matter-of-factly.

Patton was silent, his jaw set tightly. His original plan was to break in, rescue his wife, and then escape through the mountains. Now, it looked like he was going to rescue everyone besides his wife. He couldn’t be one-hundred percent sure this person was right but he had to weigh the risks before making a rash decision—especially one that get his wife killed.

As Patton considered his options, a new plan was beginning to develop. He would break these people out and take them to safety. Asher would, no doubt, come after him, but he could probably get them through the mountains in a couple days. More importantly, Asher would need to keep Jennifer alive as bait—to try to get him to come back and break her out again. After another minute of thinking, Patton’s mind was made up. He huddled the prisoners around him.

“Okay, here’s what we’re going to do.”

The night air was getting colder. A thick, roiling fog formed in the bowl where the rear field was constructed, making it difficult for the two guards to see anything. The elements were equally bad for the guards and for Patton. Shuttling prisoners out of the building, across a field, up an embankment, and up the mountain would be difficult in optimum conditions. These were not optimum conditions. Patton headed to the office he’d originally entered through, followed by twenty-one prisoners—eleven men and ten women. He was going to leave about a dozen behind, but it was their choice, not his.

After an internal debate, Patton removed his non-lethal ammunition from his rifle and slapped in a magazine loaded with real bullets. The guards, if alerted to their escape, would no doubt shoot to kill. He needed the firepower to fight back and to protect his new charges. According to the plan, Patton waited for the two guards to walk by. After counting to “ten alligator,” Patton opened the door and sprinted towards the base of the rise. He slung his rifle over his shoulder and bounded up the hill, his arms and legs churning, propelling him up the obstacle. He reached the top and pulled himself up, breathing heavily. He wouldn’t have time to gather himself before he had to commence the second step of his plan.

Patton reached to his belt and unclipped a flashlight. The light had a red cover, which made it more difficult to see. Patton strained to spot the two guards. Satisfied they were too far away to see or hear anything, Patton clicked the light on and off three times. He saw the door open and ten people pour out. It was riskier to bring them out half at a time, but it would be easier to keep them all covered if the guards were to open fire.

The group of ten made its way towards his position. A woman slipped and two men grabbed her by her arms, helping her to her feet and practically dragged her towards the hill. Patton unslung his rifle and sighted in the guards, who were all the way across the field from his position. He was tempted to signal for the other group to exit the building, but it was too risky. One of the men reached the top and he heaved himself to a flat area, fighting for air. Another man reached and then another. The first female reached the top. As two more men and another woman reached the top, a shot rang out, muffled by the thick air. Trying to figure out what had happened, Patton scoped the ground below him. One of the escapees was down on the ground, either dead or badly wounded.

At first he thought the guards had seen them and opened fire, but when another shot was fired, Patton saw that the fire was coming from the main prison building. Another escapee went down, but before the sniper could get off a third shot, Patton scoped him in and shot them center mass. He then scanned over to see where the patrol guards were. They must have been startled by the shots because they were now both sprinting towards him. Patton took aim and knocked one down with a shot to the leg. He missed the other with his second shot, but pegged him in the shoulder with a third bullet.

He scanned over to the left again, making sure that no one else was tracking him. Patton didn’t see anyone or hear anymore gunshots so he pulled his flashlight and signaled for the second group. When he looked down to see the first group’s progress, he was startled to see that a few of them were huddling around a downed escapee.

“Leave them for the prison doctors!” he yelled at them. “Come on, we have to get out of here!”

Startled by his voice, the small group looked up at him. He motioned for them to come to him and they finally started moving again. As the second group started catching up to the first, another shot rang out. Another escapee went down, screaming and holding his leg. Having been warned by Patton to keep moving, no one stopped to help the man. Patton felt horrible about that but there was nothing he could do. He had to get the rest of them to freedom.

The second group made their way up the hill and Patton started scanning the grounds for the new shooter. Luckily, the second sniper missed with their second shot and Patton was able to spot his position. He aimed and fired. He saw a spray of blood and was satisfied he’d put the shooter out of action.

Patton gathered what prisoners remained then and led them up the mountain, away from the prison. Three escapees were down, as were four guards. He knew that he’d just upped the ante, but he wasn’t concerned about that right now. He was more worried about his wife’s safety. The only things that would keep her alive were the fact that she was bait and Asher could use her for propaganda purposes. For now, he couldn’t let that bother him. He needed to focus and get these people to a safer place.

CHAPTER 29

Of the twenty-one who attempted to escape, only eighteen made it up the hill. After hiking them away from the prison, Patton huddled them together around a small fire. Normally he wouldn’t use fire, but the morning air was cold and he had to get these people comfortable. As he scanned their faces, Patton could see fear in many and regret in others. While they were now free, many regretted leaving the relative comfort and safety of the prison. There they were fed, housed, and clothed. Here though, out in the wild, exposed to the elements, their safety was far from assured. Before taking his rabble too far from civilization, Patton gave them one last chance to reconsider and return to the prison. There was some discussion and debate, but in the end, no one wanted to go back. They had no idea what Patton had planned for them, but they figured it was better than what David Asher had planned.

They pooled and inventoried all of their food and supplies. Most of them were poorly dressed for these conditions. Only a few of them grabbed coats and their prison-issued shoes were a generic leather loafer, far less than what they would need to transverse this rough terrain. They had very little food and camping gear, something they would need for their journey that God-only-knew how long was going to be.

Patton was suddenly nervous and filled with regret. He scolded himself for how impetuous his move had been. Now he was responsible for the safe transit of eighteen people—not only that, he had no idea where to take them. The only thing he knew at this point was that he was going to have to get back to his camp and gather everything that was of use. Then, perhaps after a day of rest, they would strike out and make their way over the eastern hills towards the town of Portage, Utah, which was nestled against the other side of the mountain. Their internal problems were many, but their external problems were probably worse. David Asher was going to come after them with everything he had. It was going to take all of Patton’s skills to get them to safety.

Patton finally got them moving, and after only a few short breaks, they were able to make it to his camp just before dusk. Patton had his two man tent and a large tarp that he turned into a makeshift shelter. Many were just glad to be out of the elements, but some of the others were already complaining. Patton didn’t have the heart to tell them that this leg of their journey was going to be the easiest. They would have about eight hours to rest up, eat, and drink water and then they were going to be moving out again—some time before dawn.

As Patton began to drift off into a wary sleep of his own, he could hear the snores from some and whispered conversations from a few others. He’d given each of them an MRE, which are loaded with extra calories, and cooked a large pot of oatmeal for the group. He set his alarm for four in the morning. He would wake them, feed them, and then they were going to start on their journey.

The mountains to the east of the Pocatello Valley resemble a crinkled piece of paper smoothed out flat. At their widest point, they are eight miles as the crow flies. The journey would be slow going, however, with the rough terrain and little food or proper clothing. Patton’s goal was to get them across the hills to the Utah town of Portage, a place where he’d done some business. However, he’d never made this journey by foot before. He could easily make the trek by himself, but dragging almost twenty people with him would be very difficult.

Patton woke at four in the morning. He surveyed the area, making sure that no search party was onto them. Once he was sure they were safe, he started to break the camp down and cooked breakfast. Once that was done, he started to wake his ragged followers. Many grumbled at him when he tapped them on the shoulder, whispering in their ear. However, most woke quickly and began to get ready. They understood what danger they faced.

After breakfast, they gathered up as many weapons and as much equipment as they could all carry. Besides Patton’s rifle and pistol, there were four more rifles, a shotgun, five pistols, and an assortment of Patton’s homemade weapons. He was hoping they wouldn’t be needed, but he knew better. If they were going to escape David Asher’s kingdom, they were going to have to fight their way out.

A cold, drizzling rain greeted them when they broke camp. Patton scouted the area below them again. Patton assumed their pursuers would be smart enough to keep their headlights off, but anything was possible. The people who’d been dispatched to take him out had been poorly trained. He could neither see nor hear any vehicles. He gave his group the all-clear and they followed him up the steep hill.

After a half hour and a few falls, the group made the first climb. They traversed the top of the ridge and then made their way down into a large swale. They stopped for a rest, which gave Patton a chance to assess their situation. They were out of an immediate line of sight from the valley floor, which was good, but they had several things working against them. First, Patton hadn’t prepared for a large group—they didn’t have enough supplies. The bigger issue was the people’s attitude. Some of the escapees showed mental toughness, but many of them were already complaining. Patton knew from experience that mentality is more important than physical prowess. If the grumbling continued, he would have to come up with a new plan.

Patton led the way, occasionally turning back, making sure to keep his eye on the group. Many of the women and the weaker men were straggling behind. As Patton began to stop and gather his rabble together for a break he heard something. He didn’t know exactly what it was but his instincts told him to find cover.

“Spread out! Hide!” he yelled, pushing one man towards a boulder and dove towards a large dying bush to his right.

Just as he reached the safety of the shade of the bush, a helicopter rose above the edge of the hills above them, heading south-southeast. Any hopes that they hadn’t been spotted were dashed when the chopper made a wide, deliberate turn. The helicopter circled them, hovered, and then took off again, heading towards town.

“It’s got to be a police chopper,” he yelled to no one in particular. “They know where we’re at now.” Patton waved for his followers to gather around him. When the group was within earshot he said, “They know where we are. They’re going to be sending out more people to stop us.”

Panic rippled through the group. Recognizing the look of fear in their eyes, Patton fought to catch his breath and to formulate a plan.

“We have three choices,” he said, unslinging his rifle from his shoulder and checking the chamber. “We can stop and wait for them here, we can keep going southeast, or we can cut back northeast to Portage,” he said, pointing towards the small town.

The members of the group discussed the options and decided to keep moving. None of them were up for a fight. Although Patton wanted to stand their ground, he understood. None of them had ever been in an all-out firefight. He accepted their decision and put them into a new formation, this time taking the rear while putting his most reliable people up front as lead scouts.

They continued their trek through the rocky base of the canyon, many falling back as they went. Patton had to stop the group a few times to keep them all together, but he was beginning to worry that these people weren’t up for what was about to happen to them. After a short break he got them on the move again. Shortly after continuing, Patton heard the helicopter again.

“Find cover!”

Patton dropped his pack, removed his rifle from his shoulder, and handed it to a man.

“Get up front,” he said, rummaging through his pack. “If you see anyone coming shoot at them. It doesn’t matter if you hit anything, just shoot in their general direction. It’ll slow them down.”

The young man nodded and trotted towards the front of the party. Patton found his homemade claymore mine and moved towards where they’d come from. He found an ideal spot and stuck the metal legs of the weapon into the hard-packed dirt. He inserted the blasting cap and ran the attached wire back behind a large bush. He removed the trigger and attached the wire to it. Satisfied that he had it in a good position, he made his way back to where much of the group was clustered.

“I need a volunteer to do something,” he said.

After a few moments of silence a middle-aged man stood and raised his hand.

“Okay,” Patton said, nodding. “Follow me.”

Patton led the man to the bush and showed him the mine. “This is our best defense,” Patton said, placing his hand on the man’s shoulder. “If you see a group trying to come up behind us, you need to pull this trigger.”

The trembling man looked at Patton, then out towards where Patton was telling him the danger would come from. He swallowed dryly, obviously nervous about what he was being tasked with.

“What will it do to them?” the man asked Patton, his eyes glistening with tears.

Patton looked away from the man, some emotion forming on his own face.

“It’ll kill some of them,” he admitted

The man nodded and looked back towards the west, shading his eyes from the now-brightening sun.

“It’s not something I want,” Patton said with sincere regret in his voice. “But these people are coming after us to kill us.”

This seemed to shock the man but he nodded and seemed to be preparing himself. He’d worked as a machinist in a shop in Ohio before coming to Blue Creek. Now a man—a man he’d voted for—was asking him to possibly kill fellow human beings.

“Okay,” the man said with emotion. “Better them than us I guess.”

Patton nodded and patted the man on the shoulder again. Satisfied that his volunteer was up to the task, Patton made his way to the front to set up another defensive position. Just as he got everyone put into the right place, he heard the rumbling of a truck’s engine.

“They’re coming!” Patton said. “You! You and you!” he said, pointing at a group of women. “Find a hiding spot!”

The women looked at him vacantly but then finally followed Patton’s order. He looked to the rear of their position and saw his conscript readying himself. He looked around to see if everyone was in place. When everything was set, Patton grabbed his hunting rifle and headed up the north slope of the canyon. After climbing for about five minutes, Patton had the perfect position. He could see in every direction. The engine noises were getting louder and closer now and Patton thought he could hear voices as well.

As Patton looked towards the east, he heard the claymore go off behind him. He’d been preparing himself for the noise, but it still caught him off guard. He looked down to see a huge puff of smoke billowing up into the sky. Once it cleared he could see the carnage that his weapon had created. About a half dozen men were rolling around on the ground, writhing in pain. A couple of them weren’t moving.

The man who set off the claymore ran back towards the rest of the group but was shot before he could reach cover. Patton instinctively raised his rifle and scoped the canyon below him. He scoped the sniper and took him down with his first shot. Two men approached their fallen comrade and Patton shot them also. He scoped the mouth of the canyon but didn’t see anyone else coming so he turned his attention to their front position.

As he expected, a large pickup was slowly making its way towards their line, probably a hundred yards away. Behind the truck was a skirmishing line made up of about dozen men, using the truck as cover. Patton told his people in the front to fire the claymore when their attackers were within twenty-five yards, but they were badly outmanned and outgunned. Patton had to do something quick to even out their odds.

Deciding that the truck was the enemy’s biggest advantage, Patton took aim and shot out the front passenger tire. He took aim again and shot out the rear tire and then the front driver’s front tire. With the truck now out of commission, Patton targeted the skirmishers, who were now ducking for cover. Patton took two of them out before he started receiving return fire. He packed up his gear and made his way towards the carnage to his rear. He descended the slope about halfway. As he was about to settle into a new position, Patton heard the second claymore go off, followed by a heavy volley of gunfire. From where he stood, Patton could see their pursuers’ bullets hitting rocks and boulders, sending shards of rock shrapnel through the air.

Patton slapped a magazine of his non-lethal ammunition and started picking off targets. Although the sun was bright, he could still easily pick out the enemies’ muzzle flashes. He targeted one man, who was trying to use the pickup truck as cover, and shot him in the shoulder. The man began screaming and writhing in pain, but he was still alive and was no longer a threat. Patton picked out another target and hit him in the ribs. He hit another, then another. Finally, once the attackers saw that their numbers were dwindling rapidly, they gather their wounded and started to retreat.

“Cease fire!” Patton yelled. Once the search party retreated, Patton descended the hill and made his way to their forward defensive position. Patton wiped sweat from his eyes. “Good job, guys. They will probably think twice about coming after us again.”

Patton smiled, pleased that they had held off the attack. Then he remembered the man who’d been shot. He handed his rifle to a young man and sprinted to where the man was lying. He was still alive, Patton could tell, but looked to be unconscious.

Placing his hand on the man’s shoulder he said, “You okay?”

The man’s only response was a groan. Patton turned him over as gently as he could manage and saw that the man was holding his side, just above his right hip. His trembling hands were covered in blood and he was moaning incoherently. A sudden surge of guilt hit Patton. It was far from the worst wound he’d ever seen, but he’d never been so directly responsible for someone getting hurt before.

“I’m sorry,” Patton said, patting the man’s arm.

The man tried to respond but Patton couldn’t hear what he was trying to say. Patton leaned in closer.

“Water,” he rasped almost inaudibly.

“Okay,” Patton replied quietly. “We need some water,” he yelled towards the rest of the group.

A woman, went to their makeshift camp and retrieved a water jug and brought it to where Patton was tending to the wounded man. Patton talked to him to keep him calm. He found out that his name was Jerry and that he’d been a machinist from Ohio. He had a wife back in Blue Creek and had been in the prison because of a pro-Patton Larsen blog post. The realization that the man had been in prison because of him added to his deep sense of grief and guilt. He assured Jerry that he would be fine, that his wound wasn’t serious, and that he would take care of him.

Once Jerry was stabilized, they built a makeshift field litter to carry him. Patton instructed the group to gather as many weapons and as much ammunition and food as they could find. The raiding party didn’t have much, but anything would help. Once he had everyone settled, Patton walked around the battlefield to survey the damage. There were three dead from the first claymore blast. Yet another had been shot through the head. Altogether, four of their attackers had been killed. Jerry was the only one to sustain a serious injury. A man in his group badly sprained his ankle while trying to find cover. One of the women had a cut on her head, likely from rock shrapnel from a stray bullet or one of the explosions. Other than that, they were mostly in good shape.

Patton had no delusions that this was the last of their troubles. He was grateful they were all alive and relatively mobile. They needed to get Jerry to Portage and hopefully to a hospital, but that was still another few miles over difficult ground. It would be very slow going. At this point, though, they had no choice. Their beloved governor was going to keep coming after them until they were all back in custody or all dead.

CHAPTER 30

There was no way for the government to stop the news of the ambush and the deaths caused by Patton Larsen and his band of followers, but Asher’s people did everything they could to spin the story and make Larsen the enemy. The media did their best to push the story, even touting a new reward for the rebel leader’s killing or capture. Despite this, many of the survivors had a different story to tell their friends and families.

Many of the survivors wanted to broadcast the fact that Larsen and his “gang” used non-lethal weapons. Some of their men had been killed, yes, but it was due to bad luck. Many of the bullets extracted at the hospital were made of a composite plastic instead of lead. Also, Larsen and his people had disabled the search party’s vehicle and had merely tried to stop their attack. In the opinion of most of the survivors of the ambush, the escapees were only acting in self-defense. A series of secret arrests were made after it was discovered that the true story of the “Ambush at Bloody Canyon” had been revealed by some of the survivors.

Things only got worse after another party was sent out and repelled. Asher was beyond enraged now. If he had access to a bomber jet, he would have sent it out to bomb every inch of the eastern hills. Luckily the Governor had no such weapons. He had to rely on poorly trained and poorly motivated underlings. There was nothing worse than sending people out on a mission who didn’t believe in the mission to start with, he realized. One night, while thinking of possible solutions, the words “I wish Anna was here” popped into his head. Guilt and regret surged through him but he fought the emotion.

All of his carefully-laid plans were falling apart. The only thing keeping it together now was his loyal media, the naiveté of the people, and the culture of fear that he’d developed. That was not going to last. He understood that now. He had to return some stability to his town or he was going to find himself hanging from a tree. He just had to get Patton Larsen out of the picture before he could do that.

Patton scanned the horizon from west to east with his binoculars. To his north, over four-hundred feet below where he was crouched, was the town of Portage, Utah. It wasn’t as if the town was an exciting metropolis, but the idea of civilization made Portage seem like an oasis. Despite all of their problems, Patton’s group was hanging together. They’d been attacked by Asher’s men twice, they were running out of food, but perhaps the worst thing was the turning of the weather.

Patton calculated a timeline of recent events. Jennifer disappeared on Friday afternoon. He and Frank laid low Saturday and he broke into City Hall early Sunday morning. Patton interrogated Brian White Sunday evening and escaped into the mountains that night. He took out the first search party on Monday night and rescued these people the next night. The first attack came on Wednesday or Thursday—nearly a week since his wife was kidnapped. The thought of Jennifer brought a surge of anguish and he had to fight to push the emotions away.

After the first attack, there was a full night, a day, and another night before the second attack—one that was designed to be more of a sneak attack than an all out assault. The group sent by Asher must have been worse trained than the first because their attempt at an assault failed miserably. Patton heard the vehicles well before the attackers could spring their trap. He’d found a good position, on a hill above Asher’s men, and hit two of the men with non-lethal bullets. He sprayed one of the trucks with regular ammunition for good measure. The enemy combatants quickly retreated upon receiving fire.

The second attack happened two days before. The best he could figure, it was almost ten days since Jennifer went missing. The flood of anger and sadness tried to return, but he was now focused on the task at hand. He had to get these people to safety. The biggest obstacle was moving the sick and wounded over the difficult terrain. Jerry, the man wounded during the first battle had developed severe bronchitis or possibly pneumonia. Most of the company had twisted ankles, or twisted knees, or both.

They made decent time after the second time, mostly because they were convinced that David Asher was playing for keeps. The instinct for survival began to overcome the hunger, thirst, and fatigue. With their new pace, Patton figured they would reach Portage the next day.

Patton’s prediction was almost right. The party made its way through the last canyon after sunset the following day. The few lights of Portage were visible below them and to the north. Patton’s ultimate goal was to continue south towards the larger town of Tremonton, but they needed to get Jerry to Portage as soon as possible so that he could be transported to a hospital. They made camp that night in a small grove of trees. Patton set a watch, which included himself on the first two-hour shift.

The day had been unseasonably warm and dry, but once the sun set behind the mountains, the temperature dropped drastically. Patton worried about an oncoming storm when the wind picked up just before dusk. His concerns were justified when a mild downpour started just before midnight. The rain didn’t last long but it was enough to further chill the group. Many were sick, almost to the point that Patton wanted to leave everyone behind and go for help. His suggestion to do so was met with a chorus of complaints. These people were now reliant upon Patton for their survival.

At dusk, Patton sent a three-person scouting party down to Portage. Two were tasked with carrying Jerry on his litter. Patton was convinced that he had pneumonia. Another night in the elements would probably kill him. But they wouldn’t be alone—Patton would provide overwatch and protect the four on their way to and from town. Not surprising, there was little activity down below. Patton scoped a few vehicles leaving town, no doubt people going to work somewhere, or farmers headed to their fields. There were no signs of Asher’s security forces—at least not yet. Patton watched the party of four trudge down the hill and make their way across a large pasture.

They approached a house with its lights shining through the dull morning glow. One from the party, a woman, knocked on the door and spoke animatedly with the person who answered. Patton let out a sigh of relief after a minute or so when the person stepped aside and the two carrying the litter moved Jerry into the house. They all entered and the door closed behind them so Patton could no longer tell what was going on inside.

The scouting party was inside the house for less than five minutes when two black Chevy Suburbans skidded to a stop in front of the house. Patton shouldered his rifle and looked through the scope for targets. Four heavily-armed security agents exited each vehicle. Patton considered firing on them but realized it would do no good. Furthermore, it would draw their attention to him and possibly to the rest of the group. Patton swore under his breath, set down his rifle, and lifted his binoculars to his face. The security agents broke into the house and removed all four of Patton’s people, including Jerry, who they made walk to the second vehicle. Patton swore again and got to his feet. He had to get to the camp. They were going to be attacked again.

Jennifer had no sense of the time of day or the day of the week. The last reference of time she had was being beaten by two female guards. It happened in a room that actually had windows. Before being knocked unconscious, she saw that the sun was shining through the windows. What day was it? She had no idea. Her husband had supposedly broken a group of prisoners out of the prison in an attempt to rescue her and Governor Asher was obviously not very happy about it.

Her conditions had slowly worsened since the beating. She was currently in a shed with no heat or insulation. She had only her thin pair of coveralls and a scratchy Army blanket to keep her warm. The roof leaked and the walls let in the cold. She was always cold, always hungry, and always miserable. She wouldn’t give her tormentors the satisfaction of seeing her break, though. She knew she was being used as bait to draw her husband back into town to be captured or killed. She also knew that Patton was smart enough not to fall for it.

Would he come for her? It seemed like such a no brainer, but she loved him so much she dreaded the idea of him being captured, or worse, killed. During her weaker moments, though, she dreamt of him finding her and taking her home to sit on their porch and watch the birds over the lake or their dogs playing in their yard. It was those types of thoughts that kept her going day to day. It was during one of these moments that she heard the door being unlocked. It usually meant that it was mealtime—one of two that she received per day—or she was being taken into the main building to be “interrogated.”

The latter hadn’t happened for a while, although she wasn’t sure how long. It was probably three days, maybe four. They asked her stupid questions like “Has your husband contacted you?” and she would throw up her hands and ask them how that was possible. She finally realized that it was all a game to try to break her spirit and for no other reason. There was nothing she could possibly give them that would lead to her husband’s capture.

The most frightening thing to her, though, was that she was beginning to forget things. Not just important things about herself, but simple things like what Patton looked like, what she did before coming to Blue Creek, and her parents. Again, sometimes she was strong and other times she was weak. Right now she was feeling weak. A rustling at the door brought her out of her thoughts. She heard harsh voices and then a grunt. The door then slammed loudly and was relocked. It took a few moments for Jennifer to regain her sight, but when she did, she saw that it was a woman, about her age or maybe a little younger.

The woman looked dazed and had terribly dirty and greasy hair. Her face was streaked with dirt and sweat—or tears, she thought—and she was quietly sobbing. Not knowing what to do, Jennifer allowed the young woman a few minutes to compose herself. After what seemed a lifetime, the young woman swallowed back some tears and was the one to break the silence.

“How long have you been in here?” she asked timidly, shaking visibly.

Gazing at the wall, Jennifer said, “I don’t know. I lost track of time. Do you know what day it is?”

The young woman shook her head morosely and stared down at her dirty fingernails. A new silence came upon them and lasted for a while, but Jennifer wanted to get her talking. She needed to find out what was going on outside. Jennifer walked over to her new roommate and sat.

“What’s your name?” Jennifer asked her, patting her on the thigh. She could feel the woman’s thigh muscle convulsing under her thin prison uniform.

“Theresa,” she replied simply.

“What are you doing here? I mean… why were you arrested?”

Theresa looked at Jennifer then at the wall. A solitary light bulb lit their cold and dusty room. The plywood floor was rotting where it had gotten wet.

“My husband… he was part of this scouting party out looking for a fugitive and he got ambushed.”

Jennifer’s face must have registered shock because Theresa was quick to reassure her. “He’s fine. No one was killed but he got cut up pretty good. Anyway, I told my friend what happened and the true story got out. Whoever ambushed them also gave everyone first aid and helped them get back into town.”

Something dawned on Jennifer.

“Who were they going after?” she asked, trying to not get her hopes too high.

“The guy who ran against Asher last time. Patton Larsen.”

Jennifer’s face went white with shock.

“Did they catch him?” she asked, dreading to hear the answer. It seemed strange to Jennifer, but a wide smile came over the younger woman’s face.

“What?” Jennifer asked, her voice a mixture of happiness and dread.

“No, they didn’t get him. In fact, he broke me and a bunch of other people out and tried to get us to Portage, over the hills.”

Jennifer nodded. She and Patton had been to Portage many times, mostly for business. Theresa told her about how they had traveled through the mountains, had gotten ambushed, and had almost made it to Portage. She told her about how she had been part of a scouting party that had gotten arrested and how she had been brought back to the prison and beaten by guards.

“Where are they now?” Jennifer asked.

Theresa shrugged her shoulders and said, “I don’t know. I got caught, remember? They’re probably still in camp up above Portage right now.”

Although she was close in her guess, by the time she uttered those words to Jennifer, Patton and his followers had already moved on.

It had been another miserable and cold night on the move. Their camp outside of Portage was their longest respite since Patton rescued them from prison. Now, they were trying to tough out a long, cold and rainy night in a hastily-built camp four miles south of the tiny town. While sitting on the rough ground, warming himself by the fire, Patton’s thoughts turned to his wife. He thought of Jerry limping towards the SUV at gunpoint, and the others he’d sent, possibly to their deaths. A plan was developing, but he was going to need safe harbor to make it all happen. He needed good shelter and food for these people. Then, and only then, could he put his plan into motion.

Patton straightened his legs and massaged his lower back. It wasn’t often that he allowed himself the luxury of rest, but when he did so, he took full advantage. He was beginning to wear down physically, mentally, and emotionally and he knew that if he were to break, the rest of these people had no chance. He was the source of their hope. Patton took a mental inventory of what they had to their advantage and vice versa. The list was very heavily-weighted to the latter. The best thing was they hadn’t been attacked by Asher’s people since the second attempt. Patton knew that wasn’t going to last forever, but they were going to be out in the open now. This would make it easier for Asher’s people to find them.

Patton woke to a warm, dry, sunny morning. The sounds of happy people and the wonderful smells of cooking meat greeted and cheered him. He emerged from his sleeping place to find his group huddled around a large fire with huge hunks of beef cooking on a makeshift spit. His stomach groaned as he smelled the delicious meat. He suddenly wished that he had some eggs to go with his steak.

“What’s this?” he asked the obvious ringleaders, who were turning the meat over the flames with a long stick.

One of the men looked up at Patton and smiled. “On watch last night,” he said, looking at his co-conspirator. “We heard this cow bellowing. It was down there,” he said, pointing down into a pasture towards the east.

“Well, I don’t care where it came from,” Patton said smiling, “We needed this bad, guys. Thank you.”

The two men nodded and smiled. Patton made a mental note to find out who the cow belonged to so he could repay them. Their reward came from the others who’d gathered around to watch the meat cook. Up above the crowd, Patton saw the remains of the cow, which had been butchered rather amateurishly. He sharpened his field knife as he walked up to the carcass and cut off more usable meat.

Instead of packing up camp and heading out again, Patton decided to remain in the spot one more day. That would give their meat time to dry in the sun, assuming it didn’t start raining again, and let these people’s bodies absorb the nutrients. He would make sure they all hydrated and got good rest. This, Patton thought optimistically, might be their chance at actually surviving.

CHAPTER 31

During the next day, Patton got better at picking out Blue Creek surveillance vehicles. Most stood out—especially the large black SUVs with tinted windows. Patton figured Asher had watched too many movies. A distinct patrol pattern developed. First, one of the black SUVs would drive south along the interstate. A few minutes later, a large sedan would follow. Then the SUV would travel north along the interstate. It would exit at Plymouth and come up one of the many gravel roads that headed west into the hills where they were hiding. Once the SUV patrolled the area and left, the sedan would soon follow. Once both vehicles passed through, there would be a gap of about two hours. Patton moved the camp in between the patrols, but they made very little progress.

This pattern of dodging patrols and then moving camp went on nearly all the next day. Around dusk there was a change. As usual, the SUV drove down the interstate and then up towards the camp. It disappeared over the horizon and was then followed by the sedan. Once the sedan was safely out of sight, Patton gathered the party and pushed them south. Without warning, a pickup truck with armed men in the back, sped up the gravel road and came to a violent, skidding stop. They had been spotted somehow and the enemy wised up by bringing in a third vehicle into their hunt.

Men with rifles poured out of the truck’s bed. The cab doors opened, revealing four more men, including the driver. They quickly formed a skirmishing line and slowly made their way to where Patton’s group was last spotted. Patton was able to get everyone down on the ground behind rocks, hidden in prairie grass, or whatever cover they could find. Patton organized a perimeter defense with what weapons and reliable shooters that he had.

Shots rang out and bullets peppered the ground behind Patton as he ran up the hill. He ordered his firing line to lay down suppressing fire and then ducked behind a small outcropping of rock. From behind a boulder, Patton watched most of the enemy skirmish line drop for cover. A couple of the men pressed forward, however, continuing to fire their weapons blindly towards hasty defensive position Patton had established.

“Keep firing!” he yelled to the four men in front. He could hear the screams and of the non-combatants behind him. He yelled at them to stay down.

As his picket line kept firing, Patton made his way to the right, making sure to remain hidden. He heard the crack of a bullet just over his head and realized he’d been spotted. He ducked lower and kept moving forward, making his way around to the enemy’s left flank. There was a pause in the firing and he could see some of Asher’s men stand and continue to press forward their attack.

Patton crouched down and removed one of his non-lethal claymore mines from his pack. Bullets impacted the ground behind him as he scurried to set up the device. Patton attached the blasting cap and ran the line back behind a large boulder. He attached the clacker and set it on the ground. He peered around the boulder and watched as the attackers progressed up the hill, most of them firing from the hip. A scream emanated from behind where Patton stood. Someone in his group had been hit.

Patton rolled over to his back and removed two of his non-lethal grenades from his cargo pocket. He returned to his knees, depressed the button on one, and threw it towards the further group of skirmishers. He quickly followed with another grenade at the group closer to his position. The first grenade detonated, sending a gout of dirt, rocks, and grit into the air. Several of the enemy went down with the concussion. The second explosion had the same effect. Patton waited for the dust to settle. Only a handful of men rose to their feet and continued their attack. Patton reached out and grabbed the detonator and squeezed the trigger. There was a slight delay, but the explosion was deafening. What was left of the attackers following the grenades was now decimated. Once Patton regained his wits, he could hear the groans coming from up ahead. Rather than lend aid to his enemies, he made his way back to his makeshift fighting position.

“Is everyone okay?” He yelled, hobbling as he went.

There were screams and moans from several members of the party.

“Patton!” screamed a woman to Patton’s left, up the steep rise.

When Patton reached her, he saw that she was holding a woman in her lap. Her face was pale, her body limp.

“She’s okay. She’s okay. She’s okay right Patton? Patton!”

Patton kneeled and looked at the distraught woman.

“Nancy? Nancy, you need to calm down.”

Patton reached out and felt the limp woman’s neck. There was no pulse. He pulled his hand away slowly.

“Patton?”

He looked at her and then down at the ground. He just shook his head, not able to look her in the eye.

“She’s dead?”

Patton nodded and stood.

“Sorry Nancy. She’s gone.”

Patton moved on to check the other members of the group. He could hear Nancy wailing from behind him. The woman was the only death, but she wasn’t the only casualty. Two of the men on the front lines had been hit, although they weren’t seriously wounded. After assessing the damage to his own people, Patton made his way back to his previous hiding spot. He could see that many of the attackers were making their way down the hill towards their vehicles. Patton shouldered his rifle and made sure he had good cover.

“You make a move towards us and I’ll kill you!” Most of the men ignored him and continued hobbling down the hill. “You tell Asher that next time he sends you people you won’t be coming back!”

Ten minutes later the bruised and battered attackers were gone. Patton continued to scan the area, ensuring they weren’t coming back. After another half hour, Patton made his way down to the last enemy position. There were no bodies, which was a relief, but there were a few patches of blood scattered around the ground. Although his weapons were supposed to be non-lethal, they could still do some damage. Patton looked back up the hill and looked at his beleaguered party, filled with regret. These people had been through so much. Now someone was dead. He thought back to when Jennifer suggested they buy their way out of the experiment. Patton seriously considered it then and now he wished he’d done it.

Tears sprang to his eyes as he hobbled up the hill towards his group. He couldn’t afford to wallow in self pity. He had to keep moving and get these people to safety. If there was one thing his Army training had taught him, it was resiliency. Self recrimination could come later. Now he had to be the hero. One last time.

The sun was setting over Blue Creek. The sunsets were always remarkable here, David Asher thought. His balcony outside of his City Hall office gave him a great view. He liked to sit outside and watch them alone, especially when pondering bad news.

The last patrol he sent out—one that was actually able to locate Larsen and his merry band—had returned an hour before. Those who weren’t in the hospital were at home being nursed by wives or girlfriends. Everyone he had sent to kill or capture his elusive enemy was either dead or wounded and out of commission. He barely had enough agents to keep order in town. He couldn’t afford to lose anyone else in the pursuit.

Governor Asher was beginning to resign himself to the fact that Larsen was gone. Asher ultimately had the advantage, however—he still had Larsen’s wife. He also had most of the Insight Resource spy network in his prison. No, he realized, Patton Larsen would come to him eventually. He had to.

The group was in rough shape following the last firefight. Several were immobile for various reasons. All were hungry and dehydrated. During the ordeal, Patton had come to rely upon one of the men. He was tall, strong, and mentally tough. His most remarkable feature was his bright red hair. Patton had jokingly called him Ginger. He had come to see him as a valued comrade, similar to his brothers in his old unit.

Patton approached Ginger, who was sitting on a large rock and cleaning some gear.

“We have to make our move today,” Patton said grimly.

Ginger looked up at him, squinting in the way that made Patton laugh. Ginger nodded.

“If I have to go alone I will. I can find help and we can come back for you all,” Patton continued, sitting next to his lieutenant.

“They still won’t like that idea,” Ginger said, nodding towards where the others were milling about. “They’re scared.”

Patton nodded, but was about to disagree. Ginger stopped him before he could speak.

“If you go, we’ll go with you. It’s not like you’re in better condition than we are.”

Patton surveyed the camp. Three people were on makeshift stretchers. One of them had already been left behind in a shallow, hastily dug grave. They shared what water they had left. Someone had found a bag of melted M&Ms and were passing them around. They didn’t look like much, but Patton was impressed with these people. He nodded and stood.

“Okay, but we have to go. Right now. We leave everything, including those on stretchers. We’ll build them some shelters to keep them out of the rain and sun. But if we don’t find anyone, they are going to die, and maybe us too.”

Ginger stood and set down the pot he had been cleaning.

“I’ll tell them,” he said, feeling a burst of adrenaline. It was now and never for them. Fail now, and not many of them would make it.

Two hours later, after having moved south and west over some rough terrain, they reached the top of a rise. Forty feet below was a wide, well-kept gravel road. It was obviously used by local farmers. It was the first promising sight they’d seen in days. Patton looked at Ginger and smiled. He instructed everyone else to hunker down and wait for him to return.

Patton and Ginger descended the hill without incident. Patton’s heart was thudding in his chest, thinking that this could be their salvation. That thought was tempered, however, with the realization that Asher’s people could be patrolling that road just as easily as anyone else. There was no telling what the enemy was up to. They would have to be cautious.

There was civilization to the east, but that was down towards the interstate where Asher’s people were more likely to be patrolling. Although there were no towns to the west, he knew that there were some scattered farmhouses in that direction. Ironically, heading west would take them closer to Blue Creek, but they would be concealed by the foothills. Heading in any other direction would put them out in the open.

Only one vehicle passed by, but it was headed south along the paved road that ran along the freeway. It was a beat up old Ford pickup, most likely the farmer who owned the land they were tramping around on. Patton wouldn’t put it past Asher to have decoy vehicles, but at this point, they didn’t have enough time to be that cautious. At some point they needed to make a move.

Patton motioned for the rest of the group to join him on the road. This was their make or break moment. Patton took the lead and began to trudge up the hill. As bad as he felt, he was by far the best conditioned person on this march. Every so often he looked back to see how the others were doing. Perhaps it was the human survival instinct kicking in, but the worse he felt physically, the less he cared about the others.

Ahead the road dipped down about twenty feet and then rose up again. It was going to be slow and brutal, but he needed to keep going. The one thing that had gotten him through those long, weary and brutal marches during Delta selection was the thought of those men during the Bataan Death March. They walked for dozens of miles with no food or water, with the Japanese soldiers killing their friends all along the way. If they could do that, he’d told himself a thousand times, then I can do this.

And it was those thoughts that kept him going now. Yes he was in danger, but in as much danger as those men on the Bataan Peninsula? No, he decided, shaking his head as vigorously as he was able. They went through worse than he was going through now. He could keep going. Patton had been so deep in thought he didn’t notice the dust billowing up on the far side of the next rise. Also, he didn’t hear the truck’s engine. He was so lost in thought, in fact, that he might have gotten hit by the truck had it not stopped in front of him.

When he came to his senses, an old man was standing there and staring at him in wonder. Patton was so shocked that he nearly collapsed. Luckily the old man was spry enough to catch him before he fell to the ground. The old man offered him water and he drank greedily when he was handed a water bottle. The man offered him some pistachios but his mouth was too dry and sore to eat them. Food could wait but the water was heavenly.

“What? How? Where?” the old man said, exasperated. “Where did you come from?”

Patton pointed towards Blue Creek.

“You were over there?” the older man asked, his eyes growing wide with surprise. He knew that some sort of experiment was going on over there.

Patton nodded, tears rolling down his dirt-streaked face. Whether unashamed or too tired to care, he didn’t wipe the tears away.

“What’s your name?” the farmer asked, still unable to comprehend the condition of this man, this human being.

“Patton,” he rasped. “Patton Larsen.”

“It’s nice to meet you,” the older man said out of habit. “I just wish we could have met under better circumstances. I’m Ronald Harris.”

PART FIVE

A RECKONING

CHAPTER 32

Ronald Harris was a good and humble man, but he was no debutante. He’d seen some of the world and he knew how to think quickly on his feet. The Larsen fellow had gotten his people out of Blue Creek safely, but he was in no condition, or position, to help them recover. He called to apprise his wife of the situation and asked her to call their friend who was a doctor. He took Patton and Ginger in his truck and drove them home. When they reached the ranch, Mr. Harris helped Patton into the house and started making calls. He called doctors, nurses, other farmers with trucks and trailers and people from his church. Within a half hour he had enough vehicles to transport people back to his home. The people would have to stay in the barn for now, but it was clean and they were able to make it warm. They found enough beds to get them situated for the time being.

As Mr. Harris was leaving to go back for the first group, Patton stopped him.

“I have to come with you,” he said.

Mr. Harris grabbed his arm and led him back to the house. Patton tried to resist but he was just too tired and weak.

“Young man, it looks like you’ve been through hell itself. Why don’t you just come back and sit and relax. Get some water. We’re going to take care of your friends.”

Patton stood there, wanting to resist and force his way back into the truck but the man was right. He was in no position to help anyone. Harris led him to the living room and sat him in a recliner.

“Honey!” he yelled towards the kitchen.

His wife, a plump but pretty woman, came walking out, wiping her hands on a dish towel.

“Is this him?” she asked, concerned.

She walked to where Patton was sitting and put her hand on his forehead, as if she were his mother checking for a fever. She looked at her husband with concern then returned to the kitchen. Mr. Harris could hear the kitchen faucet and she returned with a large container of water. She handed it to Patton and he drank it greedily. When he finished, he handed it to her and thanked her. He tried to stand but Harris pushed him back into the seat.

“Patton,” he said calmly, “we’ve got this taken care of. You sit here and relax and we’ll go get your friends.”

Patton nodded. As Harris began to leave, Patton stopped him.

“Someone didn’t make it. We buried her…” he said, unable to finish.

Harris stopped and stood, obviously dumbfounded. Never in his life had he experienced anything like this.

“Okay Patton. Once we get you all settled in, we can go get her and bring her here.”

Hot tears formed in Patton’s eyes and he nodded gratefully. Harris patted his wife on the shoulder then left to retrieve Patton’s friends.

It was a chilly night but they were able to get the barn to a decent temperature. Two doctors had come and gone, replaced by two others. The barn was a huge structure, big enough to house two large combines plus various other equipment and supplies. The apex of the roof was nearly fifty feet high, supported with large steel girders. Concrete had been poured for a floor. It was drafty but they cranked up the heaters high enough to keep the survivors warm.

All of the people were cozy in makeshift beds or cots and all were hooked to IVs. It looked like a World War I aid station. Still, most were responding well to treatment. Whether it was his physical constitution or his psychological will, Patton was the first to somewhat recover from the journey. Two days after arriving at the Harris ranch, Patton was ready to head back to Blue Creek to get his wife. His biggest problem was that had no idea what was going on the other side of the mountains.

When everyone was asleep, Patton snuck out of the barn and into the Harris’ home. While in the living room the night before he noticed a landline phone. As he suspected, the front door was unlocked. He turned the knob quietly and entered the room. The reason for all the subterfuge was the doctors’ orders—the patients were to do nothing aggravating. Furthermore, they were told they shouldn’t leave the Harris ranch for at least a week. Patton was about to do something that broke both orders.

Patton found the phone and dialed the number he knew by heart. It rang a few times but there was finally an answer.

“Wildcat, this is Patton.”

“Patton?” replied the groggy voice.

“Listen, all hell broke loose after you left. They kidnapped Jennifer. They’re holding her in prison. I got away from town but I have to go back. I have to find her.”

“Slow down, man,” Wildcat said, trying to wake himself.

“Sorry, bro. Look, they took Jennifer. They’ve had her for about two weeks I think. Anyway, I need you here. I need your help.”

Patton’s burly friend sat up in bed, careful not to wake his girlfriend.

“You need me where exactly?”

“Here. Back in Utah. When can you catch a flight?”

Wildcat sighed and looked at the clock on this nightstand. He was a frequent flyer so he knew most of the flights out of LAX by heart. There was a red eye to Salt Lake City, but he wouldn’t be able to make it in time. The earliest morning flight was at six in the morning.

“Patton, I can be on an early flight, but I wouldn’t have everything I need. You got some gear there that I can use?”

Patton did a quick mental inventory of weapons and supplies he had remaining.

“I’ve got some guns, but not the right gear. I can go get that in the morning, though.”

“Alright,” Wildcat said. “I’ll catch a morning flight and rent a car and drive up. I’ll call you when I get there. Is this number good?”

“No,” Patton replied, “and my cell phone was destroyed on the way out of town. I’ll have to get a phone in the morning and call you from it in the morning.”

Wildcat agreed and ended the call. He set his phone down and tried to get back to sleep.

After hanging up, Patton heard the kitchen faucet running and a man coughing. A dim light then turned on. Patton leaned his head into the doorway. Mr. Harris was looking right at him while drinking from a large tumbler of water.

“Hello,” Patton said awkwardly.

“Hello,” Harris replied. “So you’re leaving us already?” he asked, wiping his mouth with the back of his hand.

Patton didn’t respond at first. An awkward silence passed between them. Finally he said, “Yes. I need to find my wife.”

Harris nodded solemnly. He’d never been in the man’s shoes, but he could imagine how he felt. The doctors’ orders had been clear—no one was to leave for at least a week. Harris respected doctors, but he was also a good judge of character. He could tell that Patton was more capable than the others. He wasn’t about to try to force him to stay—not that he could do so, anyway.

“I guess I only have two questions. What do you need and when do you want to leave?”

Patton smiled. This Harris guy was definitely after his own heart.

The two men drove towards the interstate and then down to Ogden, Utah. Harris was taking Patton to an outdoors store where he could get the gear he needed. The truck leveled out on a small plateau. An old barn and silo lay nestled against a low hill. Patton soaked in the view, grateful to be riding in the truck and for the beautiful landscape.

“You a church goin’ man?” Mr. Harris asked Patton, out of the blue.

“I used to go with my Mom when I was a kid, but I wouldn’t call myself a real religious person.”

“You know the Bible at all?”

Patton shook his head no.

Harris took a deep breath and exhaled loudly. “Well, back before even Adam came onto this earth, there was a council. God presented a plan to us—all of us who’ve ever lived or will live on the earth. Do you believe that we lived before we came to earth?”

Patton thought about it for a minute.

“Not specifically, but it seems plausible.”

“Anyways, God presented a plan and Jesus said that He would come down and fulfill the plan. People would come down to earth with no memory of living with God before coming to earth. We would come down and live in this world and at every turn we would have a choice.”

Patton nodded.

“Anyway, inside our choices were our answer to the great question—would we choose God or would we choose the world. Sad to say, most the time we choose the world because I think sometimes we don’t recognize God in the other choice.”

Patton smirked but said nothing.

“Anyways, Jesus said that the plan was good and He said that He would come down and give Himself as a sacrifice for us and our sins and mistakes knowing that God couldn’t take us back with Him if we were imperfect. When He suffered and bled in the Garden of Gethsemane and when He died on the cross, He was paying the price for our sins. That way, if we will follow Christ then He will deem us worthy to live with God again.

“Well, Satan presented another idea. He thought it was foolish that God give us the chance to sin when Satan could make us live the straight and narrow. He would force us to be perfect—to always keep God’s commandments. That way, none of us would be unclean.”

Patton nodded. Not because he agreed, necessarily, but because he was glad to have a conversation. Still, he asked, “What’s your point with all this?”

Harris smiled.

“That little fight you got goin’ on over there is the same fight that’s been goin’ on forever,” he said, matter-of-factly. “Most of God’s children just wanna be free. They wanna pursue their own lives. It’s human nature and it’s not just genetic. It’s spiritual. It’s who we are.”

Patton nodded, agreeing again. He wasn’t completely convinced, though.

“I agree that most people want to live free. But not all.”

It was Harris’ turn to nod.

“Yes,” he replied. “But that follows the pattern. Satan wanted to force us all to be perfect. That’s basically what those people are trying in your little town.”

“Yeah, but where does that leave me?” Patton asked. “I’m living in the real world, not the spiritual or the philosophical or the theoretical.”

Harris gazed off into space for a moment then said, “It puts the whole world into perspective. This whole life makes sense in that context, I’d say.”

Patton agreed, but it did him little good to hear. More importantly, it did nothing to reunite him with Jennifer.

“I need something a little more tangible,” he said, finally. “Anyway, I appreciate you taking me down there.”

Conditions at the prison had improved somewhat for Jennifer. She was still being held in the cold and drafty shed, but the guards were treating her more fairly, and she and Theresa were getting more to eat. Sometimes the guards would take Theresa away for days. They always brought her back, but she was worried sick when her friend was gone. After the third or fourth time this happened, Jennifer realized that it was a sort of psychological torture for her. They must have recognized that the two had developed a bond and decided that if they took her friend away from her she might become more compliant.

Jennifer didn’t know anything. They could beat her or starve her or freeze her as much as they wanted. Nothing they did, though, could make her know anything about her husband’s whereabouts. For all she knew, her husband had been killed during the ongoing manhunt. Rumors were rampant and that was one of them.

One good thing came from the guards taking Theresa away—they took her to the main prison. While there, Theresa could hear the latest gossip—about the town or about her husband’s latest exploits. Of course there was the rumor that Patton had been killed, but Theresa had debunked this. She assured Jennifer that it had been started by Asher himself, knowing that Blue Creek residents would be disheartened if their hero was dead or gone. Besides that, Theresa’s husband had rejoined the Blue Creek Security Services and had gone out on a few missions. He informed her that Patton, and the people he’d rescued from the prison, had escaped and were holed up somewhere around Tremonton.

But Jennifer could never be sure. Sometimes she felt strong, confident that Patton was out there, concocting a plan to rescue her. At other times, though, she felt hopeless. One thing she did know, though—she wasn’t going to last much longer. One day, instead of taking Theresa to the main prison, the guards took Jennifer a couple of times. They let her shower and have a hot meal. Never before had she been so grateful for a warm, dry bed. It was far from as comfortable as her and Patton’s bed, but compared to her accommodations in the shed, being inside the prison was like a five star hotel.

During one of her trips into the main prison, one of the guards let slip that Patton and his party had escaped. This little tidbit undid weeks of mental and emotional torture. She was suddenly heartened and felt like she could continue on. She just needed Patton to come soon. She wasn’t sure how long her newfound strength would last.

CHAPTER 33

The nondescript looking SUV stopped at the curb. Wildcat asked if Patton was sure they were at the right place. Patton assured him it was and that he’d been at the house before. Patton exited the vehicle alone. He didn’t want to intimidate Michael Varner too much and that’s what Wildcat had the tendency to do. Patton rang the doorbell. He heard footsteps and was then greeted be a shocked Varner. He said nothing, merely waving for Patton to enter. Patton turned and gave Wildcat a thumbs up and then entered the house. Michael Varner led Patton to his den with the gorgeous view of the eastern mountains. Varner sat at his desk and gestured for Patton to sit.

“You look terrible,” Patton said with a playful grin.

“You should talk,” Varner replied. “I heard about your troubles.”

Patton nodded and said, “that’s why I’m here. I need to know what’s going on in Blue Creek.”

Varner rubbed his hands through his hair and let out a long, frustrated breath. He had bags under his eyes, seemed to have lost weight, and had four or five days of stubble on his face. His usually piercing eyes were drawn and bloodshot. Obviously he was feeling the strain. This was both a good and bad sign for Patton.

“We don’t know,” Varner said simply. “All the communications we had with our people went through your office server. Somehow they found that out. I think they tracked Bao to your warehouse and caught him sending some untainted reports. Sure he caught a good beating for that,” Varner said, almost as an aside.

Patton’s jaw clenched involuntarily.

“What about the camera system Bao told me about. Is that still running?”

Varner shook his head.

“They caught onto that months ago and shut it down. We haven’t been able to see or hear anything. All the research is based on lies,” he said as an afterthought. He understood that Patton didn’t care about this aspect of the experiment and quickly regretted mentioning it.

Patton’s eyes flared with anger.

“You people…” he said, shaking his head. “You bring us here with all these promises and look what happens. Didn’t you think there’d be a snake in the garden?”

Varner looked away. He’d obviously been beating himself up over this very fact. He didn’t respond.

“I need to get into town. You know it better than anyone—or your people know it better than anyone. I need a quick infiltration point, I need to get to Asher.”

Varner’s eyes snapped up to meet Patton’s.

“What?”

Patton held Varner’s gaze, a quiet rage stewing in his eyes.

“Without Asher this all ends. You cut off the snake’s head, the whole body dies.”

“Are you sure?” Varner asked, his eyes wide. “He’s got some loyal people.”

Patton nodded and said, “Yes, but they’re loyal to the office, not the man. Once he’s gone, and once I get a chance to speak to the people, they’ll understand what’s happened. Anyway, I just need to know the best way to get there.”

Varner thought about it. He stood and looked for something in the credenza behind him. After a moment he returned to his desk with a large map, no doubt of Blue Creek. He opened it and spread it out over his desk. Patton was no doubt more familiar with the area than Varner, especially considering he’d just led a group of people through the surrounding mountains on foot. That said, he didn’t know if that was the right place to enter from.

“If you go in from the west you have all that open ground with no cover,” Varner said, tracing his finger over the map. You have the same problem if you go in from the north. The hills are lower and easier to cross, but town is a long way away over open ground.”

Patton nodded, taking in Varner’s opinions in hopes it would help him concoct a plan. Varner continued.

“If you go from the east you’re contending with the mountains. Then town is right there so you won’t know if Asher has more patrols.”

“Going from the east is tough,” Patton said. “I just came over that way. Don’t wanna do that again.”

“That leaves the south, then,” Varner said, marking the spot with his finger. You can go in on the interstate, drive up on the highway to about here,” he said, pointing to where the hills jut out into the valley. “Then you ditch your vehicle and go the rest of the way on foot.”

Patton went over the plan again in his mind, picturing the many times he’d driven the exact route Varner had described. There were scattered groves of trees all throughout the area. They could hide the SUV in one of those. Then it was about a kilometer to the south end of the lake, where technically, his boat dock was located. If his shop was still there, along with the boat, their job would be a lot easier. If not, they would have to walk miles around the lake. Patton would run it by Wildcat, but he was sure his friend would prefer the boat to be available.

The boat rocked beneath them. Both were tired, but Patton told Wildcat he would take the first watch. Patton smiled behind the binoculars as he listened to his friend snore from one of the fishing chairs on deck. Patton set down the binoculars and stood to stretch. He needed to stay awake and alert—he had no idea what equipment Asher’s security force had.

For now they were safe. Two men on a boat, fishing at dusk, wouldn’t bring any suspicion. However, they couldn’t stay there much after dark. They would have to dock the boat somewhere and do their reconnaissance on foot. Patton went to the cabin and poured himself another cup of coffee and grabbed a muffin. He was only supposed to be on watch for two hours, but he would let his old Army buddy sleep for four.

Since leaving Michael Varner’s house in Ogden, they’d gone through an arduous journey. They had to make more of the journey on foot than they’d hoped. They knew the closer they drove towards Blue Creek, the more likely they would be caught. Caution won out and they ditched their vehicle just a couple miles from the interstate. The terrain was much like Patton traversed with those he’d rescued. He was with a seasoned veteran now, though, and they made excellent time, reaching Patton’s boat shop that first night. Apparently the place had been abandoned because they saw no traffic, in or out, all through the next day of recon. Now, here they were on the boat, waiting for full dark to come.

Patton’s ring of the doorbell was answered by a confused, then dumbfounded, then shocked Bao. He was about to blurt Patton’s name out, but quickly stopped himself. Patton wasn’t alone, accompanied by a large and intimidating man. Both wore mostly black and were wearing baseball caps.

“Hi Bao,” Patton said, smiling.

Once Bao gathered his wits, he motioned for the two men to step inside. He glanced down both directions of the street but didn’t see any suspicious vehicles. He invited Patton and his guest to sit in his living room and offered them something to drink.

“Water for me. Wildcat?”

“Water.”

Bao disappeared into the kitchen and returned with two water bottles.

Life had mostly returned to normal for the citizens of Blue Creek. The constant news of Patton Larsen’s escape and rescue of other criminals had mostly died down. Bao thought this was due to the last search party’s failure to either capture or kill Larsen. Patton was still the talk of the town, but only in whispers. Nobody dared voice support for who was officially a fugitive. Now, here the man was, sitting in his living room.

“What? Where?” Bao said, still confused.

“Look Bao,” Patton said shortly. “I’ll fill you in later, but for now I need some information. I went to see Varner. He said the network is down again.”

Bao nodded and said, “Yeah, they caught me uploading a report on your office computer. That’s when they shut your business down for good.”

“So nobody outside of Blue Creek knows anything that’s going on?”

Bao shrugged. “I don’t know. But as far as the internal network goes, we’re completely down. We all still send reports to Varner but they’re all vetted by somebody at City Hall.”

Patton looked over at Wildcat.

“That’s what I thought,” Patton said. “Asher has this place clamped down pretty tight.”

Patton then asked Bao about the town, the security force, and where Asher lived. Bao told him that people were going about their business as usual. Security didn’t seem as strong, although Bao suspected that many agents were in plainclothes. A lot of people that had been arrested were already released, Bao included. Somehow the story of arrests had gotten out, which caused major problems to Asher’s level of support.

“Are you going after Jennifer?” Bao asked, sure of the answer.

Patton shook his head. Bao looked shocked.

“I’m here to rescue everyone. The only way to do that is to take Asher out. That’s why I need to know where he lives.”

“Nobody knows where he lives. I heard a rumor he lives in City Hall. I guess they converted some offices into a luxury suite,” Bao said.

Patton looked at Wildcat again. The two shared a knowing glance.

“And whenever Asher goes out he’s with a bunch of security guards. He’s sure that you’re going to come after him.”

“He’s right,” Patton said, “but we’re going to have to get creative, I guess.”

As Patton and Wildcat discussed their plans, Bao volunteered his help. Patton looked at him in surprise. His initial reaction was to say no, but then realized they were operating from the same sense of duty. Patton relented and began to work a third person into their plans. Finally he asked.

“Bao, do you happen to have a drone?”

Bao smiled broadly and said, “It just so happens that I do. A really nice one.”

The next morning they continued their reconnaissance of the town, giving particular attention to City Hall—what the traffic was like coming in and out of the building. Most important, they needed to know what David Asher did. Did he leave the building? If so, how many guards did he have with him? How well were they armed? These were questions they would have to get answers for and only in one day to do it. Jennifer was rotting away inside a prison, probably with a gun held to her head.

Traffic in and out of City Hall proved to be normal. They did see the Governor duck into an armored SUV right around lunch time, but he was heavily guarded. Hitting him in transit was going to be hard because, one, Asher’s vehicle was big and powerful. It would take a lot of firepower to stop the vehicle and hope to hurt or kill the occupants. Second, the visible guards were heavily armed and this said nothing about who Asher might have hidden, providing overwatch.

It was towards the end of the workday that something very interesting happened. From the boat they had an excellent vantage point of the southern and western parts of City Hall. While Wildcat was on watch—using the powerful binoculars—he started to talk to himself.

“Oh this is good. Patton, you’re not going to believe this.”

Patton stood next to Wildcat and reached for the binoculars.

“You see it?” Wildcat asked, smiling mischievously.

Patton nodded and smiled himself. With all the precautions he obviously took throughout the day, the good Governor couldn’t help but take advantage of his trappings of office. Just outside his office was a large balcony that wrapped around the south and west walls of the building.

“A guard comes out the south door, looks around, walks around to the west, looks around, and then he walks back in. One minute later Asher comes out. There’s no telling if he does this every day, but at least we know it’s something he likes to do.”

Patton nodded again, grinning broadly.

“Yep. That’s our way in,” Patton said.

He set the binoculars down and looked at his friend. They laughed and gave each other a high five. This was going to be possible after all. With Bao’s help, it was only going to be easier.

Patton knew he was taking a hell of a chance. He would park at the city limits, get out with his hands up, and walk towards downtown. His biggest worry was that he would be shot on sight. He didn’t and couldn’t know what would happen. He realized that if he did this any other way, he couldn’t guarantee his friends’, his wife’s, or his own safety. Most important, if he returned to Blue Creek with guns blazing, he could spark off a civil war that could get thousands of people killed.

Patton was sitting in the truck, gazing down towards town. The gutters and sidewalks were filled with wet leaves and grass clippings. Patton took in a deep breath and let it out slowly. He’d been in danger before, but this was possibly the most dangerous situation he would ever be in. He was essentially setting himself up as a martyr. If it didn’t work, he would likely die, along with Jennifer, and would potentially leave Blue Creek in the hands of David Asher.

His one hedge was Wildcat—a man he trusted with his life. In fact, his life was currently in his buddy’s hands. Wildcat was currently in their hide spot from days before.

‘Dear God,’ he thought. ‘Give me the strength. Give me the strength for what I have to do.’ He opened the door and stepped out hesitantly. He could feel himself shaking

Patton opened his eyes and saw that vehicles were coming towards him. There were two black Suburbans, no doubt belonging to the government. Another vehicle, possibly a Jeep, followed close behind. A man with a rifle was standing in the back seat of the Jeep, nonchalantly looking to his left and right, no doubt looking for an ambush. Patton exited the truck, leaving the keys in the ignition and not caring what happened to it. He raised his hands high and walked towards the oncoming vehicles.

“Stop!” came the booming voice over the lead Suburban’s PA system. Patton stopped. He wasn’t here to play games. He would do everything they asked him to do. He just wanted an audience with the governor. The vehicles came to a stop just less than a hundred feet in front of him. A gang of men, all holding assault rifles, got out of the two Suburbans and aimed at Patton.

“I’m unarmed!” Patton yelled towards the security personnel.

He was wearing a leather coat and he could understand why they would be cautious with him. He could easily have been hiding a pistol in his waistband or somewhere else. One of the men stepped forward, holding a civilian version of an M4 carbine, aiming it in Patton’s general direction. There were enough weapons trained on him that if they were to open fire, there would be nothing left of him.

“Take off your jacket and turn all the way around,” the first man to approach him said.

Patton did so, slowly, always maintaining eye contact with the leader, assuring him that he was complying with every command. The man nodded and gestured towards Patton with his rifle.

“Now, turn around and put your hands up on the truck. Any sudden movement and you’re gonna be hamburger.”

Patton turned slowly. He felt calm. Another man roughly frisked Patton. He went over every inch of Patton’s body and after about a minute, seemed to be satisfied that Patton didn’t have a weapon.

“Okay now, hands down and take a step back.”

Patton complied, never letting his gaze avert from the leader.

“Asher wants to see you,” he said with a hint of glee in his eyes.

“That’s good,” Patton said, trying not to appear too confident. “That’s why I’m here.”

The leader snorted and gave him a wary smile.

That fact that Asher wanted to see him let him know he was safe, at least for now. He stood there, looking at the guards who were there to take him in. They turned him around, handcuffed him, and led him towards the lead Suburban. Part of Patton wanted to give some gallant speech, but there would be time for that if things turned out the way he planned. Instead, he remained stoic and let the guard force manhandle him into one of the large SUVs. A guard seatbelted Patton in. The vehicle made a wide U-turn and headed towards City Hall.

Patton gazed out towards the snow-topped mountains and sighed loudly. He couldn’t help but wonder if he’d done the right thing.

Patton wasn’t sure what to expect, but this was definitely not what he envisioned Asher’s office would look like. It was a cozy room with richly stained wood trim and crown molding. There was a large fireplace, topped by a intricately-carved mantelpiece. A small fire was going. The only light came from the dull sunlight from two large windows that were behind the large mahogany desk. It was more like an old fashioned study than an office, Patton thought. There were doors on the other side of the room. One was probably a bathroom. The other probably led to a private entrance. The wall to the south was all glass with a door that led to the balcony.

David Asher was sitting in a large overstuffed chair in front of the fire, perfectly visible to Patton as he was escorted in. A large man was sitting in a chair in the far corner, a security guard no doubt. He seemed unaware of Patton’s presence, but Patton had no doubt that the man would be quick to respond if Patton were to make any sudden moves. Asher was probably carrying a gun too. Patton also noticed two men on the balcony. They were currently talking to one another, but one soon walked away.

Asher stood and walked towards Patton, his hand outstretched and a pained smile on his face. It was strange to be greeted this way by a man who’d ordered the deaths of so many people, including his own. His first impulse was to lunge at this man, this snake, and wrap his hands around his throat and choke the life out of him. But it would be the last thing he would do and it would avail him nothing. Instead, he stood there calmly, accepting Asher’s hand and giving him a strange smile of his own.

Patton was struck by how old Asher looked—not old compared to other people, but to how he looked on the train when they’d first met. Adding to this perception was the pair of thick-framed glasses that Asher was wearing. They were fashionable, but Patton had the sense that they were needed and weren’t just a fashion statement.

“Patton,” Asher said as warmly as he could manage, shaking Patton’s hand up and down. Patton released it and his instinct was to wipe his hand on his pants, but that would have made him seem petty and small. He was not intimidated by the man and wouldn’t put himself in a subservient position.

“David,” Patton said softly, nodding slightly.

Asher’s smile faded, making way for a serious, “let’s get down to business” expression. He gestured for Patton to sit in a second overstuffed chair and he retook his place where he sat before. They sat, obviously wary of one another. Asher leaned towards him, leaning his elbow on his knee.

“I won’t insult you with small talk Patton,” Asher said calmly. “You know why you’re here. This situation has to be resolved.”

Patton nodded in agreement.

“Good. I’m glad you understand,” Asher continued.

“I understand that my part in this war is over. I don’t know what you’ve been told but I’m not here to pledge my allegiance to you. If I die I die, but I will not live in the hell that you’ve created here.”

Asher turned away and looked at the fire for a moment. He’d expected this—dreaded it even—but he would not betray his disappointment.

“I’m sorry to hear that Patton. I really am. I have to say that you’ve been a worthy adversary but I can’t risk keeping you around. We’ve read this book before haven’t we.”

Patton nodded and chuckled lightly.

“Yes, we have, David. The only thing is, you’re reading out of the wrong book. You think you’re some hero when you’re nothing more than just another tin pot tyrant.”

Asher smiled at the insult.

“I have to say I’m surprised. I thought you would’ve gone for your wife again.”

Patton glared at him and said, “You thought that because you only care about yourself. I love my wife, but she’s not the only person I care about.”

Asher nodded. It was a fair assessment of him.

“In my experience, care has nothing to do with it,” Asher said. “Humans do what feels good.”

Patton leaned forward and asked, “How does ruining the lives of thirty-thousand people feel right?”

The statement obviously took Asher aback because he stood and began to pace around the room.

“You know, you’re just like you were when I met you on the train,” he said, his voice taking on volume. “You thought you had all the answers then and you still do. Things wouldn’t be so messed up if you wouldn’t have tried to get in the way.”

Patton shook his head, his mouth creased with a mirthless smile.

“You’re wrong, but what does it matter now? We’re not going to debate our way out of this, David,” Patton said condescendingly. “We’re here now. My friends are dead because of you. For all I know my wife is dead too. You have me here and could kill me and most likely nobody would ever know I was here.”

Asher nodded and said, “You’re right, but it’s hard for me to let you continue thinking you’re right. Anyway, it doesn’t matter—for all the reasons you just said. But it seems useless so let’s just agree to—”

He stopped when he heard a plinking sound coming from the south-facing window. He stood and motioned for his security guard to go investigate. The bald, burly man returned less than a minute later.

“It’s one of those quad drones that shoots those air soft pellets.”

“What?” Asher asked, his face crinkled in confusion.

“Probably just some kids,” the guard retorted. “You want me to call someone down to see if we can find who’s controlling it?”

Asher shook his head no and said, “No. This has happened before.”

Patton watched the two men talk, preparing himself mentally for what would come next. There were more plinking sounds, and just as the guard went to investigate the sound again, there was a loud crashing sound that emanated from the street.

“What the hell!” Asher yelled.

One of the guards ran in from the balcony, nearly breathless.

“A delivery truck just rammed into a bunch of cars on the street!”

Asher looked over at Patton, who hadn’t moved from his seat. However, Patton’s expression let Asher know that the commotion had something to do with Patton’s visit in his office. Before he could say anything, the security guard stationed on the patio slammed against the thick window. As he slumped down, he left a streak of bright red blood. There was a second shot and a thudding sound out of their sight. Apparently Wildcat had hit the second guard on the balcony. The guard stationed inside, whether by instinct or some other impulse, ran to the door that led to the balcony. When he did, Patton finally made his move.

Patton closed the distance between he and Asher, who was facing away. He slapped at head and there was an accompanying pop. The governor’s hands flew up to his head, his eyes blazing with surprise. Asher pulled his hands away and his fingertips were covered with blood. A gout of blood poured down the side of his head and covered his right ear. The governor stumbled and fell against his desk, but managed to hold himself up. Simultaneously, another shot broke through the glass and struck the security guard in the head. Patton ignored him and rushed to Asher and lifted him up and sat him on the desk.

“Asher!”

No response.

“Asher!”

Still no response.

Patton slapped him hard across the face to get his attention. Asher’s eyes were still wide with incoherent shock. Patton was about to explain what he’d just done to him, but it would do no good. He would be dead within a few moments. Patton hit him with a pressure activated pellet that was fired from a plastic rig that was molded onto his wrist. It was all plastic so it didn’t set off the metal detector. Also, it was flesh-colored, which helped it escape detection by the naked eye. The pressure from contact with Asher’s head activated the powder, which fired the hard plastic pellet through the Governor’s skull. It was size of a .308 bullet, more than enough to be deadly.

Patton stood and turned away from the dying man lying at his feet and prepared for the next part of his plan. Although Patton had gotten through the hardest part of his mission he wasn’t out of danger.

Patton loaded up the program that Asher used to make video blogs and live speeches. Once this particular program was activated, all of the city’s televisions would lock into one channel and a window would pop up on all computer screens via the intranet. People didn’t have to watch their Governor, but they couldn’t watch anything else, or surf the internet, when he wanted to talk to them. Once the program was ready, Patton uploaded a video he’d made while recovering at the Harris Farm.

“Hello people of Blue Creek. My name is Patton Larsen. I understand that I have become somewhat of a boogeyman in this town. You’ve probably seen my face all over the news and on the intranet. I’m here to make an announcement. Governor Asher is dead.

“First of all, I do not gloat over the death of another human being. Yes, I, along with other friends and comrades have fought against Governor Asher and his government, both politically and with arms. Deep disagreements over the governance of this territory have led to a civil war. We did not start this war. This war was brought on by a misguided set of policies and decisions that have basically enslaved us all.

“I have fought because this government is unjust and tyrannical and when this war is over—and tomorrow will be the last day—we will return this territory to what it was meant to be, to what it originally was. Do any of you remember? How wonderful those days were when we first arrived and everyone had the hope of a new life ahead of them? We all started out on the same economic footing. We all had beautiful homes and the means to build businesses. Seeing the effects of misguided and purposeful socialist policies makes me sad and angry. What happened here, in our beautiful town, is a shame.

“What I’ve come to realize after all of this is that people are people, no matter what they earn or what they are given. A person will evolve or devolve into whatever kind of person they are meant to be. Some of you spent all of your money and then complained to the rest of us that our society was unfair. Your complaints reached the ears of those who sought to do damage and look what happened. They have destroyed a beautiful town, a beautiful community. Many have been killed or imprisoned because of it.

“Many of you will decide to leave this place and return to your homes, wherever that may be. Many of you will decide to stay. I am staying. This is my home. I’ve fought for it, risked my life for it. I would like for you all to stay but I don’t blame you if you leave. What I can guarantee is, we will return to being the community that we were when we first came here.

“And on that note, I add one more thing. I do not wish to be your leader. I only want to live in peace in my own home, with my wife, if she is still alive. This sad episode is now over—if those of you still loyal to the Governor will allow it to be over. The man you were loyal to is now gone. I plead with you—please don’t try to avenge his death. And please don’t try continue his government. If you try, you, and whoever might support you, will die. Worse, you will likely take some of your fellow citizens with you. Please accept what has happened and move on.

“I am personally in touch with Insight Resources officials and local, state, and federal law enforcement officials. We are soon going to be flooded with sheriffs’ deputies, state cops, and FBI agents. They need to sort out the mess that happened here. I promise you, if you try to fight to keep David Asher’s legacy alive, you will end up just like him.

“I can now say that the ugliness is over. I understand that many of you have become dependent on the government and those needs will continue to be met until we can get people on their feet. Despite what’s been said about me and my group, we do not want people to suffer or have needs that go unmet. My group will have to take control of the government for a short time. We’ll need to do a census and find out how many people are here and what their needs are. You will have the option to return to your homes and previous lives if you want. The government, while it still stands, will arrange for your travel.

“The experiment is over and whatever legal obligations we had back then are now over. I will explain that in more depth in the very near future. I encourage you to stay and help put this community back together. So much damage has been done and so many lives and families have been lost, but I know that we can return to that original spirit that brought us here in the first place. I thank you for your time and hope to see you tomorrow.”

CHAPTER 34

Once Patton was sure things were under their control, he decided it was time to find the answer to the question that he didn’t want, but needed to know—was Jennifer still there and was she still alive? He prayed silently to himself for a good result but prepared himself for the possibility that she was dead. Even if she were alive, Patton understood that she might be broken in a non-physical way. Undeterred, he left Asher’s office for the first time since entering it that morning.

The sun was bright now and patches of blue sky could be seen all over. A cold breeze from the northwest blew past Patton, sending a chill through him. He raised his chin and closed his eyes and let the sun bask over his face, letting it recharge him. When he reopened his eyes he saw that a truck was approaching. It was Wildcat, who’d apparently commandeered someone’s vehicle.

The two comrades hugged tightly.

“Nice shooting man!” Patton said, delirious with joy.

“Thanks. That little drone was a good shot in its own right,” Wildcat replied with a stupid grin. “Where’s Bao?”

Patton shrugged and looked around for his young friend. Bao had sacrificed his work truck for their plan. As Wildcat drove past the carnage, they saw that Bao’s truck had smashed into one car and damaged two others in the process. There was no sight of their friend.

“That little bastard did a nice job,” Wildcat said with a wry grin. “Remind me to tell him when I see him.”

Patton nodded and said, “He’ll like that. You really scare the crap out of that kid, you know.”

“Me?” Wildcat said innocently. “That’s crazy.”

They shared a laugh and then Patton turned serious. The dread returned to his mind as he thought about what he might see when he reached the prison.

Gravel crunched under the tires as the driver brought the truck to a stop. Wildcat slammed the truck into park and killed the engine.

“You coming?” he asked Patton. Patton nodded and opened his door and climbed out.

They entered together cautiously, with Patton following Wildcat. Both had pistols drawn and at the ready. They moved slowly and cautiously, making sure they didn’t run into an ambush. Patton was confident that they would meet no resistance, but he would much rather be safe than sorry. Halfway down the main hall another hallway intersected. They each searched in opposite directions, finding no one there. After a few more minutes of searching and clearing rooms, they returned to the main intersection of hallways.

“Patton, I found the security office,” Wildcat said, heading back from the way he’d come. Patton followed him eagerly.

Patton was led to a room that had a bank of monitors and a computer terminal. He sat down and shook the mouse to activate the computer. The monitor lit up and he began searching files.

“Anything?” Wildcat asked.

Patton tapped a couple keys.

“No,” he said with a frown. “Nothing on any of the security cameras. Looks like a ghost town.”

Patton clicked through files, hoping to find a list of prisoners. He found one folder marked ‘inmates’ and double clicked on it. The window opened almost immediately. There were four file folders marked ‘A block,’ ‘B block,’ ‘C block,’ ‘D block.’ He clicked on A and scrolled down, not sure exactly how the prisoners had been catalogued. The inmates were in alphabetical order according to their last name. There were names, dates, ages and some coding he didn’t understand.

Block A seemed to be all males, as was B block. Both C and D blocks contained women but he didn’t see Jennifer’s name. His heart sank when he didn’t find her there and he was near his breaking point when he opened open a file called “D-shed.” He didn’t see her name. He didn’t see any names, in fact, just inmate numbers that didn’t correspond with anything he’d seen in the other files. He turned off the monitor and walked out to where his friend was standing guard, his frustration evident on his face.

“She not in there?” Wildcat asked, placing an affectionate hand on Patton’s shoulder.

Patton had to turn away to hide the tears that had just sprung up in his eyes.

“No,” he said, nearly choking on the word.

“That doesn’t mean anything, buddy. We’re gonna search every nook and cranny in this place.”

Patton nodded and they made their way towards the back of the building.

Patton put his hand on the door to D block and hesitated for a moment. The dread of knowing that she was gone was outweighing the need to know if she was. All of the training that he’d received, to instill in him the ability to fulfill the mission at any cost and then deal with the consequences, had been overcome by human emotion. Finally, he steeled himself and pulled the door open.

The entryway was dark and the room was cold. Straight ahead of him was a receptionist’s window that guards must have used to check in visitors and administrators. Large, heavy metal doors were on either side of the window. The door to the right had a small black card reader. Patton reached into his pocket and retrieved a security card that he’d nabbed from the security office in the main building. There was a small red light, so he knew it must still be powered. He slid the card through the reader. The light turned green and Patton heard a click. He pulled it open and stepped through.

He found himself in a long, wide hallway with bright tile floors that gleamed from a recent wax and buff job. There were cells on both sides of the hall—each one had a heavy metal door with a small rectangular window that allowed guards to view the inmates. Patton walked to the first window and looked in. It was empty. The only thing he could see was a neatly-folded blanket and set of sheets sitting at the foot of the bed. The second cell was also empty, but in the third cell, he could see a shape underneath a blanket. He tried the door handle but it was locked. He slammed his palm on the door. The shape stirred and rose to sit at the edge of the bed. She was small, probably in her forties, and was obviously shocked to see anyone but a guard pounding on her door.

He hopelessly tried pulling the door open again and just waited for the woman to approach the door.

“It’s locked,” he said, fogging the glass with his breath. The woman gave him a “no duh” expression. He smacked his forehead with his palm and shook his head at his own stupidity.

“There’s a lock in the guards’ room,” she said, pointing towards where he’d just come from.

He walked back, retrieved the cardkey again, swiped it and entered the guards’ room. It took him a few minutes to find the control he was looking for, but he found it and unlocked all of the cells. He walked back to the woman’s cell and pulled the heavy door open for her. She took a couple of cautious steps into the hallway and then looked up at Patton. Recognition dawned on her face, but she was so dazed from being woken up that she couldn’t quite place him.

“Hi,” Patton said dumbly, making sure to keep his pistol down by his hip.

The woman pulled a lock of sweaty hair from her forehead and looked at him with ghostly eyes.

“I’m Patton,” he said, extending his large hand towards her. She shook it and then seemed to come fully to her senses.

“I know who you are!” she said, excited now. She looked away from him, maybe intimidated by the eye contact. “Can I get a drink of water?” she said, clearing her throat. “They turned the water off before they left.”

“Who’s they?”

She coughed and cleared her throat again.

“The guards. They turned everything off before they left,” she repeated, maybe forgetting that she’d already told him that bit of news.

Patton looked down at her, realizing that this is what he and his friends must have looked like when they encountered Ronald Harris for the first time. He activated his radio and told Wildcat to turn on the water to the building.

“What are you going to do with us?” she asked, tears in her eyes. At first he was puzzled by the question and her almost-whimpering tone. However, he looked at her. She was in rough shape.

Patton clenched his jaw. Any regret he’d had for killing Asher melted away. “Bastard,” he thought out loud but apparently she hadn’t heard him.

“Ma’am,” he said, reaching out and grabbing her hands and holding them out between them. She looked at him in disbelief. Human contact, let alone a gesture of affection, had become foreign to her. “We’re not going to do anything with you. Today is the last day you’ll ever spend in this God-forsaken place. You’re leaving. Right now. Grab whatever you need and walk towards the front of the building. We’ll have clothes, food, and water for you.”

She began to tremble and then her entire body began to convulse with sobs. She grasped at him weakly and tried to pull herself into him. Instead, she pulled herself into his chest and began heaving sobs into his shirt. And he let her do so until she was done—until she had it all out. She was just the first of many to seek comfort from him, their great hero.

“Thank you,” she rasped. “Thank you.”

She made a few tentative steps, found her feet, and walked out the door with Patton following.

“Ma’am?” he said, lightly touching her shoulder.

She turned. Her eyes were tired now, but not sad.

“Yes?”

He cleared his throat, almost not wanting to know the answer to his question.

“Do you know Jennifer Larsen?”

She slumped. Her body language told him that his worst fears were going to be realized.

“She’s…” She gestured with her head and pointed. “She’s back there,” she said, a look of pain on her face.

“Do you know her?”

The woman nodded.

“We were in ‘C’ together when she first got here. Then they brought her here before I came over here. She… she acted out and they put her into the ‘Box’.”

Patton had a good idea of what the Box could be, but he wanted the woman to explain before he made his way out there.

“The Box?”

She nodded. “It’s solitary. They… at least I heard this… they roughed her up pretty good, you being her husband and all.” She dropped her head and when she raised it, he was astonished. She was smiling. Tears were running down her face and she almost began to sob again.

“She used to talk about you all the time,” the woman said dreamily. “She always used to say ‘Patton is going to come and get us all out of here’. She was right,” she said, beaming widely at him.

It was dark in the hallway and she was over ten feet away so she couldn’t see him blush.

“I just hope it’s not too late,” he said, his voice nearly breaking.

The woman walked towards him and put her hand on his shoulder. Her touch was warm.

“I saw her two or three days ago,” she rasped. “I could hear her yelling as they were taking her down the hall. She hasn’t been in there long.”

Patton nodded and turned to look out the back door. He called and told Wildcat to remove the remaining prisoners.

“Thank you,” he said, feeling a surge of confidence. He turned away again and walked towards the back door.

Jennifer Larsen held the pose of a child who’d been sent to her room to await her punishment. She was on her bed, curled up, afraid of the commotion she’d been hearing since earlier that afternoon. She was shivering under her thin sheet and worn blanket. She wasn’t cold, necessarily, but she’d had such little water that she was almost completely dehydrated—barely able to produce enough saliva to swallow. Part of her just wanted it all to be over with. Some days she just wanted a guard to come out here and put a merciful bullet in her head.

She actually laughed at that. After all this. All the beatings and everything else that had been done to her. Jennifer was a strong woman and she’d gotten used to the beatings and the long, useless interrogations. What bothered her most was the fact that she’d been pregnant when she was first arrested. That hadn’t lasted past the first beating. She was glad that she hadn’t told Patton. She wanted to make sure that she was going to get through the first couple of months—the period where most miscarriages occurred. She started bleeding that night and knew that the pregnancy was over. The worst part was that she wasn’t sure if she’d ever get the chance to have a child with Patton. She didn’t even know if her husband was alive.

That had been one of the cruelest tricks the guards played on her. They would walk by her cell and talk about how Patton Larsen had finally been caught and shot in the town square. Part of her believed it, but her most hopeful and optimistic part hung on. She had to. If she hadn’t, she wouldn’t be here now. A lesser woman would have given in and begged to be killed.

She heard a loud sound that sounded like a gunshot. ‘They’re shooting prisoners,’ she thought. She started to ask Theresa if she’d heard it too but then she remembered that they’d taken her out that morning. She pulled the ratty blanket up to her shoulders and shuddered again. Gunshots could mean two things—either there was a rescue going on and the guards were ordered to kill the prisoners, or a rescue was going on and the guards themselves were being killed. Either way, she was sure that Governor Asher would not let her survive any rescue attempt. She was certain a guard was tasked to come out here and kill her.

And rather than be strong and face her executioner with a defiant pose, she would lie here instead, and accept her miserable fate.

Patton took slow and measured steps towards the wooden shed. It looked to be well built. There were large U-shaped handles on both doors. A large chain was wrapped through both. A large, sturdy looking lock held the chain together. The crunch of gravel was loud in his ears. He felt like he was floating. The dread was intense.

He forced himself to breathe. Whatever was behind this door, he would accept it. If she was dead, he would somehow get over it… someday, that is. If she was alive but broken mentally and physically, he would nurse her back to health, no matter how long it took. If she was alive and still the strong, stubborn woman he had married, he would take her home and they could move on and build the life they’d wanted since they’d met.

He took another deep breath and lifted the ten-pound sledge hammer over his shoulder.

BOOM!

The entire structure rattled around her. It felt like a mortar shell had landed just outside the Box. Jennifer shuddered and screamed, raising her hands to her face.

BOOM!

There was another boom and she started to claw at her hair and skin. ‘Stop! Just stop!’ she wanted to yell. The words just wouldn’t travel from her brain to her mouth. There was another boom, but this time she heard a piece of metal fall to the ground. There was a rattle of the chains and then the doors began to shake.

‘Finally,’ Patton thought, exasperated, breathing heavily now. Sweat was pouring down his face and he could feel the inside of his clothes getting damp. The handle he’d been banging on finally broke off and the chain went with it. He pulled at the handle but the door only came towards him a little bit. He looked up at the top and at the bottom and realized there were metal bolts that held the doors to the frame. He reached up and released both of the latches at the top and then did the same at the bottom. He pulled the door again and it swung open.

There was the sound of metal scraping. She recognized it from when the guards would come to get her for a shower or for another “interrogation.” She pulled herself into the corner as far as she could, thinking the boogeyman would just go away if she could get small enough. Suddenly the door flew open. There was only a single silhouette in the doorway. It wasn’t a prison guard or soldier or policeman because he had none of the accoutrements that Asher’s men wore. Still, she had no reason to trust whoever this was… until she heard the voice.

“Jennifer?”

He could see this tiny shape in the corner, trying to hide from him. Patton decided he couldn’t blame her. He’d just made a horrible racket. Well, if it was Jennifer, she was alive. He could see the shape quivering with cold or fright or something else, he didn’t know.

“Jennifer, is that you?”

No response.

“Jennifer, it’s me. It’s Patton.”

No guard or interrogator would have called her by her first name. Prisoners only went by their last names or inmate number. Plus it was such a kind, soft, meek voice. It had been such a long since she’d heard his voice but the figure said his name was Patton. Would someone lie and say they were Patton Larsen, the most wanted man in the community? No. At least not likely. She hadn’t eaten for almost two days and she was sick and dehydrated. Maybe her eyes and ears were playing tricks.

He said it again and her brain was starting to clear itself.

“It’s me. It’s Patton,” he said again.

She lowered the blanket to her waist and rose to an elbow. With another painful effort she pushed herself to the edge of the bed. She paused and then stood, limping across the cold wooden floor towards the figure in the doorway.

As she got closer to the entryway, she could see that it was indeed her husband.

He rushed to her as she collapsed. She fell and hit her hip on the rough wooden floor, but he caught her head and her shoulder. Instead of picking her up, he laid her head softly on the floor and looked at her. Greasy, dirty, sweaty hair matted down to her forehead. Her face was covered with dust and sweat and grease. It all oozed together to create a paste that made her face shiny. Her eyes were vacant but they were her eyes. It was her. She was alive.

Her trembling right hand came up slowly. She touched his face and stroked it gently.

“Patton,” she said weakly and he burst into a fit of sobs. He leaned over her, cautious not to put his weight on her, but close enough to wrap his arms around her. His sobs continued.

“Shhh,” she said, stroking his face. “It’s all over,” she said again and he looked at her, dripping tears onto her face. She smiled and almost giggled as she wiped them away. “I’ve dreamt of this. I never gave up hope,” she croaked.

He leaned down and held her again. He felt the underside of her ribs and spine. She felt very thin.

“You’re alive!” he said, accidentally crushing her. She winced and he apologized.

“Yeah,” she said, stroking a lock of hair off of his forehead. “I wouldn’t let those bastards kill me even though they tried.”

Patton had enough of being in the dark, dusty shed. He picked her up and carried her to the front of the building where all of the other surviving prisoners were being staged. Patton could see a few shapes on the floor, their faces covered with white cotton sheets.

“I’m going to set you down in a chair, Honey,” he said to her softly. He set her down in a padded office chair. He grabbed her face in his and looked at her, still not believing it was her. Here. Alive.

Patton knelt down by his wife and tried to get her to drink as much water as possible. The first ambulance arrived just over a half hour later. A steady stream of civilian vehicles began crawling up the hill. Despite her protests, Patton helped load his wife into one of the ambulances and climbed into the back to make the ride with her to the hospital.

“Are you comfortable?” he asked her as an EMT started an IV in her left wrist.

She nodded and laid her head back on the pillow.

“We’re going to get you patched up,” Patton said, lovingly patting her right hand. “We’re going to get you home and make you all better.”

She nodded again and before she could respond, she fell asleep. Patton smiled and kissed her forehead. When he pulled away he noticed the tears that had fallen on her face. He wiped them away and then wiped them off of his own face.

He looked at her again and then looked up, through the roof of the ambulance and up into the heavens.

“Thank you God. Thank you.”

CHAPTER 35

It was an angry Michael Varner who faced the congressional committee in their hearing room. Patton, watching on C-SPAN, had never seen the man like this. He was aggressive and animated. He met the members’ questions with sneers, often scoffing and sighing audibly. He was there to call these people out for what he considered to be their dereliction of duty. Granted, his company had been commissioned to operate the experiment in Blue Creek, but he had no authority to enforce any laws.

“Why didn’t you contact the Senator in question when things began to turn bad?” asked one particularly smarmy Democrat member from Oregon.

“Again Congressman, I did. Many times. I have submitted my email inquiries and phone records. My question to you is what was he willing to do?”

The politician looked to his left and right, looking for help.

“I can’t speak for that particular senator, Sir,” he replied, trying to maintain his composure. “He was in the Senate. I’m in the House.”

“Well Congressman, you asked me the question. I’m just telling you what happened from my perspective and that’s nothing. Once the experiment started we were left to our own devices. I had agents inside the experiment to monitor what was going on and if things were getting dangerous. I contacted the Senator when a family was murdered during the first summer. I was encouraged the call local law enforcement but they claimed, rightfully, that they had no jurisdiction,” Varner said, his voice rising in anger as he spoke.

Patton turned off the TV at that point. He’d lived it. He didn’t want to relive it. He was just glad to see Michael Varner taking it to the people that nobody was blaming for the debacle in Blue Creek. Varner had also hit the lecture circuit and the cable news shows, trying to bring publicity to the fact that several people had been murdered by a government they themselves established. His other objective was to illustrate the damage that scientists can do if they’re left to their own devices and with more concern for data than for people.

“Why were they granted permission in the first place?” he’d been asked more than once.

“That’s a good question. How did they?” Varner answered rhetorically. “These people flash their degrees and get all these taxpayer grants, but when it comes time to be held accountable they either run for cover or hide behind the virtue of being a scientist.”

“But you had no problem in taking their money did you?” asked one particularly annoying liberal host, playing devil’s advocate.

“I did take their money after being assured everything was on the up and up. They also assured me that there were safeguards in place if things got out of hand. Unfortunately the federal government—the same entity that gave all the grants in the first place—dropped the ball when it came time to protect the people. They lied to me and they lied to the people of Blue Creek.”

Ironically it was the federal government that stepped in and helped the citizens of Blue Creek transition out of the experiment and back to regular citizenship in the United States. For a time, the community was treated like an Indian reservation. Eventually, the community was ceded back to Utah and Idaho, becoming just a regular border town. Thousands of experiment subjects left the area and returned home. Not only did they not have to pay a penalty, they were able to keep the money they were given to participate. Several other thousands stayed, though, and were joined other Americans from all over the country. Blue Creek had become famous—not just for what had taken place there, but because of its newness and its beauty. Eventually the town reached its previous population and even grew beyond that.

Patton’s tires skidded a little as he came to a stop at the curb. He looked up at the house and then back down the folded hands in his lap. This was something he’d both dreamed of and dreaded for a long time. Still, he felt like he owed it to him. He took a deep breath and pulled the door handle and swung the door open. His left foot landed in some slush left over from the last snowstorm. His right foot splashed in a small puddle. He walked around the back of the truck and saw something that enraged him. In the front yard was a large black sign, hung from two, sturdy looking wooden posts, standing maybe four feet high. The sign read “Home of Mike Wilson, Resistance Leader and Traitor”.

Patton swore under his breath, walked to the bed of his truck, and opened the toolbox. He rooted around and came out with a large sledge hammer. He strode over to where the sign stood, the hammer slung over his shoulder.

“This is for you, Buddy,” he said, bringing the hammer down to waist level.

He swore with every stroke, first breaking the sign itself and then taking down the two posts that had held it up. By the time he was done, the sign was in dozens of pieces and Patton was kneeling down in the water-soaked grass, sobbing and thinking about that horrible day his friend had been murdered in front of a live TV audience.

After a few moments he collected himself and staggered to his feet, using the hammer to stand. With his rage subsiding, Patton looked at the mess he’d made. For someone who’d won the war, he didn’t feel like a victor. Maybe that was why so many of his friends from Delta, after returning from a mission or a tour, felt like there was nothing at home for them. He wiped his eyes. It would do no good for someone to drive by and see him in this condition. He was supposed to be a hero—the great liberator of Blue Creek.

He walked up the three concrete steps and paused. Images of Mike intermixed with images of his death and now this. The bastards had turned it into some kind of museum—a warning to those who wanted to escape the oppressed city. A sense of victory came over Patton. He had won. People were free. Jennifer was at home. He looked up at the sky again, took another deep breath, and opened the door and walked into the house. The place was tidy, but dusty. He walked into the large, open living area where Mike hosted his many parties. Warm memories washed over him. He could almost see his old friends and hear their laughter at one of Mike’s many anecdotes.

Patton then made his way over to Frank and Shontae’s house. A similar sentimental feeling came over him. However, the Norton home had a different feeling. It was here that they held their more formal, intimate dinners. There was wine, not beer and liquor. There was conversation and quiet laughter, not the loud reverie they experience in Mike Wilson’s home.

Patton entered the house, dreading the pain he might feel. He noticed that everything of value had been stolen, whether pawned by the new owners or looted by punks. He walked into the living room. It was here that they’d all spent their first Christmas and New Year’s together. He walked out of the house onto their porch through the glass sliding door. The decking was well worn by the weather. Some of the boards were broken and some were missing. The railing leading down into the back yard and Shontae’s garden was also missing.

Patton cried at this sight. For some reason this had been the worst part for him. So many summer nights had been spent out here on this porch. So many card games, laughs, and good times. Patton felt the impulse to leave. He couldn’t stand to be there anymore. The good memories were washed away by the bad, knowing the cause of those memories—those wonderful friends—were now gone. Patton made his way through a side gate, through the side yard and then to his truck, hanging his head in sorrow the entire way.

As Patton drove home he thought of everyone who’d made an impact on his life in Blue Creek. The outcomes were astonishing. Mike, Shontae, and Frank were all dead, as were Charlie Henry, Anna Radinski, and David Asher. Tom Perry, who Patton had bought the fishing shop from, went back home to be with his kids and grandkids.

In contrast to the pain, Bao decided to stay. Not only that, his friend and fellow spy Lindsay, got married and were living together in her house. Later on, as many people from around the country started to move to Blue Creek, Wildcat called Patton and asked how much Jennifer’s house would cost. Like he had with Mike and Frank, Patton and his friends often got together for parties. Patton even bought a little house for his mother, who would live in Blue Creek for most of the year and return to California during the winter.

It took a while for Jennifer to become Jennifer again. She’d been traumatized by her experience and she finally understood her husband, who had been through some terrible experiences himself. Their relationship was difficult at times, mostly because she sometimes had to distance herself emotionally from him. She often preferred to read out on the balcony and look over the lake to the mountains on the far side of the valley. However, there were other times that they went on long drives, just taking in their surroundings.

Eventually things got back to normal. Spending time with their new friends helped that, but as the saying went, “time heals all wounds.” One day, as winter was beginning to give way to spring, Jennifer brought a cup of tea to Patton, who was reading on the balcony. It had been a beautiful day, but it had begun to rain.

“It’s beautiful isn’t it,” she said, gazing at the rain like an awed child.

He looked at her and was suddenly overcome with love.

She returned his gaze. He looked at her for a moment then looked back out at the lake, which was being roiled by the storm. His smile suddenly faded and he had to turn away from her.

“What?” she said, concerned with his sudden change of mood.

Through teary eyes and a choked voice he said “One night… this was after Frank got killed… I was up in the mountains and it was raining like this. I mean, it was pouring.”

He looked at her and she gestured for him to continue.

He cleared his throat.

“And I didn’t know what to do. I didn’t know where you were. I didn’t even know if you were alive.” He trailed off, not wanting to finish his thought. He knew at some point, though, he’d have to tell her the worst of what he’d gone through and this was the worst of it.

“Anyway, I’m up on the mountain freezing my ass off. I didn’t have any shelter I just sat there on a rock letting the rain soak me. And I was thinking of you and Frank and Mike and Mary and the kids and I looked down at my .45 and thought how much easier it would be to just… you know,” he said, sounding ashamed.

She looked at him, disbelievingly, tears pouring down her face.

“I can’t believe you thought about doing that,” she said softly.

He looked at her, not knowing what she meant.

“I mean I can’t believe that you thought about doing that.”

He nodded in understanding.

“Anyway,” she said, goading him into continuing his story.

“I thought about you. I mean, I had no idea what they were doing to you. I had no idea if you were alive or if you were in prison or what.”

She looked out towards the lake, a grim expression on her face.

“When was that?” she asked.

“October. Last fall.”

She sat and thought about it. Time had passed in such fits and starts it was hard to keep track of where she had been during a certain time. There weren’t many moments to associate events with.

“I was in prison. Sometimes they had me inside. Sometimes they had me outside in that shed.”

He walked to her and clasped her hand.

“So you almost ended it all?” She shook her head. She almost didn’t believe him but he was so serious about it she couldn’t doubt him.

“Yes. But the rain stopped. I found a cave. I was able to get a fire going. I was warm. My stomach was full. I had a good rifle with plenty of ammo. I wasn’t happy, but I was…”

“Alive and free?”

“Yeah. I knew I had to do something. I couldn’t stop thinking about that day you never came home. The day they killed Mike and Frank. I decided that night I was going to either put an end to this or die trying.”

She shook her head, unable to believe everything he went through. One man. Thousands of people now living free.

“So the question is why did you do it? Why not just run away? Why not go off and start a new life somewhere?”

He turned and looked at the rain again. It was coming down in sheets. Small puddles were forming all over the driveway.

“Because,” he said, shrugging. “What is life if you can’t live free? Make your own decisions? How could I live when I knew you probably wouldn’t live much longer?”

She had no answer for that. She squeezed his hand. He looked down at her. She looked up at him and smiled sadly.

“Well,” she said, gazing out towards the water, “I’m glad you chose to keep going. I can’t imagine being a single mom.”

It took a moment for her words to take their full meaning. He stood and grabbed her, squeezing her hard enough to hurt.

“Really?”

“Yes! Yes! I just found out today!”

Their tears mingled as they held each other. Their embrace continued and they stood in their moment of happiness until they were too tired to stand anymore. Eventually they were sitting on the balcony in separate chairs, holding hands across the space between them.

“Honey?”

“Yes Patton?”

“What do you think of the name Chevelle?”

Jennifer looked at him, smiling, her face crinkling up in that way he thought was so cute.

“Chevelle? What kind of name is that?”

Patton looked at her and smiling said, “the best, Honey. The best.” He paused and then said, “What do you want to do this afternoon?”

“I dunno,” she replied, looking out over the lake. “I hadn’t really thought about it. How about we just sit here for a while?”

About the Author

Layne is named after his father’s best friend Bob Layne, who was killed in Vietnam. He is a veteran of the United States Army, joining shortly after 9/11. He holds degrees in political science and has avidly followed American and world politics since the 2000 election. His writing has been featured at AmericanThinker.com. Layne loves baseball, reading, writing, and spending time with his family. He is married, a father of four, and hails from Ogden, Utah.

Copyright

Copyright © 2018 Layne D. Hansen.

AU photo: Lindsey Waite

All rights reserved. No part of this book may be used or reproduced by any means, graphic, electronic, or mechanical, including photocopying, recording, taping or by any information storage retrieval system without the written permission of the author except in the case of brief quotations embodied in critical articles and reviews.

This is a work of fiction. All of the characters, names, incidents, organizations, and dialogue in this novel are either the products of the author’s imagination or are used fictitiously.

Archway Publishing

1663 Liberty Drive

Bloomington, IN 47403

www.archwaypublishing.com

1 (888) 242-5904

Because of the dynamic nature of the Internet, any web addresses or links contained in this book may have changed since publication and may no longer be valid. The views expressed in this work are solely those of the author and do not necessarily reflect the views of the publisher, and the publisher hereby disclaims any responsibility for them.

Any people depicted in stock imagery provided by Getty Images are models, and such images are being used for illustrative purposes only.

Certain stock imagery © Getty Images.

ISBN: 978-1-4808-6058-2 (sc)

ISBN: 978-1-4808-6059-9 (e)

Library of Congress Control Number: 2018903271

Archway Publishing rev. date: 06/18/2018

Content

Layne D. Hansen
CAREFUL MEASUREMENTS

Acknowledgments

Introduction

Prologue

PART ONE ARRIVING

CHAPTER 1

CHAPTER 2

CHAPTER 3

CHAPTER 4

CHAPTER 5

PART TWO PUTTING DOWN STAKES

CHAPTER 6

CHAPTER 7

CHAPTER 8

CHAPTER 9

CHAPTER 10

CHAPTER 11

CHAPTER 12

CHAPTER 13

CHAPTER 14

CHAPTER 15

PART THREE THE DEVIL YOU DON’T KNOW

CHAPTER 16

CHAPTER 17

CHAPTER 18

CHAPTER 19

CHAPTER 20

CHAPTER 21

CHAPTER 22

CHAPTER 23

CHAPTER 24

PART FOUR REBELS

CHAPTER 25

CHAPTER 26

CHAPTER 27

CHAPTER 28

CHAPTER 29

CHAPTER 30

CHAPTER 31

PART FIVE A RECKONING

CHAPTER 32

CHAPTER 33

CHAPTER 34

CHAPTER 35

About the Author

Copyright